Richard S. Tuttle

Winged Warrior

Prologue

Thousands of years ago…

The High Priest of Kaltara opened his eyes. He peered through the fog of delirium at the faces gazing down on him. He watched the faces incomprehensibly as their mouths moved, but their voices were jumbled and distant, their eyes sad and worried. The priest closed his eyes once again as the rivers of sweat trickled over his burning body like tiny creeks flowing through a forest fire. He offered a silent prayer to Kaltara to ease the pain that was racing through his body, but the nearby voices intruded into his meditation.

“He is burning with fever,” one voice came through clearly. “Nothing can be done for him. His end is near.”

“Nonsense,” retorted anther voice, “Kaltara is testing him. He is strong in his faith. He will survive. Mark my words.”

A commotion ensued as another person entered the room. The priest forced his eyes open to see what was happening. His vision had cleared somewhat, and he recognized the king entering the room. The others present bowed before the royal ruler of Angragar. King Regis ignored the people in the room and walked directly to the bed. He knelt next to the bed and took the priest’s clammy hand in his own.

“You are burning, Vand,” the king said softly. “Let us pray together for your healing.”

Vand’s eyes locked on the monarch’s face for a brief moment before he forcibly pulled his hand away. A pall of shock fell over the king’s face at the reaction of the priest, but Vand did not care. He did not need the king to pray for him. He was the High Priest, after all. If Kaltara would listen to anyone, it would be Vand’s words that would be heard.

“Get out of my chambers,” Vand said as forcefully as he could. “All of you leave. I need no help to speak to Kaltara. Get out.”

The king stared at the High Priest for several moments before rising and shaking his head sadly. He turned to the others in the room and waved them towards the door.

“We shall gather in the temple and offer our prayers there,” declared King Regis. “The High Priest is delirious and needs his rest. All of you come with me.”

Vand scowled as the king led the others out of the room. When they were finally gone, Vand shook his head with disgust, rivulets of perspiration spraying the bed covers.

“Delirious?” snapped Vand as he pushed the covers away and painfully swiveled his legs to the side of the bed. “I am the Voice of Kaltara! I do not need others to pray for me. It is through me that Kaltara’s word is carried to the people.”

Vand struggled to his feet and pulled a robe over his head to cover his body. He wasn’t sure exactly where he was going, but he knew that he had to do something, or his high position would be taken by one of the upstarts under him. He was not about to cede power to anyone else. He was the High Priest of Kaltara.

Vand slipped out of his chambers and into the alley outside the building. Several passersby looked at him with curiosity, and Vand scowled at them. The citizens averted their gaze and quickened their steps away from the priest. Vand wavered on his feet as he walked along the alley. He stopped and leaned against the wall for support. His mind whirled in a fog as he tried to figure out what it was that he must do to get well. The greatest healers in the city had already visited him, and there was nothing that they could do. Maybe his only course of action was to ignore his pain and carry on with the duties of the High Priest.

“May I help you, High Priest?” a melodic voice interrupted his thoughts.

“I need no help,” spat Vand as he stared at the young woman. “Be on your way.”

The woman frowned as she gazed at the High Priest. She shook her head sadly and said, “Kaltara would wish me to help others in any way that I can, but I will not fight with the High Priest of Kaltara. Still, others will continue to offer their help if you continue to travel unaided. You appear to be deathly ill. If you do not wish to be bothered by others, let me walk with you. I shall accompany you to wherever you are going and nothing more. Is that acceptable?”

Vand’s forehead creased severely as he digested the woman’s words. What she said was true, and he did not wish to be bothered by every citizen that passed by. Slowly, he nodded his acceptance.

The woman took the priest’s arm and started walking him towards the mouth of the alley. Several people looked curiously towards the couple, but no one came forward to help. When they reached the street, Vand hesitated, unsure of which direction to turn.

“Where are we going?” asked the woman. “Shall I guide you to a healer?”

“I have already seen the healers,” scowled Vand.

The woman frowned heavily as she stared at the priest. Finally, she sighed and nodded her head.

“To the Asylum then?” she asked.

“The Asylum?” balked the priest. “Their potions and elixirs are nothing more than swamp water. There are no healing properties in such trash.”

“I was thinking more of the Pit of Death,” the woman said softly. “If the healers cannot cure what ails you, what choice is left?”

“The Pit of Death?” Vand echoed as his eyes grew large. “There is no such thing.”

“Perhaps there isn’t,” shrugged the woman as she saw the priest’s body begin to quiver, “but the walk will do you good.”

Vand stared at the woman as if he were looking through her. For several long moments, he remained silent. Finally, he nodded his head.

“The walk will be good,” he said nervously. “Just feeling the breeze upon me has already eased the pain. Lead me to the Asylum so that I may expose the nonsense surrounding the mythical Pit of Death.”

The woman led the priest through the city streets of Angragar towards the north end of the city. When they reached the door to the elixir shop called The Asylum, Vand waved the woman away. She nodded without comment and left the priest. Vand stood staring through the doorway of the shop for several moments before he entered it.

The old woman who ran the shop looked up nervously as the High Priest entered. Her eyes immediately swept the room to see if anyone was present before greeting the priest.

“It’s not often we get such distinguished customers,” the woman said hesitantly as she worried that the priest was there to cause trouble. “How may I aid you?”

Vand ignored the woman as he picked up a potion and gazed at it. Abruptly, he put the potion back on the table and turned to storm out of the shop. That was when the woman saw the back of Vand’s sweat-soaked robe.

“You need more than potions,” the woman said softly as she realized that the priest was not there to demand her closure. “What you seek is down the stairs. Go before other customers enter the shop and see you.”

Vand hesitated at the door. He turned and looked questioningly at the woman, but she ignored his gaze. She turned and walked to the back of the room and began moving potions around on the shelf. Vand’s eyes wavered from the doorway leading to the street to the top of the stairs leading downward. A sudden shout from the street outside the shop jolted the priest out of his indecisiveness. He headed for the stairs and proceeded downward.

Vand descended the stairs into a large cavernous room. In the center of the room was a large pit of hot mud and several people were lounging in it. An old man immediately approached the newcomer.

“Remove your robe,” instructed the old man. “There are hooks over there to hang it on.”

“I am not here to dally in hot mud,” scowled the priest. “I expected…something more.”

“Ah,” the old man replied softly as he nodded his head. “There are dangers involved. Are you sure?”

“Am I sure?” retorted the priest. “No, I am not sure. I do not even believe in such nonsense, but others tell me that you claim to have the mythical Pit of Death down here.”

“There is nothing mythical about it,” countered the old man. “It is the last resort for those whose life is ending. It can save your life, but the cost is steep.”

“Steep?” questioned the priest.

“You may die once you enter the Pit of Death,” the old man said quietly. “Or you may be cured and allowed to live a healthy life once again. The price to enter is all of your worldly belongings.”

“All of my belongings?” Vand balked a little too loudly.

The customers in the mud pit looked to see who was talking, and the old man guided Vand towards the rear of the room and away from the others.

“If you die,” shrugged the old man, “you will have no need of your belongings. If you are healed, we will tear the paper up, and it will have cost you nothing. What good are belongings to a dead man?”

“It sounds like a way to make yourself wealthy at the expense of others,” snarled the priest. “I should have you shut down and run out of the city.”

“I suppose that you have the power to do so,” shrugged the old man, “but then your life will be lost. Look at you. You are practically dead already. I am surprised that you even made it here without help. I will get the contract for you to sign. If you don’t wish to live any longer, then leave and have us closed down.”

The old man turned and left. Vand watched him leave, his mind filled with fury. He seethed as he rolled the man’s words through his mind. No one dared to talk to the High Priest of Kaltara in the manner the old man had. He would make that man sorry for his impertinence. He would indeed have the shop closed. Yet, Vand’s feet did not move towards the stairs. In a few moments, the old man returned with a contract. He handed it to the priest. Vand snarled as he grabbed the contract. His hands moved to tear the paper in two, but he did not have the strength to do so.

“I know the decision is a hard one,” the old man said encouragingly, “but there really is no choice in the matter. Only the Pit of Death can save you now. I doubt you even have the strength to ascend the stairs. Sign the contract.”

Vand stared at the contract, his mind refusing to comprehend the words written upon it. Finally he scrawled his name on the contract and shoved it into the old man’s hands.

“What happens next?” asked the priest.

“I cannot say,” smiled the old man as he led the priest around the corner of the cave and into a short corridor with a door at the end of it. “You enter through this door. That is all that I can tell you. Go quickly while you are still able to walk.”

The old man opened the door and held it. Vand peered into the dark space beyond and saw only an extremely small room, barely large enough for a person to stand it.

“What foolishness is this?” scowled Vand. “You want me to stand in a closet?”

“You cannot comprehend it yet,” assured the old man. “Enter it quickly.”

Vand thought about grabbing the old man and squeezing the life out of him, but he knew that he was too weak to even attempt it. Obediently, the priest walked into the closet, and the old man immediately shut the door.

Vand stood in the darkness waiting for something to happen, but nothing happened. His rage grew by the second as he realized that he had just been tricked out of his belongings. Suddenly, fear coursed though the priest’s body as he realized that the contract was only valid if he died. Fearful of the thought that the old man had locked him in the closet to die, Vand’s hand shot out to open the door. The door opened easily, and Vand sighed with relief. The relief lasted only a second.

As the door opened wider, brilliant light shot into the small closet, and burning heat hit the priest like a shockwave. Vand’s brow creased as he stared into a vast wasteland, bright sunlight sparkling off the rolling hills of sand. Vand shook his head to clear the mirage from his vision, but the image did not go away. Slowly, Vand ventured through the door and into the wasteland. His eyes scanned the vastness around him. Tall mountains rose in the distance, and lava flowed down the slopes. Smoke curled upward from the mountainous peaks and a harsh wind whipped across the desert floor. Grains of sand slammed into the priest with stinging regularity, and Vand turned to retreat into the closet, but the doorway was gone. He stood shaking his head in confusion as his eyes gazed over the vast desert behind him.

“I must be delirious,” Vand said to himself.

Vand turned in a circle, bringing up his arms to protect his face from the stinging sand. He saw no exit from the wasteland.

“Am I dead?” Vand asked himself. “Is this what comes after life?”

“Is this what you want to come after death?” boomed a loud voice.

Vand gasped as he turned swiftly to find the source of the voice. His mind swam as he moved, and the priest fell to the desert floor.

“Who are you?” Vand shouted loudly. “Show yourself.”

One of the lava-spitting volcanoes suddenly moved. Vand rubbed his eyes and shook his head in disbelief. He watched with morbid curiosity as a body formed out of the volcano. A grotesque creature towered over the distant mountains and laughed deeply. The creature was monstrous and black. Horns sprouted for its head, and its eyes were like molten lava. The ground thundered as the beast walked towards Vand, but the priest could not take his eyes off of the demon. He saw sharp claws protruding from the creature’s hands and feet. When the creature laughed, Vand saw a snout full of huge sharp teeth. The priest quivered in fear.

“You are Dobuk,” the priest said accusingly.

“And you are my next meal,” laughed the beast, “but not before you have suffered greatly.”

Vand rolled over and got to his knees. He bowed his head, closed his eyes, and began praying to Kaltara for help. Vand’s concentration was broken when the demon’s claws snared the priest and lifted him towards its mouth. Vand screamed as he gazed into the cavernous snout that would become his grave.

“I know you,” the beast said suddenly. “You are Kaltara’s puppet. What is your name?”

“I am Vand, High Priest of Kaltara,” the priest said proudly. “Have your way with my body. You have no power over me. Kaltara will save me.”

“Save you?” laughed Dobuk as he tossed the priest’s body to the floor of the desert. “The High Priest of Kaltara should know better. You have entered my domain willingly, Vand. No one can save you now except me.”

The Great Demon waved a claw in the air, and Vand started screaming. The priest shrieked as his robe burst into flames, and his skin began to sear. Vand’s hands flew inward and began ripping the burning robe from his body. He flung the burning scraps to the desert floor, but his actions offered no relief. The priest’s skin burst into flames, and Vand frantically rolled around trying to extinguish the flames. All he succeeded in doing was causing the sand to stick to his burning skin.

“Have mercy!” cried Vand. “Kill me, but end this torment.”

“Have mercy?” smirked the Great Demon. “Were you talking to me? My name is Dobuk. Let me hear you say it.”

Vand bit his lip hard in an effort to stop screaming. It did not work, but the action did succeed in slicing the lip open. The priest spit a mouthful of blood into the sand and screamed hysterically.

“Have mercy, Dobuk,” pleaded the priest. “I cannot stand the pain.”

The demon’s snout split in a broad grin. He waved his claw and the fires immediately extinguished, the soaring wind died, and the sand settled to the floor of the desert.

“You have spirit, priest,” declared Dobuk. “I may strike a bargain with you this day.”

Vand gazed at his charred limbs, afraid to touch the skin in case in peeled off and fell into the sand.

“What bargain?” Vand asked nervously. “I have signed all of my belongings away to gain entry here. I have nothing left to offer. Still, I beg for your mercy.”

“You have your life to offer,” grinned the demon.

“My life is over,” sighed the priest. “If you wish me dead, I will not fight you. Take my life and be done with it.”

“That would be your death,” countered Dobuk. “That would mean nothing to me, but your life can be valuable. Renounce Kaltara and become my priest.”

“Impossible,” Vand shook his head vigorously. “Kaltara would strike me dead instantly.”

“An instant death is what you desire,” smirked the demon, “but you have no fear in that regard. Kaltara will not touch you.”

“What do you mean?” asked Vand. “Why would Kaltara not punish me for abandoning him?”

“You have already abandoned him,” chuckled the demon. “The moment you walked through that door, you gave up your faith in Kaltara. You failed his test, Priest. Now your life is mine to do with as I please.”

A look of shock came over Vand’s face, but he realized the truth of the demon’s statement. Kaltara had been testing him, and Vand had failed. He rebuked the king and the other priests who had gathered to help. He had placed himself above the people as the only one to know Kaltara. He had let vanity and pride defeat his holiness.

“I am an old man,” Vand said softly. “I do not have much life left in me. What would you have me do?”

“I will determine the number of your days,” retorted Dobuk. “If I were gracious enough to allow you to return to Angragar, your days would be limited, but I have other plans for you. How would you like to live for thousands of years?”

“Thousands of years?” echoed the priest. “That is impossible.”

“Nothing is impossible,” the demon grinned mischievously. “Be my priest, and you will rule the world for centuries. Multitudes will bow down before you and worship your every word. Your vanity will not be a slight to me as it is to Kaltara. Be vain. Be powerful. Take your revenge against those other inferior mortals.”

Vand’s eyes grew large as he tried to envision the image that the demon was painting.

“Oh,” sighed Dobuk, “what is the use? You are a foolish servant of Kaltara. You probably don’t have the character to rule the world. You don’t have the ability to push your feelings aside and crush your enemies beneath your boots. You are a weakling.”

“No!” protested the priest. “I have no feelings towards others. I am superior to all of them. I always have been, but they will fight me. How can I overcome the multitudes that will rise up against me?”

“My priest will have powers befitting his station,” smirked Dobuk. “Mortals are weaklings. When you speak in my name, they will either bow or flee, but you will not allow them to flee. You will strike them down to the last child. Can you handle that, Priest?”

Vand’s eyes glistened as he imagined the power that he would wield. He pictured King Regis kneeling before him, as he demanded the surrender of Angragar. His face broke into a smile.

“I think you will be surprised with what I can accomplish,” declared Vand. “Kaltara will rue the day that he tested me. You have a bargain, Dobuk. I will be your priest.”

The Great Demon’s grin broke as his mouth opened wide revealing the rows of sharp teeth. Flames shot from the demon’s eyes as he nodded his head in satisfaction. He waved a claw in the air, and Vand’s body instantly healed. The blisters disappeared, and the charred skin returned to a healthy tone.

Vand actually felt the sickness flee from his body. He inhaled deeply as he felt his strength returning. His eyes fell to the desert floor, and he saw rich garments before him. He picked them up and dressed. When he was done, Dobuk gently picked Vand up, and the priest stood on the demon’s open palm while Dobuk explained what he was to do. After an indeterminable amount of time, Dobuk was satisfied that his new priest would know what to do. He placed Vand back on the ground and winked conspiratorially. Vand bowed low before his new master. Dobuk waved a claw, and a door appeared in the sands of the desert.

“You must visit regularly,” warned Dobuk. “I will not stand for disobedience. I am not Kaltara, and my vengeance will be slow and deliberate. Do you understand?”

“Perfectly,” nodded Vand.

Dobuk disappeared in a puff of smoke. Vand turned and walked through the door to the small closet. He closed the door and stood in the darkness for a moment. Slowly, he opened the door and stepped out into the cave below the Asylum. The old man gasped audibly when he saw the priest. Vand grinned and motioned the old man towards him.

“You have something that belongs to me,” Vand declared. “Give it to me.”

The old man’s eyes grew large as he fumbled inside his tunic for the contract.

“How have you survived?” asked the old man. “The others either never returned or came back crazy.”

“The others were not High Priests,” grinned Vand as he tore the contract up and stuffed the pieces into his pouch. “I left a present for you inside the closet. It is the least I could do for one who has shown me the way to greatness.”

A pall of confusion came over the old man’s face, but his curiosity was strong. He immediately moved beyond the priest and peered through the open door to the closet. He saw nothing. Unexpectedly, Vand pushed the old man into the closet and slammed the door shut. He could barely hear the old man’s cries of terror as he passed through the cave to the stairs leading up to the shop.

Our story so far…

Young Lord of Khadora is the story of a young soldier who is unhappy with the culture of his country. His superb military skills, and the loyalty of his troops, enable Marak to take the reins of a minor Situ estate when the opportunity arises. When the neighboring lords conspire against Lord Marak, he uses cunning, courage, and unconventional warfare to subdue them. When his own protector, Lord Ridak of the Situ Clan, turns against Lord Marak, the young lord strikes a blow for a new culture. He creates his own clan, the Torak clan, and defies the norms by freeing his slaves. At the end of volume one, Lord Marak secretly controls five small clans on the frontier of Khadora.

Star of Sakova introduces Lyra, a young mage student who is thrust into an unfamiliar world by an attack on her father’s magic academy. Running for her life, Lyra enters the dreaded Sakova, expecting death at every turn. Instead, she finds that the god Kaltara has chosen her to lead the Sakovan people. Young Lyra unravels the mystery of the attack on the magic academy and the kidnapping of her father, Master Malafar. During the struggle to save the Sakovan people from extinction, Lord Marak visits and discovers long lost ties between the Sakovans and the people of his Chula father. By the end of volume two of the Forgotten Legacy, Lyra displays magic talents that only Kaltara could have given her. She faces off against the false Katana Alazar and defeats him in a public display that eliminates the threat of war.

Web of Deceit features a young villager from a remote area of Fakara. The story opens with the destruction of Rejji’s village and a chance meeting with Mistake, a young elf-like woman. Rejji and Mistake are captured by slavers and sold to a Khadoran estate where they befriend a young Fakaran with the rare ability to speak with animals. Lord Marak frees the trio from slavery as he seeks to learn more about the strange country of Fakara. When the trio returns to Rejji’s homeland, they become embroiled in a power struggle between the Jiadin tribe and the rest of the tribesmen, known as the Free Tribes. On a trip to the Sage of the Mountain, Rejji discovers that he is the long-awaited Astor of prophecy. He finds a painting in the ancient lost city of Angragar that depicts Lord Marak, Lyra, and himself. By the end of volume three, Rejji succeeds in uniting the Free Tribes under his banner and defeating the Jiadin. He immediately makes plans to rebuild his native country.

Aakuta: the Dark Mage introduces a new mysterious figure. A powerful dark mage suddenly appears in a country devoid of male mages. The mage appears to have no allegiances in the growing struggle between Lord Marak and the forces of evil, but he has the habit of always showing up when conflict erupts. Meanwhile, Lord Marak tries to arouse Khadora into stopping an invasion by the Jiadin. Not only do the other lords refuse to help him, but they actively try to ruin him through attacks and assassinations attempts. The secret alliances long held by Lord Marak are eventually discovered as Marak first ascends to the Lords’ Council and eventually becomes Emperor of Khadora. At the conclusion of volume four, Emperor Marak is consolidating Khadora under his banner. His plan is to rally all of the armies to help him combat the coming invasion of evil.

In Island of Darkness, a false Katana again rules Omunga. War is declared on the Sakovans as Vand’s people poison the food supply of Omunga. Emperor Marak guides Lyra as she attempts to win the war without inflicting too many casualties. She knows of the coming invasion and is forced to preserve as many of her enemy as possible. Meanwhile, Mistake and MistyTrail discover that they are sisters. They set out on a sea voyage and are shipwrecked off the Island of Darkness. As they search for a way to get home, the sisters discover elves, which were long thought to be extinct. In their bid for freedom, the sisters must rescue a pair of elves and get them off the island. During the rescues, the women discover many dark secrets of the evil enemy. At the end of volume five, Emperor Marak has ordered his people to deliver Mistake and her new friends to Khadoratung where he hopes to learn more about Vand and the lost nation of elves.

In Elvangar, Eltor and Caldal, the young male elves rescued by Mistake and MistyTrail, learn the truth about the ancient relations between the humans and the elves. They witness the awakening of the ancient city of Angragar before escorting Mistake and MistyTrail to the hidden land of Elvangar. Mistake and MistyTrail find that Elvangar is not the utopia that they expected. The land is ruled by a moody queen who turns out to be their mother. Arrested for attempting to assassinate the queen, Mistake and MistyTrail escape from Elvangar and return to the Island of Darkness to rescue their father, Avalar, King of the Elves. The young females elves discover that they are the lost princesses, Alahara and Alastasia, and accompany Avalar back to Elvangar to reclaim his throne.

Chapter 1

Raid on Duran

The first hint of dawn was appearing over the ocean as the sky began to lighten somewhat, but the morning fog obscured everything at ground level. Kenda peered out of the small window next to his bed as his eyes glistened with anticipation. The boy crept out of bed and quickly dressed as silently as he could. He eased the door open and slid through it, placing each foot carefully to minimize the noise. Slowly, he made his way to the kitchen and took his pack off the hook on the wall. He stuffed two round loaves of bread into his sack and slipped it on.

Returning to his room, he eased the door closed and then pulled his boots on. He was about to slip through the window, but he halted and got off the bed. He tiptoed to the chest at the foot of his bed. He opened the chest and extracted a length of rope, which he stuffed into his pack. He stood silently for a moment as if thinking about anything else he might need. Finally, he shook his head and shrugged. Kenda poked his head out of the window and gazed along the alley. There was no one in sight, so he climbed out the window and landed softly on the ground.

Kenda walked briskly along the alley. The fog hung so thick in places that anyone not familiar with the city of Duran would be foolish to attempt moving about, but Kenda was no stranger to the city. He had lived in Duran all of his life. The boy reached the street and looked both ways before emerging from the alley. He heard the clomping of a horse somewhere off to his right, but he could not see anyone. He raced across the street and continued along the alley for a short distance.

When he was well into the alley, he slowed down to avoid accidentally bumping into the supplies that Jackle’s father had stacked in the alleyway. He moved cautiously until the building materials came into view. Just beyond the stack of lumber and the pile of stones, Kenda moved close to the building and pulled himself up to peer through the window of his friend.

“Let’s go, Jackle,” Kenda urged softly. “It’s perfect weather out this morning. The fog is thicker than usual. Let’s go.”

“You sure this is a good idea?” Jackle asked as he sat up and rubbed the sleep from his eyes. “Your Pa will be mad when he finds out that you are gone.”

“I doubt it,” countered Kenda. “Our fathers did the same thing when they were boys. I heard them laughing about it, but they never made it all the way. We are going to make it.”

“If anyone can,” grinned Jackle as he threw off the cover and quickly dressed, “we can.”

“That is the truth,” replied Kenda, “but if you are having second thoughts, we can call this off. This was your idea, after all.”

“You’re just trying to get out of it,” taunted Jackle. “You said that you would come with me, and you are coming. We should take something to eat and drink.”

“I have two loaves of bread,” offered Kenda. “We can fill our flasks at the well before we leave the city. Can you think of anything else we might need?”

“We don’t need anything else,” shrugged Jackle as he laced his boots and scrambled out the window.

The two boys stood in the alleyway silently for a moment.

“I am so excited,” Jackle finally said. “I have wanted to do this for a long time, but I feel bad about getting you in trouble. Maybe I should go alone.”

“I am not letting you go alone,” declared Kenda. “I think it would be wise to wait a year or two until we have developed more climbing skills, but I know that you can’t wait that long. I am going with you.”

“Our climbing skills are fantastic,” retorted Jackle. “I can out climb my older brother already. Why should we wait?”

“That is what I expected you to say,” chuckled Kenda. “Let’s get moving while the fog is still thick. I want to be well up the Wall of Mermidion before it burns off.”

“The Wall of Mermidion,” Jackle replied with reverence in his voice. “The unscalable cliffs of Duran.”

“Not exactly unscalable,” countered Kenda. “Some people have done it before.”

“True,” nodded Jackle, “but they are all dead now. Besides the cliffs were never conquered by anyone our age. Our names will be famous when we return. How can anyone be angry with us then?”

“Let’s worry about our fame when we return,” suggested Kenda. “Right now we need to get our water and get out of the city before someone sees us and tells our fathers.”

“Right,” Jackle nodded vigorously. “Let’s go.”

The two boys moved silently along the alley until they came to the street. Kenda peered out of the alley and saw no one. He led the way into the street as the boys moved swiftly towards the well. The dense fog muted the sounds of the city, but they could hear the fisherman making their way towards the coast. When they heard someone coming towards them, they darted into an alley until the person passed by. The fog was thick enough that they never did see the early morning citizen. When the sound receded, the boys continued their journey towards the well.

They reached the well without running into anyone. The boys quickly filled their flasks and moved away from the well in case some early morning risers came to fetch water.

“I bet the ships don’t leave port until this fog thins a bit,” stated Jackle. “It is much thicker than normal. I can hardly see more than a pace in front of me.”

“It is early yet,” replied Kenda. “As soon as the sun rises, it will burn off quick enough.”

The boys moved as quickly as possible through the streets of Duran. Several more times they had to hide while a citizen passed by, but they never actually saw anyone. Only the sounds alerted them to the presence of others. Within half an hour, the boys had left the city and were crossing the farms towards the Wall of Mermidion that separated Duran from the rest of the Sakova.

Duran was unique in that it was the only Sakovan city that was inaccessible by land from any other part of the country. It occupied a small shelf of land between the Wall of Mermidion and the sea. The Wall of Mermidion itself was a towering range of cliffs that ran along the coast of the Sakova for hundreds of leagues. Duran was an isolated city, but most of the residents preferred it that way. They were a close-knit group that had little dealings with outsiders, even when they were part of Omunga. During the war, the city had been the first Omungan city to swear allegiance to the Sakova in exchange for the promise of food to feed the starving citizenry. Ever since, the Sakovans had sent shiploads of food to feed the people of Duran until they were once again self-sufficient.

The boys reached the foot of the Wall of Mermidion and gazed upward. They could not see far through the fog.

“We should have brought rope,” frowned Jackle.

“Got it,” beamed Kenda. “Why don’t you go first? I will follow you up.”

“Makes sense to me,” grinned Jackle. “I am the better climber. Just watch where I place my hands and feet and then follow me up.”

Kenda smiled and nodded as Jackle began climbing. He wasn’t entirely sure that he agreed with Jackle’s assessment of their skills, but this was Jackle’s expedition, and Kenda had no intention of spoiling it for his friend. He watched as Jackle slowly faded upward into the fog and then started up the cliff himself.

The cliffs were totally vertical, and the rock face was fairly smooth. There were few places to gain a firm purchase, so the technique the boys used the most was to find a narrow crevice and wedge his body into it. They would then move upward by keeping a firm pressure on each side of the crevice. It was an exhausting way to climb the cliffs, but both boys were excited to be doing it. They climbed for over an hour before Jackle found a spot where they could sit and rest.

“This is harder than I thought,” exhaled Jackle. “How far up do you think we are? I can’t see anything below us or above us. The fog is still too thick.”

“We have barely begun,” replied Kenda. “We will be lucky to reach the top before nightfall. We can still turn back if you want.”

“Don’t mention that again,” scowled Jackle. “I am not stopping before I reach the top. I don’t care if it takes two days. I will never get this chance again.”

“Alright,” shrugged Kenda, “but I want you to know that I will never think less of you if you decide to turn back. I guess what I mean is that it will be alright if we do.”

“Are you scared?” retorted Jackle. “Is that why you keep bringing it up?”

“I am scared a bit,” confessed Kenda, “but not so much of falling. I am afraid of doing something stupid, like refusing to quit when we are beaten by this cliff. There is no shame in understanding your limits and acting accordingly. I fear that you might not understand that.”

“I don’t understand it because I refuse to accept failure,” declared Jackle. “This cliff is not going to defeat me. You can go back down when you get scared, but I am going all the way to the top.”

Kenda sighed and stared off into the fog. He truly was not afraid of climbing the cliffs, but he was worried about his friend. He decided not to bring the subject up again.

“I thought this fog would be burning off by now,” Kenda changed the subject of the conversation. “We haven’t had such a fog that I can ever remember. I wonder if the fishermen will even take their boats out today?”

“I hope it clears soon,” replied Jackle. “The view of the city from up here must be fantastic. Let’s start climbing again. When the fog does lift, we will have an even better view.”

Kenda nodded as Jackle rose and squeezed into the crevice. The boys continued upward for another two hours before stopping again. Kenda took a loaf of bread out of his pack and broke off a couple of pieces. He gave one piece to Jackle.

“It still hasn’t lifted,” frowned Jackle as he munched on his bread. “Fog never lasts so late in the morning. Look towards the ocean. You can practically see the outline of the sun trying to break through the fog.”

“It is strange,” Kenda admitted. “I wonder what our families are thinking right now? Surely, we have been missed by now. Will they worry that we might be lost in the fog?”

“I figured that they would see us climbing the Wall of Mermidion,” confessed Jackle. “I suppose they will be worried if they can’t find us. I hope this fog lifts soon so that someone knows where we have gone.”

Suddenly, a tremendous force of wind blew up the face of the cliffs. Both boys instinctively leaned backwards to press their bodies against the wall of the cliff. Within seconds the fog was blown upward and the sun shone brightly in their faces.

“What was that?” Jackle asked with alarm. “I thought we were going to be blown off the cliffs.”

“Look out towards the harbor,” Kenda said excitedly. “Those ships are huge.”

The boys gazed at the sea just beyond the harbor wall. Half a dozen monstrous ships were heading towards the city.

“What are they?” asked Jackle. “I have never seen ships so large. Look how small our ships look in comparison.”

“Those are warships,” Kenda said haltingly. “I don’t like the looks of this.”

Suddenly, huge balls of fire sprang from the decks of the monstrous ships. The fiery projectiles slammed into the buildings of Duran, and fires sprang up throughout the city. The boys watched the citizens of Duran scurrying around in confusion. People ran in every direction. Distant shouts of alarm drifted lightly on the air at the citizens of Duran were roused from their homes. The Imperial Guards gathered in front of the Mayor’s building and formed ranks, but there was no one for them to fight. As the huge fireballs continued to soar into the city, the invading ships began lowering smaller ships to ferry the soldiers ashore.

“Even their small ships dwarf most of our fishing vessels,” Jackle said softly. “I can’t imagine how many soldiers those ships must hold.”

“Probably more men than the number of citizens in Duran,” frowned Kenda. “Our people will not stand a chance.”

“We have to start down,” Jackle declared as he moved to the edge of the cliff.

“Don’t be a fool,” snapped Kenda as he reached out and grabbed his friend. “We have been climbing for hours. By the time we reach the bottom, the battle will be over.”

Jackle slowly nodded and eased his back against the cliff. “I don’t like being up here,” he stated. “We should be down there helping the defenders.”

“We would be no help to anyone down there,” sighed Kenda. “I am sure that the mayor will surrender promptly. The citizens cannot hope to defend Duran against such a force. Look at the number of small boats that are streaming towards the shore.”

The fires in the city multiplied as more fiery projectiles flew from the decks of the large ships. The boys watched the destruction, unable to distinguish individuals from their height, but with a good enough view to read the hopelessness of the citizens. A figure stood before the Imperial Guards and led them down to the waterfront, a large white flag clearly visible to the boys.

“You were right,” conceded Jackle. “The mayor is surrendering. This has to be the quickest battle ever. I thought the Imperial Guards would at least kill some of the invaders before surrendering. Their first ships are just reaching the shore now.”

“The mayor is wise,” countered Kenda. “We are a farming and fishing city. Even our Imperial Guards are not true warriors. We have no business being involved in battle. Surrender is the appropriate course of action. The mayor understands our limits and sees no shame in admitting defeat. He is saving the lives of the citizens.”

The first of the invaders’ boats ran up on the beach, and soldiers in red uniforms jumped out. Boat after boat landed unopposed and soon hundreds of foreign soldiers were marching through the city. One large group of foreigners marched towards the mayor and the Imperial Guards. The Imperial Guards were easily outnumbered, yet hundreds of more boats were still streaming towards the shore.

“The Imperial Guards are throwing down their swords,” scowled Jackle. “Why have an army if they just give up so easily?”

“Why should they throw their lives away?” retorted Kenda. “There are thousands of invaders. Look, they are still coming ashore. There is no end to them.”

The boys watched the drama unfolding before their eyes. The Imperial Guards tossed their swords and knives into a large pile on the ground as the foreign invaders surrounded them. As soon as the last of the weapons were discarded, the foreign soldiers attacked the Imperial Guards.

“Treachery!” shouted Jackle. “They are killing unarmed men. What a despicable act! The Imperial Guards should have fought them.”

Kenda’s jaw dropped in disbelief as he stared in horror at the massacre below. Within seconds, the entire group of Imperial Guards was dead. The mayor, still holding his white flag was the last to die. Kenda shook his head and tears welled up in his eyes. His mouth opened to speak, but no words came out.

Jackle excitedly grabbed Kenda’s arm and pointed to a spot deeper into the city. His fingers dug into his friend’s arm as he cried. Kenda pried his gaze away from the Imperial Guards and looked to where Jackle was pointing. The red-clad soldiers where killing everyone they came across, man, woman, and child.

“No!” shouted Kenda, tears flowing freely down his cheeks. “Why?”

“It’s a massacre,” sobbed Jackle. “They are killing everyone.”

Kenda wanted to turn his eyes away from the destruction, but he could not. He watched as red soldiers invaded every part of the city. They instantly killed every person they came across. Some of the citizens tried to resist. Small groups of men raced down alleyways with old swords, shovels, and knives. They carried anything that could be used to kill a fellow human being, but it did not even slow down the invaders. The red-clad soldiers were trained warriors prepared for battle. The citizens were no match for them.

When the streets of the city were empty of the living, the foreign soldiers began to enter the houses. Kenda did not have to guess what was happening inside the homes. He watched as some citizens tried to escape the slaughter by running out the back doors of the houses, but the foreign soldiers were waiting for them. After each house was searched for citizens, a foreigner tossed a torch inside. Soon the entire city was burning.

“I think that is my father,” Jackle shouted hysterically as he pointed towards his house. “Run, Pa.”

Kenda winced as he watched the foreign soldier strike the man down. He looked across the street and saw his own house burning. He closed his eyes and let the tears flow down his cheeks. When he opened his eyes again, he saw more boats landing on the beach. Men jumped out of the boats, but they did not wear the red uniforms of the others. The new arrivals wore dark hooded cloaks. A chill ran down Kenda’s spine as he watched the hooded men enter the city.

“We have to hide,” Kenda said softly.

“What?” blubbered Jackle. “What are you talking about?”

“Those are mages,” replied Kenda. “Look along the beach. The hooded men are mages.”

“As if they can cause more damage than the soldiers,” snapped Jackle. “Who cares about the mages?”

“We do,” Kenda replied, forcefully calming himself. “They did not need to bring mages ashore to kill the citizens. We need to hide.”

“Why?” asked Jackle. “What do you know that I don’t?”

“The only reason to bring the mages ashore is to find the citizens that the soldiers missed,” explained Kenda as he moved to the nearest crevice and squeezed his body into it. “They do not plan to leave a single person alive. We have to hide before they find us.”

“What does it matter to them if someone survives?” asked Jackle, who refused to leave the ledge.

“I am not sure,” admitted Kenda, “but it does matter to them. Maybe they don’t want anyone left alive to describe their attack? I do not know, but I am positive that we are in danger. Hide in a crevice.”

“They can’t get us up here,” countered Jackle. “Just let those foreigners try to scale the Wall of Mermidion. They will never make it to the top.”

“Neither will we,” retorted Kenda. “I never thought we could make it all the way up, but I didn’t want to spoil your fun. These crevices disappear near the top of the wall. We will have to go back down eventually, but not until the foreigners are gone.”

“I am never going back down there,” declared Jackle. “There is nothing left for me in Duran. I will not return.”

“We will discuss this later,” sighed Kenda. “Get yourself into a crevice before someone looks up here and sees you.”

“I would rather that they saw me,” protested Jackle. “Maybe some of them will die trying to capture me. They cannot climb the Wall of Mermidion, and we can.”

“Jackle,” pleaded Kenda. “Just hide.”

Suddenly, a brilliant flash seared Kenda’s eyes. He heard Jackle emit a ghastly scream that faded to nothing as his friend’s body tumbled down to the base of the Wall of Mermidion. Kenda closed his eyes tightly and cried.

For hours, Kenda remained hidden in the crevice, listening to the distant sounds from below. First came the sounds of warfare, screams, shouts, the clashing of steel. An eerie silence followed after a while, broken only occasionally by the crash of a collapsing building. Kenda turned his head and peered out of the crevice. Tall columns of smoke billowed upward from the burning city. Kenda wondered if anything would be left of the city when he descended.

Eventually, new sounds drifted up to his perch on the Wall of Mermidion. Kenda eased his body downward and crawled out of the crevice, keenly aware of the need to keep his head low. He crawled to the edge of the cliff and stared downward. Duran was utterly destroyed. Wooden buildings had become heaps of ashes and smoldering debris. Where stone buildings had stood, piles of broken rock littered the ground. Thousands of men in red uniforms swarmed through the city, poking into the piles of rubble as they passed by.

Kenda’s eyes were drawn to the city well. Around it stood over a hundred dark-hooded men. Kenda tried to make sense of the needless slaughter, but he could not comprehend it. He thought about the local farmers, and how they became obsessed with ridding their farms of moles. It was the only thought about complete annihilation that he could come up with, but he failed to see how the citizens of Duran could be considered a threat to anyone. It made no sense to the Sakovan boy.

As Kenda was watching the men around the well, he saw one of them point upward towards the Wall of Mermidion. A chill shivered through Kenda’s body as he watched the large group of mages turn their eyes towards him. He dared not move, his eyes frozen on the well and the men around it. Eventually, the mages stopped looking in his direction, and Kenda sighed with relief. The respite from fear was brief.

One of the mages called to a group of red-clad soldiers and pointed to the cliffs. Kenda could see the soldier nod exaggeratedly before turning and shouting to some of the other soldiers. Soon six soldiers were running towards the base of the Wall of Mermidion. When the soldiers came close to the base of the cliff, Kenda was no longer able to see them. He backed slowly away from the edge and retreated into his crevice.

“I said that we couldn’t reach the top,” Kenda said aloud as if Jackle were still there to hear him, “but I hope that I was wrong. Those soldiers are coming up to check the crevices.”

Kenda sat for a few moments trying to figure out what to do. He gazed up at the high sun and knew that the face of the cliffs would soon be in the shadows when the sun passed over the crest. Realizing that he had no other option, Kenda started climbing the nearest crevice. He tried to keep his body as deep into the crevice as possible and hoped that none of the mages would send a fiery projectile to whisk him off the wall.

He climbed swiftly until he came to the next small ledge. He hurriedly chose another crevice and darted into it without taking the time to look down at the foreigners. Soon the crevices grew very dark. Kenda looked up and could no longer see the sun.

Kenda froze when he heard a distant scream. He knew without looking that one of his pursuers had fallen off the wall. He listened intently to the length of the scream as if it would give him an idea of how far up the cliffs the soldiers had gotten, but it was a futile exercise. The scream just faded into the sounds of the wind.

Kenda continued up the Wall of Mermidion in a mindless exercise of endurance and stamina. As each crevice ended, the boy immediately sought the safety of the next dark crevice and continued upward. He minimized the amount of time that he was exposed to those below him. Eventually, he reached a point where there were no more crevices. He gritted his teeth and sighed heavily as he looked out over the ocean and saw the bright pink clouds heralding the sunset. Soon it would be completely dark, and the real climbing had just begun. Kenda gazed upward and studied the face of the cliff. It looked like a sheer vertical stone face. He shook his head and cried.

Suddenly, another scream came from below, but not as far away as the first one. Kenda did not need to count the length of the scream to realize that the soldiers were climbing faster than he was. He looked again at the face of the cliff and gritted his teeth in determination. The climb to the top of the Wall of Mermidion might well kill him, but Kenda knew that death surely awaited him if he did not move swiftly. He took the rope out of his pack and coiled it. He put one arm through the coil and draped the rope over his chest. With the sigh of a decision made, Kenda reached up and grabbed the first handhold that he could see. He pulled himself upward, moving his free hand over the surface of the dark rock in search of the next handhold.

Chapter 2

Pain Killers

Aakuta tripped and fell to the ground near the rear of the temple on the Island of Darkness. He cursed under his breath as he heard a bone crack as his body hit the ground. The added pain of a new cracked rib was not even noticed by the dark mage. His body was continually wracked with pain every moment of the day, a result of the curse put upon him by Dobuk, the Fallen One.

Aakuta closed his eyes and tried to concentrate on peaceful and serene thoughts. He had found that if he concentrated hard enough, the pain dulled somewhat, although it was never bearable. He had almost succeeded in transporting his mind elsewhere when someone brutally kicked him in the head. Aakuta’s hands instinctively rose to protect his face as he rolled over to gaze upon his torturer. Aakuta snarled when he recognized Xavo, a young mage in the service of Vand.

Xavo was an egotistical fool. Although he was handsome and had mastered a great deal of magic, the young mage lacked common sense and consistently overrated his own power. Aakuta hated him.

Xavo never passed up a chance to humiliate Aakuta, especially if there were others around to enjoy the demonstration. On this particular day, a dozen red-clad soldiers stood behind the young mage, laughing hard as the old mage’s plight.

“The great Aakuta,” sneered Xavo as his foot swung to deliver another blow to Aakuta’s head. “You aren’t so great any more, are you? Nobody goes against Vand and survives.”

Aakuta’s arm moved swiftly, blocking the kick aimed at his head. Xavo snarled and immediately tried once more to kick Aakuta’s face.

“Stop it!” shouted a woman near a building on the other side of the street. “Stop it immediately,” she added as she strode across the street.

“This is of no concern to you,” snapped Xavo. “You no longer have any standing in the court of Vand.”

“I may not have standing in the court,” glared Lady Mystic as she halted between Xavo and the old mage sprawled on the ground, “but I am telling you to stop it right now.”

“Or what?” sneered Xavo. “You can’t even enter the temple to complain, besides, abusing one who has been stricken by Vand’s curse is not prohibited. In fact, it is encouraged. Be gone.”

“You are a fool, Xavo,” scowled Lady Mystic. “I have no need to complain about your actions. I will just match my power against yours, right here, right now. Are you prepared to die?”

“My power is a match for yours,” Xavo quickly shot back, but the nervous reactions of his body told a different story.

Lady Mystic smiled menacingly as she watched the younger mage’s body tick spasmodically. She stepped close to the young mage and stared into his face.

“I have nothing to lose by continuing this confrontation,” she declared softly. “Is your stubborn pride truly worth your life this day?”

Xavo was acutely aware of the soldiers behind him and knew that they were waiting anxiously for a confrontation. He would look foolish walking away from the fight, but he had no desire to match skills against the Emperor’s daughter.

“You were thrown out of the temple for catering to this old fool,” Xavo said loudly. “Perhaps the best punishment for your actions is to let you continue to associate with such refuse.”

Xavo swiftly spun around and strode off, brusquely pushing his way through the gathered soldiers. Lady Mystic shook her head and then glared at the soldiers. The group fidgeted only briefly before turning away and dispersing. Lady Mystic watched the soldiers leave before turning and squatting next to Aakuta.

“You should not endanger yourself on my account,” Aakuta groaned weakly.

Tears welled up in Lady Mystic’s eyes as she cast a healing spell on the dark mage.

“You still care about me after what I did to you?” sniffed the Emperor’s daughter. “Why?”

“You did what you had to do,” replied Aakuta. “Should I stop loving you because of that?”

Lady Mystic smiled tightly, but tears continued to cascade down her cheeks. Suddenly, her eyes grew large and she stared incomprehensibly at Aakuta.

“You are lucid,” Lady Mystic remarked. “How is that possible? No one has ever emerged from that chamber without being insane.”

”Dobuk has never met the likes of me,” Aakuta grinned before grunting in pain. “At times I can concentrate on other things, but not for long. The pain distracts me.”

“And the pain will be worse for you than the others because you can think,” frowned Lady Mystic. “You will be more aware of it. I must do something. Can you walk?”

“My arms and legs still function,” Aakuta nodded as he rolled over and got to his knees.

The pain in his newly cracked rib shot through the mage, but he tried to ignore it. Lady Mystic stood and helped Aakuta to his feet. She draped one of his arms over her neck and wrapped one of her arms around him. Slowly she guided him across the street and into the alley that led to her home. When she got him through the door, Lady Mystic guided the dark mage to a chair at the table.

“Sit quietly while I mix you a potion,” instructed the Emperor’s daughter.

“A potion?” questioned the dark mage.

“It will relieve your pain,” nodded Lady Mystic as she began mixing ingredients in a large flask. “It won’t last long, but it will give you a small amount of relief for a time.”

“Mix a lot of it,” Aakuta smiled meekly. “I don’t expect that Vand will allow me to die anytime in the near future.”

“It is highly addictive,” Lady Mystic shook her head. “Too much of it and you will lose your ability to reason. Just be thankful for an hour of peace.”

Aakuta fell silent as he watched Lady Mystic mix the ingredients for the potion. The silence was disturbing, and Lady Mystic felt the need to talk.

“I have been watching you every day,” she said softly. “I had no idea that you could reason. You hide it well.”

“You can imagine what Vand would do if he knew that I could think,” sighed Aakuta. “I knew that I must hide that fact well.”

Lady Mystic’s eyebrows rose as she turned to stare at the dark mage. She pondered Aakuta’s admission and eventually nodded at his logic.

“He would torture you anew,” she declared. “You were wise to hide it from him, but why do you wish to think? You are only making it harder on yourself. I would wager that it is wiser to be without reason in your condition. The insane do not feel the pain as severely as those who can concentrate.”

“My task here is not complete,” Aakuta admitted as he drank the potion that Lady Mystic handed to him. “Ah,” he smiled broadly, “that is a wonderful feeling. I actually feel human again. How long will it last?”

“I am not sure,” replied Lady Mystic. “My guess is around an hour, but I have never had the opportunity to try it on someone in your severe condition. What do you mean when you say that your task is not complete?”

“I have paid a steep price for spying on Vand,” explained Aakuta. “The least I can do to repay him is to complete that task. I must continue to send word to Emperor Marak’s people about what is happening here on Motanga. I must inform them when the invasion will begin.”

“So you truly are the spy,” frowned Lady Mystic. “I knew that you helped Rhoda escape, but how do you get any information to Emperor Marak?”

“I used the air tunnel that your father is so keen to learn about,” smiled Aakuta.

“You know how to use an air tunnel?” gasped Lady Mystic. “You could have used that information to save yourself. Vand would have let you live if you gave it to him.”

“I would rather die than see him possess such knowledge,” spat Aakuta. “Rhoda felt the same way. No matter who interrogated her, they would never have learned the secret of the air tunnel. In fact, she was responsible for the destruction and death of her first interrogator. She had fully expected to die in her own attack. Vand should realize that Marak’s people would never betray him.”

“You would rather die?” Lady Mystic retorted scornfully. “What about what it does to me? You profess your love for me, but have you thought about how all of this affects me? I would rather that you did not die.”

“I have thought a great deal about you,” admitted Aakuta. “I wish that I had never met you. At least that way you would never have become hurt by my actions, but I cannot change history. You are wrong about your father, though. Oh, Vand would gratefully accept my knowledge of the air tunnel, but he would not reward me for it. He would kill me just the same. You truly do not understand that fiend, even after what he has done to you.”

“His action was justified,” frowned Lady Mystic. “I betrayed him. What would you expect him to do? Emperor Marak would do the same to you.”

“That is where you are wrong,” smiled Aakuta. “Emperor Marak, like the Sakovans, is capable of forgiveness. My daughter’s people forgave me for everything that I did that endangered them. I could not understand that attitude at first, but I do understand it now. It is how your father should have reacted to you, but he didn’t. Doesn’t that tell you something? If your father truly loved you, he would never order your removal from his presence. Vand cares for no one but himself.”

“He has to be strong,” argued Lady Mystic. “He is responsible for ruling over so many people. He cannot waver from his duty just because I am his daughter. It is you who do not understand him.”

“I will not argue with you over your father,” Aakuta said with frustration as he rose from his chair. “Mark my words. Your father cares nothing for you. He will use you and toss you by the wayside when he no longer needs you. Emperor Marak is not that kind of person.”

Aakuta turned and walked out of the room. Lady Mystic heard the door to the alley open and then close. She glared at the table for a moment and then swept her hand across its surface, sending flasks and ingredients crashing to the floor. She kicked the chair that Aakuta had been sitting in and then stormed out of the room. For several minutes she paced the floor, full of fury and indecision. Finally, she threw the door to the alley open and stepped out of her home. Off in the distance, she saw Aakuta at the mouth of the alley. The dark mage turned to the right and headed towards the beach. Lady Mystic quickened her step and followed.

Aakuta walked slowly as he pretended to still be in pain. He did not want anyone to know that he could think and function normally while the pain-killing potion was active. His path appeared to be erratic and without purpose, but the dark mage slowly made his way to the desolate stretch of beach where he had first set foot on the Island of Darkness.

When he reached the beach, he looked carefully in each direction to make sure that he was alone. Satisfied that he was not being observed, Aakuta wove an air tunnel to Raven’s Point. He waited patiently until he felt someone at the other end. Aakuta always wove a one-way air tunnel to avoid the noise coming through from the other end, so he had no idea who he had managed to contact. All that he knew was that he had located someone with the abilities of an air mage, and that person was at the deserted cove where he normally sent his messages.

“This is Aakuta,” the dark mage said softly into the air tunnel. “I have been absent for a long time, and I may not communicate again for a while, but I will still try to determine the time of the invasion if I am able to. I must report that Vand has discovered my purpose here on Motanga. That is the reason that my reports may become sporadic, or even stop at any time,” he added.

Aakuta paused as he wondered how much the Khadorans really needed to know about his personal situation. He did not want any Khadorans coming to the island to rescue him; therefore he could not admit the trouble that he was in.

“As a security precaution,” Aakuta continued, “I will always use the word Motanga in the first sentence of any future reports. Vand is keen on discovering the mechanism of the air tunnel, and he may eventually try to use it to confuse you. Be wary. I will try to contact you again soon. I hope that Rhoda made it home safely. I wish her well.”

Aakuta dropped the air tunnel and stared out over the ocean waves. He was not sure how long he remained silently pondering the future, but the noise from the jungle behind him startled him. He whirled around to see Lady Mystic retreating through the foliage. Aakuta raced after her and caught up to her before she could exit the jungle.

“You were spying on me?” he asked accusingly.

“What if I was?” shrugged Lady Mystic. “You seem to think that spying is a noble pastime. Why complain when others do it?”

“It does not need to be like this,” Aakuta sighed. “Can’t we be friends without letting this war come between us?”

“Not when you continue to work against my father,” Lady Mystic shook her head. “What more must he do to you to make you understand?”

“That is the question that I want to pose to you,” frowned Aakuta. “How many times must he reject you and abuse you before you see him as he really is?”

“You just don’t know him as I do,” retorted Lady Mystic as she turned and walked away.

Aakuta watched sadly as his love retreated towards the city. He sighed with frustration before his mind got around to thinking about what she might have observed while spying on him. Suddenly, his jaw opened in fear. He had been a fool to let her walk away. Lady Mystic might be a fool where her father was concerned, but she was a tremendously intelligent woman. Was it possible that she saw him weave the air tunnel? Would she take that knowledge to Vand if she did?

Filled with terror, Aakuta raced towards the city, uncaring about his appearance to others. He ran into the alley hoping to see Lady Mystic walking along it. She was nowhere in sight. He continued to run along the alley until he came to the door to her home. It was wide open. He entered the house hoping to find Lady Mystic inside. The house was empty.

Aakuta stood in the laboratory staring at the broken glass and ingredients strewn across the floor. He thought about his previous exit from the house and tried to understand his friend’s emotional state and determine what her reactions must have been. Finally, he nodded conclusively when he realized that she would take the air tunnel to Vand. There was nothing that Aakuta could do now to stop her. Instead of wasting time berating himself for his failure, Aakuta gathered up the ingredients that he had seen Lady Mystic use to make the pain-killing potion. He grabbed an old pack off the floor and filled it with what he would need to duplicate her potion.

With the pack in hand, Aakuta left the house, closing the door behind him. He immediately headed to the edge of the city and dashed across the open area to the forest beyond. Once he found a secluded glade, Aakuta sat down and opened the pack. He removed the ingredients and began to concoct a batch of the pain-killing potion. When he was done, he filled four glass bottles with the liquid and put stoppers in to seal them. He dug a hole with his hands and buried the old pack along with the tools used to make the potion. Taking the four bottles, Aakuta wandered through the woods, looking for four different places to hide the liquid drugs.

* * *

Lady Mystic stopped at the front entrance to the temple. The guards immediately stiffened and move their pikes to prohibit her entry.

“You know that you are not allowed in the temple,” stated one of the guards.

“I know,” Lady Mystic nodded. “Send word to my father that I am here to see him. It is extremely important.”

“The Emperor will not accept such a message,” the guard shook his head. “You do not exist.”

“You will go to the Emperor, and tell him that I am hear,” Lady Mystic said forcefully. “If you don’t, I will see that you are severely punished. Tell him that I know the secret of the air tunnel. Go!”

The two guards looked at each other for a long moment before one of them shrugged and stepped through the door. Lady Mystic waited impatiently for his return. The wait seemed like an eternity, but the guard eventually returned with a squad of soldiers.

“You will have an escort,” announced the guard.

Lady Mystic sighed and nodded. She had not expected her father to treat her so poorly, but she knew that everything would change in a few moments. She allowed herself to be escorted up to the throne room. She smiled broadly as she walked into the throne room. It felt like home to her. She gazed up at her father and smiled. The Emperor glared in return.

“You profess to know the air tunnel,” Vand announced bluntly. “Prove it.”

Lady Mystic halted halfway across the room. Half of the soldiers escorting her continued onward unaware of her halting. The other half stopped abruptly in confusion. Lady Mystic wove the air tunnel and aimed it at the Emperor.

“I have succeeded where others have failed, Father,” Lady Mystic said softly into the air tunnel.

A look of surprise illuminated the Emperor’s face. He grinned broadly and nodded. “Approach, Lady Mystic,” he said loudly.

Lady Mystic grinned and felt a shiver of victory course through her body. The others in the room stared in confusion as they wondered what was happening. Lady Mystic marched up and stood before her father.

“Teach me,” the Emperor instructed. “I want to know how it is done.”

Lady Mystic gladly instructed the Emperor in the creation of the air tunnel. He nodded his understanding and experimented with it. First he aimed one at Clarvoy, the head spy for Motanga.

“Now we have something we can use against them,” whispered the Emperor. “We must discuss the implications of this discover. Stay when the others are dismissed.”

Across the room, the head spy merely nodded. Next, the Emperor directed an air tunnel at one of the mages in the rear of the room. He instructed the man to leave the room. While no one else had heard the utterance, the mage nodded and walked out the doors.

“This is wonderful,” announced the Emperor. “How did you learn this magic?”

“I watched Aakuta use it,” grinned Lady Mystic. “Surely you can have no doubts about my loyalty now. He would die if he knew that I was instructing you in its use.”

“He would not die,” frowned the Emperor. “I have not allowed it yet. Why didn’t you bring this knowledge to me before? Why have you waited until now?”

“I just learned it,” answered Lady Mystic. “I brought the knowledge to you as soon as I learned it.”

“Do not lie to me,” shouted Vand. “The insane do not go around casting spells.”

“I am not lying,” frowned Lady Mystic. “I do not understand it, but Aakuta still has the ability to reason. I made up a potion to ease his pain, and he became quite lucid. The first thing he did was to run to the beach and create an air tunnel. I followed him and spied on him. I came here as soon as I learned his secret.”

“You aided the traitor?” scowled Vand. “You will never aid him again. Is that understood?”

“I understand,” Lady Mystic responded, her brow creasing heavily, “but my aid enabled us to discover his secret. Besides, I will never see him again once I move back into the temple. Surely you would not allow him entry.”

“Allow him entry?” balked Vand. “Never. I do not allow the enemy into my midst. Everybody out. This court session is over.”

The people started to leave. Lady Mystic turned to leave, and Vand stopped her.

“Not you, Daughter,” Vand said softly. “I am not through with you yet.”

Lady Mystic turned to her father and smiled. When all of the people had left, Clarvoy stepped forward and stood beside Lady Mystic.

“Lady Mystic has brought valuable information today,” the Emperor said to the head spy.

Lady Mystic beamed with pride as she listened.

“This information has altered my plans,” the Emperor continued. “Aakuta must be found and destroyed.”

“How can we destroy him?” asked Clarvoy. “He is protected from death.”

“Not any longer,” announced the Emperor. “By the time you exit the temple, his protection from death will be lifted.”

“It shall be as you wish,” nodded Clarvoy.

“You are also to go to Lady Mystic’s home,” instructed the Emperor. “Destroy her laboratory. I will not have traitors making potions to aid my enemy.”

“Destroy my laboratory?” Lady Mystic echoed with shock. “Is that really necessary? Couldn’t I just move it to my chambers here in the temple?”

“You have no chambers in this temple,” sneered the Emperor. “You never will again. I told you before that I do not tolerate traitors in my midst. You are alive only because you are my daughter, but life is all that our relationship buys you. Cross me again and even your life will be forfeit.”

“I am not a traitor,” Lady Mystic fumed. “Who else would bring you the air tunnel? I have done more for you than even Clarvoy.”

The Emperor struck swiftly. He rose from the throne and slapped Lady Mystic across the face. Lady Mystic sprawled on the floor and looked up at her father with hurt and surprise.

“You think that being my daughter makes you immune from my wrath?” laughed the Emperor. “I have had thousands of sons and daughters. You should be grateful that my blood flows through your veins. It is my only gift to you. Get out of my sight before I change my mind and have you executed for my enjoyment.”

Lady Mystic rose, her cheek stinging from the blow and tears flowing from her eyes. What hurt the most as she retreated from the room was the fact that Aakuta had been right all along. Her father was an animal who cared for no one but himself. Lady Mystic cried as she raced down the stairs.

Her first instinct was to run to her house and try to preserve her laboratory, but she knew that that effort was futile. Clarvoy would search her entire home to make sure that everything was destroyed. She wanted desperately to find Aakuta, but how could she face him now? Twice she had betrayed him. No man could possibly forgive her after that. She had had to choose between her lover and her father, and she had chosen wrong. Now she had neither.

Lady Mystic ran out of the temple and through the streets of the city. She wandered through the jungle to the secluded spot on the beach where she had spied on Aakuta. There she threw herself on the ground and cried herself to sleep.

Chapter 3

Society of Mages

The balding mage hurried through the streets of Morada, capital of the elven nation of Elvangar. He looked around anxiously before slipping into the Society of Mages. Once inside the old building, the mage made his way through the reading room, nodding to two of his acquaintances before exiting the room and entering his private study.

In the reading room, the two men rose nonchalantly and put down the books they had been reading. The tall, lean man left first, and the overweight one dallied for a moment before following. Both men made their way to the same private study that the bald man had entered.

“Salfour,” greeted the bald man. “Have a seat. Is Levitor coming?”

The door opened before Salfour could answer. The overweight mage slipped into the room and closed the door.

“You look worried, Maraton,” commented Levitor as he also took a seat. “What did you find out?”

“Our task will not be an easy one,” sighed Maraton as he sat behind the desk. “Avalar is determined to aid the humans in their war with Vand. I wish Karaza was still with us.”

“He is not with us because he wanted to claim the throne for himself,” replied Salfour. “He was foolish to think that the people would break the thousand-year rule of the Kierans.”

“And just how would you suggest we gain control of the country if we let the Kierans keep the throne?” retorted Levitor. “None of us have Kieran blood flowing through our veins.”

“I don’t know,” conceded Salfour. “What I meant is that Karaza saw himself as too important. He should have worked with the rest of us. Together we could have succeeded. Now we not only have Avalar back among us, we also have his two daughters to contend with. It just complicates everything.”

“There is a way,” Maraton interrupted. “I have spent a great deal of time thinking about this.”

“Do not hold us in suspense,” replied Salfour. “Say what you know.”

“Queen Alycia has a sister,” declared Maraton. “She is Kieran by blood as same as the queen. If the royal family were to have fatal accidents, Kanis would have a valid claim to the throne.”

“I remember the sister,” nodded Levitor. “In the early days she used to live at the palace, but I don’t think she has been seen in years. What happened to her?”

“She did not get along well with Avalar,” answered Maraton. “They fought constantly. Kanis tried to express her views about how Elvangar should be ruled. Avalar thought her ideas were foolish and ignored them. When things came to a head, she tried to get Alycia to come to her aid. The queen refused to intervene, and Kanis left the palace forever. She moved to a small village and has lived there ever since.”

“And why would she want to become involved now?” asked Salfour. “Obviously she has given up any hopes of ruling Elvangar.”

“Yesterday,” grinned Maraton, “I would have agreed with you.”

“And now?” prompted Levitor.

“I took it upon myself to visit her yesterday,” smiled Maraton. “I made up a reasonable excuse for my presence in the small village and acted like I just happened to recognize her. She was flattered that someone from the Society of Mages would remember her and invited me into her home.”

“And because she talked to you, you think she will aid us?” frowned Levitor. “You can’t be serious?”

“Oh, but I am,” grinned Maraton. “When Avalar and the princesses were lost at sea, Kanis returned to Morada. She figured that she could move back into the palace and live with her sister. No doubt she expected to exert influence over the queen. To her surprise, Alycia refused to even see her. She left Morada in a very bitter mood, a mood that has not improved over time.”

“No doubt Karaza had a hand in refusing her entry into the palace,” quipped Salfour. “He was always jealous of anyone else exerting any influence over the queen.”

“No doubt,” nodded Maraton. “In talking to Kanis yesterday, I rekindled her feelings about the royal family. She hates Avalar with a passion, and despises her own sister. Words cannot begin to describe her feelings towards the two princesses. I am sure that she would execute them if she got the chance. She sees them as obstacles.”

“How does all of this help us?” asked Levitor. “So you have a Kieran that would be glad to see the royal family disposed of. Am I missing something here? Kanis has no power in Elvangar. She will never be queen while any of the four members of the royal family live.”

“An accurate statement,” agreed Maraton. “She does not do anything for us at the moment, but I believe that her cooperation is the key to our success. The people are evenly divided about this upcoming war. Our first task is to keep things that way.”

“Wait a moment,” interrupted Salfour. “I thought our task was to sway the people against the war?”

“It was,” nodded Maraton, “but I have a new plan.”

“A new plan?” echoed Levitor. “Isn’t that something for the three of us to discuss? Or are you following in Karaza’s footsteps and trying to seize the throne for yourself?”

Maraton sighed and shook his head. “Why don’t you accuse me of being a fool while you are at it?” he snapped at Levitor. “The three of us are here right now to discuss my new plan. Do you want to argue about protocol, or do you want to hear the plan?”

“Let him speak,” Salfour urged Levitor. “Maraton is not like Karaza.”

“I am sorry,” apologized Levitor. “Tell us of your plan.”

“I understand that we are all tense after what Karaza did,” soothed Maraton, “but I think we can salvage something out of it. I think we all know that a Kieran must reign, at least for now. Kanis is the only hope we have of finding someone with a proper claim to the throne. If the peace faction of Elvangar wins decisively in the ongoing struggle about aiding the humans, our chance for power will disappear. This is also true if Avalar wins decisively because we will be off to war. Things must remain evenly divided.”

“And what do you see happening if things remain divided?” asked Levitor.

“If I read Avalar correctly,” smiled Maraton, “he will leave Elvangar to parley with the humans. I suspect that he will take the princesses with him. That is when we will strike.”

“Yes,” Salfour nodded vigorously. “Alycia will not be in command as she was when Avalar was lost. Her guard will be down.”

“And Karaza will not be around to bar Kanis entry into the palace,” added Levitor. “Do you think the sister can be counted on to kill the queen and seize power?”

“Our task is to ensure it,” smiled Maraton. “Kanis is not a mage. I think we can safely put her under our spells without detection. That way if she changes her mind, she will be powerless to refuse our commands, although I suspect that she will eagerly jump at the chance to seize control of Elvangar.”

“Which leaves us with finding a way to eliminate Avalar and the princesses before they return from the land of the humans,” summarized Levitor.

“Exactly,” replied Maraton. “When the time comes, it might be wise to suggest that the king take his most loyal soldiers with him. That will get them away from Morada. There will be many ways to prevent his return. Each of us can easily sink a ship. No on need be any wiser about his fate.”

“How do we stand with the Council of Elders?” asked Salfour.

“Less than half support peace at any price,” frowned Levitor. “I spoke with Amber this morning. He is afraid that a vote right now would give Avalar the backing that he needs.”

“But Avalar is not sure,” interjected Maraton. “If I read the king properly, Avalar will want to be sure of the votes before forcing the issue. We have some time left yet to woo a few more members of the council.”

“We need to inspire more demonstrations by the citizens,” suggested Salfour. “Perhaps we should bring in some people from the outlying villages to bolster the ranks.”

“An excellent idea,” nodded Maraton. “We need to make sure that Avalar thinks the vote is too close to pursue. Then when we have all of the votes lined up as we want them, we call off the demonstrations.”

* * *

Avalar, King of the Elves, walked into the throne room. He saw Queen Alycia leaning on the railing at the edge of the room and walked over to stand beside her.

“Dwelling on the past again?” Avalar asked softly. “It is important to learn from our mistakes, but it is not wise to dwell upon what cannot be changed.”

“Avalar,” the queen smiled brightly, “look below. I was dwelling on the past a bit, but not how you think I was. Look at our daughters playing with Tamar and his friend.”

Avalar gazed down to the ground below the Royal Tree. He grinned as he watched his daughters practicing their swordsmanship against the two army officers.

“That is not exactly playing,” chuckled the king. “They are practicing their fighting skills. I asked Tamar to personally instruct them.”

“Practicing?” questioned the queen. “But they are laughing and having fun. I have been watching them for some time.”

“They are enjoying it,” Avalar smiled with a nod. “We have two very special daughters, Alycia. We should be very proud of what they did with their lives after the accident. They will make fine leaders some day.”

“I am proud of them,” Alycia smiled tautly. “But every time I think of them growing up in the human world, I berate myself for failing to find them. My thoughts always return to the day they confronted me in this very room. I am ashamed of the queen that I had become. I do not deserve to have such fine daughters any more than I still deserve to be your queen. I let all of you down.”

“It is not your fault,” soothed the king. “Karaza had you under his spell. Do not dwell upon it. Enjoy the girls while you can.”

“While I can?” echoed the queen as she turned to face her husband with a frown etched upon her face. “You make that sound as if it will not last long. Why are you teaching them fighting skills? Surely you do not expect them to join the army that will be going to aid the humans?”

“I have no such thing planned,” sighed Avalar, “but I have come to know our daughters rather well. They will want to go to the aid of their friends, whether I allow it or not.”

“You must forbid it,” the queen stated adamantly. “They must never be allowed to come into harm’s way again.”

“Forbid it?” the king shook his head. “As if I could forbid them anything. You had them in mage cells, and still they escaped, not just from this city, but from Elvangar itself. I do not doubt that they have the cunning to escape again if they so wish to. I will not take the chance that I can keep them safe from danger. I fully intend to see that they are trained in all of the arts, military as well as magical. While I will try to reason with them to keep them safe, I want them prepared to face the worst.”

“I don’t want to lose them again,” the queen frowned as her eyes dampened. “Perhaps if they were married?”

“I am not going there,” chuckled the king. “It will take special men to please our princesses, and special men are just as apt to follow them off to battle as restrain them here in Elvangar. There will be no arrangements regarding their betrothals. That decision will be left to them individually.”

“It was just a thought,” Alycia smiled with a twinkle in her eye. “How did your meeting go?”

“Not well,” frowned Avalar. “I spoke with Volox about the mood of the Council of Elders. He thinks the vote is too close to call right now.”

“Volox?” questioned the queen. “Why did you not discuss it with Malid? He is the Head Elder after all.”

“Malid may indeed be the Head Elder,” nodded the king, “but I trust the judgment of Volox more. He was one of those who saw through Karaza’s deceit. That gives me confidence in his judgment.”

“I understand,” agreed the queen, “but you need the support of Malid. Do not alienate him by going around him.”

“I will also solicit Malid’s views,” declared the king, “but I will go to Volox when I want the unvarnished truth. Malid would try to curry favor with me and tell me that everything is going along just fine. That is not what I need to hear right now. I need to honestly gauge the dissent among the Council.”

“And this dissent is strong?” inquired Alycia.

“It is,” nodded the king. “The Council of Elders is almost evenly split between aiding the humans and staying out of the war. I must find a way to bring around the dissenting half.”

“You feel strongly about this, don’t you?” asked the queen.

“Very strongly,” nodded Avalar. “I was imprisoned on the Island of Darkness for many years. I lived with the nightly screams as those fiends tortured humans and elves alike. They are truly evil, Alycia. This world must rid itself of the likes of Vand.”

“And the humans cannot accomplish this on their own?” questioned the queen. “Vand is one of them after all.”

“Do not blame the humans for Vand,” cautioned Avalar. “That is what some in the Council are trying to do. It is a false premise. Vand is a product of Dobuk and has been around since the time of Kieran. Dobuk could just as easily have seduced an elf for the role of spoiler. He chose a human.”

“Still,” pushed Alycia, “that is not the fault of the elves. If Vand were one of us, would we not try to take care of him ourselves? Why not leave the war to the humans?”

“They are not capable of defeating Vand,” answered the king. “Until just recently the humans were a fractious lot, split into numerous countries and further split into tribes and clans within those countries. It is an amazing testament to Kaltara that the humans are even working together on this problem. They cannot defeat Vand without the help of the elves.”

“You sound so sure of this,” frowned the queen, “but I worry that the humans will turn against us in the end. That thought frightens me more than Vand.”

“It should not frighten you,” comforted the king. “I have met the human rulers. I like them. They are selfless and true believers of Kaltara. If anything happens after the defeat of Vand, I suspect it will be a rekindling of the old alliance when elf and human coexisted as allies and trading partners. I would like to see that.”

“That is if Vand is indeed defeated,” responded the queen. “What makes you so sure that the elves will make the difference when the war begins?”

“I don’t know that we will make the difference,” frowned the king. “I do know this, however. If we stay out of the war and Vand wins, it will not be long before his armies arrive in Elvangar. The elves have a far better chance of survival by aligning with the Torak before the war starts, and that is what we are going to do.”

“You hope,” retorted the queen. “The Council of Elders may disappoint you.”

“The Council of Elders may indeed disappoint me,” conceded Avalar, “but the elves are still going to war.”

“You would dare to overrule the Council of Elders?” the queen asked with disbelief.

“I am the King of the Elves,” stated Avalar. “As such, I, and only I, have the right to declare war. While it is customary for the Council of Elders to concur, I can override their dissent.”

“That would be wrong, Avalar,” cautioned the queen. “The people would not stand for it. There would be riots in the street. You would be overthrown.”

“Perhaps,” conceded the king, “but not before our armies left Elvangar in support of the humans. If the price of defeating Vand is my life and my throne, then that is the price that I will pay. It is the right thing to do, Alycia. I cannot stand by and merely watch as Vand’s evil spreads across the world. I will not hide behind the Gates of Elvangar and wait for his armies to arrive. I will not allow my people to suffer under his rule, even if the majority of them are ignorant of the consequences.”

Alycia stood in shock as she listened to her husband’s impassioned speech. While technically correct, Avalar’s proposal would create a firestorm of protest. Finally, she smiled and hugged her husband.

“Perhaps you need to say those very words publicly,” suggested the queen. “At first I was concerned about your approach, but your honest passion about this matter shines through. The people might rally around you.”

“They might,” nodded the king, “but it is a last resort. I am content for the moment to let the system work as it should. We need that time to prepare the army in any event.”

“Am I intruding?” came a voice from the other side of the throne room.

The king whirled around and saw his uncle Garl, Head of the Society of Mages. He smiled and waved the old man over.

“You are never an intrusion, Garl,” smiled the king. “How are you doing with the reorganization of the Society of Mages?”

“It is progressing,” replied the old mage. “I have been absent for so long that most of the faces are new to me. Karaza ruled with a fair amount of secrecy. That worries me.”

“Why?” asked Queen Alycia.

“It indicates that he might have been hiding more than just his designs on the throne,” answered the king.

“Precisely,” agreed Garl. “And I do not know who I can trust in the Society. It may take me a while to get things sorted out.”

“Do you think there might be others that were conspiring with Karaza?” asked Alycia.

“I cannot be sure,” admitted the Head Mage. “Karaza was the type of person who tried to use everyone, but he would often pit people against others. Some may have been helping him unknowingly. Those I am not worried about. What I need to find are those who were willing accomplices, if any exist.”

“If they do exist,” shrugged the king, “they will likely burrow deep for a while to avoid detection.”

“Perhaps,” replied Garl, “but your call to war may prove to be too great a temptation for them. It may force them into the open.”

“Are you suggesting that some of them might seek to carry on with Karaza’s obsession, even with him gone?” questioned the king

“We cannot discount that possibility,” nodded Garl. “The Society of Mages houses many very powerful magicians. You should never underestimate the amount of trouble that they can cause you.”

“How will you discover who is friend and who is foe?” asked the queen.

“It will not be easy,” answered Garl. “The mages are extremely intelligent by nature. Those who wish to hide their true feelings will do so well enough. They will particularly avoid saying anything derogatory in my presence.”

“You need some spies to work for you,” offered Queen Alycia.

King Avalar turned and looked at his wife curiously. Slowly, a smile spread across his face.

“How are the magic lessons going with Alahara and Alastasia?” he asked Garl.

“They are exceptional students,” replied Garl. “I only wish that I had more time to offer them.”

“And how do most of the mages in the society feel about the miraculous return of the lost princesses?” quizzed the king.

“There were many questions at first,” answered Garl. “I finally posted Kieran’s prophecies for everyone to read. That answered most of the questions. No one doubts their validity, if that is what you are asking.”

“Not exactly the question I had in mind,” smiled the king. “I have a proposal for the Head of the Society of Mages.”

“Your proposals are always welcome,” Garl replied. “What would you have me do?”

“Accept Princess Alahara and Princess Anastasia into the Society of Mages,” answered the king.

“Into the Society of Mages?” echoed Garl. “They are extremely talented, but this is most irregular. They have the potential to be great mages, but they are inexperienced. They would be ostracized by the other mages. That would be nothing but trouble for the royal family. You do not need that stress at this time. When they have proved they have the proper experience and knowledge, it will be my pleasure to induct them into the Society of Mages.”

“I want the princesses to learn as much magic as they can absorb,” stated the king. “Your time is limited with the reorganization of the Society of Mages. There is no reason that they should not have access to a multitude of teachers.”

“The Society of Mages is not an educational institute,” retorted Garl. “Avalar, you know that I support you in everything you do, but this is destroying a unique organization that dates back to the days of Kieran. I cannot do such a thing.”

“Why are we discussing this now?” asked Queen Alycia. “Is not the mood of the Council of Elders more important? Why get off on a tangent regarding our daughters?”

“Because our daughters have a wealth of experience in discovering the true nature of others,” explained the king. “While they are learning magic from the country’s greatest mages, they will also be learning exactly who these mages are and where they stand. It is a task that Garl cannot accomplish by himself. It is a perfect solution to a complex problem.”

“I see where you are going with this,” nodded Garl. “Each and every point you make is valid. Your daughters have an uncanny sense regarding the nature of people. They instinctively know whom they can trust and whom they cannot. It is so pronounced that I often think of studying it to see if their abilities are magical in nature. Of course, that study is not something that I wish to do at the moment. My task list is full enough now with the reorganization of the Society of Mages.”

“Your plan is brilliant,” Queen Alycia smiled at her husband.

“Brilliant from a logical standpoint,” conceded Garl, “but they are still not eligible for membership in the Society of Mages. They must become accomplished mages first. Then they can apply for membership.”

“But you are currently reorganizing the Society of Mages,” grinned Alycia. “What better time in history to initiate a new type of membership?”

“New type of membership?” frowned Garl.

“Precisely,” Avalar nodded vigorously. “Call it a junior membership if you will, but create a new level of membership for promising students. Propose the idea to the members of the Society of Mages as a way to cultivate future members. Do not mention the princesses by name, but make the proposal generic for all young mages who show exceptional promise.”

“Hmm,” murmured Garl as he rolled the idea around in his head. “Many of the members of the Society of Magic would love to have young students that they can strut before, but I fear that they would tire of the obligation to teach after a while.”

“Make the teaching part of it voluntary,” suggested the king. “Let the members strut and pump up their pride. I would wager that Alahara and Alastasia will convince enough of the mages to tutor them. You should not underestimate my daughters, Garl.”

“I do not underestimate them,” grinned Garl. “They think much like their father and have their mother’s beauty. I will propose your idea to the Society of Mages. I will set a small number for potential junior members, no more than six from the whole country. I will leave the nominating up to the members, so you may need to flex some muscle to get the princesses nominated.”

“I will not be obvious about promoting my daughters for membership,” promised the king, “but I will make sure that their names are on the tips of the tongues of some of your members.”

“Then we have a plan,” smiled Queen Alycia.

“We have a plan,” nodded Garl. “I will propose the junior memberships this afternoon.”

Chapter 4

For God and Country

In southwestern Khadora along the Macara River, two rows of soldiers lined the long road leading to the Rican clan estate. The silver accents of their forest green uniforms glistened in the morning sunlight. Lord Padro, lord of the Rican clan, waited for his guests to arrive on the porch of the estate mansion. His mind wandered as he rehearsed the plan that he would present to the other lords.

Eventually, brilliant streaks of sunlight alerted the lord to movement near the road that ran past the estate. Lord Rican’s eyes rose to see the reflections from the polished pikes of the soldiers nearest the main road. The two rows of soldiers stiffened as a small army turned off the main road onto the smaller road leading to the mansion. Lord Rican nodded in confirmation as he recognized the blue and black colors of the Seth clan.

Turning to the marshal beside him, Lord Rican spoke, “Lord Sydar and the Seth have arrived. Make sure that their host squad is well prepared to accept them.”

“They are prepared,” assured Marshal Juan as he waved a signal to one of the squads stationed nearby.

Twenty Rican soldiers immediately straightened and moved to stand before the estate mansion. Their task would be to host the visiting delegation from the Seth clan. In peaceful times, this duty was considered an honor, but in Khadoran history, few times have ever been truly peaceful, and those few times seldom lasted long. The host soldiers were meant to ensure that the visiting soldiers were carefully watched during their brief stay.

Lord Padro looked up with surprise as he noticed a change of color near the main road. The blue and black uniforms suddenly gave way to uniforms of red and white.

“Lord Woroman and the Disina clan are here as well,” he stated to the marshal. “They must have traveled here together.”

“Does that surprise you?” asked Marshal Juan as he signaled the other host squad to get ready.

“In a way it does,” admitted the Rican lord. “Lord Sydar and Lord Woroman are neighbors, but they have never been particularly fond of each other. The fact that they are arriving together means that they have already discussed the reason for their trip here today.”

“And yet they still came,” remarked the marshal. “That bodes well for your plan.”

The Rican lord pondered silently for several moments before nodding, “It does indeed. If my plan did not have merit, neither one of them would have showed up. This will be an historic day.”

Within moments Lord Sydar reached the steps of the mansion. The host squad efficiently held the horses while the visitors dismounted. Lord Sydar climbed the steps of the mansion without an escort. Lord Rican smiled broadly at the gesture.

“Welcome to my home,” smiled Lord Padro. “I see that Lord Woroman is right behind you. Shall we wait for him?”

“We shall,” nodded Lord Sydar.

The Khadoran lords waited in silence as the first host squad ushered off the horses and escorted the Seth soldiers to an area where they could relax and eat. Rican servants hurried to groom and feed the horses and bring food and drink for the visiting soldiers.

By the time the Seth soldiers had left the steps of the mansion, Lord Woroman and his Disina escort had arrived. Their host squad also acted efficiently, and soon Lord Woroman had also climbed the small flight of steps without an escort. Lord Padro smiled and greeted the second lord and then led his two guests to the meeting room.

“I take it from your arrival together,” opened Lord Padro, “that you two have already discussed my proposal?”

“To some degree,” confirmed Lord Sydar. “While we concur that our new emperor is leading us down a dangerous path, we do not see the benefit of trying to fight him.”

“Yet you came anyway?” questioned Lord Padro.

“We will give you the opportunity to explain the benefits to us,” answered Lord Woroman.

“We agree that the Chula are our enemy,” interjected Lord Sydar. “You will get no argument from us about that, but to go against the emperor is extremely dangerous. It is said that he has unique ways of dealing with those who get in his way.”

“The point is, Lord Padro,” added Lord Woroman, “we are not prepared to stick our necks out for the chopping block.”

“Are you prepared to accept the Chula as your equals?” retorted Lord Padro. “Are you willing to bow before their radical god, Kaltara? Are you willing to cede land to the savages? Land that is rightfully yours to conquer?”

“If we were,” sighed Lord Sydar, “would we be here?”

“We are willing to listen to your plan, Lord Padro,” interjected Lord Woroman. “That is why we are here. Show us how we can fight these reforms, and you will have cohorts.”

“Provided that your plan does not cost us our lives or estates,” added Lord Sydar.

“Fair enough,” nodded Lord Padro. “Please, sit.”

The three lords sat at one end of the long table in the meeting room. Servants brought in refreshments, and the lords discussed trivial matters until the servants had left.

“Emperor Marak is well known for unique ways of quieting dissent,” Lord Padro began, “as one of you said earlier, but he is also determined to rule according to the law. I believe that is his weakness. As long as we stay within the bounds of the law, he will be frustrated in his attempts to squash our dissent.”

“What can we do in a legal sense?” asked Lord Sydar. “The emperor has made it law that the Chula are to be regarded as allies. He has made it law that our armies must report to Khadoratung for training. He has made it law that our estate borders are frozen in place. What is the sense of ruling a clan these days when all of the decisions are handed down by Khadoratung?”

“You bring up interesting points,” conceded Lord Padro. “Allow me to address them. I think we should graciously accept the training offered by the emperor. It costs us nothing, and it teaches our army the methods of our potential adversary. I see the training as a plus.”

“But our officers are becoming influenced by those who train them,” objected Lord Sydar.

“Not just the officers,” Lord Woroman shook his head. “Even the ordinary soldiers come back from Khadoratung singing the praises of their teachers. For our armies to be efficient, they must not look upon our enemies with favor.”

“Soldiers are impressionable,” shrugged Lord Padro. “Their minds can be conditioned just as easily as the minds of servants. I am sure that we can find troops loyal to us that will visit each other’s estates and tell tales of how bad the trainers in Khadoratung really are. Peppered with enough truth to be believable, they can spread horror stories of the inadequacies of the trainers. Besides, our goal is not necessarily to fight the rest of the Khadoran clans. It is to change the foolish laws that this new emperor has foisted upon us. Perhaps we can even be successful in removing the emperor so he cannot cause any more harm to our clans.”

“What about the Chula?” asked Lord Sydar.

“Ah, yes,” Lord Padro nodded thoughtfully. “A particularly sticky point for those us who share borders with the barbarians. The law says that the Chula are now allies of Khadora. So what? Have none of us ever had war with allies before? If an ally attacks you, are you not justified in attacking back? And could anyone really expect a victorious clan not to annex those conquered lands into his own estate? If the Chula attack us, they will be the ones who broke the law, not us.”

“So attacking the Chula is not really out of the question,” summarized Lord Woroman. “We just have to make it look like the Chula started it.”

“Precisely,” smiled Lord Padro, “but let us not dwell so much on the warfare aspect of this struggle. Our goal is to return Khadora to the way it used to be. That means removing Marak or making it so his power is ineffectual. I think we can accomplish this through the Assembly of Lords.”

“You mean to debate it?” Lord Sydar asked with shock. “The first lord to stand before that body and criticize the emperor will be branded as a renegade. It would be safer to just handle things here on our own.”

“I disagree with your last statement,” Lord Padro shook his head. “I have laid out ways to get around the laws, but if we merely disregard the laws as things are now, Marak will concentrate his efforts on us. I do not want that kind of attention. You said that the first lord to criticize the government would draw the wrath of the emperor. I think you are positively correct in that assumption.”

“You are contradicting yourself,” frowned Lord Sydar. “Either way we draw attention to ourselves, but you still propose doing it through the Assembly of Lords?”

“In a fashion,” grinned Lord Padro. “I think we should band together and fight this through the Assembly of Lords, but I did not say that we should be the first to bring the issue up.”

“I am confused,” sighed Lord Woroman. “Explain what your plan is.”

“I propose to have a clan start a discussion about the unfairness of these new laws,” explained Lord Padro. “It will not be one of us who starts it, but as soon as it is started, we will immediately join the chorus of those protesting. Once that discussion is fully engaged, there will already be enough doubt about the validity of the new laws. Should one of us, or another clan, then be attacked by the Chula, who then can blame the ensuing fight on us?”

“I see where you are going with this,” Lord Sydar nodded with appreciation, “but what clan would be foolish enough to be the first to speak before the Assembly of Lords?”

“I can think of four clans that would be prime candidates for such a plan,” smiled Lord Padro. “The Vessi, Glamaraldi, Lejune, and Pikata clans come to mind.”

“The four clans that hosted the Jiadin warriors?” asked Lord Woroman.

“Exactly,” nodded Lord Padro. “Of course as soon as they speak, many will write them off as being sore losers in their battle with Emperor Marak, but if we immediately jump in and agree with their complaint before the bickering begins, the complaints will appear to be valid.”

“You have given this a lot of thought,” complimented Lord Sydar. “Seven clans from opposite ends of the country banding together to voice complaints that may very well be common to many other clans. It just might work.”

“Especially if we can get others to jump in with us,” added Lord Padro. “We should not speak loudly about this plan to others just yet, but we should visit with other lords to see where their feelings lie. When it comes time to spring the attack, we will know which lords are likely to support us. We can prime those individual lords to quickly step in and support the complaints.”

“How do we do that without revealing the plan?” asked Lord Woroman.

“Talk to other lords,” suggested Lord Padro. “Just casual conversation at first until you learn where their sympathies lie. If they seem like they might be supportive, mention that you would consider voting against these laws if you ever had the chance. See what their reactions are. We do not need to actually speak of this particular plan to anyone. We just need to get other lords to promise to vote against the laws if given the chance. Leave the rest to me.”

“What will you do?” asked Lord Sydar.

“I am going to journey to the four clans that we talked about,” answered Lord Padro. “It will be just a neighborly visit to see if they need any help getting their estates back in order. Once I am invited in, I will sew the seeds of dissent and arrange for one of them to ignite the spark.”

* * *

The Imperial Guard marched along the corridor and halted in front of the guards outside the entrance to the Emperor’s suite. The two guards nodded perfunctorily and opened the door. The Imperial Guard marched into the office and halted in front of the Emperor’s desk. Emperor Marak looked up and smiled.

“How do you get away with impersonating an Imperial Guard?” asked the Emperor.

“Marshal Chack and I have come to an understanding,” grinned Fisher. “If he allows me to wear the uniform of an Imperial Guard, I promise not to assassinate any more emperors.”

“Well, that is a relief,” chuckled Marak. “What do you have to report?”

“I am concerned about the Island of Darkness,” admitted the spy. “Now that we know that Aakuta is the one who has been communicating with us, we can have a fair amount of confidence in the reports. The problem is, he has not been communicating since the rescue of the elf king.”

“Do you think he was killed by Vand?” asked the Emperor.

“No,” Fisher shook his head, “at least not yet. After a long period of silence, he finally did communicate recently. He had little to say except for apologizing for his absence. He also set up a keyword as verification that the communication is from him. That concerns me greatly.”

“Why?’ questioned the Torak.

“Because it indicates that he is in some kind of trouble,” explained Fisher. “I tried to put myself in his position to better understand his lack of communications and his recent message.”

“And what conclusions did you come to?” prompted the Emperor.

“He is either close to discovery,” declared Fisher, “or he is close to death. Either would do. He is also concerned about others using an air tunnel to impersonate him. Perhaps they would try to spread false information.”

“To what end?” inquired Marak

“I can think of many uses for disinformation,” shrugged Fisher. “If I was in Vand’s position, I could give you an early date for the invasion and then have my spies watch to see what your reaction is. I would then change my plans accordingly. Or I might give you a later date for the invasion and strike early. The possibilities are endless.”

“So I see,” frowned Emperor Marak. “From what HawkShadow and Rhoda told me of their escape from the Island of Darkness, I have no doubt that Aakuta’s life is in danger. He is a courageous man to stay on that island.”

“He has already accepted his death,” nodded Fisher. “I only hope it is swift in coming when it finally arrives.”

“You are telling me this for an explicit reason, Fisher,” Marak said. “What is it?”

“I think we need another set of eyes and ears on that island,” declared Fisher. “We can no longer depend on Aakuta as our sole source of information.”

“And just who would you suggest that we send to their death?” questioned the Emperor.

“I have never been one to offer up the life of another,” stated Fisher. “I think that I should go myself.”

“Out of the question,” Marak shook his head. “You are vital to my needs here. I just cannot afford to lose your services, Fisher.”

“You cannot afford to be blind as to what is happening there either,” countered Fisher. “There is no one capable of performing that task besides me.”

“Aakuta is still in the game as far as we know,” replied the Emperor. “Let’s discuss this again when he no longer contacts us. For now, I would be lost without your eyes and ears right here in Khadora.”

“You sound as if you are expecting trouble,” frowned Fisher. “I have not picked up anything of that nature. What troubles you?”

“What troubles me?” echoed the Emperor. “I really do not know, Fisher, but something is gnawing at me. Perhaps it is the fact that nothing seems to be going wrong. If I was Vand, I would be trying to create all sorts of chaos to keep us off guard, yet everything is running smoothly. What does that suggest to you?”

“That we are missing something,” nodded Fisher. “I have been feeling that way myself, but I guess I have not dwelled upon it. You are right. Vand should be up to something, especially after the rescue of the elf king.”

“I want you to find out what we are missing, Fisher,” instructed Emperor Marak. “I know that is asking you to do the impossible, but if anyone can do it, you can.”

“I will do my best,” offered the spy. “I will be gone from Khadoratung for some time. When is the best time to contact you?”

“Early morning or around the evening meal,” suggested the Emperor, “but if you need to contact me at other times, do so. I want to know what you find out.”

Fisher nodded and left the office. Marak stared blankly at the closed door for a while, his mind lost in thought. Eventually the door opened and a guard stuck his head in. The Emperor nodded and waved dismissively as he rose from his desk. It was time for the meeting of the Lords’ Council.

Marak left his office and proceeded to the chambers of the Lords’ Council. An extra chair had been brought to the table in anticipation of his arrival, and the Emperor sat down. Lord Chenowith was chairing the meeting, and he began as soon as the Emperor was seated.

“This is an historic moment for our country,” Lord Chenowith began. “I was notified this morning that Khadora is now completely slave free. For the first time in the history of our country, there is not a single slave within the boundaries of Khadora.”

Murmurs of accomplishment rippled around the table. The lords were pleased.

“Where do we stand on resolution of border agreements?” asked Lord Patel.

“Over ninety percent of clan borders have been officially agreed to,” answered Lord Chenowith. “Most of the remaining disputes are between two rival clans and each clan has agreed to resolution of the problem by the Lords’ Council.”

“What cases will be left unresolved?” asked Lord Kiamesh.

“Cases that involve borders with the Chula,” replied Lord Chenowith. “That is one of the reasons that I have asked the Emperor to join us today. I am hopeful that he can lead a delegation to the Chula to help solve these last problems. Emperor?”

“I will need to review each border dispute before discussing them with the Chula,” answered the Emperor. “As you are all aware, Khadoran seizures of Chula territory have been a problem for centuries. There is no record of the Chula ever seizing Khadoran land. The Chula will be reticent to give up land that they believe is theirs.”

“You can’t just ask each estate to forfeit what they believe to be their land,” frowned Lord Quilo. “That would not sit well with the Assembly of Lords.”

“I am aware of that,” nodded the Emperor. “That is why I want to review each dispute first. I have little doubt that most of those claims will be outright attempts to claim Chula land as the borders are officially set, but I want to look for valid claims first.”

“How will you tell the difference?” asked Lord Quilo.

“I will ask the Chula,” replied Emperor Marak.

“That’s it?” frowned Lord Quilo. “You will just take the side of Chula? What does that say about your Khadoran lords?”

“I think it is clear what it says,” answered the Emperor. “I have first hand experience dealing with Chula boundary disputes. If Khadorans have any type of claim at all to the disputed land, I expect the Chula to honestly tell me so. I wish I could say the same about my Khadoran brothers, but we all know that is not possible. Maybe someday it will be possible, but that day has not yet arrived.”

“So all of the disputed claims will be disallowed?” asked Lord Chenowith.

“I did not say that,” replied the Emperor. “I fully expect the Chula to recognize the situation that I am in. I believe that they will give up some of the disputed land to ensure peace with the Khadorans, especially in cases where any type of validity can be attached to a claim.”

“You have a lot of faith in the honesty of the Chula, don’t you?” asked Lord Patel.

“I do,” nodded the Emperor. “When one considers that this entire country used to belong to them, one can understand their hesitancy to give up more of it, but they are also a practical people. What they desire most is to halt the incursion into their lands. I am confident that some small portions of land will be forfeited to achieve that goal.”

“I want to meet the leaders of the Chula,” declared Lord Chenowith. “I want to speak with the people that you think so highly of. Can you arrange that?”

Emperor Marak remained silent for a long time. He wondered how these high lords would react to being in a Chula village. How would they react to a Chula shaman who had the face of a lion? He remembered his trip with Axor through Fakara, and how the Fakarans received the Chula shaman. Initially there had been fear, but the Fakarans grew to accept the shaman. Slowly, he nodded and smiled.

“I think it is time for all of you to meet the Chula,” smiled Emperor Marak. “Some things about our neighbors will amaze you because they are so different; other things will amaze you particularly because you will find that they have many of the same thoughts as you have. They are like us in many ways, yet very different in others. You should be informed about your new allies. I will see to it.”

The lords looked at Marak suspiciously for a moment, but Lord Chenowith chuckled at the Emperor’s ability to leave things unsaid and continued with the meeting.

“The Emperor’s edict regarding temples to the god Kaltara is well under way,” he continued. “Each major city in Khadora now has a temple to Kaltara, although those temples remain unused. Would the Emperor care to tell us what he has planned for them?”

“This is probably the hardest part of my reforms,” admitted the Emperor, “but it is also one of the most crucial. Whether or not you understand it, Kaltara guides our fate. The great battles that are about to befall us will be a battle between good and evil, between Kaltara and Dobuk.”

“Dobuk is the god that Vand follows?” asked Lord Jamarat.

“Dobuk is the Great Demon,” corrected Marak, “but yes, that is who is driving Vand and his minions. Khadorans must learn that we are fighting for more than just ourselves. We are fighting for Kaltara and all that is good in this world. Our enemies are strong and powerful, but Kaltara will aid us if we ask him to.”

“Can’t you ask Kaltara to aid us?” asked Lord Jamarat. “I heard that he talks to you.”

“He does,” smiled Emperor Marak, “and He does help me. Look at the remarkable path my life has taken, from the son of a slave to the Emperor of this great country. Kaltara has guided me all of the way, but should he aid thousands upon thousands of others who do not even believe in him? I want all of our people to know Kaltara. I want all of our people praying to Kaltara for help with the coming struggle. Can any of you tell me how to accomplish this?”

Most of the lords had blank stares on their faces, but Lord Chenowith was smiling. Emperor Marak looked at the Walkan lord with curiosity.

“To many people in Khadora,” Lord Chenowith volunteered, “this Lords’ Council is the most respected body in the world. To untold thousands of Khadorans our new Emperor is the hero of legends. I think the answer to your problem, Emperor Marak, lies within this room. We set the example for how we want our citizens to behave. If we want them to believe in Kaltara, then we must believe in Kaltara.”

“And if our Emperor believes in Kaltara,” Lord Jamarat quickly added, “then I want to believe in Kaltara. How do we learn?”

Emperor Marak grinned at the simple solution presented to him by the lords. He rose from his chair and addressed the Lords’ Council.

“I suggest that we immediately retire to the newly built temple in this city,” declared Emperor Marak. “There I will introduce you to Kaltara.”

Chapter 5

The Voice of Kaltara

Emperor Marak led the members of the Lords’ Council into the new Temple of Kaltara in Khadoratung. While the temple had been constructed quickly, the workmanship was impeccable. The temple was built from plans provided by the Qubari. The lords gazed around with appreciation as the Emperor led them to the prayer chamber.

“I should have visited sooner,” remarked Lord Patel. “This is an exquisite structure. Is it true that it is modeled after the one in Angragar?”

“It is an exact replica,” nodded the Emperor as he halted outside the prayer chamber and opened the door. “This chamber has no windows. I normally do not bother with a torch, but I think one is appropriate for this visit. Take one in with you, Lord Patel.”

Lord Patel took a torch from a holder outside the chamber and carried it inside. The other lords followed, and the Emperor entered last and closed the door. The chamber was large and circular. Marak walked to Lord Patel and took the torch from his hand. He placed it in a wall sconce and returned to the center of the room.

“Let us kneel and hold hands,” suggested the Emperor.

The lords formed a circle with the Emperor and knelt down. Most of the lords were slightly anxious about being in the temple, as religion had never been an important part of Khadoran life. They didn’t know how to act, and Emperor Marak sympathized with them. It was not long ago that he had those very same feelings himself.

“Kaltara,” Emperor Marak began, “I have brought the Lords’ Council of Khadora with me today to learn about you. They are to help me spread the word about you so that all Khadorans might praise you.”

“Welcome to my home, Torak,” boomed a voice. “Your heart is in the right place, but I question your methods.”

“I do not understand,” frowned the Emperor.

“The people must have faith in me,” replied the voice.

“I know,” replied Marak as he noticed the other lords staring at him in a curious manner, “that is why we have come.” Fearing that the others were being left out, Marak asked, “Am I the only one hearing your voice?”

“You are, Torak,” replied the voice. “If I speak to every citizen of Khadora, and they listen, that does not constitute faith. Oh, they may tremble at my voice and do what I wish for a time, but that is not what I seek. The people must believe in me, and that is your task.”

“I understand,” frowned Marak, “but I am not a priest. I seek your help in this matter. At least help me get things started. The Lords’ Council is critical for my efforts to defeat Vand. These men have come here willingly to learn about you. Help me teach them.”

The lords were frowning as they listened to the Emperor carry on a conversation as if he were talking to someone, but the chamber was silent except for Marak’s words. Doubt began to creep into their minds, even though they had the highest regard for the Emperor. Marak began to think he had made a grievous error.

“I will grant your request this one time,” the voice boomed so that everyone could hear.

Expressions of awe filled the faces of the members of the Lords’ Council as the lords finally realized that Kaltara did indeed exist.

“Has not the whole world heard the crack of the awakening of Angragar?” Kaltara continued. “The Sakovans heard it. The Qubari fell to their knees when they heard it. The Chula celebrated it, and Vand’s people trembled upon hearing it. Have the Khadorans been so long without faith that they do not know my hand when it strikes?”

Not a single person in the chamber spoke. The faces of the lords were open-mouthed, their eyes wide with sudden understanding.

“You have done well, Torak,” the voice continued. “I am pleased with the temples that you have built. Now you must fill them. Use these men that you regard so highly. Your time is very short. The evil comes soon. The Time of Cleansing is now upon you. Prepare to fight in my name.”

The torch blew out as a great gust of wind traveled around the circular chamber. High overhead, the darkness was split by a brilliant glow that illuminated the chamber, as the sun would have. The glow slowly began to fade, sending the chamber back towards the darkness. The lords let out a collective sigh as if they had all been holding their breath the entire time.

Without a word, the Emperor rose and retrieved the extinguished torch. He carried it as he moved to the door and opened it. Everyone filed out of the prayer chamber.

“I could never have imagined such an experience,” remarked Lord Chenowith when they had reassembled outside the prayer chamber. “I am glad that he chose to speak to us. I will be the first to admit that my doubt was growing in there.”

“Why did he call you the Torak?” asked Lord Jamarat.

“The time we live in was prophesized thousands of years ago,” explained Emperor Marak. “The rise of the Torak, the Star, and the Astor was foretold in those prophecies. Why I was chosen to be the Torak, I do not know, but it is something that I cannot turn away from.”

“And this Time of Cleansing?” asked Lord Quilo. “That is when this evil will come to fight us?”

“Exactly,” nodded the Emperor. “It will be soon. We have much to do to prepare for it. I will let you lords return to the palace,” he added after a pause, “I wish to inspect the temple alone.”

The lords nodded and proceeded out of the temple. The Torak walked blindly around the temple, supposedly on an inspection tour, but his mind was elsewhere. He was pleased that Kaltara had spoken to the lords, but he also realized that it was not likely to happen again. He still needed a way to get the Khadorans to revive their lost faith.

In his wanderings, the Torak ended up in the library. He was pleased to see that the shelves were lined with books. He suddenly stopped walking and stared at the section of the shelves that hid the secret doors in Angragar. With the urge of curiosity, he walked to the shelves and sought the secret lever. He was quite astonished when his hand came into contact with it. Looking around to ensure that no one was present, he pulled the lever. When the bookcase slid open, Marak slipped through the crack and pulled it closed. He shook his head in awe as he saw a single door in the hidden enclosure. Without a thought, he marched to the door and opened it. He stepped into the small enclosure and closed the door.

He cautiously opened the door and felt a coolness invade the small space. He exited the closet and walked to the spy hole behind the shelves. There was no one present in the library. He turned around and saw that two doors were behind him, the one he had just exited, and another. With a grin on his face, Emperor Marak released the catch on the bookshelf and walked into the library of the Chula temple. He closed the bookshelf and left the library.

A short distance away from the library was an office that was reserved for the priest. Marak walked to the office and peeked through the open door. A Chula shaman was in the room and his head immediately swiveled towards the door, his long mane swaying violently.

“Did I make too much noise looking in on you?” grinned Marak.

“You were silent as always,” grinned Ukaro as he crossed the room and hugged his son. “It is impossible to sneak up on a Chula shaman, though. We have a sense about things around us. How are you? Where are your shadows?”

“I am fine, Father,” answered Marak. “Halman and Gunta are still waiting for me outside the new temple in Khadoratung.”

“In Khadoratung?” the shaman frowned questioningly. “But how?”

“I am not sure myself,” shrugged Marak. “I was touring the new temple and found that one of the secret doors existed. I passed through it and came out here. There is now a second door in this temple.”

“Kaltara is aiding you,” smiled Ukaro. “It must be that you will have need for such travel.”

“I suppose,” frowned the Torak. “Something is bothering me, Father. I took the Lords’ Council to the prayer chamber in Khadoratung to meet Kaltara. He was reticent to speak to them, although he eventually did. How am I to convince others to follow Kaltara if He only speaks to me?”

“He does not only speak to you,” smiled Ukaro. “I think His hesitancy is that you may not demand that He speak to others. He will do so as He sees fit.”

“There is still the problem of convincing others,” sighed Marak. “I don’t know how to do it.”

“Stop worrying about it,” soothed Ukaro “Just do it. It will come to you. You must have faith in Kaltara before you can give it to others. He would not task you to a job without providing the skills necessary to finish it.”

“Alright,” nodded the Torak. “Your advice has always been good for me.”

“I see that you are making great progress with your Khadorans,” stated the Chula shaman. “We have noticed the difference already.”

“We have made progress,” replied the Torak, “but there is still more to do. One of the problems remaining has to do with the borders between the Chula and the Khadorans. Some lords have laid claims to Chula land.”

“That is to be expected of a people who have always sought our lands,” shrugged Ukaro. “What will you do about it?”

“I am not sure yet,” answered Marak. “I may ask the Chula to give up some lands to solve the problem. I will review each claim personally.”

“You have the right to do so,” frowned Ukaro, “but use it wisely. Such decisions could foster bitterness if not done carefully. The goal is to unite your peoples, not drive them apart.”

“I understand,” nodded Marak. “I should return to Khadoratung. Give my love to mother.”

“She will be sorry to have missed you,” Ukaro smiled warmly.

The Emperor returned to the library and passed through the secret doors to the temple in Khadoratung. Gunta and Halman were waiting anxiously outside the temple.

“At last,” sighed Gunta. “I do not care to be apart from you for so long.”

“If I am not safe in the temple of Kaltara,” smiled Emperor Marak, “where can I be safe?”

“Between Halman and me?” grinned Gunta.

“I always seem to get attacked when you two are around,” chuckled the Emperor. “We are returning to the palace where I also do not need your protection. You should take some time off for yourselves. Have a meal and rest a bit.”

“After you are safely inside the palace,” declared Halman.

Emperor Marak nodded, and the three Torak warriors walked from the temple to the palace. Marak’s shadows escorted him to his office and then left. The Emperor walked to the large wall map of Khadora and stared at it. He tried to envision the attack that Vand would throw at him, but he soon realized that looking at just Khadora prohibited him from seeing the whole story. He made a mental note to order a map of the land stretching from the ancient city of Angragar to the southernmost point of the Sakova. A knock on his door drew his attention, and he granted authorization to enter. An Imperial Guard entered and waited for permission to speak. Marak nodded.

“There is a merchant at the entrance to the palace that demands to speak to you,” declared the guard.

“A merchant?” frowned the Emperor. “Did he say what he wanted?”

“No,” the guard shook his head. “In fact, the guards are at a loss as to why he would wish to speak to the Emperor. He is not a well-known merchant that might sell goods to the palace. He runs a small stall in the marketplace. Should I turn him away?”

Marak stood silently for a moment, wondering if it might be an assassination attempt. Finally, he shook his head.

“No,” answered the Emperor. “Treat him with the same respect that you would extend to a lord. Bring him up to see me.”

The guard nodded and withdrew from the office. Marak walked to the window and gazed out at the city of Khadoratung. He knew the visitor would not be Fisher in one of his many disguises because he had already spoken to his spy. Marak subconsciously fingered the pouch that held his Sakovan stars while he waited for the knock on the door. He did not have to wait for long. The knock shattered the silence of the office, and the Emperor gave his approval for the merchant to enter.

Marak turned to face the door as a tall, lean man was shown in. The man’s face showed the strain of many years in the sun, but he was not yet old and frail. The man’s tunic was clean, but showed obvious evidence of many repairs. Marak surmised that the man’s stall was not very productive. The man bowed with respect, and the Emperor nodded for the guards to leave. The merchant waited for the doors to close before speaking.

“Thank you for seeing me,” the merchant bowed. “I am called Pialorta. I am but a small merchant in the marketplace here in Khadoratung.”

“Welcome, Pialorta,” smiled the Emperor as he walked behind his desk and waved at the chair before it. “Sit down and tell me what has brought you here today.”

The merchant moved hesitantly to the chair and finally sat down, but Marak could tell that the man was extremely uncomfortable in the presence of the Emperor.

“I truly do not understand why I am here,” confessed the merchant. “In fact, I was sure that I would be turned away when I asked to speak to you.”

“Then why did you try?” asked Emperor Marak.

The man chewed on his lower lip as he stared across the desk at the most powerful man in Khadora. His hands began to shake. Several silent moments passed between the two men before the merchant spoke haltingly.

“You will think me a fool, Emperor Marak,” the merchant began, “but I was instructed to speak to you.”

“Instructed by whom?” questioned the Emperor.

“By God,” the merchant swallowed hard. “I cannot explain this very well, but I was standing at my stall in the marketplace when suddenly I grew very dizzy. I shut my eyes to clear my vision and heard a booming voice inside my head. My eyes flew open and I was amazed at what I saw. It was not the busy stalls of the marketplace, but a lush green valley with animals frolicking in the meadow and a cool clear stream running before me. It was a most relaxing sight.”

“What did this voice say?” prompted the Emperor.

“He introduced himself as Kaltara,” the merchant continued, pleased that the Emperor had not immediately called the guards to have him evicted. “He told me that my merchant days were over. He said I had a higher calling in this life. He instructed me to visit the Emperor who was known to him as the Torak. I know that your clan name is Torak, so I assumed that you were indeed the Emperor that I was to seek. If not you, who could God have meant for me to speak to?”

“I am the Torak,” confirmed Marak. “Did Kaltara tell you what it is that you are supposed to do?”

“No,” the merchant shook his head. “I was too afraid to ask at first.”

“At first?” echoed the Emperor.

“Yes,” the merchant nodded vigorously. “I was afraid at first, but Kaltara took my fears away from me. After that point I found that I no longer cared what my task was to be. I knew that I would give up my stall and do whatever God asked me to do.”

“Are you a religious man?” asked the Emperor.

“I have never been before,” admitted Pialorta. “I have given as much thought to God as the average Khadoran, which is to say, none at all.”

“But you believe in Kaltara now because he spoke to you?” inquired the Torak.

“It was not just the words,” Pialorta shook his head. “It was much more than that. I felt Kaltara within me,” he added with reverence. “I want to run and shout to everyone in the marketplace, but that is not what I was instructed to do. I came immediately to the palace. What am I to do, Emperor Marak?”

The Emperor stared blankly at the merchant for a long time without answering. Pialorta appeared to have calmed down once his message had been delivered. He sat and waited patiently for the Emperor to speak. Finally, Marak grinned broadly at Pialorta.

“You know, don’t you?” asked the merchant. “I can see it in your face.”

“I do indeed understand,” smiled Marak as he rang the bell on his desk to summon the guards. “It was not long ago that I asked Kaltara for help. You, Pialorta, are that help.”

The guards entered the room with their swords drawn. Marak waved dismissively at them and said, “Send a tailor up here immediately.”

The guards withdrew and Pialorta looked questioningly at the Emperor.

“You shall have the chance to speak to the multitudes in the marketplace,” smiled the Torak. “You will speak to thousands of Khadorans about Kaltara, and you will explain how to worship him.”

“Me?” balked the merchant. “I do not understand.”

“You are to become the Priest of Kaltara here in Khadoratung,” declared the Emperor. “The new temple is ready to be filled with the voices of thousands of worshippers. You shall gather the faithless and teach them to become the faithful.”

Emperor Marak had expected the merchant to protest, but Pialorta merely sat with wide-open eyes, staring at the Emperor. Finally, he nodded.

“So it shall be,” Pialorta swallowed hard. “I knew it would not be an easy task, but I will do my best. Will Kaltara continue to guide me as I bring others to know Him?”

“Have faith,” smiled the Torak. “In the temple library are a multitude of books and scrolls. Many of them are replicas of those found in the ancient city of Angragar. Within those pages, you will learn much about Kaltara.”

“I will study them night and day,” promised the priest.

“I suspect that there will be other priests soon,” stated the Emperor. “Four other temples have been built in Khadora. When the priests arrive here, I shall bring them to the temple to meet with you.”

“I am most honored by your faith in me,” the priest said.

“My faith, like yours, is in Kaltara,” smiled the Emperor as a knock sounded on the door.

A tailor entered in response to Marak’s call. The Emperor had just sent the new priest off to be fitted with appropriate clothing when another knock sounded. Ophia entered the room and shut the door.

“We have just had a communication from StarCity,” announced the air mage. “The Star of Sakova wants to know if you can possibly come to visit.”

“When does she wish me to visit?” asked the Emperor.

“She would like you to be there now,” Ophia replied, “but she understands that you need time to travel.”

“Did she say what she wanted?” Marak frowned.

“She did not,” answered the air mage. “Her tone was different than normal. Her words were guarded. She was terse and refused my inquiries into the purpose of the trip.”

“Very well,” Marak said after a long moment of silence. “Go back up on the roof and contact Angragar. Do not mention the Sakovans, but cleverly discern if everything is all right there. I suspect that Lyra believes that our air tunnels have been compromised.”

“I understand,” nodded Ophia. “Should I alert our other mages that air tunnel communications might be monitored by the enemy?”

“No,” replied the Torak. “Any warning to our people must be accomplished by ordinary means. I cannot be sure of the Star’s reasons for secrecy, but the very fact that she thinks she needs to be concerned bothers me. I will go to StarCity and find out the reasons for her concern. Alert Gunta and Halman on your way to the roof. Tell them we are leaving for the Sakova.”

Ophia hurried out of the Emperor’s office. Marak stepped into his living quarters and removed the white garb of the Emperor of Khadora. He dressed in the black and silver colors of the Torak clan and strapped on his weapons. When Halman and Gunta arrived, Marak was once again the Lord of the Torak clan. Marak’s shadows knew they were heading into potential danger. They readied their own weapons while the Emperor waited for Ophia to return.

When the guards opened the door to admit the air mage, they saw the Emperor dressed in black. Their eyes grew large as they gazed upon the warrior emperor, but they kept their thoughts to themselves.

“I just had a pleasant conversation with the Qubari,” reported Ophia as she stared at the Torak. “I could not detect any hint of concern in their voices. What shall I do next?”

“Contact the Sakovans again,” instructed the Emperor. “Tell them that some of the Torak clan are closer to StarCity than we realized. Tell them to expect a delegation within the hour.”

Ophia looked curiously at the Emperor, but she knew better than to question the words of his message. She nodded her understanding and left the room.

“Within the hour?” questioned Gunta after the air mage had left the room. “You know something that you have not shared with Halman and me.”

“Many things,” grinned Marak. “Come with me and learn some of them.”

The Torak led his shadows out of the office and slipped out of the palace using the Emperor’s private entrance. Within minutes the trio entered the temple and made their way to the library. Halman and Gunta said nothing as Marak slipped the catch on the bookshelf and led them into the small area beyond.

“Just like Angragar,” Gunta nodded as Halman slid the bookshelf closed. “Let me go through first. Halman will come last.”

“It goes to the Chula temple,” warned the Torak. “We will not be entering their library.”

Gunta nodded and opened the door to the closet. He stepped in and closed the door. Marak waited several seconds before opening the door and stepping into the closet. He closed the door and reopened it, stepping out into the small area behind the bookshelves in the temple in Changragar. Seconds later Halman stepped out of the closet.

“Now through to Angragar?” asked Gunta.

Marak nodded and the trio repeated the procedure, coming out in the small area behind the bookshelves in Angragar.

“And on to StarCity,” instructed the Torak.

Gunta nodded once more and stepped through the door bearing the mark of the Star of Sakova. Within moments the three warriors were behind the bookshelves in StarCity. Gunta peered through the spy hole and observed the library. Lyra was standing in the center of the room ushering out the few people who had been using the library. Gunta waited for the Star of Sakova to close the doors to the library before releasing the catch that swiveled the bookshelves.

Gunta led the way into the library as Lyra stood staring at him. When Marak exited the small area, Lyra moved swiftly across the room and embraced him.

“I am glad to see you,” Lyra said softly as Marak hugged her. “How did you arrive so quickly? Were you already at Changragar?”

“There is a new door at Changragar, “ explained the Torak. “It leads to the temple in Khadoratung. Ophia sensed some urgency in your request. Have our air tunnels been compromised?”

“I do not know,” replied Lyra, “but I could not take the chance that they were compromised. We have something very important to discuss, and I do not want anyone to know about it before we discussed it.”

Chapter 6

Spy Holes

The Star of Sakova led the Torak and his shadows out of the library in StarCity. She led the way through the corridors of the Sakovan palace, sending Jostin to find StarWind and have her meet the group in her office. When everyone had entered the Star’s office, she closed the door and said nothing until StarWind arrived.

“StarWind,” Lyra began after the Sakovan spymaster ahd arrived, “I would like you to brief Emperor Marak on this situation. Leave nothing out.”

“Very well,” StarWind said. “Earlier today HawkShadow discovered a boy roaming around in the forest near the Wound of Kaltara. The Wound is a tremendous canyon that stretches for hundreds of leagues. It is impassable. The entire area around the Wound of Kaltara is desolate and uninhabited. HawkShadow captured the boy and discovered that he was close to death. He had abrasions covering his face, chest and legs. Several bones were broken. The boy incurred these wounds while climbing the Wall of Mermidion.”

“The huge cliffs along the coast?” interrupted Emperor Marak. “I thought they were unscalable?”

“For all intents they are,” replied StarWind. “The boy fell several times, but managed to stay alive long enough to reach the top.”

“Kaltara was surely with this boy,” interjected Lyra. “His name is Kenda.”

“His father should have a talk with the lad,” frowned the Torak, “but why are you telling me about him?”

“His father is dead,” frowned StarWind, “as is the entire population of Duran.”

Marak closed his eyes and sank onto one of the chairs before Lyra’s desk. StarWind waited while the Emperor composed himself. She knew exactly how he felt.

“I am sorry,” Marak finally said. “I suspect that I know where this story is going, but please continue, StarWind.”

“Your assumptions are correct, Emperor Marak,” nodded StarWind. “The boy described a vicious attack on the city of Duran. Half a dozen large ships carried warriors and mages in from the sea. From the description that Kenda gave, it appears that the Motangans used a magical fog to hide their approach. When the fog lifted, it dissipated instantly. The attack commenced at the same time. The Motangans showed no mercy. Every individual was struck down; buildings were searched and burned. The second wave to arrive was a group of mages. Kenda believes that they were brought ashore to search for survivors. The invaders’ intent was to leave no witnesses.”

“How was it that Kenda managed to escape?” asked the Torak.

“Kenda and his friend had decided to climb the Wall of Mermidion the night before,” answered StarWind. “It is a rite that the young pursue in Duran. No one ever succeeds, but there are seldom any serious injuries in the attempts. Typically the boys climb as high as they dare and then return to the city to take their punishment. The boys left the city before dawn. They were several hours up the wall before the fog lifted.”

“And Kenda’s friend?” asked Marak.

“He died,” reported StarWind. “He was seen on the wall and fell victim to a mage’s fiery blast. Kenda kept to the dark crevices, but Motangan soldiers were ordered to search the wall. He had no choice but to succeed in getting to the top.”

“He sounds like a brave lad,” frowned Marak. “Will he survive?”

“LifeTender is on a choka heading out to him now,” Lyra declared. “HawkShadow will keep the boy alive until she arrives. I am sure that he will live.”

“While I have no reason to doubt Kenda’s word,” StarWind continued, “I have sent scouts to verify his story. It is too important an event to take the word of a single boy.”

“A smart move, StarWind,” nodded Marak. “How soon will you know for sure?”

“We will know tonight,” answered StarWind. “I have a ship from Zaramilden heading there. HawkShadow also sent SkyDancer to check by land. She will not be able to enter the city, but she will be able to view it from the top of the Wall of Mermidion.”

“Then I shall stay until we know for sure,” declared Marak. “Let’s discuss what the significance of this event is as if it has occurred.”

“It is the invasion that we have been waiting for,” shrugged Lyra. “No one but the Motangans would attack in so vicious a way.”

“I would readily agree that the Motangans are behind the attack,” Marak shook his head, “but that does not mean the invasion has begun. Aakuta reports that Vand has a thousand ships, or soon will have. Why only send six?”

Lyra frowned and stared at the floor when Aakuta’s name was mentioned. She knew that Marak meant no disrespect to her father, but it still bothered her to have him called Aakuta.

“I apologize, Lyra,” Marak said softly when he saw Lyra’s reaction.

“You meant no disrespect,” Lyra smiled weakly. “It is something that I must get used to.”

“Can you think of any other reason to attack Duran?” asked StarWind.

“Possibly,” answered the Torak. “Vand knows that we use air tunnels to communicate. Perhaps he has found a way to intercept our communications and wants to verify it by monitoring what happens when we discover that Duran has been destroyed.”

“He might just want to see how we move our forces in reaction to the strike,” suggested Gunta. “It would be expected for the Sakovans to reposition their forces towards the east coast of the Sakova, but what would he expect the Khadorans to do?”

“A good point,” Marak nodded. “Between our three countries, we have a tremendous amount of coastline to protect. If Vand can draw our forces to any one particular point, it will make his invasion that much easier.”

“And if we keep our armies where they are,” added Halman, “he will easily break through our lines and get behind us.”

“Exactly,” agreed the Torak.

“There is also the terror aspect of it,” offered StarWind. “You can imagine what this will do for our morale when the people find out that Duran has been totally destroyed.”

“That can also work against Vand,” countered the Torak. “When word does get out, make sure that everyone knows that there was no chance for anyone to surrender. Vand does not plan to take any prisoners. We are all in this fight to the death, whether we want to be or not.”

“Well,” sighed Lyra, “the people are going to learn about what happened at Duran whether we tell them or not. It is only a matter of time. I propose that we use that time to determine how we will notify the people. I want to do it in a controlled manner so that the citizens can have their questions addressed rather than gather among themselves and spread rumors.”

“A wise decision,” agreed the Torak. “Khadora already has a mechanism that I can use to accomplish the task. It is the Assembly of Lords. You need something similar in the Sakova where you can have officials from each city gather. That way you can explain it to the assembly and then each of them can go home to explain it to the people of their cities.”

“The mayors would be a good choice for assemblymen,” suggested StarWind. “We could have them come to StarCity or hold the assemblies in different cities each meeting on a rotating basis.”

“I prefer the rotating cities idea,” nodded Lyra. “Set it up immediately. We will hold the first meeting in Okata.”

“But we have not confirmed the attack yet,” StarWind reminded the Star.

“It doesn’t matter,” shrugged Lyra. “We still need to start the assembly, and we will start it with a meeting. We have enough to discuss even if the attack did not occur. Set it up.”

StarWind nodded and left the room. Lyra paced the floor for a few moments, ending up in front of the wall map.

“This is coming too soon,” Lyra said softly. “We are not prepared for the war yet.”

Marak rose and walked up behind Lyra. He put his arms around her and held her.

“We will be ready,” he said softly. “I have a few ideas that I would like to discuss with you.”

* * *

The spy saw Marak and his two shadows slip out of the palace in Khadoratung. He eased into the darkness of a nearby alley as he wondered why the Emperor was wearing his black and silver clan colors rather than the white and gold of the Imperial Emperor.

Fisher had no reason to spy on the Torak, but his nature was one of constant curiosity. It was a trait that had made Fisher such a great spy. Fisher followed the trio to the new temple and slipped into the building after them. He let the small group get as far ahead of him as possible without losing them. He knew that Gunta and Halman rarely missed a detail when they were guarding the Torak.

Fisher saw Marak and his shadows enter the library. He chose a concealed place to wait for them to exit so that he could continue to follow them. He was extremely curious as to why Marak had chosen to wear his clan colors.

One minute slowly dragged on to the next. Fisher heard no conversations coming from the library. He heard no sounds of movement. After a long period of waiting, Fisher crept up to the library door. There was no one in sight. Perplexed, Fisher strode into the library. He walked slowly around the room, eyeing everything with suspicion, but finding nothing of interest.

Fisher had toured the new temple many times during its construction. In fact, he was amazed and thrilled to see an actual temple of Kaltara being built in the Khadoran capital. It showed the influence that the Torak had brought to the Khadorans. As he relived walking through the construction site, he remembered his curiosity regarding the small aberration in the perimeter of the library. He had assumed at the time that the library would have a small reading desk in an alcove, yet the library was perfectly rectangular. He walked to the area of the bookshelves where the alcove was supposed to be.

Fisher knelt before the bookshelves and gazed upward. He saw nothing out of the ordinary. Not satisfied that the alcove was a mistake of the builders, Fisher ran his hand under each shelf in the area. He smiled broadly when his fingers touched the metal latch. He triggered the latch and saw the bookshelf slide open slightly. He peered into the darkness and saw nothing.

Fisher slid past the bookshelf into the small alcove. He pulled the bookshelf closed and turned to examine the small room. He saw nothing other than a door and frowned. No doorway had been in the alcove during the construction. He was sure of that. The spy eased the mysterious door open and looked into a small, empty closet. His mind swam with confusion.

Fisher checked the small alcove one more time before stepping into the closet. It was extremely dark inside the closet so Fisher withdrew a candle from his pouch and lit it. Fearful of someone accidentally seeing the glow from his candle, Fisher closed the door to the closet and began inspecting every section of the walls for something that might not be obvious. He found nothing. Frustrated by the mystery, Fisher blew out the candle and opened the door. A cold breeze flowed across his feet, and the spy became instantly alert.

Fisher stowed his candle in a pouch and drew a dagger. It was a warm sunny day in Khadoratung, so Fisher assumed that a wizard created the cold breeze. He slowly moved out of the closet and eased the door shut. As he looked around the alcove, he frowned at seeing a second door leading off of it. He knew that there had only been one door a moment ago.

Fisher was about to examine the second door, when he heard a noise in the other direction. He moved up against the back of the bookshelf and put his ear to it. He could hear people talking in the library, but he could not hear what they were saying. He saw a tiny stream of light coming through a hole and moved his eye towards it. He inhaled deeply as he gazed into the library. There were two Chula in the library cleaning the floor.

Fisher stood silently for a long time trying to figure out what was going on. Eventually he slid his dagger into its sheath and turned to gaze at the two doors behind him. He wondered where the second door went.

Loud noises drew Fisher’s attention back to the spy hole. He watched as the Chula left the library. With no one in sight, Fisher fingered the latch used to unlock the bookshelf. He pushed it open and walked into the library, pushing the bookshelf back in place. He strode out of the library as if he had just entered it to replace a book. The coolness in the air confirmed that he was no longer in Khadoratung.

“So this is how Marak has been moving around so swiftly,” he softly mused to himself as he reached the outside entrance to the temple at Changragar.

“Ah, favored son of the Kywara,” Ukaro called in greeting as he approached the entrance to the temple. “I had not heard that you were skulking around these parts.”

“It is not a planned trip,” Fisher replied smoothly. “Is Rykoma around?”

“I certainly hope so,” answered Ukaro. “I have come to speak with the Head Shaman of the Kywara. Have you looked in the office in the temple?”

“No,” replied Fisher. “I just arrived myself.”

Ukaro halted and stared questioningly at the Kywara spy. The shaman had just hiked up the mountain trail leading to Changragar, and he would have seen Fisher had he been on the trail.

“Do not ask,” smiled Fisher. “Let’s go see Rykoma together. I would like your input as well on a problem that I have.”

Although puzzled by Fisher’s mysterious appearance, Ukaro nodded and walked alongside the spy as they made their way to the office inside the temple. Rykoma smiled broadly as the pair entered the office.

“This has the makings of an interesting day,” greeted Rykoma. “What brings the two of you to see me?”

Ukaro immediately nodded to Fisher to proceed with his problem first.

“I need the services of a young shaman,” Fisher declared. “He must be powerful, both in magic and in endurance. He is likely to die in my service. Can you recommend anyone?”

“You do not ask for much,” Rykoma replied sarcastically. “Why must he be young?”

“I do not want him to have taken the rites that change his physical features,” answered Fisher. “I want someone who can blend in.”

“You want an expendable spy?” frowned Ukaro. “Is this something that the Torak has requested?”

“No,” answered Fisher. “In fact, I think the Torak would frown upon my asking for one.”

“Yet you expect us to look favorably upon your request?” retorted Rykoma. “It is not the Chula way to throw life away. Life is sacred and to be cherished.”

“You should not ask others to do what you would not do yourself,” added Ukaro. “I am disappointed in you, Fisher.”

“I would prefer to go myself,” replied Fisher, “but the Torak has forbidden it.”

“Sit and explain,” Rykoma ordered as he sat down himself.

“For some time,” Fisher began, “I have had a spy on the Island of Darkness. It is not someone that I sent there, but rather one who volunteered on his own. You may know him as Aakuta or Master Malafar. In any event, he has been sending information to mages at Raven’s Point. I have been getting the information and passing it on to the Torak. During the rescue of the elven king, Aakuta’s nature may have been discovered. I fear that he will soon cease passing information to me.”

“So you want someone to go to the Island of Darkness and replace him?” asked Ukaro.

“Aakuta needs to be replaced,” nodded Fisher. “The information of the timing of their attack is vital. Without that knowledge, it is likely that we will lose the coming war.”

“And Marak has refused to let you go?” questioned Ukaro.

“He has forbidden it,” nodded Fisher. “He feels that he needs me more here. I cannot think of anyone who can possibly survive for a time on the Island of Darkness other than a Chula shaman.”

“Your request makes sense,” nodded Rykoma, “but the Chula are not well versed in the ways of the Motangans.”

“I know,” agreed Fisher. “I have heard the tales of Mistake and MistyTrail and their time on the Island of Darkness. I think if a shaman could survive among the mountain peaks, he might be able to remain safe.”

“He would provide little information being isolated in that way,” stated Ukaro.

“I understand,” replied Fisher. “While the information that Aakuta is sending is valuable, I would be satisfied with just the timing of the invasion. A man on the mountain peaks would be able to see Vand’s fleet as it readied to depart the island. Patrols seldom cross the peaks, and should that happen, there is that small cave that the girls hid in.”

“It might work,” mused Rykoma. “Calitora is very powerful for a young shaman. He is also a superb warrior, and his endurance would be excellent.”

“He is also reckless,” warned Ukaro. “Perhaps a better choice would be someone who would be more willing to remain on the mountain peaks and not journey down to see what others are doing.”

“Entering the cities would be suicidal for someone not trained in the ways of the Motangans,” agreed Fisher. “The spy is to remain on the mountains. I do not wish to gift the Motangans with a Chula body.”

“Not to mention the information that could be gleaned from the interrogation of a Chula shaman,” added Ukaro. “I would suggest someone with less curiosity.”

“There are no others that can match Calitora’s skills,” sighed Rykoma.

“You are not limited to only the Kywara tribe,” shrugged Ukaro. “There are other Chula tribes that have young shaman. I am sure that the Zatong can offer a replacement.”

“I have no authority over the Zatong or any other Chula tribe,” countered Rykoma. “While I can parley with them and get them to offer up one of their sons for this mission, I do not think that we can afford to waste time on this. I will send Calitora.”

“Thank you,” Fisher bowed respectfully to the Kywara shaman. “I will leave the two of you to discuss other things.”

Fisher left the office and returned to the library. He quickly slipped the hidden catch and moved into the small alcove, closing the bookshelf behind him. He walked hesitantly to the door that he had not used before. He stood before it in the dark and contemplated where it might lead. Steeling his nerves, the spy opened the door and stepped into the closet. He closed the door.

He did not know if the door had to remain closed for any period of time, so he waited a few moments before opening it again. When he stepped out of the closet, he noticed that there were now three doors, and each of them bore the mark of one of the Three who had been prophesized. He had come out of the door with the sign of the Torak upon it.

Ignoring the other two doors for the moment, Fisher moved to the spy hole and peered through it. Seeing no one in the library, Fisher flipped the latch and entered the room. He closed the bookshelf behind him. As he exited the library to see which temple he was in, several guards spotted him and immediately surrounded him, their long spears pointing at the spy’s chest.

Fisher raised his hands in surrender as the spears poked him towards the center of the corridor. Before he could open his mouth to protest, someone hit him over the head from behind. Fisher sank into darkness.

Fisher was not sure how long he had been unconscious, but he could tell that it was dark out. He groaned and felt his head for a lump as he studied the small cell that he was in. He rose to his feet and stretched his muscles as he pictured the men who had captured him. The long spears suggested the Qubari jungle, but the men had not been dressed in loincloths. Fisher was still pondering his location when the cell door opened. The guard glared at Fisher and waved his spear for the prisoner to leave the cell.

Fisher walked slowly and deliberately out of the cell and saw that three other guards were waiting for him. The guards herded Fisher along the corridor and into a large room. That was when Fisher realized where he was.

“Fisher!” greeted Bakhai. “Welcome to Angragar.”

“Thank you, Bakhai,” smiled Fisher as the guards backed away and stood against the wall with their spears held vertically. “I guess I didn’t have the proper password?”

“We were not notified that you were using the doors,” shrugged Bakhai. “What brings you to Angragar?”

“Actually,” admitted the spy, “I just discovered the doors and was exploring where they led to. I did not realize that I would come out in Angragar. How do they work?”

“They work by the will of Kaltara,” smiled Bakhai. “I know no more than that. How did you discover the doors?”

Fisher truthfully revealed his following of Marak and his knowledge of the construction of the temple in Khadoratung. He did not mention his discussion with the Chula, as it was not pertinent to the question.

“I suggest that you return to Khadora and refrain from using the doors until you have talked to Emperor Marak,” frowned Bakhai. “I think your actions will point out the need for security around the use of the doors. They can be a liability to us as much a benefit.”

“I will return immediately,” Fisher nodded as he rose.

One of the guards stepped forward and led Fisher out of the room. He escorted the spy to the temple and into the library. The guard then turned around and walked out. Fisher thought it was odd that the guards knew about the doors, but obviously did not want to see how they were accessed. Fisher shrugged and unlatched the bookshelf. He backed into the alcove and pulled the bookshelf closed. That is when he felt the blade of a long sword rest upon his shoulder and threaten his throat. Fisher’s hands rose into the air and sighed with defeat. Hands reached out and turned the spy around so that he was facing his attackers. Suddenly, light flared to life and Fisher stared into Gunta’s face.

“Fisher?” frowned Marak. “What are you doing here?”

Fisher sighed and explained the whole thing over again. Marak opened the door with the mark of the Torak on it and ushered everyone through it. In Changragar, they continued through to Khadoratung. When they reached the capital city, Emperor Marak entered the library and sat at one of the tables. He invited Fisher to sit with him.

“I should have realized that I could not keep a secret from you for long,” smiled the Torak. “The problem is, now we know that others can stumble across the doors. We must make preparations to secure ourselves from their use by enemies.”

“Then perhaps this day has proved worthwhile after all,” Fisher replied sheepishly. “If it is any consolation, I have arranged for a new spy to go to the Island of Darkness. His only purpose is to notify us of the time of the attack.”

“We have already had an attack,” reported Emperor Marak. “The Sakovan city of Duran no longer exists. That is why I left the palace in such a fashion.”

“Then it has begun,” Fisher nodded slowly. “I would like permission to use the doors. It will help me gather information.”

“Consider it done,” nodded Marak, “but always remain aware that your entry to the doors must be stealthy.”

“After today,” frowned Fisher, “I shall never make that mistake again.”

Chapter 7

Death of a Mage

Shouts rang out from every direction as the search spread outward. This was the second day of searching for the dark mage, and the patrols had kept Aakuta on his toes. Aakuta crawled to one side of the large tree in the forest and stuck his head out to see what was going on behind the temple.

A large column of soldiers was standing at attention. Aakuta started counting them and then realized that there were ten soldiers for each mage standing in front of the soldiers. He counted the mages instead and frowned when he realized how many soldiers were being added to the search. He would have little chance of avoiding them this day.

Aakuta grunted with pain and pulled his head back behind the tree. The pain was more intense now that the curse had been lifted. Aakuta had known the moment that Dobuk released the curse. His body instantly screamed from every pore. Old wounds that had been dull and almost forgotten screamed anew. Without Lady Mystic’s potions, he would have already killed himself.

Aakuta frowned when he thought about the potions. Lady Mystic had been far off in her estimate. While she thought one potion might last an hour, each had actually lasted for four hours. The problem Aakuta faced now was that he had just consumed the last of the potions. He had only four hours to find a way out of his predicament before he became totally insane and took his own life.

Aakuta felt the effects of the last potion kick in. A warm glow flowed through his body, and his nerves dulled as the aches and pains subsided. He sighed with relief.

The noise behind the temple increased dramatically and Aakuta peeked around the tree again. His brow creased heavily as he saw the soldiers breaking up into groups. The mages were taking control of their soldiers and pointing the direction to start the search. Several of the mages pointed towards the forest where Aakuta was hiding. Aakuta knew that it was time to flee.

The dark mage pushed himself off the ground and stood behind the large tree. His eyes swept the forest as he plotted his path through the trees. He closed his eyes and memorized the path because there was no way that he would be able to see the trees later.

Aakuta called for his spell of fog and let it build around his feet. He knew that the fog would alert the soldiers to his location, but he had no choice. If he just ran, they would easily see him now that they had decided to search outside the city. Already the soldiers were getting closer.

When the density of fog had risen greatly, Aakuta snapped his wrist and sent the cloud outward in a circle. He immediately started running as the shouts of alarm drifted on the air. He kept his eyes open, not that it mattered much. The fog was so thick that he could not see his hand if he extended his arm out before himself. He counted numbers in his head and altered his course when he thought he was at the point to do so.

The fog was not the perfect plan for escape, but it was the best that he had at the moment. If he could put enough distance between the soldiers and himself, he could veer off to either side and circle around behind the searchers. Once behind them, he would seek a new place to hide.

Aakuta debated between veering to the right and the dense forest at the foot of the mountains, or angling to the left and the jungle along the shore of the island. As the sound of his pursuers grew more distant behind him, he knew that he had to choose soon. He was almost out of the fog, and he was rapidly losing his breath.

Aakuta chose to turn to the left and headed for the jungle. That was when he slammed right into a tree. He grunted loudly as the impact took his breath away, and he toppled to the ground.

“Off to the left,” a shouted voice drifted through the fog. “I heard him.”

Aakuta cursed under his breath and scrambled to his feet. He wondered what he would do now that he had not shaken his pursuers. Surely he could turn and attack the soldiers magically. He still did have the power to kill a great number of them, but each group also had a mage with it. And what would be the point of killing a hundred of Vand’s soldiers anyway? Vand already had more soldiers than he knew what to do with. Aakuta shook his head as he ran as fast as he could towards the jungle. The fog lessened somewhat and then suddenly disappeared completely. Aakuta instantly measured the distance to the jungle and tried to estimate how far behind him the pursuers must be. It would be a close race.

Aakuta saw a small trail leading into the jungle. He veered slightly to head for it. As he tore along the small trail into the deep foliage of the jungle, he chanced a look over his shoulder. The first of the pursuers was just emerging from the fog. The dark mage cursed as one of the soldiers shouted and pointed directly at Aakuta. He had been too slow in his dash to the jungle.

Gasping for breath, his heart pounding wildly, Aakuta halted as the trail made a sharp bend. He quickly wove an air tunnel and directed it far off towards the left. He cursed loudly into his cupped hands and the sound came out at the end of the air tunnel. He heard his pursuers shout and then heard the thrashing as dozens of soldiers left the trail and started tromping through the dense undergrowth towards the distant sound.

Aakuta slowly and quietly stepped off the trail to the right. He was careful not to disturb the foliage along the trail as he picked his way deeper into the jungle. The going was slow through the dense jungle, but it gave Aakuta the time he needed to catch his breath. His body was not up to the exertion that he was putting it through. He knew that the diversion would not fool his pursuers for long, but without the ability to breathe, he could not have run much further anyway.

Slowly Aakuta made his way through the thick jungle, the shouts of the soldiers falling away behind him. When he could no longer hear the soldiers, Aakuta dropped to the ground and rested. The dark mage reclined on his back and stared up at the sky. As he watched the clouds drift overhead, he tried to figure out what he would do next. His time was running out.

Suddenly, Aakuta heard the foliage moving off to his right. At first he thought it might be a large snake moving about, but several noises came in unison. The dark mage swallowed hard as he realized that someone was near. Slowly, he rolled over onto his stomach and rose to his knees. His eyes opened wide as he scanned the thick jungle for any signs of movement. When he finally saw one of the soldiers, Aakuta thought his heart would stop beating; his pulse was pounding in his ears.

As Aakuta slowly swiveled his head, he saw a wide swath of soldiers moving cautiously through the jungle. They were making every effort to do so silently, and they had almost succeeded. Already they were far too close for Aakuta to make a run for it.

The soldiers were spread out in a long line, ten abreast. Aakuta could not see the mage. Aakuta had stopped in a small clearing to rest. Now he looked to each side of him for a place to hide. On his left was a tree with its roots exposed; the mound of soil that used to cover the roots was long gone. Aakuta crawled silently towards the tree.

As the sounds of the soldiers came closer, Aakuta wiggled his way under the tree. The underside of the tree was hollowed out, termites swarming in and out of the porous wood. Aakuta twitched as he pulled in his legs and shoved his head upward into the rotted tree. The termites swarmed all over his body, but the dark mage remained frozen.

Moments later, Aakuta heard a soldier pass nearby. The pursuers were moving slowly and methodically, hoping to catch Aakuta in a moment of laxness. Suddenly a voice softly intruded the quiet jungle air.

“Perhaps I was wrong,” the voice said. “I thought for sure that the old fool would go in the opposite direction of the supposed noise. Let’s head back towards the trail.”

“Do you think the others have caught up to him yet?” asked one of the soldiers as they gathered together not far from the tree.

“Not a chance,” replied the voice of the mage. “That old man is a wily one. Let the others run through the jungle searching for Aakuta. We will be the ones to find him. I think I am beginning to understand how he thinks. I am willing to bet that he did come this way, but something must have turned him back. We will return to the trail and head towards the beach for a thousand paces. Then we will slip into the jungle again and try this one more time. We will find him. I want to personally present his head to Vand.”

Aakuta shivered as he recognized the voice. It was the voice of Xavo, the mage who had beat him near the temple not long ago. Aakuta burned with fury at the thought of Xavo being the one to find him. As the group moved towards the trail, Aakuta slithered out from under the tree. He brushed off the termites and decided that he knew what he would do next. If he were going to die in a matter of hours when the potion wore off, he would at least have the pleasure of ridding the world of Xavo before he died.

Aakuta rose and saw Xavo forty paces away walking towards the trail. The ten soldiers were already another twenty paces in front of the mage. Aakuta moved as swiftly as he could without making any noise. He was within several paces of Xavo when he made a noise that attracted everyone. A branch snapped when he stepped on it. The soldiers turned around immediately and shouted with recognition.

Aakuta grinned menacingly when he saw the soldiers all in a knot. He swiftly cast the Chula spell of death. Several balls of light sped towards the soldiers. The balls flattened into discs as they traveled, and the discs sprouted sharp blades of light. Aakuta was aware of shouts coming from every direction as the blades of light ripped into the clump of soldiers. Body parts flew through the air in a bloody mist.

Xavo was taken by surprise by the attack. Although he thought he figured out how Aakuta thought, he was wrong. He was also slow to react. Aakuta tried to take advantage of that slowness, but Xavo managed to get off a fireball at Aakuta, hitting the dark mage in the chest. Pain ripped through Aakuta, and he fell to the ground from the force of the projectile. Aakuta’s robe was on fire, and he ripped at it, tossing shreds of burning fabric in every direction. Some of the nearby plants immediately ignited from the magical fire, sending smoke rapidly rising into the air. Xavo grinned and drew his knife to claim Aakuta’s head.

* * *

Santiock saw a brilliant light and instantly turned towards it. He saw a group of Motangan soldiers torn to shreds by a magical spell, and his mouth fell open in horror. He quickly scanned the jungle, alert for an attack. Not more than a hundred paces away, he saw the dark mage, and not far from him was Xavo, fire leaping from his fingertips. Santiock shouted for his men to follow him as he dashed towards the confrontation.

The foliage was dense, but Santiock rushed through it as he watched the fireball strike the dark mage. He saw Aakuta fall backwards, the magical fire igniting the brambles around him. He witnessed Xavo draw a knife and go down on top of Aakuta to sever the dark mage’s head.

When Santiock arrived, the fire was spreading rapidly, the magical flames igniting the moist jungle foliage. He looked down at Xavo hacking away at the corpse and made an instant decision. He reached down and grabbed Xavo’s feet and started pulling the mage free of the fire. Several other soldiers immediately leaped in to help, and Xavo was pulled clear of the fire. Santiock stared at the burning corpse of Aakuta as Xavo shoved everyone away and staggered to his feet.

“What have you done?” snarled Xavo. “I wanted his head. I almost had it cut off.”

“I will verify Aakuta’s death,” replied Santiock. “His head was not worth your life. Look. See how his body burns. No one can deny you the rewards that Vand will bestow upon you. It is better that you are alive to receive them.”

Xavo snarled an obscenity and pushed his way through the crowd of soldiers that were trying to extinguish the fire. Santiock shook his head in amazement at the mage’s lack of gratitude. He took one last glance at the burning corpse and followed Xavo out of the jungle.

* * *

Lady Mystic sat on the beach, her back to a slanting palm tree. She stared blankly out at the ocean swells as she thought about the mess that she had made of her life. Aakuta had been right about her father. Vand had totally rejected her as if her relationship meant nothing to him. All of her life she had looked up to her father, blind to what everyone else had been able to see. She recalled the taunts that the other children had thrown at her when she was little. They laughed when they told her how her father had had her mother executed. She had never believed the stories, until now. While everyone had sworn that it was the truth, she had steadfastly refused to believe that her father was capable of such an act. How wrong she had been.

It was all so clear now. Every slight and insult that her father had thrown her way came pouring back through her mind. Tears flowed down her cheeks as she saw what a fool she had been. Her whole life had been a sham, and now she had ruined Aakuta’s life as well. It was bad enough that she had betrayed him once, but the second betrayal would remove him forever from her life. She wished she had a chance to do it all over again. This time, she would actually help the elf king to escape.

Lady Mystic swallowed hard as she thought about Aakuta. He was the only person who had ever actually loved her, and she discarded him for her father. The Emperor’s daughter smashed her fist into the sand alongside her. The action did nothing to make her feel better.

Lady Mystic’s mind whirled with thoughts of Aakuta. She wanted to find him and help him in some way, but she knew that it was not to be. Thousands of soldiers and mages were already looking for the dark mage. She would not stand a chance of finding him alone. And even if she did find him, there was no way that Aakuta would forgive her a second time. She had had her second chance when she discovered that Aakuta was lucid, but she squandered that chance by betraying her lover one more time.

Lady Mystic started bawling loudly. She threw herself face first into the sand and ripped at her hair. That was when she heard the horns sounding the retreat. Lady Mystic sat up and listened carefully to the horns. There was no mistaking the sound of retreat echoing through the city. That sound could only mean one thing; Aakuta had been found.

Lady Mystic rose and brushed herself off. Her mind whirled with a thousand thoughts as she wondered if it was too late to save Aakuta. If the dark mage had been captured, the soldiers would bring him before Vand. If she truly cared for him, now was the time to show it. She could run to the temple and magically attack the soldiers bringing Aakuta in. She could free her lover, and they could escape into the jungle to live in peace.

Lady Mystic ran towards the temple. Curious people were already beginning to line the streets in anticipation as columns of soldiers and mages entered the city from every direction. The soldiers lined the streets, keeping the rest of the citizens off the roads. Lady Mystic jostled the crowd to get a position where she could see the captive being brought to the temple.

A ripple of confusion ran through the crowd as no squad of soldiers marched along the parade route. Only a single mage walked between the lines of soldiers barricading the route. Lady Mystic scowled when she saw the mage’s face. It was Xavo.

When Xavo passed, the soldiers dropped their barricade and let the citizens roam freely. Lady Mystic shook her head in confusion. She desperately looked around for someone that she knew that would still speak to her. She saw Santiock, a high officer in Vand’s army. He had always been friendly towards her in the past. She pushed her way forward and softly called his name. Santiock’s eyes scanned the crowd looking to see who had called him. His eyes landed on Lady Mystic and he frowned. He hurried towards her and grabbed her elbow. He guided here away from the milling crowd to a place where they could talk privately.

“So even you are afraid to be seen talking to me?” frowned Lady Mystic. “Is this my reward for years of loyalty to Vand?”

“One does not tempt the hand of fate around Vand,” Santiock shrugged indifferently. “Why did you call my name?”

“I must know what happened today,” declared Lady Mystic. “Why was Xavo marching the route with no soldiers and no prisoner?”

“He alone survived,” explained Santiock. “His squad managed to track the escapee into the jungle and kill him.”

Lady Mystic frowned at hearing Aakuta called the escapee. It rubbed a raw nerve.

“His name was Aakuta,” snapped Lady Mystic, “and I doubt that Xavo has the power to kill him.”

“Aakuta was powerful,” Santiock’s brow knitted with agreement. “Never has one so insane been able to use magic effectively. His strange spells of light left little of Xavo’s squad.”

“I thought none of the soldiers survived?” questioned the Emperor’s daughter.

“They didn’t survive,” replied Santiock. “What I meant when I said his spells left little was just that. The remaining pieces of Xavo’s soldiers were small and unrecognizable. Their bodies were entirely shredded.”

“And yet Xavo remained alive?” Lady Mystic pushed skeptically.

“He was apart from the soldiers by twenty paces of more,” explained the officer. “While Aakuta was shredding the soldiers, Xavo attacked Aakuta with a fireball. It was a fatal attack.”

Lady Mystic’s heart skipped a beat as she heard the words. She did not believe that Aakuta was dead.

“So Xavo says,” retorted the Emperor’s daughter. “Xavo always plays the part of the great mage. Where is Aakuta’s head if he is dead?”

“Xavo is a pompous braggart,” agreed Santiock, “but not this time. I was close by. The brilliant light drew my attention even before the screams of death were heard. I saw the soldiers’ body parts fly through the air. I saw Xavo deliver the killing blow. I helped drag Xavo out of the fire that erupted in the brambles. He was intent on cutting off Aakuta’s head, but he would have died trying to get it. The flames grew at an astonishing rate.”

Tears welled up in Lady Mystic’s eyes and Santiock shifted uncomfortably.

“I am sorry, Lady Mystic,” consoled the officer. “I know that you cared for Aakuta, but loving a traitor is not a wise thing to do these days. I must go to the throne room in case there are questions surrounding this incident.”

Santiock waited a moment for a response from Lady Mystic, but there was none. The officer turned and strode towards the temple. He hurried along to catch up to those heading for the throne room. He did not want to miss a minute of the session because Vand was often known to freely give out boons after a victorious mission.

The throne room was crowded as everyone sought to be in Vand’s presence in case spoils were awarded. Santiock squeezed his way towards the front of the room, earning him more than one jab in the ribs. He did not care. Unlike the other pretenders in the room, he had helped Xavo flee from the fire. That at least should give him some standing if rewards were showered on anyone.

“Quiet!” demanded Vand. “I want to hear the report. Speak Xavo.”

Xavo moved to stand before Vand. He bowed low and reverently before straightening and smiling at the Emperor.

“Aakuta thought he was clever,” reported the mage. “He used a spell of fog in an attempt to avoid being captured, but it did not work. He fled into the jungle and everyone lost sight of him. A sound was clearly heard some distance away and most of the groups converged on it. I did not. I remembered your demonstration of the air tunnel and knew it was a trick. Instead, I led my troops in the opposite direction. We left the jungle trail and moved silently through the dense foliage. That is when Aakuta struck. He attacked my men with some hideous light spell. My men immediately died, but I avenged them. I struck Aakuta down with a powerful fireball.”

“What nonsense is this you spout?” scowled Vand. “Aakuta was cursed. He had no mind for using magic, yet you speak of fog, and air tunnels, and even some light spell of death. I will not tolerate such lies in my court.”

“These are not lies,” Xavo quickly replied as he pulled a glass bottle from his pouch. “Aakuta found away around the curse. We found this bottle in the forest behind the temple where Aakuta must have been spying on us. I think it contained some type of elixir that negated the curse. That is the only explanation that I can think of.”

Vand held out his hand, and a guard swiftly raced to Xavo and took the bottle from his hand. The guard brought the bottle to the Emperor and placed it in his outstretched hand. The Emperor held the bottle up and gazed at the slight accumulation of liquid in the bottom. He uncorked the bottle and sniffed the contents for several moments before throwing it to the floor in disgust. If anyone had been close enough to hear the Emperor mumble under his breath, they would have heard him curse his daughter.

“Where is Aakuta’s head?” demanded the Emperor.

“My fireball was much too powerful,” answered Xavo. “Aakuta’s body was burned along with a large section of the jungle. Soldiers are still fighting to put out the blaze.”

“Then we have no confirmation of his death,” scowled Vand. “That is unacceptable.”

“We have many witnesses,” offered Xavo. “Indeed, I was dragged out of the fire as I sought to take Aakuta’s head regardless of the peril to my own life. I knew that bringing his head here would please you.”

“Where are these witnesses?” asked Vand.

A dozen men raised their hands. Santiock was one of them, but he frowned at the number of others who were claiming to have helped. Santiock stepped forward and bowed before the Emperor.

“I was nearby,” Santiock offered to the Emperor. “While some will make false statements in your presence to gain your favor, this is not such a case with Xavo. I witnessed the attack on his men. The spell was indeed deadly, and their bodies were instantly shredded. Xavo did indeed strike down Aakuta with a fireball, igniting the brambles present there. He did indeed draw his knife and attempt to sever Aakuta’s head. I, along with two others, pulled Xavo out of the flames. He was not happy that we had done so before he had retrieved the head of Aakuta, but we had to save his life.”

“And you are sure that Aakuta could not have survived the fire?” questioned the Emperor.

“Not a chance,” replied Santiock. “The flames were intense, and the area was completely surrounded by your troops. Aakuta is dead. I saw his lifeless body burning in the flames. There can be no doubt regarding his death.”

“Let me add that I had already succeeded in cutting most of the way through his neck,” interjected Xavo. “No one can breathe without a throat, nor can they use a head that is no longer attached to the spine. A few more seconds and I would have presented a trophy to you. That is why I was angry with my rescuers. I only needed one more cut.”

“You should thank your rescuers,” smiled Vand. “I do not need a trophy when the kill is confirmed. Had you died trying to get Aakuta’s head, you would not be alive today to receive my praise. Your name shall be exalted this day as a valiant Disciple of Vand. Let my empire know that Xavo is favored with my graces.”

Xavo beamed as everyone applauded him. Even Santiock genuinely applauded although he had often thought little of the braggart mage. When the applause stopped, Vand focused his attention on Santiock.

“You also must have seen Aakuta’s use of the air tunnel as a diversion, Santiock,” declared the Emperor. “That shows good thinking and analysis. Your actions in saving Xavo must also be rewarded, as will the actions of others who pitched in. I will notify my generals that you are to be promoted. You are to determine who else has taken actions today that warrant my favor.”

Vand rose and left the throne room as men crowded around Santiock to discuss the merits of their inclusion on the list to be favored by Vand. Xavo frowned heavily as Santiock became the center of attention rather than himself. He turned and stormed out of the throne room.

Chapter 8

Aunt Kanis

Princess Alastasia viewed the battleground. Galantor stood facing her with his large two-handed sword. The elf officer stood poised to strike her down. Beyond her opponent Alastasia saw Tamar with his back to Galantor. He stood in a pose like Galantor, but he was facing Princess Alahara. Alastasia caught her sister’s eye and nodded a signal. Alahara grinned and nodded back.

Princess Alastasia dove towards the ground. She pulled her staff in close to her body as she hit the ground and rolled past Galantor. When she came out of the roll, Alastasia swung her staff hard into the back of Tamar’s legs. Tamar’s legs buckled and he dropped to the ground. Even before his body hit the ground, Alahara was in motion. She charged towards Tamar and leaped over his falling body. Her own staff moved in a blur as she swung it at Galantor’s legs. The elven officer had been turning around to see where Alastasia had gone when he was struck. A sharp crack split the air as Galantor howled and hit the ground.

Alahara and Alastasia raced to Galantor’s side. The officer rolled on the grass, one hand clutching his left shin. Tamar got up off the ground and joined the small group.

“What is it, Galantor?” asked Tamar. “Are you hurt?”

“I can fix it,” Alastasia offered quickly as she gently moved the officer’s hand and replaced it with her own.

“My leg may be broken,” groaned Galantor.

“This is supposed to be practice,” sighed Tamar. “You girls are not supposed to kill your tutors.”

“I was supposed to strike his legs before he turned,” apologized Princess Alahara. “I was too slow. I caught the side of his leg instead of the rear.”

“That is the first time I have ever heard anyone use the word slow while talking about you,” chuckled Galantor. “I would prefer to think that my reaction was just faster than you had planned on.”

“It’s not broken,” smiled Alastasia as she cast a healing spell on Galantor’s leg.

“That is a relief,” sighed Tamar. “Galantor has duty tonight. These practice sessions are getting a little rough recently. Where do you girls get your moves from? What prompted you to switch opponents?”

“One has to gauge a battle in the view of the overall battlefield,” answered Princess Alastasia. “You should never isolate your thoughts to only one opponent. It limits your possibilities. Those are my father’s words.”

Tamar’s eyebrows rose in appreciation. “One does not argue with the words of the King of the Elves,” he smiled, “especially when the words are correct. Your tactic took us totally by surprise. How did you coordinate it?”

“We talked about it, among other things, before you two arrived,” grinned Princess Alahara. “It was just one possible strategy depending upon the placement of our opponents. When we got you lined up back-to-back, MistyTrail gave me a nod.”

“Alastasia,” corrected her sister with a laugh. “I am glad to know that I am not the only who has trouble with names.”

“What if we had not lined up properly?” asked Tamar.

“We had other plans,” grinned Alahara. “You will learn of them someday.”

“I am sure that we will,” chuckled Galantor as he flexed his leg and nodded to Princess Alastasia. “You two are actually making better warriors out of Tamar and me,” he added as he rose. “We should start using some of your tricks on the other soldiers. It might spice up our normal drills.”

“I have a better idea,” grinned Tamar. “Why don’t we have the princesses join us one day for drill? Let them pull their tricks on the other soldiers. It will be much more effective when our men learn by humiliation.”

“Providing our men survive,” laughed Galantor. “Thank you, Princess Alastasia. The leg feels fine now.”

“Always glad to help heal the wounds my sister inflicts,” grinned Alastasia.

“I have to head off to duty,” frowned Galantor. “It was fun training with both of you. I look forward to more grass chewing in the future.”

“Tomorrow?” asked Princess Alastasia.

“Tomorrow,” Galantor grinned as he nodded and waved.

“He took that well,” remarked Princess Alahara as Galantor ran across the grass and disappeared around the corner.

“You two have become worthy opponents,” smiled Tamar. “You make up for your small stature by outsmarting your opponents. Plus your speed is phenomenal.”

“We are grateful for your tutoring,” interjected Alastasia. “It is fun to unwind this way after a day’s worth of lessons at the Society of Mages.”

“How are your lessons coming?” asked Tamar. “I have heard nothing about it. I would have expected to hear rumors circulating about your magical deeds.”

“As junior members of the Society of Mages,” frowned Alahara, “we are beneath notice of the illustrious senior mages. To talk about us would be to give us too much credit in their eyes.”

“They are not all that bad, Alahara,” laughed Alastasia as she shook her head. “It is true that we are not treated as full members of the society, but that is something that we must earn. I look forward to proving my skills to the senior members.”

“If you prove your magical skills in the same fashion as your martial skills,” chuckled Tamar, “I want to watch. Are you learning anything?”

“We are learning a great deal,” nodded Alastasia. “No single mage will tutor us for an extended period of time, but we have managed to get most of them to devote small segments of time to our education.”

“That actually works to our advantage,” interjected Alahara. “We get to see the same spells from many different angles, and we get taught a very broad spectrum of spells. It’s like have forty personal tutors.”

“And none of them fully understands the extent of our knowledge,” added Alastasia. “When it comes time for us to be tested, our tutors will be the most surprised of all. None of them will expect the level of knowledge that we have gained in a short period of time. They will be impressed.”

“How are the other junior students doing?” asked Tamar. “Are they learning as much?”

“Hardly,” Alahara shook her head. “They have each latched on to one senior mage and not looked any further. They spend most of the day in the library reading about magic instead of learning it.”

“You two are special,” Tamar smiled warmly as he spotted two boys walking along the street outside the park. “I have to run also. I will meet you here again tomorrow.”

“Alright,” smiled Alastasia as she waved.

“That was fun,” Alahara said as she bent down and picked up her staff.

“That is Eltor and Caldal that Tamar is talking to,” commented Alastasia as she nodded across the park. “What are they doing in Morada?”

Princess Alahara rose and stared across the park. She saw Tamar guiding Eltor and Caldal around the corner.

“I don’t know,” frowned Alahara. “They didn’t even come over to say tayo.”

“Pay no mind to them,” came a female voice behind the princesses. “You are too young for boys.”

Alahara and Alastasia whirled around to see a slender elven woman standing near the path to the Royal Tree. She had a wry smile on her lips.

“Which one of you is Alahara?” the woman asked.

“I am,” answered the older sister. “Who are you?”

“I am your Aunt Kanis,” answered the woman. “Queen Alycia is my sister.”

The princesses looked at each other in confusion, but it was Alastasia who spoke, “I have never heard of you. I did not know the queen had a sister.”

“The queen?” mocked Kanis as she turned and headed towards the entrance to the palace. “Can you not even come to call her mother? I know that you were raised in the land of the humans, but that is no reason to show disrespect for your elders. I shall have to speak to your mother about your manners.”

“I meant no disrespect,” frowned Princess Alastasia as the princesses followed Kanis. “We often call her mother.”

“Well,” Kanis shook her head, “you will learn the elven ways soon enough now that I will be staying in the palace again.”

“You are moving into the palace?” frowned Alahara as she gazed at the small pack the woman was wearing. “Is that pack your only belongings?”

“Hardly,” Kanis replied dryly. “My cart broke down on the trail here. It made no sense for me to struggle with it when there are two strong princesses with nothing better to do. Run off to the road heading to the village of Florentia. You will find my broken cart not far from the edge of the city. Bring it back here and see that my belongings get up to my chambers.”

Alahara’s brow knitted in a deep frown, and she was about to tell the woman to go and get her own belongings. Alastasia saw the guards bow slightly to Kanis and admit her to the lift. She placed her hand calmingly on Alahara’s arm to silence her. Kanis turned around and smiled woodenly at the girls as the lift began to rise. The princesses watched her ascend into the Royal Tree before speaking.

“Who does she think she is?” Alahara snapped. “Do we look like servants?”

“She is rude and pretentious,” agreed Alastasia, “but we will only complicate things by fighting with her. If she truly is our aunt, and I suspect that she is by the way the guards bowed to her, I have no wish to give her cause to complain to mother about us.”

“You intend to go and fetch her belongings?” balked Alahara.

“Yes,” nodded Alastasia. “Actually I had planned for you to help me. We will get her stuff so that she can’t complain about us, then we can avoid her in the future. Would you rather go with me to get her belongings, or go up into the palace and visit with her?”

“Visit with her?” Alahara’s lips curled in disgust. “I will go with you, but don’t expect me to move too fast. I am in no hurry to return here.”

“Me neither,” chuckled Alastasia. “I hope we don’t have any other aunts coming to visit.”

“I wonder why Queen Alycia never mentioned her sister,” pondered Princess Alahara as the girls headed for the edge of the city.

“Think about it,” chuckled Alastasia. “Does Aunt Kanis seem like someone that you would brag about being related to? She has all the warmth of a swamp snake.”

“Well put,” laughed Alahara. “Even when she tried to smile her face looked like she had just swallowed something dreadful. Do you think our mother was ever like that?”

“No,” Alastasia shook her head. “Even when she was under Karaza’s spell she was not that bad. Remember how pleasant she was when we first met?”

“Before she slapped me,” sighed Alahara.

“Be fair, Alahara,” chided Alastasia. “That was Karaza’s doing.”

“I know,” conceded Alahara, “but it still hurt. At least I didn’t try to kill her.”

“You brat!” gasped Alastasia as she playfully pushed her sister. “I did not try to kill her.”

“I know,” laughed Alahara, “but it still makes a great story. I can’t wait to tell it to your children.”

“You mean your children,” retorted Alastasia. “You’re the older one. You should get married first. I will observe how happy it makes you before I decide if I want to.”

“Have you ever thought about it?” Princess Alahara asked seriously. “Getting married and starting a family, I mean?”

“I used to,” admitted Alastasia, “but that was when I was MistyTrail. The Sakovans were like one big happy family. I don’t get the same feeling here, although I know it will take time.”

“I never thought about it until I met Rejji,” confided Alahara as they reached the edge of the forest and found the trail to Florentia.

“Do you still miss him?” asked Alastasia.

“I do,” Alahara nodded. “Rejji treated me nice when no one else cared about me. We became very close.”

“And now you are heir to the elven throne,” Alastasia pointed out. “I doubt the elves would take kindly to you marrying a human.”

“Maybe that is why Kaltara blessed me with a sister?” grinned Alahara. “You could become Queen of Elvangar.”

“Do you think the humans would accept an elf as Queen of Fakara?” frowned Princess Alastasia. “Don’t forget that Rejji is now the king.”

“I hadn’t thought about that,” frowned Alahara as the princesses made their way along the forest trail. “Why must everything be so complicated? I don’t want to be the queen of either country.”

“I don’t care much for the idea either,” shrugged Princess Alastasia. “Mother almost never leaves the palace. I would go mad living like that.”

The princesses lapsed into silence as they walked along the forest trail, each lost in thoughts of their future. It was that silence that saved their lives.

Alastasia heard something rustle along the trail ahead. Her arm automatically snaked out and gently caught Alahara’s hand. Alahara needed no verbal command to stop. The two princesses halted in the middle of the trail, their ears straining for sounds that were foreign to the forest. They heard a hushed voice, but the words were inaudible. The princesses looked at each other and nodded with suspicion. Normal travelers would have no need to speak in hushed tones.

Alahara silently moved to the right side of the trail and slipped into the forest. Alastasia went to the left and slid behind the trees. They both remained frozen for several minutes as they waited for another noise. They heard nothing. Finally, Alastasia wove an air tunnel to Alahara.

“I want you to create an air tunnel on the trail behind us,” Alastasia instructed. “Talk normally into it as if you are lecturing me on something. Walk the air tunnel along the trail until it passes us by. I will create another air tunnel to listen up ahead. Let’s see if we can find out who is up there and what they want.”

Alastasia did not need to hear a reply from her sister. She knew that Alahara would already be weaving the air tunnel. She changed the pressure in her own air tunnel and moved it forward along the trail. She listened intently as she moved the air tunnel around, trying to gauge the location of the hidden voices.

“Quiet,” a voice whispered. “Someone is coming.”

“Are they coming for the cart?” asked another voice.

“I said to be quiet,” reprimanded the first voice. “Just get your bows ready, and keep your mouth shut. Fire on my command.”

Alastasia frowned as she listened to the male voices. She heard Mistake’s voice pass along the trail near her and keep going. She waited patiently.

“Where are they?” asked a frantic voice. “I just heard them pass, but I did not see anyone.”

“Quiet!” urged the first voice.

“Quiet yourself,” said a third voice. “I am getting out of here. I think they are invisible.”

The third person turned and ran noisily. A moment later, the first voice cursed and also fled, followed shortly by another person. Alastasia still waited patiently as she tried to follow the noise of the retreating ambushers. Eventually, she lost the sound of them retreating. She redirected the air tunnel towards Alahara.

“I think they have all left,” she told her sister. “I am going to go forward along the trail, but I want you to move forward through the forest. Be ready for anything.”

Alahara nodded and waved to her sister. Alastasia stepped onto the trail and moved slowly forward. As she rounded a bend in the trail, she saw the broken cart, one of its wheels resting at an odd angle. The horse appeared to be sleeping. Alastasia walked very slowly, her eyes scanning both sides of the trail. She reached the cart and knelt beside it. The wheel had come off the axle, but it did not appear to be broken. Alastasia waved to her sister to help her. Alahara exited the woods.

“There is no one in the woods,” remarked Princess Alahara. “What happened?”

“You walked your voice right past them,” explained Princess Alastasia. “That spooked them. There were three of them, but they fled because they thought we were invisible. Help me raise the cart so I can put the wheel back on.”

“Who were they?” asked Alahara as she lifted the cart. “What did they want?”

“There were three males,” answered Alastasia as she maneuvered the wheel. “They had planned to ambush us with bows.”

“With bows?” echoed Alahara. “Do you mean they were going to kill us?”

“That is what it sounded like,” nodded Alastasia as she pushed the wheel onto the axle. “I do not know if it was particularly us that they were waiting for, but they planned to ambush whoever came for the cart.”

“Bandits?” frowned Alahara as she let the cart down. “I wonder if they stole anything from the cart?”

Alastasia rose and brushed her hands off. She shrugged and peered into the back of the cart at the chests and packs piled there. Frowning, she climbed onto the cart and tried to open one of the chests.

“It’s locked,” Alastasia reported. “It doesn’t look like anyone tried to pry it open.”

“This makes no sense,” frowned Alahara. “If they were bandits, why not just take the cart and be done with it?”

“Maybe they weren’t smart enough to fix the wheel?” shrugged Princess Alastasia. “I don’t mind pondering on this, but I am loathe to do it here. Let’s get this cart into the city and worry about the ambushers later.”

“I agree, “ nodded Princess Alahara. “You take the cart for a while. I want to shadow you from behind. When we enter the city, I will catch up.”

“I am on my way,” declared Princess Alastasia as she grabbed the reins and woke the horse.

The horse started and began moving along the trail. Alastasia reached into her pouch and extracted a Sakovan star. She held the star in one hand as she led the horse with the other. When they reached the city of Morada, Alahara moved forward and walked alongside her sister.

“Would you recognize their voices again?” asked Princess Alahara.

“I think so,” nodded Alastasia. “The first voice I would definitely recognize. The other two did not say much, but I still might know them if I heard them again.”

“So,” pondered Alahara, “were the bandits poised to kill Aunt Kanis, or us? Or did they not care as long as they killed someone?”

“I don’t know,” Alastasia shook her head. “I do not know how bandits work in Elvangar. Maybe we should ask Avalar?”

“I am hesitant to mention it to our father,” frowned Princess Alahara. “He might think that we sound disrespectful to Aunt Kanis. Let’s ask Tamar.”

“Alright,” agreed Alastasia.

Neither sister spoke for the rest of the trip to the Royal Tree. When they reached the lift, they unhitched the horse. One of the guards took the horse and led it away while two of the other guards pushed the cart onto the lift. Alahara and Alastasia got on the lift and rode it upward. The lift stopped halfway up, and two guards pulled the cart off. The princesses stayed on and rode the lift to the top. They started walking to their chambers when they heard the shouting from the throne room. They looked at each other curiously. Without a word spoken, both sisters turned and crept along the corridor towards the throne room. They halted before entering the room as they heard their father’s voice.

“She is not what we need to deal with at this time,” yelled the king. “Why did you invite her to the palace?”

“I didn’t invite her,” answered the queen. “She just arrived. Kanis is like that. She only shows up when you don’t want her to.”

“Well tell her to leave,” scowled Avalar.

“I can’t do that,” retorted Alycia. “She is my sister after all. She claims that I refused to see her years ago when she visited. I cannot now tell her to leave.”

“That refusal was probably the work of Karaza,” replied the king. “It was perhaps the only sane thing that mage ever did.”

“It probably was Karaza,” conceded Alycia, “but she will still think that I refused her entry. If I tell her to leave now, she will surely believe that I hate her. I don’t want her to feel that way.”

“Then I will tell her to leave,” stormed the king. “I don’t care if she hates me. I do not want to have to deal with her with everything else that is going on right now.”

“Why let her bother you at all,” sighed the queen. “She is living lower down the tree. You will never run into her. Forget that she is here, and concentrate on winning support for the war. How is the council leaning today?”

“You are trying to change the subject,” replied the king.

“Yes, I am,” the queen said with a hint of humor. “Still, I do want to know how the council sits on this issue.”

“They vacillate,” sighed Avalar as his voice lowered to a normal speaking tone. “The citizens’ demonstrations are not helping any. Just when I think I have won a few converts, the demonstrations sway them back to an undecided position.”

“Who is behind the demonstrations?” asked the queen.

“I wish that I could find out,” replied Avalar. “I am sure that if the demonstrations stopped, the council would support the war.”

“I have never seen you in a dither like this before,” commented Alycia. “You always were calm and purposeful before. Why is this time any different?”

“Because I feel like we are running out of time,” admitted the king. “My opponents will win not only if I lose the council vote, but also if they can delay the vote long enough for Vand to attack the humans. We will need time to get our armies in place before Vand strikes. If we are too late, we might as well stay home and prepare to defend Elvangar.”

“You could force the council to vote,” suggested Queen Alycia.

“I could,” agreed the king, “but I will not leave their vote to chance. Too much is at stake. Besides, I have not gotten the ships ready yet. We don’t have enough ships to get our armies to the battle.”

“Use human ships,” shrugged the queen.

Avalar stopped pacing and stared at the queen. Slowly his face split into a large grin. He crossed the room and hugged Alycia and then kissed her.

“Of course!” exclaimed the elven king. “Why didn’t I think of that? There were quite a few ships in Angragar, and I understand that the Torak has a fleet of his own.”

“That will require human seamen to sail through the gates of Elvangar,” warned the queen. “Maybe that is not such a great idea after all. It might harden the council against this war.”

“It might,” conceded the king, “or might show them that the humans already know where Elvangar is and have no plans for its conquest.”

“Or you could sail for Angragar with a shipload of seamen to pilot the human ships back here and then load your armies,” suggested the queen.

“That would also work,” nodded Avalar. “I must make contact with Emperor Marak. His advice would be most welcome on this subject.”

“Who will herd the council while you are gone?” asked Queen Alycia.

King Avalar released his wife and walked to the railing. He gazed down upon the city of Morada in silence. Finally, he turned and faced the queen.

“I must talk with our daughters,” the king stated. “Have they returned from their lessons today?”

“I have not seen them,” answered the queen. “Shall I go look for them?”

“No,” Avalar responded. “I will go myself.”

Princess Alahara and Princess Alastasia did not want to get caught snooping on their parents. They immediately turned around and sped silently away from the throne room. When Avalar finally found them, they were sitting casually in Alahara’s room talking. They looked up in surprise as their father entered.

Chapter 9

Spies

King Avalar entered the chambers of Princess Alahara. The two princesses were sitting on the floor in a meditative state. The king closed the door and walked to the bed. He sat down and gazed adoringly at his two precious daughters.

“Father!” exclaimed Princess Alastasia, as if just coming out of a mediation trance. “How nice of you to stop by.”

Avalar merely smiled.

“You do not often come by to just stare at us, Father,” stated Princess Alahara. “Is there something on your mind?”

“There is,” replied the king, as if lost in his own thoughts. “I need to speak with the Torak. I understand that the Khadorans have a spell that allows this. Is that true?”

“It is true, “ answered Alahara. “It is called an air tunnel.”

“Will you create one for me?” asked Avalar.

“Alahara didn’t say that we knew the spell,” frowned Alastasia as she gently laid her hand on her sister’s arm to halt any verbal response. “You assume a great deal.”

“I assume little,” grinned the king. “You girls think as I do. Curiosity is at the core of your being. There is no possibility of you not knowing how to cast the spell. Do you not trust me?”

“We trust you with our lives,” Alahara answered quickly.

“But that does not mean that we won’t test you to understand you better,” chuckled Alastasia. “Are you planning a trip to Angragar? Alahara and I would like to go with you if you go.”

“I should be going to Angragar with armies of elven archers,” frowned the king, “but I fear that the people are not behind me on this. I need to let the Torak know of my difficulties. He must be aware that our arrival may be later than expected.”

“You do not sound as though there is any doubt about the elves joining in the war,” stated Alahara. “Is it wise to promise the Torak that our armies are coming if you are unsure?”

“I am not unsure,” countered the king. “The elves will join the Torak in this war, whether the people want to or not, but I will take the extra time needed to sway their opinions. They must understand that we have no choice.”

“Or you will lose your throne,” Alastasia nodded sadly. “Will the army refuse to march if the people don’t want this war?”

“Some of them might,” Avalar nodded, “but most of them will follow me. I should not trouble the two of you with such thoughts. You need to concentrate on your lessons. You will rule Elvangar one day. You must be ready to accept that responsibility.”

“Not trouble us with such thoughts?” echoed Princess Alahara. “How can you say that we need to be prepared to lead our people one minute, and that we should study magic the next? If you truly want us prepared to rule, then you need to start preparing us.”

“Alahara is right,” interjected Princess Alastasia. “We are not without talents of our own. Why are we not involved in your plans to prepare Elvangar for war? You do not confide in us when you should.”

King Avalar stared at the princesses for a long silent moment. His brow creased as if weighing some weighty decision. Finally, he smiled and nodded.

“You are correct,” Avalar said. “I have been treating you as if you were small children, yet it was the two of you who rescued me from the Island of Darkness. I guess that I have been trying too hard to protect you, but that is not the wisest path. You have both shown great intelligence, and you know how to handle danger properly. I must have more faith in you.”

“So you will tell us all that is bothering you?” prompted Princess Alahara, hoping to learn more about Aunt Kanis and why her father was at odds with her.

“I shall,” nodded the king. “Some people have an uncanny sense of danger. I am one of them, and I suspect that the two of you are as well. The reactions of the elven people to this coming war are stronger than they should be. While some elves can always be expected to voice support for continued isolation, I do not believe the current numbers that have been demonstrating against this war are anywhere near what they should be.”

“You think someone is riling up the people?” asked Alahara.

“Exactly,” nodded the king.

“We could help you find out who it is,” offered Princess Alastasia.

“You already are,” grinned Avalar. “One of the reasons for you attending the Society of Mages is to find out if anyone is acting against me. I felt it was better if I did not plant seeds of doubt within your minds, but time is running out.”

“You suspect mages of this?” asked Alahara.

“I suspect that spells of compulsion are being used,” confirmed the king.

“For what purpose?” frowned Princess Alastasia. “That sounds rather nefarious just to avoid a war that they will probably not partake in.”

“You are perceptive,” smiled the king. “I have dwelled on that question for some time now. The only gain that I could think of makes no sense at all.”

“To seize power in Elvangar,” interjected Princess Alahara. “Why do you think it makes no sense?”

King Avalar’s eyebrows rose in surprise. He shook his head as his lips split in a grin. “You two always amaze me. It makes no sense because there is now a clear line of succession. If they wanted to seize control of the country, they should have done it before the two of you rescued me. Their battle is that much harder now with four of us.”

“They did try it before,” Alastasia pointed out. “Just because they failed when it should have been easier does not mean that they will quit when the going gets harder.”

“They?” frowned the king. “You are talking as if Karaza had confederates. Have you discovered something at the Society of Mages?”

“No,” Alastasia shook her head, “but we will look harder now that we are aware of why we are there.”

“You are also there to learn about magic,” declared the king. “My primary purpose in getting you into the Society of Mages was to have you educated. I am still hesitant to have you actively involved in uncovering the plotters. It is not because I doubt your skills, but because you are too dear to me to lose you. Perhaps I am wrong in now involving you.”

Alahara and Alastasia exchanged quick glances, as if each were asking the other an unvoiced question. They nodded in unison.

“I think someone tried to kill us today,” Princess Alahara declared. “We were not going to mention it to you for fear of upsetting you, but I think we all need to be open with each other during these trying times.”

“Tell me about it,” frowned the king, his hands tightening into fists.

Princess Alahara related the entire story from the end of the practice session with Tamara and Galantor until their return to the Royal Tree.

“You are to avoid contact with Kanis,” Avalar said bitterly. “You are both princesses of Elvangar. You owe no obedience to that woman. Stand up to her if she tries to control you.”

Will you kick her out of the palace?” asked Princess Alahara.

“Not this time,” replied the king. “I was just about ready to do so, but now I want to keep an eye on her. When she threatens my family, she has overstepped her bounds. She should expect no mercy from me.”

The three members of the Royal Family sat silently for some moments, the tenseness in the air bearing down on all of them. Eventually, the younger princess spoke.

“Maybe Alahara and I can infiltrate the protesters to find out who is behind the demonstrations,” suggested Alastasia. “That might be one way that we can help.”

“Tamar is already taking care of that,” replied Avalar.

“Eltor and Caldal?” Alahara asked in surprise. “Is that why they are in Morada?”

“You do not miss much,” smiled the king. “Your two friends from Etta volunteered to join the protesters. Tamar meets with them daily. So far they have not managed to discover anything. I fear that time is running against us.”

“And as time goes by,” frowned Alahara, “the conspirators will get more daring to achieve their goals. Alastasia and I can take care of ourselves when things get hectic, but I fear for mother. They may try to kill her.”

“I will see that she has guards at all times,” nodded Avalar. “Create the air tunnel for me now. I must speak to Marak and then meet with members of the council.”

* * *

Alahara and Alastasia decided to split up the next day at the Society of Mages. Their thought was that they could cover twice as many mages in the same amount of time and still get their lessons in for the day. The elven mages who belonged to the Society of Mages were the best magicians in all of Elvangar. Most of them, male and female alike, had attitudes reflective of an elite people. They looked at the most basic chores in life as beneath them and always had others serve them. Some of the mages transferred that servant status onto the junior members of the Society, while others treated the students with a parental compassion. Maraton was one of the former.

Princess Alastasia tried hard not to grumble under her breath when Maraton ordered her to get him some food from the kitchen. She had been in the middle of learning a spell to mesmerize animals and had just begun practicing it when Maraton demanded that she stop. The squirrel chattered noisily and dashed away. It might be hours before she could find another subject to practice on.

As Alastasia stood in the kitchen ladling soup into a bowl, she heard several youths whispering at a table in the corner. She did not turn to look upon them, but she froze, her ears straining to listen to the voices. While she was unable to discern what the boys were saying, she knew for certain that the voices belonged to the ambushers from the previous day.

Alastasia placed the bowl of soup on the table in front of her and quietly wove an air tunnel and directed it to the table in the corner. She kept her back to the boys, who were facing away from her.

“The demonstration tomorrow will be the biggest yet,” declared the leader. “It is supposed to be peaceful like the others were, but we are going to change all that.”

“What are we going to do?” asked one of the younger boys.

“We are to start throwing stones at the guards,” explained the leader. “Encourage others around you to do the same.”

“Are you crazy?” asked one of the boys. “The soldiers will attack us if we throw stones at them. I am not about to be maimed for this job. It doesn’t pay that well.”

“We won’t be hurt,” assured the leader. “Once you get others throwing stones at the soldiers, move to the rear of the mob. When the soldiers attack, run. Let the others get hurt.”

“What’s the point?” asked one of the younger lads. “Why start a fight?”

“Because that is what we are being paid to do,” scowled the leader. “Since when have you been choosy about the tasks that we are assigned? After our failure yesterday, we are lucky to still be getting paid. Just do what I tell you to do. Finish eating and meet me outside. I want to check on something before I leave here.”

Princess Alastasia swiftly dropped the air tunnel and grabbed the bowl of soup. She slipped out of the kitchen before the leader had risen from his chair. Out in the corridor, the princess moved to the first corridor and ducked into it. Moments later the leader of the boys exited the kitchen and walked towards the offices of the mages. Alastasia waited a while before stepping out and following at a distance. The boy never looked back as he wandered the corridors. He walked up to a door and knocked loudly. A muted voice answered his knock, and the boy entered one of the offices and closed the door. Alastasia passed the door and noted the name on it. She continued walking and delivered the soup to Maraton.

“This soup is cold,” scowled Maraton. “Get me another. Be quick bringing it back this time.”

Princess Alastasia nodded meekly and left the room. Instead of going to the kitchen, she wandered through the corridors looking for her sister. It took her over half an hour to find Alahara and describe the conversation that she overheard.

“Who is the mage that the leader reported to?” asked Princess Alahara.

“Salfour,” answered Alastasia. “I had a session with him earlier today. He was not very enthusiastic about teaching me, but that is true of many of the mages here. What should we do now?”

“First we speak to Garl,” answered Alahara, “then we find Tamar. Garl knows the mages here better than we do. He will know what to do about Salfour. We must warn Tamar about the confrontation tomorrow. Many people will get hurt if the soldiers react the way that I think they will.”

“Let’s go,” urged Alastasia.

“What about Maraton’s soup?” asked Alahara.

“Let him get his own,” shrugged Alastasia as she headed for Garl’s office. “I am no servant.”

Alahara raced after Alastasia. When they reached Garl’s office, the old man was just entering it. They followed him through the door and closed it.

“This is hardly the proper way to enter the office of the Head Mage,” scolded Garl. “Even though you are relatives and princesses, here you are students, and you shall behave as such.”

“Today we are not students,” retorted Alahara. “Today we are spies. What can you tell us about Salfour?”

“Spies?” Garl asked as if he was surprised. “What do you mean?”

“Father explained it to us yesterday,” answered Alastasia. “I wish we had known sooner. We think Salfour is involved with the demonstrations.”

“And much more,” added Alahara. “He met with one of the boys who tried to kill us yesterday.”

“Kill you?” echoed Garl as concern etched into his voice. “How did they try to kill you?”

“With arrows on a trail outside the city,” replied Alahara. “That is not important right now. Alastasia recognized their voices and they were talking about the demonstration for tomorrow.”

“Then the leader went to visit Salfour,” nodded Alastasia. “What can you tell us about him?”

“He is mostly a loner,” frowned Garl as he moved to the chair behind his desk and sat down. “He has been at the Society for many years, yet he only speaks to one or two other mages.”

“Who would those one or two mages be?” asked Alahara.

“Let’s not be jumping in the pool before we know how deep it is,” warned Garl. “Just because this boy spoke to Salfour does not mean that Salfour is trying to overthrow the king. If you make unfounded accusations, no one will believe you when you do find the correct culprits.”

“We are not making accusations yet,” replied Alastasia, “but it would be helpful to narrow down the mages that we must spy on. Whom does Salfour talk to?”

“Levitor and Maraton,” answered Garl, “but I will not have you making any accusations against any of them without proof. If you do so, I will have you both expelled from the Society of Mages. Do I make myself clear?”

“Exceedingly clear,” frowned Princess Alahara. “I thought you were on our side? Why are you protecting them?”

“I am the Head Mage,” answered Garl, “and I take my responsibilities seriously. It is disturbing enough to think that any mage under my care would be involved in such a plot, but I demand proof before any public accusations are made. I will not see the reputation of the Society of Mages besmirched for anything less than the provable truth.”

“So how do we get this proof?” asked Princess Alahara. “We can’t just come out and ask them to confess.”

“What reason would there be for boys to be running around inside the Society building?” asked Princess Alastasia.

“Many of the mages have boys who do errands for them,” replied Garl. “It is quite a common practice.”

“Do you keep track of who they are?” asked Alahara.

“No,” answered Garl. “There has been no reason to.”

“What if something was stolen?” prompted Alahara. “Something valuable? What would you do?”

Garl’s eyes narrowed as he stared at Alahara. He sighed and shook his head.

“I would doubt that any of our members would resort to stealing,” answered Garl. “If something valuable was missing, I would ask the mages which servants they had into the building that day. Then I would investigate, but this is not a good plan.”

“Why not?” asked Alastasia. “We would learn the names of all of the boys who had been here today.”

“We might,” answered Garl, “but I suspect that if your suspicions are true, some of the mages would deny that anyone had been here today. One other result of this plan would be particularly nasty. Suspicion would immediately fall upon the six junior members. It might mean the end of the program.”

“Well,” frowned Alahara, “we must do something. Those boys are going to try to make the soldiers attack the protesters tomorrow. A lot of people are going to get hurt.”

“We must inform the army,” stated Garl. “They will know what to do.”

“We will take care of that,” Alastasia offered instantly. “Come on, Alahara. Let’s go.”

Princess Alahara looked quizzically at her sister, but she followed Alastasia, who hurried out of the office and out of the building.

“Hold on,” Alahara said as they reached the street. “Why are you rushing off? You dropped that conversation like a skillet with a red-hot handle. What is wrong with you?”

“What is wrong with me?” fumed Princess Alastasia. “Why were we wasting time talking to Garl? All he cares about is his precious Society of Mages. Never mind that mages are working to kill the entire Royal Family. Forget about citizens dieing in the street as the soldiers attack tomorrow. Dismiss everything as long as the Society of Mages’ reputation is left intact. How could you stand there talking to him any longer?”

“Wow,” Princess Alahara remarked with awe. “And I thought I was the one with the short temper. I have never seen you act this way. What is really bothering you?”

“I don’t know,” sighed Princess Alastasia as her eyes dampened. “This is just so frustrating. We should have killed those boys on the trail yesterday instead of trying to keep ourselves safe. Not only are they helping the mages to kill us, they are also going to get a lot of other people killed. I do not understand the elven way of dealing with problems. In the Sakova I would just have eliminated the threat.”

“You are going to go up against three of the mightiest mages in Elvangar by yourself?” asked Princess Alahara. “Think about what you are saying. We don’t even know for sure that Salfour and his associates are really involved in this. While the boy did go to his office, it is quite possible that Salfour merely uses the boy for errands and someone else is using him to provoke the riots. I am sorry, MistyTrail, but Garl is right on this. We need proof. Let’s talk to Tamar and see what he says.”

Princess Alastasia nodded silently, and Alahara led her away from the building. They headed towards the army offices to find Tamar. As they walked over the bridge that crossed the river running through the city, Alastasia gripped her sister’s arm tightly. Alahara stopped and turned to see what the problem was. She saw Princess Alastasia staring at three boys below the bridge on the banks of the river. The boys were gathering stones and putting them in small pouches.

“Those are the boys,” Alastasia whispered. “The tall one is the leader that visited Salfour today.”

“They are so brazen as to gather the stones in full daylight?” questioned Princess Alahara.

“Brazen?” shrugged Alastasia. “No one knows what is coming tomorrow except us. Who would find anything strange with boys gathering stones?”

“Let’s go talk to them,” suggested Alahara.

“Are you crazy?” asked Alastasia. “It is not like they will not recognize us.”

“Let’s see how they react to us,” retorted Alahara. “If they become extremely uncomfortable with our presence, we will know that we were their targets yesterday. That is a fact that we have not yet established. It is possible that they planned for someone else to come along.”

“Alright,” nodded Alastasia, “but only one of us will go. The other will remain here and be prepared to shield the one talking to them.”

“Fair enough,” agreed Alahara. “I will go talk to them.”

Princess Alahara backtracked off the bridge and found a path heading down to the riverbank. She walked up behind the boys and spoke loudly.

“Tayo,” called the princess. “A great day for playing in the river, isn’t it?”

The boys turned as one and stared at the princess. The two younger boys immediately ran off along the riverbank. The oldest boy stared, his mouth distorted as if he had eaten a particularly sour lituk.

“It is a nice day,” the boy finally answered. “You are one of the princesses, aren’t you?”

“I suppose,” Alahara frowned as she nodded. “I was hoping that you wouldn’t notice.”

The boy’s features showed alarm as his eyes narrowed. “Why would you say that?” he asked nervously.

“I don’t want to be a princess,” stated Alahara. “In fact, I don’t care much for living in Elvangar. Everyone I meet is afraid to talk to me because I am the princess, but I don’t care anything about any of that. I think I will run away, just like your friends did.”

“Really?” the boy asked with surprise. “They ran because they don’t like girls. They will get over it. Why would you run away? You have everything. You will be queen some day.”

“Not me,” laughed Alahara. “I am going to be on the first boat heading for Fakara when the war starts, and I am never coming back.”

“Never?” asked the boy. “But what if the war never happens? I mean there are a lot of people who don’t think we should be fighting for the humans. There may not be a war.”

“I hope there isn’t,” shrugged Alahara, “but I will find a way to leave in any event.”

“You aren’t for the war?” inquired the leader. “I thought all of the Royal Family would be for it.”

“Hardly,” laughed Alahara. “In fact, I might just protest the next time there is a demonstration.”

“I don’t believe you,” the boy retorted skeptically. “Even if you didn’t agree with the war, your father would not allow you to attend a protest.”

“Watch me,” countered Alahara. “The king does not own me. I bet a lot more people will come out against the war if I am there.”

“I heard there might be one tomorrow,” hinted the boy. “We’ll see if you show up.”

“If there is,” smiled Princess Alahara, “I will be there. You can count on it.”

“I have to go,” the boy said suddenly. “I will look for you at the protest.”

“What is your name?” Alahara shouted after the boy.

“Kara,” the boy shouted back as he entered the trail and disappeared.

Princess Alahara smiled and returned to the bridge where her sister waited for her.

“What was all that about?” asked Alastasia.

“I was just making friends,” grinned Alahara. “I have a plan for tomorrow. I will explain it later. Right now I must get back to the Society of Mages. You find Tamar and inform him of what we know. Ask him to meet us tonight in the palace.”

Chapter 10

Naming the Players

Princess Alahara raced to the Society of Mages. She avoided the busiest streets and kept herself to the alleyways. She slipped into the building without being seen and burst into Garl’s office without knocking. The Head Mage looked up with a deep frown on his face. His mouth opened to rebuke the princess, but Alahara held up her hand for silence.

“Berate me later for my horrible behavior,” the princess said quickly. “Right now you need to listen to the proof that I have brought you. We have no time to waste.”

“What are you talking about?” demanded Garl.

“If I am correct in my assumptions,” panted Alahara, “Salfour is about to have a visitor. We are going to listen in on the conversation.”

Princess Alahara walked to the window behind Garl’s desk. She leaned out and counted the windows from the corner of the building until she found Salfour’s office. She quickly wove an air tunnel and made it so that they could listen to what was said in the office.

“Please explain what you are doing,” prompted Garl. “I have never seen that particular spell. Who taught it to you?”

“The humans,” answered Princess Alahara as the sound of a knock on a door sounded. “We can discuss the spell later. Right now we need to listen.”

Garl nodded, but his puzzled frown indicated that he wanted an explanation. Princess Alahara ignored him as Salfour gave permission for his visitor to enter.

“Why are you back here?” snapped Salfour. “I told you that these meetings are to be kept limited.”

“This is important,” panted Kara. “I just ran into Princess Alahara down by the river.”

“Did she recognize you?” Salfour asked with alarm.

“Recognize me?” echoed the boy. “How could she? She has never seen me. I told you that we ran from the ambush without ever seeing them. The other boys got spooked and I was not going to stay there alone. She has never seen me before.”

Salfour sighed deeply. “Tell me what has caused you to come back here today,” he demanded.

“I want to renegotiate the fee for the protests,” declared Kara. “I can guarantee that thousands will show up tomorrow if you are willing to part with a little more gold.”

“Do not toy with me,” warned Salfour as sounds of choking came through the air tunnel. “Our deal is set in stone. What does meeting the princess have to do with this extortion attempt?”

“You don’t have to kill me,” choked Kara. “I was just trying to make some more gold. I have done good for you, haven’t I?”

“Speak,” demanded the mage. “What does this have to do with the princess?”

“She is coming to the protest tomorrow,” offered the boy. “She doesn’t believe in the war and wants to protest against it.”

“Are you a fool?” shouted Salfour. “She is the heir to the throne. There is no possibility of her being against the war that her father wants.”

“She doesn’t want to be queen,” argued the boy. “She hates it here in Elvangar because no one likes her. She plans to flee the first chance that she gets. She was planning on taking one of the ships going during the war, but she would leave sooner if the chance came up. Don’t you see? If one of the princesses is against the war, I could get thousands of people to come to the protest. That should be worth a bonus of some kind.”

“I cannot believe this,” Salfour said with uncertainty. “The king would not allow her to protest the war. It would surely defeat him and his cause.”

“She doesn’t care what the king wants,” the boy said adamantly. “She really hates it here. I could tell. She will be at the protest tomorrow. Mark my words.”

“And how did she find out that there is a protest tomorrow?” asked Salfour.

“I said that I had heard a rumor that there might be one,” answered Kara. “She said that she would be there. I will have a busy night tonight spreading the word about her coming. That should be worth a little more gold.”

“You will get nothing more until after the demonstration,” snarled Salfour. “If it is a huge success, you will be amply rewarded. If not, you had best be scarce around here. Now get out.”

“Where will Salfour go next?” Alahara whispered to Garl. “Will it be the office of Maraton or Levitor?”

“I do not know,” admitted Garl. “Can they hear through this spell you are casting?”

“Only if I allow it,” smiled Alahara, “and I am not allowing it right now.”

“Go two windows to the right,” instructed Garl.

Princess Alahara moved the end of the air tunnel two windows to the right. She waited in silence for some sound that would indicate the presence of someone in the office. She heard nothing.

“Maybe…” Garl began when a loud knock sounded on the door.

Someone snorted loudly and moved as if roused from slumber. A voice called for the visitor to enter.

“Come, Levitor,” said Salfour. “We need to talk to Maraton right away.”

“About what?” groused the sleepy Levitor.

“I don’t want to explain it twice,” growled Salfour. “Just come.”

Noises or someone moving around was all that was heard.

“Up one level and one window to the left,” instructed Garl. “I cannot believe what I am hearing.”

“Is it enough to take action?” asked Alahara as she adjusted the air tunnel to the proper window.

“Hardly,” frowned Garl, “although I now believe that those three are involved. All that we have heard is that they are paying boys to instigate the protests. That is hardly a criminal offense.”

“They knew about the ambush on Alastasia and me,” Alahara pointed out.

“I also know about it,” sighed Garl. “Does that mean that I ordered it?”

“Who is it?” a voice shouted in answer to the knock on the door.

“Me and Levitor,” came the answer as the door opened and two men shuffled into the room. “We have a problem or an opportunity. I am not sure which.”

“Shut the door and explain the problem,” instructed Maraton.

“Kara just came to visit me,” informed Salfour. “His purpose was to try to extort more gold out of me, but he delivered some interesting information.”

“Go on,” urged Maraton.

“It seems that one of the princesses does not care for life in Elvangar,” Salfour continued. “She plans to escape to the human lands. She is also against the war and plans to take part in the protest tomorrow.”

“What?” Maraton asked, his voice rising with disbelief. “Which princess?”

“Alahara,” answered Salfour. “She is the heir to the throne.”

“I don’t believe it,” Maraton said skeptically. “It is a ruse to infiltrate the organizers of the protests. You are to get rid of Kara and the others immediately.”

“I was skeptical at first, too,” admitted Salfour, “but this story rings true. She claims that she hates it here because no one likes her. She probably had many friends among the humans.”

“Then why is she against the war?” retorted Maraton. “If she likes the humans so much, she should want the elves to go save them.”

“The princesses did run away once before,” Levitor pointed out.

“They were imprisoned,” scowled Maraton. “They also came back with Avalar. I am telling you that it is a trick. Get rid of Kara and the others. I will not have them tied back to us. Staging protests is one thing, but Kara and his friends know that we tried to assassinate the princesses. You will get rid of those boys tonight. Do you understand me?”

“Do you mean kill them?” asked Levitor.

“No,” Maraton sighed as he shook his head, “buy them sweets. Of course I mean kill them. Are you a fool? Do you know what happens to people who try to overthrow the throne?”

“But they do not know about you or me,” Levitor pointed out. “Salfour has been their only contact.”

“Don’t be giving him any ideas,” scowled Salfour. “I will get rid of the brats, but this is going to destroy the chances of staying out of the war.”

“Get other organizers for the protests,” ordered Maraton. “I will not risk my life for three boys.”

“It is too late to get other organizers,” objected Salfour. “The council is starting to lean towards Avalar, and I suspect that he knows it. If tomorrow’s protest is weak, the king will strike and call for a vote.”

“Then cancel the protest until we can assure a good turnout,” countered Maraton. “We are too close to success to abandon this now.”

“We cannot even cancel the protest now,” Salfour shook his head. “Everyone has already been notified. If we tried to call it off, even a weaker demonstration would be the result. We have to go forward with it.”

“Wait a minute,” interrupted Levitor. “Even if the princess is trying to infiltrate the organization, she will still show up at the protest, right?”

“What are you thinking?” asked Maraton.

“Right now,” explained Levitor, “all she knows is that Kara and his friends are part of the organization. So what?”

“So they will squeeze the boys for information and they will discover that Salfour has been paying them,” scowled Maraton. “We cannot afford for that to happen.”

“So it won’t,” smiled Levitor. “The boys are to start a riot at the protest, aren’t they? People are going to get hurt, right? We just have to make sure that the princess is one of those killed in the riot tomorrow.”

“Along with the three boys,” Maraton nodded in agreement. “Now that is a plan that I like. I will leave the details to you, Levitor. See that it happens.”

“Me?” asked Levitor. “Why not Salfour? This is his mess.”

“Because Salfour will be busy looking for new organizers,” smiled Maraton. “He knows how to find the dregs in this city.”

“And what will you be doing?” asked Salfour as he brushed off the taunt.

“I have a meeting tonight with Kanis,” replied Maraton. “Avalar is not happy having her in the palace. We have to make our move soon, or we will miss our chance. The Royal Family must die this week.”

“Enough,” groused Garl as the meeting broke up. “I have never heard such disgusting talk in all my years.”

“Not even from Karaza?” asked Alahara as she dropped the air tunnel.

“Not even from Karaza,” replied Garl. “Oh, Karaza was evil. I grant you that, but he tried to use the laws to complete his nefarious schemes. These fools have a total disregard for our society. They would not only assassinate the Royal Family, but they would destroy Elvangar in order to rule it.”

“So what do we do now?” asked Alahara.

“I must find mages that I can trust,” answered Garl. “It will be dangerous to go up against those three alone.”

“I thought you were the most powerful mage in Elvangar?” asked the princess. “Why do you need help?”

“Because I do not wish to destroy Morada in the process of capturing those three renegades,” answered the Head Mage. “Do not underestimate their power. If they are cornered, they will seek to destroy everything around them.”

“You are the Head Mage,” frowned Princess Alahara as she turned to leave. “It is not my business to tell you how to conduct yourself. At least you finally believe in the truth.”

“You do not seem to be satisfied,” frowned Garl. “You are a headstrong young woman, Alahara. Do not do something foolish that will affect the lives of thousands of elves. Maraton and the others will face justice. Be patient and believe in me.”

“I will try,” Alahara said with an attitude as she walked out the door.

The princess made her way to the Royal Tree, her mind fuming with the lack of action on Garl’s part. While she was expecting Tamar to show up later that night, she was surprised to find that he had already arrived. Princess Alastasia called to Alahara as she entered the quarters reserved for the princesses. Alahara entered Alastasia’s room and saw that Tamar and Avalar were already there.

“You do not waste time with your spying tasks,” smiled the king. “I understand that you have identified the boys who tried to attack you yesterday. Alastasia also told me that Salfour might be mixed up in this in some way. Is that true?”

“In some way?” Princess Alahara replied a little too brusquely. “I am sorry,” she apologized in a softer tone. “I do not mean to snap at you, Father. Salfour is not only involved with the protests, but he, along with two others, are planning on assassinating the Royal Family.”

“That is a serious accusation,” frowned the king. “I am not doubting your word, but what proof do you have?”

“I just came from the Society of Mages,” answered Alahara. “I let Garl listen in to conversations that just took place there. Salfour, Levitor, and Maraton are behind all of these troubles. If anyone doubts my word, I am sure they will accept the word of the Head Mage of the Society of Mages.”

“They admitted their crimes?” asked Tamar.

“Among themselves,” nodded Alahara. “I used an air tunnel to listen into the conversation. Garl heard everything. I used his office to spy on them. Tomorrow when the protest turns violent, they plan to kill the three boys and me. They think that I am trying to infiltrate their organization so they decided that the boys must die so that they cannot lead anyone back to the Society.”

“And what did Garl say about all this?” asked Tamar.

“That is the frustrating part,” frowned Alahara as she caught her sister’s eye. “There is no doubt that he believes everything now, but his response is hesitancy. I think he is afraid of the rogue mages. I fear that he will do nothing.”

“Then you do not understand Garl very well,” smiled the king. “There is nothing that Garl fears, but he is slow and deliberate in his methods.”

“But we cannot afford to go slow,” objected Alahara. “While Salfour and Levitor almost bought my ruse about being disenchanted with Elvangar, Maraton did not. He saw through it immediately. He knows that they must act quickly or risk discovery. I think that they may be willing to take a greater risk now. Perhaps I was wrong to stir up this hornet’s nest.”

“Do not second guess yourself,” comforted the king. “Was there anything in their words to tie Kanis into all of this?”

“Maraton is meeting with her tonight,” nodded Alahara. “He fears that you will kick her out of the palace, making their move that much harder. He said that they must strike within the week.”

“You have done exceedingly well,” smiled the king. “No matter how much I ask of you two, you always deliver more. It is by Kaltara’s grace that you were both spared in that shipwreck. The people of Elvangar will flourish under your rule.”

“If Elvangar survives that long,” sighed Alastasia. “Everything seems to be conspiring against us.”

“Nonsense,” retorted Avalar. “Alahara, can you attend the protest tomorrow and remain safe?”

“How did you know that I was planning to go to the protest?” asked Alahara. “I said nothing about that.”

“Are you the only princess who knows how to use an air tunnel?” grinned Alastasia. “You didn’t think I would listen in to my sister’s conversation with a boy?”

“You brat!” laughed Alahara. “I hope I get the chance to repay you.”

“You are thinking of letting her go?” Tamar frowned with disbelief. “It is much too dangerous. That crowd is going to get out of hand.”

“And you let her drag you to the Island of Darkness?” chuckled Avalar. “I think we both must accept the fact that the princesses can take care of themselves. That does not mean that I will not be worrying, but I will no longer try to protect them by isolating them.”

“I can keep myself safe,” declared Princess Alahara.

“I will be going as well,” stated Princess Alastasia. “What do you want us to do?”

The king’s eyebrow rose as he looked at Alastasia, but he did not object.

“I think we need to develop a plan for tomorrow,” answered the king. “One of the things we need to do tonight can be done right here. I want to learn the air tunnel spell.”

“I can teach you that,” offered Alastasia.

“Good,” nodded Avalar, “that will leave Alahara with time to visit Aunt Kanis.”

“Visit Aunt Kanis?” echoed Alahara. “Do I have to?”

“Yes,” grinned the king. “I want you to be very friendly to her. Convince her that you hate it in Elvangar. Let it slip that you are going to the protest tomorrow. Basically,” the king continued, “I want you to sell her the attitude that you presented to Kara. I think that Kanis will convince Maraton of your sincerity when they meet later tonight. That may buy us some more time to think about what needs to be done.”

“Why would Kanis believe me when Maraton does not?” asked Alahara.

“Kanis is a vain creature,” explained the king. “She will reason that anyone who tells her how beautiful and intelligent she is must be telling the truth, therefore, she will believe everything that you say.”

“Was Mother ever like that?” frowned Alastasia.

“No,” chuckled Avalar. “Alycia has never been like that. It is hard to believe that they are sisters. Even when she was under Karaza’s spell, Karaza was not able to control her completely. I am sure that he found that very frustrating.”

“Let me get this over with,” shrugged Princess Alahara. “I don’t want to miss too much of this planning session. I am sure that I will have some ideas to contribute to it.”

Princess Alahara left the room and headed for the lift. She closed her eyes and pictured Aunt Kanis on the ride down to the proper level. By the time she reached her aunt’s chambers, Alahara was ready for mischief. She knocked on the door and Kanis replied with permission to enter. The princess walked in and closed the door.

“Are you lost?” quipped Kanis. “Why are you here?”

“Shouldn’t I want to know my relatives better?” smiled Alahara as she gazed around the room. “Why are your quarters on such a low level? Surely you deserve better than this.”

Kanis cocked her head and stared at the princess, trying to determine if she was being mocked or not.

“I shall speak to Mother about this in the morning,” Alahara declared seriously. “Avalar has no right to treat you this way.”

“Avalar?” questioned Kanis. “You do not call him Father?”

“Hardly,” Alahara snickered. “If I knew him well before we rescued him from the Island of Darkness I would have saved myself the trip. He doesn’t care for me. To him I am just a status symbol. All he cares about is power.”

“And you don’t care about power,” Kanis replied skeptically. “Please, spare me this little drama of yours.”

“No, I don’t,” Alahara replied adamantly. “I can find no fun in living in a tree watching elves run around the city. In Fakara I had real friends, and they were friends who truly cared for me. I haven’t found an elf yet who is worth knowing. Mother comes the closest to being a friend. I was hoping that you would be different, being her sister, but I guess the elves are all made from the same mold. I won’t trouble you any longer.”

The woman’s face clouded over with confusion as Alahara turned to leave. She moved quickly across the room and put her hand on the door so that Alahara could not open it.

“Stay,” Kanis said softly. “Come sit down. I want to get to know you better.”

Alahara hesitated for a moment and then finally shrugged and walked across the room and sat in a chair. Kanis smiled pleasantly as she sat next to the princess.

“I did not mean to be rude,” apologized Kanis, “but I had heard that you were much like Avalar. I am sure that you realize that the king does not care for me much.”

“Who does he care for?” quipped Alahara. “I sometimes think his years in the prison must have changed him a great deal because I hear stories about how great a king he was. You must have known him in his earlier days. Was he different?”

“He was at first,” nodded Kanis, “but his attitude is not the product of imprisonment. He turned nasty long before you were born. I fear his attitude has rubbed off on my sister. I do not feel very welcome in the palace.”

“Don’t say that,” frowned Alahara. “Mother sticks up for you. I heard them arguing last night. It was Avalar that demanded that you be housed down here. He does not even want you in the palace, but he gave into Mother after a fight.”

“Alycia fought for me?” Kanis reacted with surprise. “Really? Then why did she refuse to see me when Avalar was imprisoned?”

“You had not heard about that?” asked Alahara. “Mother was under the spell of an evil magician. She never even knew that you had come to visit. It was Karaza that had you turned away.”

“But she has not seen me this trip either,” complained Kanis.

“Avalar has forbidden it,” shrugged Alahara. “He would have a seizure if he knew that I was here now, but I heard how intelligent and beautiful you were, and I just had to visit before I left Elvangar.”

Kanis beamed as she listened to the princess’s words. “Leave Elvangar?” she asked. “Where would you go?”

“Back to Fakara,” answered Alahara with a grin. “I have a boyfriend there.”

“But that land will be destroyed in the coming war no matter who wins,” Kanis pointed out. “That is hardly a land to call home.”

“It won’t be destroyed,” Alahara shook her head. “Avalar is making more out of this war than he needs to. I think he needs the war to feel more important because he has been gone for so long. Maybe he thinks the people will not accept him as king unless there is some crisis to rally to. The protesters have the right of it. In fact, I will be protesting tomorrow. I can’t wait to see Avalar’s face when he sees me in the crowd.”

“You wouldn’t dare?” balked Kanis. “He would skin you alive.”

“He will not touch me,” scowled Alahara. “How will he explain to the people that he has forbidden his daughter the right held by all elves to speak out against the government? There is nothing that he can do.”

“He could have you jailed,” suggested Kanis.

“I have been in the jail here before,” shrugged Alahara. “It didn’t hold me the last time, and it won’t this time either.”

“You really think the humans can defeat Vand?” questioned Kanis. “The pictures that your father paint are rather bleak. He makes it sound like the humans will cease to exist. Perhaps he knows more about these things than your do.”

“Doubtful,” Alahara shook her head vigorously. “Vand does not scare me. I have been to the Island of Darkness twice already, and I am still alive and well. Why should I be afraid of some fool who allows a young woman to come onto his island and steal his most important prisoner? Does that sound like Vand needs to be feared? This war that Avalar is pushing is all a farce.”

“You are serious?” Kanis asked, her eyebrows rising in surprise.

“What’s not to be serious about?” asked Alahara. “Why don’t you come with me tomorrow to the protest? It will be fun.”

“I couldn’t,” Kanis shook her head.

“Sure you could,” urged Alahara. “Wouldn’t you love to see Avalar’s face when he saw us in the crowd. That would be priceless.”

“Maybe the one after tomorrow,” chuckled Kanis. “I really want to hear more about your views, but I have an appointment this evening. Why don’t we meet tomorrow after the protest? We could have a meal outside the palace and spend some time getting to know each other better. I would like that.”

“I would like that, too,” smiled Alahara. “Have fun at your appointment. I am going to see if I can get Alastasia to go with me tomorrow.”

“Does she feel the same way?” asked Kanis as she escorted the princess to the door.

“She does,” nodded Alahara, “but Avalar scares her. She is afraid to defy him, but I think I can talk her into it.”

“Well, good for you,” encouraged Kanis. “I like your attitude.”

Chapter 11

Setting the Stage

The Banyan Inn was the most expensive establishment in the elven city of Morada. Although the common room was elegant and airy, with open walls to the garden and musicians constantly playing soft music, the allure of the Banyan was its private dining rooms where intellectuals and dignitaries could meet in seclusion. Many of the rooms had separate entrances from the outside, and the staff was trained to be discreet.

Kanis opened the door to one of the private rooms and stepped inside. Maraton immediately rose and bowed slightly as she entered. Kanis smiled and nodded as she made her way across the small room. Maraton ushered Kanis to a chair and waited until she was seated before returning to his own chair.

“You are looking exceptionally radiant tonight,” opened Maraton.

“I feel positively wonderful,” beamed Kanis. “I think things are beginning to come to fruition.”

“We are making progress,” Maraton nodded distractedly as if he wished to dispense with protocol and small talk.

“More than progress,” grinned Kanis. “Our victory is in sight. I overheard some of the palace guards on the way out tonight. Avalar will announce in the morning that he is calling for a council vote on the war. The guards were ordered to construct a stage near the Royal Tree. Avalar will address the people about the war.”

“No,” frowned Maraton. “It is too soon. We are not ready yet.”

“Of course we are,” Kanis laughed. “Avalar does not realize how poorly his plan will fail.”

“We do not have the votes to stop him,” retorted Maraton. “Even if we did, the plan was to keep him from calling for a vote by dividing the council evenly. We must get him to leave Elvangar before we strike.”

“I disagree,” countered Kanis. “There is no reason to wish for Avalar to leave home. We have the power to crush him right here in Morada. By tomorrow night, the reign of Avalar will be over.”

The mage stared at Kanis as if she had gone insane. He shook his head in confusion as his hand clenched the knife before him. He abruptly jabbed the knife into the table and sighed heavily. The knife handle vibrated, and Kanis stared at it with raised eyebrows.

“You are much too tense, Maraton,” smiled Kanis.

“I have reasons to be tense,” scowled the mage. “This is not what we had planned. Things are starting to unravel.”

“Unravel?” echoed Kanis. “I do not think so. The protest tomorrow will be the dagger plunge that finishes Avalar. He will have already announced the council vote, so he will have no chance to delay. It will all be over before he realizes what has happened.”

“What are you talking about?” frowned Maraton. “While the protest will be large and bloody, there are other things afoot that you know nothing about. Princess Alahara has been snooping around. Yesterday she met with one of the lads who organized the protest. She tried to make him believe that she was joining the protesters, but I can see through her. She is trying to infiltrate us.”

“You are such a poor judge of character,” Kanis laughed. “And you are paranoid. Why do you think Alahara is trying to infiltrate your group?”

“She is the heir to the throne,” Maraton said as if he were explaining something obvious to a simpleton. “No one with half a brain would believe that Alahara would protest the war. She is of her father’s blood. Besides, she was raised in the land of the humans. She of all people would want the elves to save her friends.”

“Sometimes I wonder if mages are really smarter than everyone else,” smirked Kanis. “Or is it just that all of their brains are focused on one small area of thought, and all of the rest of their head is simply filled with mush?”

“Are you trying to say something?” Maraton replied brusquely.

“I am,” nodded Kanis. “You do not know how to evaluate people. Alahara loathes her father. She laments the day that she rescued him from the Island of Darkness. She hates Elvangar and is planning on escaping at the first opportunity. Now, what were you saying about people with a half a brain?”

“How do you know this?” balked Maraton.

“I am her aunt,” shrugged Kanis. “She confides in me. In fact, Alastasia feels the same way, but the younger one does not have the fortitude to stand up to the king. Alahara does.”

“Talk is cheap,” scowled Maraton. “She may try to impress her aunt with her courage, but I still don’t believe it. Why would she want to leave Elvangar when she will be queen one day?”

“For a man,” Kanis grinned. “The young are often foolish about such things, but what do we care for her reasons? We only care about Avalar’s downfall.”

“Alright,” mused Maraton, “I can believe the part about her wanting to leave Elvangar for a lover, but then she would be even more a supporter of the war than Avalar is. She has more to lose when Vand attacks.”

“Not according to her,” countered Kanis. “She does not see Vand as this great omnipotent force. She does not think that the humans will have any problem defeating Vand without the help of the elves.”

“Then she is deluded,” snapped the mage. “Vand is powerful. Blood will flow freely over the human lands. While all of the kings and leaders of the humans are slaughtered, no one will even get close to Vand. She is a fool.”

“Is she?” retorted Kanis. “She has been close to Vand twice already. She has moved around the Island of Darkness as if it were her home. She even broke into the temple and stole Avalar from the dungeons. As for knowing the strength of the humans, she has lived with them all of her life. Who are you to judge their chances in the coming war better than her?”

Maraton sat in silence for some moments contemplating the words of the queen’s sister. Servants came into the room, and the mage ordered two expensive meals. He waited for them to leave before speaking.

“I must figure out what all of this mean to our plans,” he said softly. “Alahara is slated to die at the protest tomorrow.”

“No,” Kanis said adamantly. “That would spoil everything. Avalar would gain the sympathy of the people for his loss. Besides, she is on our side. Think about it. She is against this war, and she has the credentials to be heard. Instead of killing her, we need to get her to address the people. When she is done talking, not only will everyone be against this useless war, they will look upon Avalar as weak.”

“Weak?” echoed Maraton. “Because he cannot control his own daughter?”

“That and more,” nodded Kanis. “He will also appear weak because he languished in prison for decades. He had to wait for his young daughter to come and rescue him. Properly framed, it will also make Alycia appear too weak to rule. After all, she sat by and did nothing for close to twenty years.”

“The only one looking good in all of this will be Alahara,” frowned Maraton.

“And she will be leaving for the human lands,” grinned Kanis. “This will be much easier than we had planned. I will be forced to step in to keep the reign of Kieran going.”

“What if she decides not to leave?” asked the mage.

“Then we eliminate her,” shrugged Kanis. “I do not think she will stay. She has no love for the elves.”

“Then we need to pressure the council members for a vote against the war tomorrow,” nodded Maraton. “The protest must be large and violent before Avalar speaks. Do you think Alahara could be convinced to speak against her father?”

Kanis laughed heartily. “One of the main reasons that she wants to be at the protest tomorrow is to embarrass Avalar. Will she speak if given the chance? I guarantee it.”

“Excellent,” smiled Maraton. “I will see that she gets her chance. I am afraid that I must forego the meal. I have many people to speak to about the changes. I only hope that I can get to all of them in time.”

* * *

Alahara and Alastasia got off the lift and stared at the distant stage as it was being completed. Hundreds of workers scurried about the large wooden structure putting on the finishing touches. A chill shot down Alastasia’s spine.

“Father is going to very exposed up there on the stage,” she commented softly. “I am not sure that this is such a good idea.”

“Just concentrate on what we have to do,” advised Alahara. “We are just a small part of this plan. Put it all out of your mind except your own duties.”

“I cannot,” Alastasia shook her head. “Neither can you. While your words are nice, we both understand that we cannot lose sight of the bigger picture. We must be ready to step in where others may falter.”

“Well,” sighed Alahara, “at least try. Our task is the most important.”

“Not true,” countered Alastasia. “Everyone has a large part to play today. I am glad that Tamar told us about Eltor and Caldal infiltrating the protesters. I thought it was rude of them to be in Morada and not speak to us.”

“They didn’t get very far with their infiltration,” replied Alahara. “Not as far as we did.”

“We really don’t know if we have succeeded yet,” warned Alastasia. “Anyway, I think their new duties are better suited to them. I hope they succeed.”

“They will,” Alahara said with confidence. “Look. There is Kara. Let me introduce you.”

A small group of around a hundred protesters had arrived early for the demonstration. They stood quietly watching the completion of the wooden stage, their homemade signs protesting the war hanging from limp hands. Princess Alahara guided her sister to the edge of the crowd where Kara stood leaning against a building. He straightened up when he saw the princesses approaching.

“Both of you?” Kara asked with surprise.

“My sister feels as I do,” smiled Alahara. “She is just shy about it.”

“That’s fantastic,” grinned Kara. “Let me introduce you to the people who have already gathered. We can start singing some protest songs.”

“Not yet,” Alahara shook her head. “We will not reveal our opposition to the war until the king is on the stage. If we were to do so any earlier, he would send soldiers to escort us into the palace.”

“Then we would miss the whole demonstration,” pouted Alastasia.

“Oh,” frowned Kara. “I understand. That does make sense. I was wondering, Alahara, would you be willing to get up on the stage and talk about the humans today?”

“Talk about the humans?” echoed the princess. “What do you mean?”

“Well you know that the elves are not needed in this war,” explained Kara. “I was hoping that you would tell the crowd about your views. I think it would have a tremendous impact.”

“It sure would embarrass the king,” Princess Alahara chuckled nervously as she saw Levitor come around the corner.

Kara waited impatiently for an answer as thoughts whirled through Alahara’s mind. Levitor glanced her way with a snarl on his lips, and Alahara dropped her gaze to the ground. Finally, she looked Kara in the eyes and smiled.

“You ask a lot of me,” she said, “but I am willing to steel my courage if you are willing to do the same.”

“What do you mean?” asked Kara.

“I will go up on the stage and speak,” offered Alahara, “if you and your two friends will come up on stage with me to protect me.”

“Protect you?” gulped the boy. “From the soldiers?”

“Not the soldiers,” chuckled Alahara. “From my father. Avalar will not dare to be seen pushing young boys around to get to me. All the three of you have to do is stand around me. That is all.”

“That’s it?” asked Kara. “Sure. We will do it. Does this mean that you will speak?”

“It does,” grinned Princess Alahara. “I will speak right after the king does.”

“Fantastic,” the boy replied excitedly. “I have to spread the word. I will find you later when everything starts happening.”

Kara ran off and Alastasia moved close to her sister. “Why did you agree to speak?” she asked in a whisper. “I thought we were just supposed to disarm the crowd?”

“This will work out better,” smiled Alahara. “While Kara may have convinced many of these protesters to come here with the promise of gold, there are citizens here who truly believe that Elvangar should stay out of this war. I think we should try to convince them of the truth.”

“Better you than me,” sighed Alastasia.

“Oh, you will be involved as well,” grinned Alahara. “Let’s get started on what we came to do. Remember to use an ordinary compulsion spell first. Only use the Kieran compulsion spell if the other one fails. We don’t want to be causing pain if we don’t have to.”

Alastasia nodded, and the princesses split up. For several hours they moved slowly through the gathering crowd. Every time they say a boy with a pouch of rocks, they cast a compulsion spell on him. Each boy immediately left the gathering and returned without the rocks. The boys had no recollection of leaving the gathering and dumping their rocks by the side of the river.

* * *

A muted voice gave permission to enter the office. Garl opened the door and entered the room. He stood staring at Maraton and waited until the mage raised his head to acknowledge the Head Mage.

“What is it, Garl?” Maraton asked with annoyance. “I am kind of busy here.”

“You need to work on your manners,” Garl replied calmly. “I want you to come to the garden with me.”

“Not today,” Maraton shook his head. “I am just too busy.”

“A pity then,” shrugged Garl as he turned to leave. “Let history record that you were too busy today.”

Maraton’s head snapped up with annoyance and confusion. “What do you mean history?” he asked.

“I am an old man,” sighed Garl. “Surely, even you can see that? I will soon be asked to name my successor as Head Mage of the Society of Mages. I thought that I would be remiss in my duties not to include you in that list, but you are obviously too busy. Sorry to interrupt your work.”

“Wait,” Maraton called out as he rose from his chair. “Why the garden? That is a strange place to hold interviews. Why not interview me right here? It would save time.”

“An office is a poor place to discuss elven magic and all that it represents,” scoffed Garl. “I prefer to hold interviews in the midst of nature. I am too old to change my ways, even for you. Good day.”

“Wait,” Maraton called again. “Go to the garden. I will be there in a minute. Just let me get my last thoughts down before I forget them.”

Garl did not reply. He continued walking out of the office and headed for the large central garden. He inhaled deeply as he exited the building. He loved the smell of the flowers and the tree blossoms. With a smile on his face, Garl walked to the far end of the garden where the ivy ran rampant, climbing up the side of the building and covering the wall that formed the fourth side of the courtyard. He sat on a small stone bench facing the ivy and closed his eyes. His mind wandered back to the small village of Etta where he had spent close to twenty years in exile.

“You aren’t sleeping, are you?” the voice shattered Garl’s daydream.

Garl opened his eyes and saw Maraton standing before him. He smiled and shook his head. “No,” he answered. “I was just daydreaming of simpler days in Etta. Things were much less complicated there. There life in all of its forms was revered. I think I may return there before I die.”

“That’s nice,” Maraton replied dryly, thinking the old man should hurry up and pack his bags while he could still find the way to Etta. “What do you need to know about me to determine my fitness to succeed you?”

“I mostly need to know the level of your expertise in magic,” answered the Head Mage. “I also need to explore your moral fitness for the office.”

“My moral fitness?” balked Maraton. “What does that have to do with anything?”

“A great deal,” replied Garl. “As you know, the Society of Mages is not a political institution. We try our best not to get involved in the politics of Elvangar, although at times there are exceptions. Still, the moral character of the Head Mage must be beyond reproach. As Head Mage, our leader must often interact with the nation’s leaders. Elvangar must be constantly assured that the Society of Mages will not threaten the monarchy. You can imagine the fear of our power if that were not so.”

Maraton stood uncomfortably as the discussion came too close to the current situation in Elvangar. He wondered if the Head Mage might have stumbled upon his plans.

“I have no interest in politics,” lied the mage. “Magic is my life, as it should be for every mage. The Head Mage should be chosen on raw power as it has been for centuries. Why are you changing the requirements?”

“I don’t see the requirements as having been changed,” countered Garl. “The Head Mage has rarely been chosen by raw power. He has been chosen by effective power. There is a great difference between those two. For example, while you are extremely powerful with raw magic, I have little doubt that a lesser mage could effectively disarm you by using a far superior mental intellect.”

“You are talking nonsense now,” Maraton shook his head. “Name a mage other than yourself who could defeat me.”

“Princess Alahara,” smiled Garl. “While she may one day have far greater raw power than you do, she certainly does not possess it right now.”

“Nor is she a match for me,” snapped Maraton as tried to turn to leave the meeting. “Enough of this nonsense.”

Maraton frowned as his feet refused to obey him. He looked down and saw that the ivy had wrapped around his legs tightly. His eyes opened wide as he watched the ivy spiraling upward to encase his body.

“I think you are wrong about her,” Garl continued as if nothing out of the ordinary was happening. “You see, Princess Alahara used her intellect to discover your little plot to destroy the Royal Family and crown the queen’s sister. In a sense, she has made the most effective use of her magic, although you had the greater raw power.”

“You are mad,” shouted Maraton as his arm rose and pointed at Garl.

Garl smiled sadly and shook his head. “Blast away with your most potent spells,” shrugged Garl. “I am completely shielded. You cannot harm me, and you know it. Spend your time to make peace with Kaltara.”

Maraton frowned as he stared down at the ivy, which was growing at a frantic pace. He pointed his finger downward at the base of the ivy and blasted a hole in the plant with a fireball. The ivy reacted by growing even faster. Strands ran up Maraton’s back and encircled his throat. The mage’s hands ripped at the ivy, but new strands of the plant soon encased his hands along with his neck. His eyes narrowed with the realization that death was just moments away.

“Why, Maraton?” asked Garl. “Why did you stray from the path of the righteous?”

Maraton did not answer as the ivy had completely enclosed him. Garl shook his head sadly and rose from the bench. He went in search of the next wayward mage.

* * *

“I do not think this is a good idea,” frowned Queen Alycia as she stood at the railing of the throne room looking down at the new stage and the growing crowd of demonstrators. “If anything, you should have a larger contingent of soldiers surrounding you. You are being foolishly proud to go upon that stage with no guards.”

“I do not see it as a foolish move,” countered King Avalar. “If the citizens are going to stone anyone, it should not be the soldiers of our nation. Their complaint is with me and my policies. I am not afraid to stand before our citizens and tell them the truth.”

“Well I am afraid for you,” retorted the queen. “I lived without you for too long. I will not do so again. There will be soldiers guarding you today if I have to order them out there myself.”

“You will do no such thing,” Avalar said sharply. “The first strategy of war is to do the unexpected, and that is what I intend to do. Make no mistake about this Alycia; we are at war here. While many of those protesters firmly believe in their cause, many others are down there to foment the destruction of our reign. I will not allow that to happen.”

“Then I shall join you on that stage,” Alycia said stubbornly. “If you are to be stoned to death, I want to be by your side when it happens. Let them stone me as well.”

King Avalar walked to the railing and put his arm around his wife. He kissed her gently and then leaned on the railing beside her and gazed downward at the protesters.

“Do not fear for me,” he said softly. “There will be no stoning of the king this day. Our daughters are down there making sure that the stones are not thrown.”

“Alahara and Alastasia?” questioned the queen. “Where are they?”

Avalar pointed to the far edge of the mob. Alycia squinted and finally found Alahara.

“What are they doing down there?” she asked. “Are you all mad? There is a plot to destroy the Royal Family and the three of you are wading into the public and inviting attacks? This is a nightmare. It can not be happening for real.”

“Everything is under control,” soothed Avalar. “There is only one loose end that we have not figured out how to address yet.”

“And what is that?” Queen Alycia asked suspiciously.

“Kanis,” Avalar replied softly. “Your sister is involved in this attempted coup.”

“No,” Alycia shook her head with disbelief. “Kanis may be crude at times, but I cannot fathom her involvement in anything like this. You are wrong. You just don’t like her and find it convenient to attach her to the conspirators.”

“I was very much afraid that you would react this way,” sighed the king. “I do not know how to convince you of your sister’s duplicity, but I know the truth of it. She has conspired with Maraton to become the new Queen of Elvangar.”

“I do not believe it,” Alycia said adamantly. “Your sources are wrong. They do not know my sister.”

“Three individuals that I would trust my life to disagree with you,” replied the king. “Alahara and Garl heard it with their own ears, and Tamar had Kanis followed last night. She met with Maraton at the Banyan Inn in a private room. It is not my own personal feelings for your sister that are determining her guilt. It is her own actions.”

“I still can’t believe it,” Alycia shook her head as she turned from the railing and paced the floor of the throne room. “What will you do to her if it is true?”

“I don’t know,” admitted the king. “I do not care much for Kanis, but she is your sister. It is a decision that I do not wish to make. I want you to think about it. We will talk about it later.”

Chapter 12

Protesting the War

The area around the new stage was crowded. Thousands of elven citizens had gathered to hear the king. Mixed in with the crowd were hundreds of angry protesters. Many of the protesters carried signs demanding peace; others handed out red flowers to signify the elven blood that would flow should the king get his way and drag Elvangar into the human war.

Princess Alahara and Princess Alastasia moved systematically through the crowd casting compulsion spells on protesters that carried pouches of rocks. After several hours of making the boys return the rocks to the river, the princesses thought the protest would be fairly tame. Suddenly, shouting drew the attention of Princess Alastasia. She turned and saw Levitor arguing with Kara. Being careful not to draw attention to herself, she made her way closer to find out what was going on.

“I don’t control them,” yelled Kara. “I made all of the arrangements, but I cannot force them to act.”

“Be quiet,” hushed Levitor as he grabbed the boy by the arm and dragged him around the corner of a building and out of sight of the other protesters.

Princess Alastasia moved cautiously along the front of the building until she had almost reached the corner. She stood with her back to the building and tried to listen to the conversation, which had dropped decidedly in volume.

“Don’t ever raise your voice in my presence again,” warned Levitor.

“How was I supposed to know that you are in this with Salfour,” argued the boy. “No one told me. I thought that someone had discovered my part in this.”

“Well I am telling you now,” Levitor shot back. “The point is, no one is carrying stones. How do you expect to start a riot if you are the only one with stones.”

“We delivered stones to everyone,” frowned Kara. “I saw them carrying them before. I don’t know what happened.”

“Well you better find out, and fast,” threatened the mage. “The king will be coming out to speak soon. I want blood flowing in the streets.”

“We have time,” argued the boy. “The soldiers have not even arrived yet. They will come out well before the king.”

“So you are an expert on royal protocol now?” taunted the mage. “Just obey your orders and make sure that plenty of people have stones to throw. If this fails, I will have your hide. Do you understand?”

“I understand,” replied the boy.

Unexpectedly, the mage cursed. Princess Alastasia frowned as she tried to imagine what was going on around the corner. She looked across the park and saw Garl marching towards her. She bit her lower lip and hoped the Head Mage would not give her away.

“What is it?” asked the boy.

“I have to go,” Levitor said. “Make sure that you don’t let us down.”

Suddenly, Levitor emerged from around the corner. He tried to move quickly away from the protest, but Garl called loudly to him. Levitor stopped and turned to meet Garl.

“Look at the crowd out here today,” Levitor said innocently. “Have you come to listen to the king speak, too?”

“I do not have time for such things,” Garl replied gruffly. “I have been looking all over for you. Come with me to the Society. We must talk.”

Princess Alastasia exhaled slowly as Garl’s eyes passed over her. She saw the look of recognition in his eyes, but he said nothing.

“What about?” Levitor asked nervously. “I was hoping to hear the speech.”

“You will hear nothing new in today’s speech,” replied the Head Mage. “I have spent time this morning thinking about my replacement as Head Mage. I need to talk to you in the garden of the Society.”

“While I am flattered that you are considering me for such an august position,” replied Levitor, “I would prefer to talk about it here.”

“I am not considering you for the position,” Garl replied. “There are others who are better qualified, but it is your services that I require right now.”

“Perhaps later,” Levitor shook his head.

“Now,” Garl said adamantly. “Or would you care for me to tell Maraton that you could not be bothered speaking to me?”

“Maraton?” Levitor echoed, his voice showing a hint of fear. “Oh,” he continued more calmly, “now I understand. Yes, Maraton is an excellent choice. There is little more that I could add to that recommendation.”

“Very well,” shrugged Garl as he turned to leave. “Maraton is waiting in the garden. I will tell him that you are too busy to attend. He will be disappointed by the lack of support for his application.”

“I already gave my recommendation,” Levitor called after the Head Mage, but Garl ignored him.

Levitor cursed again and ran after Garl. Kara came around the building and stood staring at the retreating mages. He turned and saw Princess Alastasia leaning against the building.

“What are you doing here?” he asked.

“Resting,” smiled Alastasia. “Truthfully, I am a bit nervous about this afternoon.”

“Nervous?” frowned Kara. “About what? It is not you who will address the people from the stage.”

A boy walked by carrying his pouch of stones and heading for the river. Kara watched the boy curiously and then called him by name. The boy did not respond, and Kara appeared ready to run after the lad.

“I guess he didn’t hear you,” smiled the princess. “What do you think the king will say today?”

“What?” Kara asked in confusion as he was torn between running after the boy and hiding his involvement as one of the organizers.

“The king,” Alastasia repeated. “What do you think he will say?”

“How would I know?” snapped Kara as he turned to run after the boy.

Princess Alastasia swiftly cast a spell of compulsion on Kara. The ringleader stopped suddenly and turned around. He walked over to the building and leaned against it.

“Are you sick?” asked the princess.

“What?” Kara said groggily. “I just feel weak.”

“Then you should make sure that everyone’s stones are safely returned to the river,” smiled Alastasia. “That will make you feel better.”

“Yes, it would,” Kara nodded enthusiastically. “Why didn’t I think of that?”

“You did think of it,” chuckled the princess.

Alastasia watched Kara wander off into the crowd of protesters. She saw him tap a boy on the shoulder and point to the river. The boy looked back with confusion on his face, but he complied and soon headed to the river to deposit his stones. Princess Alahara soon walked up to her sister and leaned against the building.

“Taking a break?” asked Alahara. “There are still more stone-throwers out there.”

“Not for long,” grinned Alastasia. “I found a more efficient way of getting rid of them. I ordered Kara to do it.”

Princess Alahara laughed heartily as she turned to follow Kara’s progress.

“Levitor was just threatening Kara,” informed Alastasia. “Then Garl appeared and demanded that he return to the Society of Mages. Do you know what the old man is up to?”

“No,” Alahara shook her head, “but Avalar has faith in his uncle. That should be good enough for us.”

“I suppose,” responded Alastasia. “Look. The Council of Elders is coming onto the stage. I guess things will be heating up real soon. We need to start worrying about the mages. They can make the difference this afternoon.”

“You go to the Society of Mages and check up on them,” suggested Alahara. “I am going to keep close tabs on Kara and his friends. I will not let them start a riot.”

Princess Alastasia nodded and ran off towards the home of the mages. Alahara scanned the crowd until she found Kara and then moved in to follow him. She did not stop him from ordering the boys to get rid of their stones, but she kept close to him while he did so.

* * *

The Council of Elders sat behind a long table on the newly built stage. They peered at the thousands of citizens before them. The crowd was quite noisy, and the citizens could not hear the elders speaking among themselves.

“This is quite a protest,” remarked Amber. “There must be thousands of demonstrators here.”

“It is hardly fair to call all of them demonstrators,” replied Volox. “Most of the people have gathered today to hear the king address the people. If it is protesters that you seek, look at the ones carrying the signs.”

“Not all protesters are carrying signs,” retorted Amber. “Do not try to sway this council with false words.”

“I think the mood of the people will be clear to those who listen to the responses to the king’s words,” interrupted Malid, the Head Elder. “Having said that, I think the duty of an elder is to vote with the best interests of Elvangar in mind, not necessarily the fickle mood of the uninformed public. It will be our responsibility today to vote on a proposal put forth by the King of the Elves.”

“And why are we holding this vote in public?” asked one of the elders. “The council never votes in public.”

“Are you afraid of the people seeing how you vote?” taunted another elder.

“That is not the point,” frowned the first elder. “The question is a legitimate one. Why is this vote being held in public?”

“Because the king requested it,” answered Malid. “This council has been torn evenly on this subject for some time now. That is all about to end. The king has offered to address the people in public, and he has requested that the council vote in public. This decision is so important, that I felt that we could not refuse.”

“In all fairness,” interjected Amber, “someone from the opposition should also be allowed to address the public before we vote.”

“And would that be you?” asked Volox. “Are you prepared to stand and speak against this war?”

“I am prepared to speak against it,” nodded Amber, “but I can do so as part of the council proceedings leading up to the vote. I think a member of the public should be chosen to speak.”

“And suppose they do not choose wisely,” smiled Volox. “Will you then ask for another voice to be heard?”

“Of course not,” balked Amber. “Let’s just make an announcement and let the protesters choose whoever they want. That would be fair in my book.”

“Do we need a vote on this?” asked Volox. “To formalize it, I mean.”

“Well,” pondered Malid, “this council is not in session yet. If we want to bring up any motion, we must start the session. Perhaps we should wait until the king’s speech is over.”

“No,” protested Amber. “Give the protesters some time to choose a spokesperson. If we have to start the session early, then so be it.”

The Head Elder scanned the faces of the council and nodded. “Very well,” he said. “I open this meeting of the Council of Elders. Are there any motions?”

Volox waited patiently for Amber to present his motion. It passed unanimously with little discussion. A runner was called for, and a hasty message was constructed for the leaders of the protest.

“While we are waiting for a reply,” Volox said, “I would like to make another motion.”

“Speak, Volox,” nodded Malid.

“Because this vote today is so important that we are abandoning long set protocol,” Volox began, “I would like to invoke an old procedure that has not been used in many years. This motion is certainly not meant to cast aspersions on any elder, but to assure the public that they can have the highest confidence in their Council of Elders.”

“And what is this procedure?” asked Amber.

“Many years ago, particularly on important votes,” answered Volox, “the Council of Elders would submit to a magical examination to ensure that none of them were functioning under a spell of compulsion. This procedure verifies that no outsiders are exercising undo magical influence on the votes of the Elders.”

“A spell of compulsion on an elder would be a despicable act,” scowled Malid. “If ever there were a justified use of such an examination, today’s vote would fit that description. Are there any opponents to this motion?”

“May we vote on who shall administer this examination?” asked Amber.

“The Head Mage of the Society of Mages would be the one to administer the examination,” declared Volox.

“But Garl is hardly impartial on this,” protested Amber. “He is the king’s uncle.”

“Are you afraid of this examination, Amber?” taunted Volox.

“Absolutely not,” spat Amber. “Any elder who allows himself to fall under a magician’s spell should be forced to resign. I am merely questioning the impartiality of the examiner.”

“The Head Mage has remained steadfastly neutral on this issue,” declared Malid, “as he has on all other political issues. If you are referring to Garl’s involvement in the Karaza affair, I would like to make two points about that. One, he was not Head Mage at the time. Two, his involvement was not based upon politics, but rather his focus was on the well being of the monarch. I would find fault with any Head Mage who did not react to that situation as Garl did. Can anyone find anything offensive regarding the selection of the Head Mage to provide this examination?”

No elder spoke, and Malid called for a vote. While Amber grumbled because he did not care for Volox ever getting his way, the vote passed unanimously. Malid again called for a runner and dispatched a message to the Society of Mages.

The crowd grew restless as they waited for the king to appear. Suddenly, the lift was seen descending out of the Royal Tree. People shouted and pointed towards the lift on which the king was clearly visible. The protesters started chanting as the King of the Elves marched across the grass to the newly built stage. Some of the citizens remarked that the king did not have his usual contingent of soldiers escorting him.

Out in the crowd of citizens, the council’s runner went from protester to protester in an attempt to find one of the organizers. The runner finally ended up being directed to Kara who accepted the note.

“Well, imagine that,” Kara grinned. “The Council of Elders has actually invited me to pick a spokesperson to refute the king’s arguments.”

“You are a big man today,” smiled Princess Alahara. “I hope you speak well.”

“Not me,” grinned Kara. “This is your chance to speak. You did say that you would.”

“Only if you demand that I do,” shrugged the princess. “You have the right to choose anyone you want. Whoever you choose, you and your friends should march up on the stage and call for the selected person to come forward. That way everyone will know that the person truly speaks for the protesters.”

“That is not a bad idea,” grinned Kara, “but first we have to drown out the king’s speech. I’ll be back in a minute.”

King Avalar reached the stage and stepped to the edge of it. He waved to the citizens and received a chorus of boos from the protesters in the audience. Signs against the war were held high in the air, and red flowers were thrown towards the stage. While the protesters were but a fraction of the audience, they were extremely vocal. Every time the king’s mouth opened to speak, the protesters chanted slogans loudly. King Avalar waited patiently.

Princess Alastasia slipped through the crowd and found her sister. She frowned at the protesters around her.

“We both owe apologies to Garl,” Alastasia whispered in Alahara’s ear. “All three of them are now plant food.”

“Are you serious?” Alahara asked excitedly. “He did this alone?”

“By himself,” nodded Alastasia as she was distracted by the sound of distant singing. “I was wrong to doubt him.”

Unexpectedly, thousands of elves suddenly appeared on each street leading towards the Royal Tree. The newly arrived elves marched in columns and sang patriotic marching songs while converging on the stage. They raised high the banners that they carried. On each of the banners were the names of elven families. Larger banners, each requiring two elves to carry, indicated the names of the outlying villages that the elves had come from. Princess Alastasia excitedly poked her sister and pointed to the elves carrying the Etta banner. It was Eltor and Caldal.

“They did it,” Alahara beamed. “There must be thousands of them.”

King Avalar waved happily as the village elves mingled into the crowd of city elves. When the procession ended, the area was packed shoulder-to-shoulder. The first time the king tried to speak after the arrival of the village elves, there was a smattering of chants trying to drown him out, but it soon died as the villagers told the protesters to shut up and listen. The non-protesting citizens of Morada also joined in, urging the protesters to be quiet so that the king could speak.

“Thank you for this opportunity to address you,” the king said loudly. “Regardless of how each of you feels about this coming war, I am pleased that so many of you have come to listen to what I have to say. We are at the brink of the most important decision that the elven people have had to make in two thousand years. Some of you have been protesting every day in the streets of Morada against elven involvement in the coming war. Your chants and slogans make it sound as if I am trying to lead the elven people to their deaths in order to protect the humans. You are entitled to your opinions, but I want to set the record straight before the Council of Elders votes today.”

The king paused and surveyed the crowd. He was thankful that no stones had yet been hurled in his direction, although he was maintaining a magical shield around himself.

“I would never put human lives above the lives of my people,” declared the king. “Not because I think humans are less of a people, but because I am responsible for the elves, and only the elves. The humans have their own leaders to look after their people. A great many of you may then be wondering why I am pushing to join with the humans in the coming war. It is a valid question for a citizen to ask, and I do not think poorly of anyone for asking it. It is a question that I have asked myself a thousand times. It is not easy being a king and having the fate of your people in your hands. It requires one to constantly reevaluate his decisions to make sure that he is doing what is in the best interests of his people. But there comes a time when there is no easy choice to make. This is one of those times.”

One of the protesters shouted that the king should just let the humans fend for themselves. The king smiled at the protester and nodded.

“That is one of the options,” replied Avalar. “There is one problem with that position. I have been to the Island of Darkness. I have seen Vand’s army. I have also been to the land of the humans and seen their preparations for war. It is my firm belief that without our help, the humans will certainly fall before Vand’s armies. Still, you might ask, why is this any concern of the elves? Let me tell you why. Vand set out to capture the King of the Elves for a specific reason. That reason was to keep us out of the war against the humans. When I was held captive, I was Vand’s insurance that the elves would not interfere in his affairs until it was too late. He knows that he will have an easier time of conquering both the humans and the elves if he can just attack us separately.”

The citizens started talking among themselves, and the king gave them some time to digest his words before continuing.

“There is no doubt in my mind that Vand will turn his massive armies on Elvangar as soon as he is done with the humans,” continued the king. “The only way that we can escape attack, is if Vand falls before the human armies, and that is impossible unless the elves join with the humans now. Will elven warriors fall in the coming battles? Yes, no matter whether we fight in the land of the humans, or we fight here in Elvangar. War is coming, my people, no matter what we decide here today. It is only a question of where we will fight the enemy. Look around this great city and gaze upon what we have built together, for if we choose to hide behind the Gates of Elvangar, Morada will soon resemble the ancient city of Alamanda. I aim to avoid that fate for my people. Today I am asking the Council of Elders to vote upon a resolution endorsing my plan to aid the humans in their battle against the forces of Vand. I know the elders will vote what they think is best for all of Elvangar, but it is only natural to be swayed by public opinion. It is in that vein that I ask you, the citizens of Elvangar, for your support in this effort.”

For several moments there was silence from the crowd as the king’s words sunk in. Then a few protesters started to chant, but the other citizens quickly drowned them out. Some of the elders sat with surprise on their faces at the support the king had managed to garner. Malid rose and walked to the edge of the stage while the king retreated to stand behind the council.

“In fairness to the citizens,” Malid stated loudly, “we call up the leaders of the protest movement to speak their piece to the citizens. After that speech, the Council of Elders will vote publicly on the resolution offered by the king.”

Kara and his two friends made their way up to the stage. Alahara gazed up at the Royal Tree as she planned what she would say. She froze when she saw two people gazing down at the crowd. She nudged her sister and pointed upward.

“Kanis is with Mother,” Alahara said urgently. “You must get up there. Kanis will have a fit when she hears me speak. Who knows what she might do?”

Alastasia nodded and pushed her way through the massive crowd. The people yelled at her and cursed, but Alastasia did not care. She ran as if her mother’s life depended upon her speed.

The three boys reached the stage and encouraging shouts came from the audience. Kara grinned and waited for the applause to die down.

“Some of you may think that I am crazy,” grinned Kara, “but I have selected a very special person to speak this afternoon. I urge every person here today to listen carefully to her words because she knows the truth about this human war. She has lived among the humans and has been to the Island of Darkness. What better perspective could we hope to hear today? I call upon Princess Alahara to speak to the people.”

King Avalar feigned as much surprise as many of the citizens felt. The crowd parted and the princess made her way forward. As she walked across the stage, she reinforced the compulsion spells that they had placed on the three boys. She walked up to Kara and his two friends and whispered to them with a big smile as if she were thanking them for the invitation to speak.

“Whatever happens for the rest of the day,” she smiled, “remember that every word I speak brings you pleasure. You will smile and cheer when my speech is over.”

The boys smiled and nodded dutifully as the princess turned and walked to the edge of the stage to address the citizens.

Chapter 13

The Resolution

Princess Alahara stood at the edge of the stage for several moments, her eyes scanning the assembled crowd before her. She had never spoken to such a large group of people before, but she pushed her worries aside as she decided how to rouse support for the coming war.

“I am honored to address you today,” Princess Alahara began. “While I cannot be sure of all of the reasons that I have been chosen to speak, I would like to think it is because of my special knowledge about the human world and the Island of Darkness. I have been to the Island of Darkness two times. The first time, my sister and I managed to rescue two village elves from Etta. It was a very harrowing experience for all of us. It is sad for me to report that many elves have been enslaved on the Island of Darkness. There are generations living there that have never seen Elvangar, and they probably never will. When an elven slave no longer performs adequately, Vand’s creatures have sport with them. They tear the elves apart, or eat them while they are still alive. I want each of you to dwell on that image for a moment.”

Alahara paused for a long time to give her sister time to reach the throne room. The citizens murmured among themselves while they waited.

“Can any of you imagine being eaten alive by a creature that resembles an enormous ape?” she continued. “Can you imagine your loved ones suffering such a fate? I have been asked to tell you my views of this coming war. Well here are my views. If Vand suddenly decided not to attack the humans, I would urge the king to gather the elven armies to attack the Island of Darkness. It would probably result in an enormous defeat for the elven people, but what kind of people are we when we can sit home safely knowing that these vicious barbarians are torturing our kin? How can we think highly of our civilization when elven families are slaves on a nearby island?”

Some of the elves started to shout in agreement with the princess.

“A few moments ago,” Alahara continued, “I watch thousands of elves march into this city, proudly bearing the banners of family names. I would be willing to wager that each and every one of those families has some kin on the Island of Darkness right now, kin who are being beaten, tortured, and murdered. Is this something that we should allow to continue?” she asked, her voice rising to a shout.

Thousands of people shouted no, and Alahara nodded appreciatively, her face a grim hardened mask.

“I don’t think we should abandon our kin to such a fate,” declared Princess Alahara. “King Avalar wants to join the humans to defeat Vand. I say we should go one better. Not only should we help the humans to defeat that despicable elf-killer, but we should invade the Island of Darkness and free our family members from bondage.”

Again the princess paused, but this time she wanted her words to sink in. She looked at the faces of the protesters in particular. She wanted to know if she was affecting even some of them. She could not tell.

“What about these humans that want our help?” asked the princess. “You know very little about them except for the ancient stories of deceit, but I need to remind you that that deceit was foisted on us by Vand, not the other humans. I am not saying that the humans cannot be deceitful, because they can be. In fact, they can be as deceitful as elves.”

More than one person in the audience chuckled, although Alahara had not meant it in a humorous way.

“I have spent most of my life among the humans,” Alahara continued. “There are good humans and bad ones, just like us. I was fortunate to know all three of the human rulers personally during my stay in the human world. They are of a character that any decent elf would appreciate. They are people of the caliber of our king, and words alone are not adequate to express how I feel about King Avalar. The elves are fortunate to have such a fine leader, but you already know that. Let me get back to the humans. A short time ago, the humans were fractured and fought among themselves. Three prophesized leaders have arisen to unite the humans so that they can defend themselves against Vand. Some of you may see this as a threat. You may fear that the humans will learn the location of Elvangar and seek to destroy us. Your fears are ungrounded.”

Loud murmurs showed that the people did not believe her words. Alahara frowned and continued.

“The humans already know where Elvangar is,” declared Alahara. “They have known since the time of Kieran. It was humans who told my sister and me the way to the Gates of Elvangar. So why haven’t they invaded us? Do you want to know why?”

The crowd roared in the affirmative, and Alahara felt that she was back in control of the crowd. She smiled at the audience.

“They didn’t attack us,” continued the princess, “because they have always considered us their friends. They made a pact with Kieran two thousand years ago to break off relations between the elves and the humans until the time was right. They have kept that pact. Now they face certain ruin without our help. Are we going to refuse them? Are we going to say thank you for being our friends and respecting our pact, and oh, good luck with the destruction that is about to befall you? We’d like to help, but you frighten us.”

“That is not the point,” shouted a citizen. “It is not our war. Let the humans destroy each other. You would not expect them to come and save Elvangar if we were threatened. Why should they expect us to do so?”

“A valid question,” nodded Princess Alahara. “Let me answer it. If Vand suddenly changed his plans and decided to attack Elvangar first, should we expect the humans to come to our aid? I certainly would, and I will tell you that I would not be wrong in my expectation. The humans would come without a whole lot of discussion about it. They understand the evil that Vand represents. They know that Vand will never be happy with conquering only a portion of the world. Vand wants it all.”

The questioner did not appear to be convinced and Alahara shook her head.

“You who asked the question,” Alahara pointed to the man, “if I asked you to come with me to the Island of Darkness this afternoon, would you come?”

“What for?” asked the man.

“To rescue a man held in the dungeons of Vand’s temple,” answered Alahara. “You don’t know the man personally. In fact, you have never heard of him, but he is very dear to me. I think I could get two others to join us. Will you come?”

“Are you crazy?” shouted the man as others around him laughed. “No one is going to go to that island with only three others. Your speech did make me ashamed that we have let our elven brothers languish on the Island of Darkness, but you can’t expect anyone to throw their lives away for your friend.”

“You answer is understandable,” Alahara smiled tautly, “and I do not fault you for lack of courage. It would be a suicidal venture. But how then can you explain my sister’s call for help when we set out to rescue King Avalar? There were only three of us in that ancient elven ship, yet Alastasia and I were determined to rescue our father. Brave Tamar went with us, but we knew that three was not enough to get the job done. We needed at least four people to make our plan work. Alastasia asked one of her human friends to join us on that suicide mission. He was told that he would probably die trying to rescue the King of the Elves. Yet he volunteered to come.”

The crowd murmured loudly. Many people knew that the princesses had rescued the king from the Island of Darkness, but not many of them had ever heard the story of it. They had not known that a human had been involved.

“Even better,” Alahara continued, “when our human friend joined us in Angragar, the human leaders offered to send a human army instead of us risking our lives. They were willing to risk their own lives to save the King of the Elves. We refused the offer because we thought that four us was the perfect number for the task, but we ran into trouble after rescuing Avalar. Vand’s army was on our heels as we raced to the beach where we had hidden our boat. Do you know what saved our lives?”

“Tell us,” shouted more than one person in the audience.

“I intend to,” grinned Alahara to a chorus of laughs. “Emperor Marak, one of the three human leaders, brought sixty men to the Island of Darkness to assure our escape. Without his help, we would probably have perished. And I hope you listened closely to that. I did not say that the Emperor sent sixty men to help us. He brought them with him. Marak put his own life in danger to make sure that King Avalar was safely freed. Whatever your reasons are for not wanting to help the humans, do not ever tell me it is because the humans would not risk their own lives to help the elves.”

Princess Alahara fell silent and her eyes dampened as she recalled the harrowing escape from the Island of Darkness, and how Marak had come to the rescue. The crowd fell silent as they waited for the princess to continue. There were no longer any hecklers and not a protest sign was visible. Princess Alahara turned and walked back across the stage to the king. She wrapped her arms around her father and hugged him. He hugged her back as the crowd burst into applause.

* * *

As Princess Alahara continued to rouse the populace, Princess Alastasia raced into the throne room. She slid to a halt when she saw Kanis struggling with the queen. Kanis had the queen pressed against the railing of the throne room, and Alycia was desperately trying to hang onto something lest she be thrown over the edge. The princess did not hesitate to act. She immediately cast the Kieran compulsion spell on her aunt. Kanis screamed, her hands going to her head as her body fell to the floor. Alastasia glared at her aunt as she concentrated her power into the spell.

“Stop it!” shouted Alycia. “You are going to kill her.”

“And she was trying to kill you,” Alastasia spit out venomously. “She has no right to hurt you.”

“Stop it!” demanded the queen. “Stop it this minute.”

Princess Alastasia snarled, but she dropped the spell. Two knives immediately slid into her hands as she walked warily towards her aunt. Kanis groaned and looked up at her niece. She saw the knives in her niece’s hands and the anger in Alastasia’s face. Her face palled as she struggled to her feet.

“How dare you treat me this way?” Kanis shouted at Alastasia.

“How dare you try to kill my mother?” snarled Alastasia. “It is only by Alycia’s grace that you are still alive, and I fear that I won’t be able to control myself much longer. I shudder to think of the long humiliating trial that you are going to cause this family.”

“Trial?” balked Kanis. “What are you talking about? We just had an argument. That is no reason for a court to hear about it.”

“Save your lies for someone who does not know you,” snapped Alastasia. “We know all about Maraton, Levitor, Salfour, and you. Did you truly think that you were dining in private at the Banyan last night?”

Kanis suddenly dropped her eyes and stared at the floor. Tears came to her eyes, but the princess could still sense the defiance in her aunt. Kanis backed away from her niece until she was up against the railing.

“How could you turn against your own sister?” asked Alastasia. “Is nothing in life sacred to you? Is power your god?”

“Leave me alone,” whimpered Kanis. “You cannot make me stand trial. I am the queen’s sister. You can do nothing to me.”

“Wrong,” retorted Alastasia. “My mother may be willing to let you go, but you also planned my death and the deaths of my father and sister. You will be put on trial. I will demand it.”

“No,” Kanis shook her head violently. “You have to let me go. I could not stand a trial. Please. I will admit everything. I do admit everything. I wanted you all dead so that I could rule Elvangar. Is that so bad?”

Alycia gasped at her sister’s admission. Tears rolled down her checks as she realized that Avalar had been right after all.

“Alycia, please,” begged Kanis. “You can make them understand. You have to let me go. I am your sister.”

“You are no longer my sister,” Alycia replied, her voice wooden and fragile. “I would have forgiven you anything, but you are heartless. Even now after you have been uncovered there is no remorse in your soul. You are only worried about the humiliation of being called to account for your crimes. You disgust me.”

As Alycia turned to leave the room, Kanis shouted defiantly. “You will never humiliate me,” she declared as she climbed up on the railing. “I would rather die than be humiliated.”

Alastasia raced forward to grab Kanis. While she wanted her aunt punished for her treachery, she did not want to see the woman die. Before the princess could reach her, Kanis threw herself off the platform. Alycia turned in shock at seeing Kanis fall from the Royal Tree. She stood stunned for a moment and then walked over to Alastasia and hugged her tightly.

“I am sorry, Mother,” Alastasia said softly. “I know that Kanis was your only sister, but perhaps it is better this way after all. We must always think of what is best for the elven people. While I did not relish the thought of a public trial, I did feel that it was necessary. If Kanis was merely let go, she would have continued to plot against you, and I could not bear the constant threat to your life.”

“You and your sister will make finer queens than I could ever be,” Queen Alycia sobbed. “You always stand up for what is right in this world, no matter the cost. I am so proud of both of you.”

Below the Royal Tree, several members of the crowd screamed as they saw the body fall from the platform. Avalar and Alahara turned in horror as they saw the crowd pointing towards the base of the tree. They broke their embrace and dashed off the stage. While Avalar was a swift runner, Princess Alahara arrived well before him. She knelt next to the crumpled body and turned it over. She sighed with relief as she recognized the face of Kanis.

“It is not mother,” she said to the king as he arrived. “It is Kanis.”

“Praise Kaltara for your mother’s safety,” Avalar said softly.

“And Alastasia I expect,” added Alahara. “We saw Kanis in the throne room with mother before I came up to speak. Alastasia raced to join her. What do we say to the crowd?”

“I wish to spare the citizens from the disgrace of the actions of a small number of malcontents,” the king replied. “This nastiness is almost behind us. I will speak to the people. I want you to take over here. Have the guards treat the body of the queen’s sister with respect. There will be a dignified burial this evening. Let her death be recorded without dishonor.”

“I understand,” nodded Princess Alahara as guards converged on the fallen body.

King Avalar walked back to the stage and stood silent on the edge for a moment to gather his thoughts. The crowd was deathly quiet. When the king finally spoke, his voice was soft, but carried well through the silent crowd.

“Kanis, sister of Queen Alycia, has perished this day,” King Avalar declared in a sorrowful voice. “While her fall from the throne room brings great sorrow this day, let her death show that the elven people are not immortal. We die everyday, even in the safety of our homeland. Elves will also die in the coming struggle with Vand, but we must not let it shatter us as a people. I pray that Kaltara will watch over us in the coming days.”

King Avalar halted his speech and gazed at the faces of the gathered citizens. He let his eyes rove over the assembled crowd, and he was touched by the sympathy he saw in their faces. He smiled inwardly as he felt pride in his people. Despite their fears, the elves had not lost compassion for their own, even for one whom they did not know well. He knew that compassion would be extended to the humans in the future.

“The Royal Family will be holding a quiet ceremony this evening for the burial of the Queen’s sister,” Avalar stated. “The ceremony will be open to anyone who wishes to attend.”

The king appeared at a loss for words as he stared out at the audience. The crowd fell unusually quiet, and many of the citizens bowed their heads in prayer for the fallen woman. Avalar smiled tautly and bowed his own head, but his prayers were for the future of his people. He knew the elves were a good people, but he also knew that they would need Kaltara’s guidance in the coming days. He prayed for their safety during the coming turmoil.

After several moments of prayer, King Avalar turned and walked away from the edge of the stage. The Head Elder stood with uncertainty for a moment. He saw Garl making his way through the crowd and turned to the elders.

“The Head Mage is coming,” Malid declared. “I will not explain to the audience what is happening up here until the examinations are complete. Then I will reopen this session of the Council of Elders, and we shall debate the resolution presented by King Avalar. Are there any questions?”

No one spoke and Malid turned to greet Garl. The Head Mage and the Head Elder bowed slightly to each other in a respectful greeting. Very few citizens had ever seen the Council of Elders in session. The crowd watched with quiet curiosity.

Garl started at one end of the table, casting a spell to sever any spells of compulsion. The elders did not feel a thing, until Garl reached Amber. When the Head Mage cast the spell on Amber, the elder collapsed, his head striking the table in front of him. The crowd buzzed with wonder as Garl immediately cast a healing spell on the elder. Amber raised his head and looked about in a daze of confusion.

“You were under a compulsion spell,” Garl said softly. “What mages have you been in contact with recently?”

“Levitor has been calling on me frequently,” frowned Amber.

“For how long?” asked Malid.

“For some time,” Amber replied sheepishly. “I cannot believe that I would allow this to happen to me. Levitor will pay for this dearly.”

“He already has,” Garl said softly. “While now is not the time to go into the details, I must sadly report that three members of the Society of Mages had been plotting to overthrow the government. They are responsible for staging the antiwar protests. It does not surprise me that they would stoop to a spell of compulsion on an elder.”

“You speak as if this threat is behind us,” frowned Malid. “Are you certain of this?”

“I am certain that the involvement of the three mages is over with,” clarified the Head Mage. “I must notify this body that I have taken independent action to thwart this evil plot. I will freely stand before this council in judgment for my actions, but I would prefer to do so in a private setting. This is not an issue that should be brought to the attention of the populace.”

“You have murdered the three mages?” gasped one of the elders.

“I have delivered justice to three traitors,” corrected Garl, “but I guess that is for this council to decide. I will submit to your decision.”

“You could appeal to the king to invoke his higher authority,” frowned Volox. “Why are you willing to submit to this council?”

“As Head Mage,” Garl replied, “I must remain above politics. To hide behind the protection of my nephew could be construed as an act of the guilty. I feel that I acted responsibly for the good of Elvangar. I will stand before this council and submit to their will.”

“Well spoken,” nodded the Head Elder. “Please complete the examination. We will meet tomorrow to discuss this other matter.”

Garl completed the examination and found no other elder under a compulsion spell. He retreated from the stage, and Malid addressed the other elders softly.

“The finding of the compulsion spell troubles me,” admitted the Head Elder. “There has not been such a contentious issue before us as this resolution from the king. Amber, you were the leading spokesman for the antiwar faction. Is it fair to consider this motion in light of the examination just concluded?”

Amber gazed out at the assembled crowd who were waiting for the council to start the debate. He frowned as he turned to look at Volox.

“I said not long ago,” Amber answered softly, “that any elder who allowed himself to be put under a compulsion spell, should resign from this council. Perhaps that is what I should do. I do not believe that we can put off the vote with the people waiting to hear us speak.”

“That is gracious of you,” smiled Volox, “but I do not think it is necessary. I have been observing this crowd all afternoon, especially those who carried the protest signs. Even if you continue your opposition to the king’s resolution, you will be in the minority. The elven people have clearly been swayed by the speeches from the Royal Family. I move that we continue with consideration of the king’s resolution immediately.”

Malid glanced around the table and saw no signs of disagreement. He loudly proclaimed the session of the Council of Elders open for discussion. He nodded to Volox, who had been chosen to read the king’s resolution. Volox stood and faced the audience. He loudly read the resolution, which called upon the elven people to immediately prepare armies to aid the humans in the war against Vand. When he had finished reading the resolution, Volox walked around the table and handed it to the Head Elder. He returned to his seat, but he did not sit down.

“For what purpose are you standing?” the Head Elder asked Volox. “Do you wish to speak on the resolution?”

“I have but one word to say,” Volox said loudly. “King Avalar asks for support from the elven people to wage war against an unspeakable evil. My answer to the king is yes. I vote for the king’s resolution.”

Volox sat down. Suddenly, the silence hovering over the crowd shattered. Several elves started clapping loudly. That started a ripple that spread like a wildfire. Within seconds, thousands of people were clapping and shouting their approval. The applause did not stop until another elder stood up to be heard. When the crowd quieted, the standing elder stated his support for the king’s resolution. The crowd roared with approval as the remaining elders began to glance at one another.

One by one, the elders stood and affirmed the king’s wishes. Even Amber eventually rose in support of the resolution, knowing that the cause was lost, and realizing that a show of unity was now more important to the elven people. The Head Elder was the last to vote. He also voted in the affirmative, making the resolution pass unanimously. Malid formerly announced the results of the council’s vote and adjourned the session. King Avalar thanked each elder personally before walking to the edge of the stage to address the people.

“Citizens of Elvangar,” the king said loudly. “The Council of Elders and the people of Elvangar have spoken loudly today. In the near future, the elven armies are going to speak even more forcefully. As our young men and women prepare to go off to foreign lands to fight the evil, I ask those of you who will be remaining behind to pray for our victory. Fill our temples every day, and ask Kaltara for the blessings of victory over our foes.”

Chapter 14

Ears Can Deceive

The citizens of the Khadoran city of Sintula lined the streets and watched in awe as the soldiers marched by. The constant parade of soldiers, decked out in their colorful clan uniforms, went on for hours, as the forces of the Khadoran armies headed southward towards the Kalatung Mountains and the Sakovan border. The citizens cheered whenever a different clan’s colors came into view. In between cheers, the people talked among themselves, wondering where the thousands of soldiers were heading. Some speculated that they were bound for the Sakovan border to protect against a surprise attack from their new allies, while others shared the rumor that the evil invasion had begun, and the soldiers were going to help the Sakovans.

Unbeknownst to the citizens, the massive movement of forces was meant as a public display of disinformation. Emperor Marak had decided that the attack on Duran was meant to gauge his response. He had ordered the mobilization of the clan armies that had been in Khadoratung for training. Each Khadoran clan had sent two cortes at a time to the capital for required training. Emperor Marak had ordered those armies to march publicly towards the Sakovan border so that any spies within Khadora would be sure to see them. At the southern terminus of their long march, the Situ estate of Stony Brook, the soldiers headed westward through the forests to the western coast of Khadora. There they were loaded onto ships and returned to the capital under the cover of darkness.

* * *

Lord Sevrin of the Ragatha clan hurried out of his Khadoran mansion. He stepped onto the wide porch of the mansion and moved quickly to stand by the side of his Lord Marshal.

“It is the Seth clan judging by the blue and black colors,” Lord Marshal Orteka said as he nodded towards the road running past the Ragatha estate. “We have had no notice of a visit from them.”

“Lord Sydar rules the Seth clan,” commented Lord Sevrin as he pointed to a tall man riding in the vanguard of the approach column. “He appears to be among the delegation. Considering that he only has a single corte as an escort, it is safe to assume that this will be a friendly visit.”

“It is hard for old habits to die, isn’t it?” chuckled the Lord Marshal. “You and I still think the same thoughts when a different clan’s colors appear on the horizon.”

“It is hard,” smiled Lord Sevrin. “Khadorans have lived for so long under the constant threat of war with its neighbors that we are quick to forget that we are all brothers now. Perhaps that is not so bad. Some of the lords are having a hard time accepting Emperor Marak’s reforms. Who knows how long this peace will last? I wonder what brings the Seth to our home?”

“I will entertain the officers personally,” offered the Lord Marshal. “Perhaps I will pick up something that Lord Sydar does not wish revealed to you.”

“You are a good man, Orteka,” smiled Lord Sevrin. “I don’t know what I would do without you.”

“I would be greatly pleased if you never find out,” chuckled the Lord Marshal.

The Ragatha lord and his military leader stood in silence as the visiting corte arrived. Orteka had already issued orders to a Ragatha corte to act as hosts to the visitors, and that selected corte greeted the visitors professionally. The cortain escorted Lord Sydar to the porch and offered introductions.

“See to our visitors’ needs,” Lord Sevrin said to his Lord Marshal. “Lord Sydar and I will be in the meeting room.”

Orteka bowed politely and left the porch while Lord Sevrin led his guest into the mansion. Lord Sevrin nodded to servants on his way to the meeting room and knew that refreshments would be served immediately.

“Welcome to my home, Lord Sydar,” Lord Sevrin greeted as they entered the meeting room. “What brings you to the Ragatha?”

“Thank you for your gracious hospitality,” smiled Lord Sydar. “I am on a short journey that happens to bring me by your estate. I felt that I would be remiss if I did not stop and talk with you for a while. I hope the timing is not inconvenient? I promise that I will not take more than a few hours of your time.”

“My day is yours to spend,” nodded Lord Sevrin. “A few hours of getting to know each other better will be well spent. The Assembly of Lords is excellent for allowing lords to meet one another, but there is never enough time at those gatherings to truly get to know your fellow lords.”

“Ah, so true,” smiled Lord Sydar. “And lately the Assembly of Lords has been rather hectic with all of the reforms that Emperor Marak is issuing. I suspect that a lord with multiple estates, such as you have, is probably having a very difficult time dealing with the new reforms.”

“The reforms are a drastic change in the way we conduct business,” nodded Lord Sevrin as he tried to gauge where the conversation was heading. “Are you having much trouble instituting the reforms?”

“No more than other lords,” Lord Sydar replied guardedly. “What do you think of the reforms?”

“I was hesitant at first,” replied Lord Sevrin, “as many lords were, but I see the wisdom in them. Our productivity has increased without slaves.”

“And what about the Chula?” frowned Lord Sydar. “Do you really expect them to be allies? Are you truly willing to trust those savages?”

“The Ragatha learned long ago that the Chula will leave you alone if you respect their land,” answered Lord Sevrin. “We have not had any trouble with the Chula in a long time. I am happy for it to stay that way.”

Lord Sydar frowned heavily as the servants entered with trays of food. He looked at the food and shook his head. Finally, he returned his gaze to Lord Sevrin.

“Your hospitality has been most gracious, Lord Sevrin,” declared the Seth lord, “but I have just realized that I had promised another stop today. Please forgive the short duration of my visit. I will try to visit again when more time is available.”

Lord Sevrin’s brow creased with confusion, but he nodded to his guest. “Very well,” he said. “I hope the stay was long enough to refresh your mounts.”

Lord Sevrin escorted the Seth lord out of the mansion. The Seth corte immediately broke camp and hurried to their horses. Within moments the Seth clan turned onto the new road leading to Woodville.

“That was rather short for a visit,” commented Lord Marshal Orteka after the Seth column had disappeared from view. “What was it all about?”

“Darned if I know,” frowned Lord Sevrin. “One minute we were chatting amicably, and the next he was leaving. All we talked about were Marak’s reforms. What did you learn from the soldiers?”

“Not much,” answered the Lord Marshal. “The visit was too short to learn anything. All that I could find out is that the purpose of their journey is to visit other clans. There is no destination for the trip.”

“Something does not smell right here,” frowned Lord Sevrin, “but I cannot determine what it is.”

“Perhaps we should contact Woodville and alert them?” questioned Orteka. “That does seem to be the way they are heading.”

“They won’t go to Woodville,” Lord Sevrin shook his head. “That is a Torak estate. They also won’t go to Fardale for the same reason. Whatever Lord Sydar is up to, my acceptance of Marak’s reforms turned him off. I suspect that he is looking for lords who object to the new reforms, but I cannot fathom why.”

“I do not think we can ignore it,” stated Orteka. “Any dissent against the Emperor right now could be harmful.”

“I agree,” nodded the Ragatha lord. “Send a message to Lord Marshal Yenga at Fardale. Tell him what we suspect, and warn him that the Seth will most likely appear at Glendale next.”

“You think they are heading towards the Litari?” asked Orteka.

“Where else can they go on the road to Woodville without going to a Torak estate?” posed the Ragatha lord. “Yes, I think Lord Burdine of the Litari will be the next host to greet Lord Sydar.”

“I will get an air tunnel to Fardale up immediately,” nodded the Lord Marshal.

* * *

The Marshal of the Litari estate stiffened when he saw the Seth clansmen approaching.

“Here they come,” Garlo said softly to the Litari lord. “It looks like Yenga was right about their plans.”

“At least he was right about their destination,” nodded Lord Burdine. “Are you sure that the men can pull this off?”

“They will be the epitome of soldiers who cannot stand the new reforms,” assured the marshal. “They will say nothing direct that could possibly embarrass us before the Emperor, but their dissatisfaction will be obvious. If the Seth are looking for clans who don’t like the Emperor’s reforms, they will find comfort here.”

“And if it something else that they are after,” frowned Lord Burdine, “we will end with egg on our faces.”

“The risk is worth it,” shrugged Garlo. “Yenga believes that the Seth are up to something nasty, and I trust his judgment. If this turns out poorly, place the blame solely on me.”

“Nonsense,” balked the Litari lord. “Emperor Marak knows that I have come to support him fully. That is the only opinion that I care about. I alone will be responsible for the charade we present today.”

The two leaders of the Litari clan waited silently for the Seth column to arrive. The host corte moved in quickly to gather the Seth horses and direct the Seth soldiers to an area where they could refresh themselves. Marshal Garlo waited until Lord Sydar was introduced before bowing in a show of respect and leaving to mingle with the visiting soldiers.

“Your men are very efficient,” complimented Lord Sydar as Lord Burdine led his guest to the meeting room.

“Marshal Garlo is an efficient trainer,” smiled Lord Burdine as he indicated that his guest should sit.

“More efficient than the trainers in Khadoratung?” asked Lord Sydar.

“In Khadoratung,” replied the Litari lord, “they teach methods for working with other clans. That is of little interest to the Litari. Marshal Garlo trains our men to work efficiently with each other. A clan is only as good as its troops. What brings you to Glendale?”

“I am just traveling along the road past your holdings,” smiled Lord Sydar. “We never had the chance at the Assembly of Lords meetings to get to know one another. I thought that it was time to do so.”

“Well,” Lord Burdine replied cautiously, “I welcome your visit. We do not get many visitors down here on the southern frontier, but I am sure you know that. Your own holdings are on the frontier if I remember correctly.”

“There is nothing wrong with your memory,” smiled Lord Sydar. “The Seth lands lie between the Macara River and the western coast. It is a sparsely inhabited area, especially if you discount the Chula tribes that infest the mountains and forests.”

“Our new allies,” Lord Burdine snorted derisively. “It is hard to imagine the things that are asked of Khadoran lords these days.”

“Precisely,” replied Lord Sydar as his face split into a grin. “I find it hard to swallow many of the new decrees. I can’t imagine that many lords are happy with them.”

“I should suspect not,” shrugged Lord Burdine, “but what can be done about it? The Lords’ Council backs the Emperor completely.”

“The Lords’ Council is selected by the Assembly of Lords,” reminded Lord Sydar. “I suspect that if there is enough outrage at the new reforms within the Assembly of Lords, things could very well revert to as they were.”

“Do you really think that is possible?” asked Lord Burdine.

“Who can say?” shrugged the Seth lord. “It is my understanding that a group of lords is planning to protest the new reforms at the next meeting of the Assembly of Lords. If the topic were to come up, would the Litari be in favor of supporting it?”

Right to the point, Lord Burdine thought as he smiled and nodded. “I could support that move if it could be done in such a way that would not bring harm to the Litari clan,” he answered, knowing that that was impossible because the Litari clan was secretly sworn to Emperor Marak. There was no possible way that Lord Burdine could support such a move without bringing harm to the Litari clan.

“Excellent,” grinned Lord Sydar. “No harm will come to the Litari from this movement because many clans will be speaking out against the reforms. The Litari will be just another voice added to the call to abolish the reforms. There will be too many of us for the Emperor to take any punitive action.”

“Are you sure others clans will be willing to risk the Emperor’s wrath?” probed Lord Burdine. “What other clans feel as we do?”

“I will not say who the other clans are,” frowned Lord Sydar. “I am sure that you can understand why, but there will be enough to make a difference. That I can assure you.”

“I guess that I will have to take your word for it,” shrugged Lord Burdine. “I will watch you closely at the next meeting. When you make your proposal, I will be ready.”

“Oh,” smiled Lord Sydar, “I will not be making the proposal. No, that is truly the way to grab the Emperor’s attention. Other clans who are already on the poor side of the Emperor will make the proposal. All we have to do is support it when it is made. It is much safer that way.”

“You have thought of everything,” noted Lord Burdine.

* * *

The Chula shaman timed his arrival on the coast of the Island of Darkness perfectly. Several hours after nightfall, he paddled his canoe to a desolate strip of beach where the jungle came close. After hiding his sleek craft deep in the jungle, Calitora stripped off his pack and transformed himself into a black jaguar. He picked the pack up in his mouth and padded softly through the dense foliage. Before the sun rose in the morning, the shaman had transformed back into his human form and found a suitable place on the peak of the tallest mountain.

The first thing the shaman did was to weave an air tunnel to Changragar. He notified the shaman at the temple that he had arrived on the Island of Darkness. When the sky lightened, Calitora had a beautiful view of the large island. He could see each of the major cities as well as the sea surrounding the island in every direction. More importantly, the main city of Motanga, Vandamar, sat very near. He could clearly see the temple and shipyards. Scores of huge ships not only filled the harbor, but lined the coast as well. If the Chula shaman had had some method of magnifying his vision, he would have seen a woman sitting on the beach in the predawn light. The woman was staring at the sea as if expecting some wisdom from its gray tumultuous waves.

Lady Mystic sighed heavily and wiped the tears from her eyes. She noticed the sky lightening and realized that another day was coming. She didn’t care. Every day would be much like the last one for the rest of her life. Her body cramped from sitting in one position for too long, but she did not adjust her position to ease the discomfort. Instead she let her mind dwell upon the pain. In fact, she focused her attention on it, welcoming it. The pain was a sensation, the only sensation, in her entire body. She closed her eyes and tried to look inward, urging the pain onward. She wanted to feel something instead of feeling numb and dead as she had ever since Aakuta’s death.

“Someone told me that I might find you here,” a voice shattered her introspection.

Lady Mystic’s eyes opened slowly, her mind being dragged away from its fixation with her pain. She saw the bottom portion of an elegant robe. Her eyes slowly panned upward until they reached the man’s face. She hissed.

“Not exactly a warm greeting,” shrugged the man. “You do have a home in the city. Why don’t you use it?”

“Why don’t you?” Lady Mystic spat. “Go away and leave me alone. I detest you and will not tolerate your gloating.”

“Gloating?” balked the man. “I am trying to be friendly to you.”

“I don’t want your friendship, Xavo,” snarled Lady Mystic. “Leave me before I kill you.”

“You are powerful,” retorted the mage, “but in your condition, I doubt you could hurt a krul. How many days have you remained on this beach? How long since you have eaten something?”

“Why do you want to know?” snapped Lady Mystic. “Are you trying to figure out when I will die of starvation so that you can come and watch? Leave me alone.”

“Why are you so hostile towards me?” asked Xavo. “I have never harmed you.”

“You are a fool,” scowled Lady Mystic. “You killed Aakuta. That is enough for me to hate you. Be glad that I am weak. That is the only thing saving your life right now.”

“I did kill Aakuta,” shrugged Xavo, “but that was my job. You would have done the same if you had had the chance.”

“How dare you say that?” Lady Mystic shouted as she struggled to get to her feet. “I loved Aakuta. I would never have killed him.”

“You betrayed him,” Xavo reminded Vand’s daughter. “Not once, but twice. I should think killing him would have been far less offensive to him.”

Lady Mystic fell face first onto the beach as her legs refused to hold her body. She started crying hysterically. Xavo knelt next to her and gently placed his hand on her back.

“Are you hurt?” he asked softly as he gently turned her over onto her back. “I know how to heal. Just tell me what is broken, and I will mend it.”

“My heart is broken,” cried Lady Mystic, “and you cannot heal it. Go away and leave me alone. Please, go away.”

Xavo stared at the woman. He knew Lady Mystic to be an extremely powerful mage, yet this woman had no resemblance to Vand’s daughter. Her faced carried the stains of a thousand tears, and her eyes were the eyes of the dead. They stared right through you. Her lips quivered in fear, and her legs didn’t have the strength to hold her body upright.

Xavo removed his pack and dropped it on the beach. He sat down next to Lady Mystic and lifted her up until her head rested on his lap. She did not fight or waste her breath by telling him to leave. He reached for the pack and drew it nearer to him. He reached into the pack and withdrew a potion. Bringing the bottle to her lips, he made her sip some of the liquid. Lady Mystic moaned unintelligibly.

Xavo brushed the sand from her face and made her sip some more of the potion. When he had succeeded in getting half the bottle of potion into her body, life began to return to Lady Mystic. Her breathing became regular instead of ragged. Her eyes seemed to be able to focus as she stared up at Xavo’s face.

“Why are you doing this?” she asked

“You need someone to do it,” Xavo shrugged. “Why shouldn’t I be the one?”

“Why should you be the one?” Lady Mystic persisted. “You are the most pompous self-absorbed person that I know. What do you want? What will this act of kindness cost me?”

“I am self-absorbed,” admitted Xavo as he fished in his pack. “I always have been, but who isn’t? One does not have friends on this island; one has competitors. Here, eat this orange. It will do wonders for you.”

Lady Mystic grabbed the orange and began devouring it as if she had not eaten for days, which she had not.

“You didn’t answer my question,” Lady Mystic pointed out. “What do you want with me, and what will it cost me?”

“What I want is some information,” smiled Xavo, “and it will cost you nothing.”

“I knew you wanted something,” huffed Lady Mystic.

“Of course I do,” admitted Xavo. “I never said that I didn’t want something, but I am glad that I came even if you refuse to help me. You would not have lasted much longer.”

“And what would that matter to you?” scowled Lady Mystic.

“Oh,” shrugged Xavo, “I would survive, but I would miss you. You are probably not aware of it, but I have always admired you. In fact, you are the only person on this island that I have admired.”

“Clova chips,” Lady Mystic shook her head. “You have never admired anyone except yourself.”

“Almost true,” smiled Xavo. “What I admired in you were the characteristics that many see in me. You are also self-absorbed and pompous, as you so aptly labeled me a few moments ago. Of course your reasons for being so smug were not only your skill and power, but also the fact that you were Vand’s daughter. I could never compete with that. Yet most people viewed us in the same light. That is why I admired you.”

Lady Mystic frowned as she thought about Xavo’s words. There was a ring of truth in what he was saying, although she had never recognized those traits in herself before, perhaps because she had never honestly examined herself. She began to understand Xavo in a way that had never dawned on her before.

“What is it that you came to me for?” Lady Mystic asked calmly.

“I have been promoted,” declared Xavo. “Vand has named me as one of his disciples. My problem is that I have no idea how to behave as a disciple, and I don’t want to appear foolish by asking someone. I was hoping that you could enlighten me.”

“And you are not afraid of appearing foolish to me?” questioned Vand’s daughter.

“No,” Xavo shook his head. “You are nobody now. You have no standing in Vand’s organization.”

“Brutally truthful,” smiled Lady Mystic. “I like that. That is another characteristic that we share. Am I to assume that your promotion is a reward for killing Aakuta?”

“It is,” nodded Xavo. “Vand was extremely pleased.”

“I can imagine,” spat Lady Mystic. “I will find a way to repay my father for that.”

“Did you really love Aakuta?” asked Xavo. “I mean, I know that you think you did, but you truly did betray him twice. I have a hard time reconciling that.”

Lady Mystic turned from Xavo’s face and stared at the sand for several moments before answering.

“I truly did love him,” she said softly. “My problem is that I truly loved my father as well, yet they were starkly at odds with one another. Twice I made what I thought was the best choice. Twice I was wrong. I wish I could have those chances back.”

“Would you truly do anything different?” asked Xavo. “Sometimes we paint a picture of ourselves that is much too rosy.”

“I understand what you are saying,” nodded Lady Mystic, “but of this I am sure. It took me far too long to realize what an animal my father is.”

“Careful,” warned Xavo. “Words of that nature will bring harm upon you. I will forget that I heard them, but you must not repeat them to others.”

“I no longer care,” shrugged Lady Mystic. “Vand has already taken my life from me. He can do no more damage to me. He had better kill me quickly, because I will most certainly kill him if I get the chance.”

Xavo inhaled deeply and swallowed nervously. He shook his head and stared at Lady Mystic.

“I would prefer that you do not say such things,” Xavo said softly. “You may be without status, but I still admire your courage and skill. I am not ready to see you die.”

“Forget it,” Lady Mystic said brusquely as she sat and moved away from Xavo. “Let me tell you what you have come to learn. By the time you leave this beach, you will know all there is about being a Disciple of Vand.”

Chapter 15

War Plans

The large room in the Imperial Palace in Okata was awash in uniforms. General Didyk spread a large map out on a long table, and all of the generals crowded around it. Lyra and StarWind moved through the crowd to stand at the Didyk’s side.

“We had thought that Duran and Zaramilden would be fairly safe from attack because of their remote locations,” Didyk began. “We could not have been more wrong as the devastating attack on Duran shows. On the face of it, the attack on Duran makes no sense from a strategic standpoint, but I suspect that Emperor Marak is quite correct in his assessment. I think Duran was attacked to gauge our response to it.”

“More likely,” interjected General Papper, “it was to test the Khadoran response. Khadora has what might pass as a navy, while Sakovan vessels are mostly fishing boats.”

“Emperor Marak has made quite a show of moving large armies to our border,” declared the Star of Sakova. “It would be impossible for Vand’s spies to have missed it.”

“Yes,” nodded General Papper, “but did he move his fleet? I suspect that Vand’s generals are more concerned with naval battles because their forces will be most vulnerable at that time. If each of those ships carries a thousand men, lost ships will have a large impact on the army that lands on our shores.”

“Not only is it a worry about losses at sea,” interrupted General Smythe, “but reconnaissance as well. The boy from Duran who survived the attack mentioned six large ships that participated in the attack. Those ships were able to successfully cross the ocean, conduct a full-scale attack on a city and depart without us knowing about it. Had the boy not survived, we might still not know about it.”

“So Vand knows that we are not effectively patrolling the sea,” nodded StarWind.

“At least we weren’t at the time of the attack on Duran,” nodded General Didyk. “I think General Papper is onto something, though. If Emperor Marak did not also move his fleet as well as his armies, Vand will know that we do not intend to interdict his ships when he crosses the ocean. I would prefer that he be a little nervous about sailing to our shores.”

“What are you suggesting?” asked General Smythe. “Are you saying that we should attempt to make him believe he will have trouble sailing here, although we do not really plan any attacks at sea?”

“I want Vand to have as little knowledge about our plans as possible,” shrugged General Didyk. “We do not have a navy, and it is clear from Marak’s response that he does not plan to use what he has. Therefore, we should make Vand think that he will face a sea battle getting here.”

“And how do you propose that we do that?” asked General Smythe. “You just got finished telling us that we have no navy. Should we send our fishing boats out to sea until Vand’s ships give chase? How do we make Vand think he will suffer a sea battle?”

Lyra held up her hand for quiet as she turned and gazed at General Didyk. “Are you of the opinion that the Khadorans will offer no resistance at sea when the invasion comes?” she asked.

“Judging by Emperor Marak’s response, yes,” nodded General Didyk. “I suspect that when Marak decided to execute a fake response to fool the Khadoran spies, he never even thought about a naval response. If I was one of Vand’s spies, that is what I would have learned from the Khadoran response.”

“And what would you have believed if you knew for a fact that Emperor Marak did consider a naval response?” asked Lyra.

General Didyk frowned and stared at the map for a moment. “If I knew that as fact,” mused the general, “I would detail spies to keep a very close watch on his ships. It could be possible that Marak was intentionally trying to deceive me, or that his ships were not in a position to respond. If the second option is closer to the truth, I would want to know where his ships had been, and what they had been doing at the time.”

“Interesting,” mused Lyra as she wondered how close Didyk’s thinking was to the Motangan generals’ thoughts. She knew that Marak did indeed plan a naval response, but she was not going to share that information with anyone. It was one of Marak’s most closely guarded secrets.

“I have the feeling that there is something that you are not sharing with us,” frowned General Papper. “Will there be a naval response to the invasion?”

“As it has already been said,” shrugged the Star of Sakova, “we have no navy. If there is to be any naval response, Emperor Marak will have to initiate it. I am just curious how a trained military mind deciphers the clues of the enemy. You have made me rather curious where Marak’s ships were at the time that he marched his armies across Khadora.”

“They were on the western coast,” answered StarWind. “They were used to ferry the armies back to Khadoratung after their long march southward.”

“And as that was a covert operation,” nodded General Didyk, “I suspect that Vand’s spies did not know that. So Marak did think of the naval option, but was unable to use his ships in two places at the same time. That information should not leave this room. Let us keep Vand guessing.”

“Marak can not hide his ships from the spies,” interjected StarWind. “They may not know the comings and goings of the ships, but which coast of the country they are on is fairly obvious to anyone watching.”

“He could take them over the horizon,” suggested General Smythe. “Unless a spy took a boat out of port, he would not be certain of their location.”

“True,” nodded StarWind, “but what I meant is that those ships had to enter the port of Khadoratung to unload the armies. Even if it was done under the cover of darkness, they were seen. I could well imagine that Khadoratung is crawling with spies. Anyone who knows the extent of Marak’s fleet could easily ascertain that all of his ships were on the western coast at the time.”

“Ah,” nodded General Smythe. “I see what you are saying. It is a long way around the landmass, especially from the Khadoran capital.”

“Where is Vand likely to strike next?” asked Lyra as she wished to move the conversation away from the naval response.

“The two cities at the greatest danger are Zaramilden and Alamar,” declared General Didyk. “Alamar, if he decides to concentrate his forces on us, and Zaramilden, if he is aiming at Khadora.”

“Why bother with Zaramilden if he is going to land in Khadora?” asked General Papper. “His men would have to cross the Kalatung Mountains. That makes no sense.”

“I don’t think he would unload his forces at Zaramilden,” explained General Didyk, “but he would destroy the city so that there was no force on his flank when he attacked Raven’s Point. He might even make another prewar run to take Zaramilden off the map before the real invasion. It is not a city that he needs to conquer as it leads to nowhere, but he cannot afford to spare it either. As Papper pointed out earlier, his forces are vulnerable at sea. He cannot bypass Zaramilden without destroying it, at least not if he is attacking Khadora. If he attacks us, Zaramilden could be spared. It is much too far from Alamar to matter to him.”

“And if we evacuated Zaramilden before the invasion?” asked Lyra. “What would that tell Vand?”

“Evacuate the whole city?” balked General Didyk. “What would you do with the people?”

“What would it tell Vand?” repeated Lyra.

“I am not sure,” shrugged General Didyk. “It might tell him that we expect him to strike at Khadora, or it might tell him that we are not interested in defending it. I can’t be sure.”

“Anyone?” asked Lyra as her head turned to gaze upon the generals in the room.

“If Vand knows anything about you,” offered General Manitow, “it would tell him that you are concerned for the people’s lives. Nothing more.”

“Good,” Lyra nodded and smiled at the general from Alamar. “That is what I was hoping to hear. Zaramilden will be evacuated immediately. Half of the people will be relocated to Gatong, and the other half will go to Fortung. Any problems with that?”

“We will make room for them in Gatong,” answered General Papper.

“Fortung will be ready for them also,” agreed General Smythe. “Will it be done by ship or overland through the Sakova?”

“Those that can travel the distance will be moved overland,” declared Lyra. “The old and infirm will be taken by ship. General Manitow, I would like you to organize those going by ship. Alamar is the closest port.”

General Manitow nodded.

“People from StarCity will organize the overland portion of the trip,” Lyra continued.

“I can send people out to meet them halfway,” offered General Papper. “I know that your people are busy with the harvest. The less time they spend away from StarCity, the better.”

“Thank you, Papper,” smiled Lyra. “That is quite acceptable.”

“What about Alamar?” asked General Didyk. “If Vand’s armies plan on coming to the Sakova, Alamar must be attacked. He has no option on that. How do we plan a defense?”

“That is the crucial question, isn’t it?” frowned Lyra. “I agree that Alamar will be attacked first. In fact, I fully expect Vand’s armies to start at Alamar and work their way around the coast all the way to Gatong.”

“Why around the coast?” asked General Kapla. “He does not know the superstitions of the Sakova. Isn’t he likely to blaze a path across the center of the country?”

“I don’t think so,” answered Lyra. “The Omungans certainly did not when they attacked a thousand years ago, and they were coming from the same island.”

“How could you possibly know that?” frowned General Didyk. “This is not the time for making assumptions.”

“I agree, General Didyk,” smiled Lyra. “I saw the Omungans attack the Sakovans.”

Murmurs spread through the room as the assembled generals looked at the Star of Sakova in disbelief. She laughed softly and shook her head before responding.

“My relationship with Kaltara is rather unique,” Lyra stated. “When I became the Star of Sakova, I was a young Omungan student. I knew nothing of the Sakovan people. I asked Kaltara for guidance, and he gave it. I had a series of visions that showed me the complete history of the Sakovan people. The images flashed by quicker than I could comprehend them, but they became memories to me. I actually witnessed the attacks and the subsequent slaughters. The Omungan invaders started near Alamar and worked their way around the coast in a circle. When the coast was secured, they turned inland. Fortunately, they never completed their task.”

The room was completely silent for several moments before General Didyk spoke. “No wonder you hate the Omungans so much,” he said. “To have to witness such death and destruction, it makes me ashamed of my ancestors.”

“They were my ancestors, too,” Lyra replied, “and I do not hate Omungans. I was one. What I hated about Omunga was the manipulation of the people for the satisfaction of a few. Besides, none of us are guilty for what our ancestors did. We are responsible for what we have done, and even then Kaltara offers forgiveness to those who seek it.”

Again the room fell silent for several moments.

“Can we count on Vand attacking in the same manner?” asked General Manitow. “That is taking quite a gamble with many lives.”

“That is true,” frowned Lyra, “but we must have a plan, even if we decide to change it later. For now let’s assume that he will attack in the same manner that the Omungans did.”

“Then the heart of the Sakova becomes our sanctuary,” General Smythe pointed out. “That is why you are stockpiling food in StarCity?”

“That is one reason,” nodded Lyra. “The other reason is that StarCity is central to all locations. It is an ideal distribution point.”

“If we mass our armies at Alamar,” posed General Didyk, “and Vand learns of it, he might be tempted to encircle us there.”

“There is a risk of that,” nodded StarWind, “but it can be minimized. The armies can be kept out of sight. If the bulk of the armies are located in the Sakova, we will have no fear of spies. We will allow no one in and no one out. Food and supplies will be delivered from StarCity.”

“And how will we get our troops into Alamar in time to do us any good?” asked General Kapla.

“By delaying the landing of their ships,” answered Lyra. “I don’t want to go into that just now, but we are developing a plan to stall their invasion as their ships near the coast. The real question is what do we do if they overpower us at Alamar?”

“If you are correct about their plan of attack,” offered General Smythe, “we could slowly retreat around the coast. It is usually a losing battle when you try to retreat safely, but what other option is there?”

“Fleeing and regrouping,” suggested General Didyk. “We know the geography much better than they do, and the Sakovans taught me a vital lesson that I will not soon forget. We can make sure that there is no food available along the coast. Just supplying their own armies will slow them down. We can regroup at a time and place of our choosing and attack them when they least expect it.”

“Actually,” General Papper interjected thoughtfully, “a combination of those two plans would be best. If we divide our forces into two segments, the smaller group can slowly retreat along the coast, burning fields along the way. The larger segment can slip into the heart of the Sakova and then be used for surprise attacks.”

“You men are beginning to think like Sakovans,” grinned Lyra. “Let’s work up a tentative plan and see if we can find any holes in it. Approach it as if it is just a shell of an idea. What I mean by that is to think freely as we design this. I am sure that we can make improvements as we go along.”

* * *

Emperor Marak was staring at the wall map in his office in the Imperial Palace in Khadoratung when a knock sounded on the door. He gave permission to enter without taking his eyes from the map. He heard the door open and close, but little else. Still, that small amount of knowledge told him a great deal. The footsteps were soft and had only traveled half way across the room.

“You are getting lax,” chided the visitor. “Never depend on the guards to properly screen your visitors. I don’t want to find you dead one day.”

Marak pivoted swiftly, his arm moving in a blur as the Sakovan star sailed through the air. It slammed into the floor less than a pace in front of the visitor’s feet. Marak grinned.

“Your words are well taken, friend,” smiled the Emperor as he stared at the priest of Kaltara. “Why the new disguise?”

“I do not want to limit my access to you by portraying only an Imperial Guard,” shrugged Fisher as he bent down and pried the star out of the wooden floor. “There may come a time when that disguise will not be enough to gain me entry. By the way, you would have missed me by over a pace with that star.”

“No, I wouldn’t have,” grinned Marak. “Had I not noticed your unique walk, I would have aimed higher.”

Fisher grinned and shook his head as he walked to the Emperor and handed back the star. “A unique walk?” he frowned. “How do you mean?”

“Other people try to walk softly when they are creeping up on someone,” explained Marak. “It makes their steps very deliberate. You walk naturally, but silently. I am not sure if that is a good explanation, but I understand the difference. That is all that matters.”

“I will have to pay more attention to my walking now,” chuckled the spy.

“Don’t,” Marak shook his head. “Your walking is perfect. If you think about it, you will lessen your stealth.” The Emperor returned the star to his pouch and sighed softly, “I am glad that you have come. We have a problem.”

“You always have a problem,” replied Fisher. “What is the nature of this one?”

“There is a stirring among the clan lords,” explained Emperor Marak. “Some of them are planning a revolt of sorts. I need you to identify the players.”

“That is exactly what I have been doing,” grinned Fisher. “You are talking about what started with the Seth clan I presume?”

“How did you know so soon?” asked the Emperor.

“I am a spy,” laughed Fisher. “Actually, I spoke with Yenga shortly after he found out about it. I have been working on it ever since. I stopped by to let you know what I have found out so far.”

“Come and sit,” urged the Emperor as he retreated to his desk. “I want to hear what you have found out.”

Fisher sat in front of the Emperor’s desk while the Torak sat behind it.

“Marshal Orteka was wise enough to have one of his men shadow Lord Sydar when he left the Litari estate,” Fisher began. “The Seth lord has been doing a lot of visiting in the south, and he is not the only one. Lord Woroman of the Disina clan has also been making short, discreet visits to the frontier clans.”

“Those two clans have unresolved boundary disputes with the Chula,” noted the Torak. “That may be what ties them together.”

“They are also neighbors,” nodded Fisher. “Have you been told what the conversation with Lord Burdine was about?”

“Yes,” nodded Marak. “They plan to cause a vote in the Assembly of Lords revoking my reforms, but Lord Burdine was not able to tell me much about it.”

“That is because he learned very little,” replied Fisher. “The plotters are very reluctant to speak about the plan. At this point they are merely seeking out clans that are unhappy with the reforms. When they find one, they make rather simplistic promises of having a chance to vote against the reforms, but they steadfastly refuse to name the other clans involved.”

“That will make it practically impossible to find out what I am up against,” frowned the Emperor.

“That is not entirely true,” grinned Fisher. “There are many ways to pierce the veil of secrecy on any plan of the clans.”

“Such as?” asked Marak.

“You have two cortes of troops from each and every clan in Khadoratung at all times,” answered Fisher. “I took the liberty of mingling with some of them recently. The visits that the Seth and Disina clans have been making started fairly recently. The first visit made by either clan, was made by both of them at the same time. Both the Seth and the Disina visited with the Rican clan just before the traveling started.”

“Another clan with a boundary dispute,” nodded the Emperor. “Is Lord Padro also making the rounds among his neighbors?”

“Not exactly,” answered Fisher. “Lord Padro is certainly visiting other clans, but not in the south. I learned from Katzu that the Rican lord has been busy visiting some old enemies of yours. He saw Lord Padro at the Pikata estate. He also heard that the Rican lord had already been to see the Vessi, Glamaraldi, and Lejune clans.”

“The four clans that hosted the Jiadin,” nodded the Emperor. “Now what Lord Burdine said makes sense. He said that Lord Sydar told him that clans that were already on my poor side would be the ones to ask for the vote. So Lord Padro is definitely one of the plotters.”

“So it seems,” nodded Fisher. “What I haven’t been able to find out is who else is involved. I can find out who was visited, but not what they talked about or agreed to.”

“You have found out a great deal already,” smiled Marak.

“And what are you going to do with the information now that you have it?” asked the spy.

“I am not sure,” Marak admitted. “It helps knowing the major players, but Khadora cannot afford this type of nonsense right now. The Time of Cleansing is coming very soon. I can feel it.”

“I could eliminate a few of the players for you,” suggested Fisher.

“No,” the Torak shook his head. “That is not the way to build unity. I want to make these rebellious lords understand that there are greater things at stake than their estates. We need every fighter we can find, and I do not plan to turn any of them away.”

“I understand,” shrugged Fisher, “but if you change your mind, let me know.”

“You have such confidence in yourself,” chuckled Marak. “Assassinating a clan lord is not an easy task, yet you offer it so easily.”

“I understand what is at stake,” Fisher replied seriously. “The odds of any of us surviving this coming war are slim. What difference does it make if my contribution comes before the war or during it? The offer is a serious one.”

“And I will take it as such,” Marak nodded soberly. “Let me try to find a better approach first. If I cannot dissuade these lords within the bounds of the law, then we shall talk again about this matter.”

“You have already called for an Assembly of Lords,” Fisher pointed out. “This is likely to be the last one before the fighting starts. Whatever you have planned, you must do it soon.”

“Agreed,” nodded Emperor Marak. “It must be resolved at that meeting.”

“Do you want me to continue pursuing this matter?” asked Fisher.

“No,” Marak shook his head. “I think you have identified the major players. If I can find a way to handle them, the rest will fall into line. Have we heard from Aakuta?”

“Not a word,” frowned Fisher. “I fear the worst. I do have another man on the Island of Darkness now. He will not provide a great deal of intelligence, but he should be able to notify us when the ships leave port.”

“Who is it?” asked the Torak.

“I do not think you have ever met him,” answered Fisher. “His name is Calitora. He is a Chula shaman.”

“An excellent choice,” approved Marak. “Can we communicate with him?”

“We can,” replied Fisher. “He confines himself to the mountain peaks so there is no chance of our conversations being overheard. Why do you ask?”

“I am not sure,” the Torak admitted. “It is just good to know that we can ask for specific intelligence if we need to. We know a great deal about the coastline of the Island of Darkness, but we have little knowledge of the interior. Perhaps this shaman can provide that knowledge?”

“Calitora has the ability to travel in feline form,” nodded Fisher. “That would make mapping the interior possible without alerting the Motangans. I will pass your request on to him.”

Marak nodded with appreciation and changed the subject, “What Chula tribes border the estates of our three rebellious lords?”

“One tribe borders all three estates,” replied Fisher. “It is the Sookie tribe. The leader’s name is Grundar. Why do you ask?”

“I want to meet him,” replied the Torak. “I have been very thorough in meeting all of the Khadoran lords, but the same is not true of the Chula chieftains. Someone should have berated me for that lapse. Do you know Grundar?”

“I have met him,” nodded Fisher. “He is a bear of a man, but very friendly.”

“How long would it take for all of the Chula chieftains to get to Changragar?” asked Marak.

“If it was important,” mused Fisher, “two days at the most. Perhaps even one day might suffice. The Chula will race night and day if it is required of them. What are you planning?”

“I want to meet all of them as soon as possible,” declared the Torak. “You have reminded me that this will be the last Assembly of Lords before the war. Shouldn’t I make the effort to meet my Chula brothers?”

“You certainly should,” Fisher grinned broadly. “May I have the honor of setting it up?”

“Please do,” nodded Marak. “With the secret door to Changragar, I can be there quickly. Just let me know when to arrive.”

“I will come and get you personally,” promised Fisher.

Chapter 16

Changing Boundaries

The ship glided noiselessly along the Sakovan coast south of Alamar. The night was young and dark, the moon not yet risen. The coastline was hard to see, and men lined the rails listening for the telltale sounds of the surf. The smell of wood smoke drifted lightly in the air, and the captain of the ship knew that he was close to his destination. So did his two special passengers who arrived alongside the helm as if the captain had summoned them.

“We are close,” one of the passengers declared. “Bring the ship to a halt and lower the small boat.”

“I can get you in closer,” offered the captain.

“You will follow my orders,” the passenger replied tersely.

The captain slowly backed away and nodded his head. He turned and snared one of the crew and told him to inform the rest of the crew that the passengers were leaving. Within minutes the ship slowed down as the crew raced around silently preparing for the departure. The captain nodded in satisfaction at the performance of his men.

“They will lower the small boat in just a minute,” the captain said to his passengers. “What about picking you back up?”

“Tomorrow night at this same time,” instructed the passenger, “you will be as far north of Alamar as you are now south of it. I will meet you there in a small boat of my own. If I am not there, return the following night. If again I do not show, return home.”

“Just one of you will be returning?” asked the captain.

“Your task, Captain, is to follow my orders,” snapped the passenger, “not to ask questions.”

“Yes, Sir,” apologized the captain. “I will be at the right spot tomorrow night. Your small boat is ready.”

The passengers spun and headed for the rail, while the mate walked up alongside the captain.

“You came close that time, Captain,” the mate said softly. “Other captains that I have sailed with have a golden rule when they carry Clarvoy as a passenger.”

“And I suppose that you are about to tell me that rule?” sighed the captain.

“Indeed, I am,” replied the mate. “Never, ever, speak to Clarvoy unless you are required to. I have seen captains thrown overboard for offending him. It is not a healthy thing to do.”

“I will try to remember that,” snarled the captain. “I hope that he…”

“Don’t finish that thought,” warned the mate. “Even thinking such a thought is inviting death. You are new to these voyages. Listen to one who has made many of them. You may find that several of your crew are in Clarvoy’s employ.”

“For what purpose?” asked the captain.

“Vand requires a lot of ship captains to man his fleet,” explained the mate. “He rotates captains on these voyages to train them. What better use of a spy then to watch a man that will be carrying a thousand of his warriors into battle? You are being watched and evaluated on this voyage, Captain. Make sure you put your best face forward.”

A crewman approached the helm and stood before the captain.

“Small boat away, Sir,” the crewman reported. “We can hear the surf from the starboard rail. I suspect the small boat will return fairly quickly.”

“Let me know as soon as we have it aboard,” ordered the captain.

“Aye, Sir,” nodded the crewman as he departed.

“Thank you, Mate,” the captain said softly. “I could not have imagined spies among my own crew.”

“My pleasure, Sir,” smiled the mate. “As captains go, you’ve been a good one. I wouldn’t want to lose you.”

“I was just trying to do my best,” shrugged the captain. “I just hope they get to the beach safely.”

“They should be there now,” replied the mate.

* * *

The small boat slid up on the beach, and the two men immediately jumped out and pushed it back into the surf. As the crewmen rowed the small boat back to its mother ship, Clarvoy led the mage away from the waterline.

“Which way?” asked the mage as he looked up and down the beach for any signs of life.

“North,” answered Clarvoy. “There is a small fishing village not far up the beach. That is the origin of the wood smoke we have been smelling. Do you know how to sail, Pango?”

“Somewhat,” answered the mage. “I sailed a bit in my younger days, but not extensively.”

“That will do,” replied Clarvoy. “Be very quiet as we approach the village. If we are discovered, use a memory spell on the villagers. Do not kill them. It is important that our passing not be detected.”

“I understand,” nodded Pango.

The two dark-clothed men walked quietly along the beach until they came to the edge of the fishing village. A row of tiny one-room shacks sat back from the water. On the beach in front of each shack sat a small fishing boat. Clarvoy stared at the boats in the darkness for a moment, waiting to see if anything moved on the beach. When he was satisfied that the fishermen were all inside their shacks, he led the mage to one of the older boats. He touched Pango on the arm and pointed to the chosen boat. Pango picked up the bow of the small boat and slid it into the surf. When he turned to help Clarvoy into the boat, he found the spymaster missing.

A shiver of fear raced up Pango’s spine as his eyes scanned the dark beach looking for his master. He sighed with relief when he saw Clarvoy emerge from alongside the shack. They quickly got into the boat and started paddling out to sea. Even before they emerged from the surf, Pango had the small sail hoisted to catch the breeze. Within moments the land was no longer visible.

“I was worried about you back there,” Pango admitted.

“The fisherman must have sensed something,” explained Clarvoy. “Fortunately, I sensed the fisherman. He will not remember anything in the morning.”

“Won’t he report his boat stolen?” asked the mage.

“Report it to who?” asked Clarvoy. “There is no law in villages like that one.”

“I hadn’t thought about that,” conceded the mage.

“There is much about the Sakova that will appear foreign to you,” nodded the spymaster. “Even the lessons that you have already had on Motanga will not adequately prepare you for this task. Fortunately, we have many hours alone on this boat before we part company. Let me spend that time by telling you all about your target host. By the time we dock in Alamar tomorrow with the rest of the fishermen coming in from the sea, you will know much about the Sakovans and how they act.”

“What can you tell me of the host?” Pango asked nervously.

Clarvoy smiled knowingly and shook his head. “Put such fears behind you, Pango,” he advised. “You will appreciate your new body. The Sakovans are a very fit and hardy people. You will luxuriate in the youth and vitality of your host.”

* * *

HawkShadow appeared at ease as he walked along the streets of Alamar, but the Sakovan assassin was never at ease. His head moved slightly as he walked. Although the movement appeared casual, it allowed HawkShadow to constantly gaze around himself, categorizing people, analyzing potential threats, and looking for that one person who stood out from the rest because of some anomaly. He discovered nothing disturbing on his walk to the Alamar School of Magic.

HawkShadow veered into the empty lot beside the school and placed his back to a tree as he observed the people there. StormSong was sparing with SkyDancer and had drawn quite an audience, not only of fellow Sakovans brought to Alamar to prepare the city for defense against the invasion, but also of regular citizens of the former Omungan city. The crowd cheered and groaned with each bold move or hazardous slip of the battling women. HawkShadow smiled broadly as he remembered such bouts in StarCity.

StormSong was a powerful and brutally aggressive warrior, while SkyDancer relied on speed and surprise to keep her opponent off stride. Judging from the amount of perspiration flowing over each of the women, HawkShadow knew that the bout had been going on for some time before he arrived.

The assassin’s eyes roved over the assembled crowd, noting the many familiar faces of Sakovans. Scores of his friends where assembled in this once-foreign city. He shook his head imperceptibly as he thought about what had brought them all here.

“It is good to see the young warriors unwind a bit,” came a friendly voice from behind HawkShadow.

HawkShadow smiled as he recognized the voice and footstep of Lyra’s uncle. He did not bother to turn and greet the old mage.

“They have a very physical way of unwinding,” chuckled HawkShadow. “Sweat is a great cleaner of the mind. Any word from the Star yet?”

“Just a few minutes ago,” Temiker replied as he moved alongside the Sakovan assassin. “LifeTender took the message. She says that we are to continue our preparations here at Alamar. The generals have accepted the fact that this city will be the prime target.”

“And Zaramilden?” asked HawkShadow.

“It is to be evacuated as we suspected,” answered the mage. “The Sakovans from StarCity are to complete the work here in Alamar quickly. Lyra has decided to hide the bulk of the armies in the heartland. That will require constant shipments of food and supplies from StarCity.”

“And a resumption of the patrols on the fringes of the Sakova,” nodded HawkShadow. “I am pleased. I am not a city boy, and I yearn to return to my homeland.”

“I can understand your feelings,” smiled Temiker as he gazed around at the crowd. “Still, you and your people will be greatly missed here. I never thought that I would live long enough to see Omungans and Sakovans enjoying each other’s company as I see today. It is a heart-warming thing to witness.”

“We will be back,” promised HawkShadow. “Besides, we still have a few days of work before we can leave, and not all of us will be leaving. LifeTender and some of the mages will stay to help out with your magic tutoring. I suspect that SkyDancer and I will be among the first to move out. We will have to choose encampments for the armies that will be arriving in the heartland.”

“Yes,” nodded Temiker. “I could not manage without the mages. We have a great bunch of students, but there is little time to get them ready.”

“What about the Khadoran mages?” asked HawkShadow. “Can’t they help you?”

“They already are,” answered Temiker. “We have sent over a thousand students north to be trained, but Khadora is going through the same problems that we are. It takes time to determine a student’s abilities. One cannot teach magic overnight any more than one can instantly become a great warrior.”

“We will all do the best we can,” shrugged HawkShadow.

* * *

The fishermen sailed into the port of Alamar in a mass of sails and hulls as they always did at the end of the day. The small ships darted every which way through the harbor as some headed for private docks while others tied up to the public wharves. Others, having no permanent dockage, merely ran their ships up on the beach. Hundreds of fishermen secured their boats and gathered their catch. The two Motangan men in the stolen boat blended in easily as people scurried about to finish their chores before the sun set.

Clarvoy led Pango through the streets of Alamar until he found the location that he wanted. There he left Pango to hide in the darkness as the sun dropped below the horizon.

The streets started to empty as the sky grew darker, citizens returning home, their tasks for the day complete. Clarvoy walked the city streets, still dressed as a poor fisherman with a canvas rain barrier covering his clothes. His black eyes scanned the city searching for the chosen host. When he finally found the Sakovan, Clarvoy drew attention to himself by carelessly discarding the canvas cloak.

As Clarvoy had expected, the Sakovan noticed the careless act. Dressed completely in black, Clarvoy did his best to look suspicious, knowing that the chosen Sakovan was proud and would never call for assistance unless it was needed. Clarvoy smiled inwardly as he walked to a corner and peered nervously around it. When he casually glanced back, Clarvoy noticed that the Sakovan had disappeared from view. The spymaster’s smile broadened as he turned the corner and walked slowly along the street.

Clarvoy did not bother to turn and verify that the Sakovan was following him. He had enough respect for the Sakovans that he knew he was being followed. The Motangan spymaster moved at a leisurely pace, stopping every so often to suspiciously listen to a conversation or peer into an open window. He made sure not to do anything so openly brazen that it would cause the Sakovan to act. Rather he tried to remain suspicious without providing any proof that he was actually a spy.

Clarvoy moved into a dark alley, its only illumination being a street torch at the far end. He slowly walked the length of the alley and halted in the glow of the light. Unexpectedly, Clarvoy swiftly turned around and stared into the dark alley. He saw a dark shape move swiftly towards a small alcove along the side of the alley. He smiled openly and listened intently. He heard the sounds of a brief struggle and then marched into the darkness. As he approached the alcove, the Sakovan walked out and smiled at Clarvoy.

“You certainly know your trade,” smiled the Sakovan. “It happened just like you said it would.”

“All things are predictable,” nodded Clarvoy. “Do you know what to do next?”

“I have everything memorized,” nodded the Sakovan. “I will report in regularly.”

“Good,” replied Clarvoy. “As of this moment, Pango no longer exists. Remember that. Never let your mind wander back to your old self. You must assume your new identity at a primal level.”

“It shall be as you command,” nodded the Sakovan.

Clarvoy nodded silently and turned. He walked out of the alley leaving his new Sakovan spy behind.

* * *

Fisher and the Torak stepped into the library of the temple at Changragar. The chill air sent a shiver through Marak as he walked across the room and exited the library. The two Chula guards posted outside the library bowed their heads as the Torak led Fisher past them. Marak turned in the corridor and walked to the office of the shaman. Ukaro, Axor, and Rykoma were waiting for him.

“I did not realize that this would be a meeting of the head shamans of the Chula,” quipped the Torak as he entered the office.

“Then you have much to learn about the Chula,” grinned Ukaro as he crossed the room and hugged his son. “The head shaman is always involved in such lofty meetings. It is we who keep the chieftains in line.”

“I should have realized as much,” smiled the Torak as he returned the embrace. “What is the mood of the chieftains?”

“Most are excited about an audience with the Torak,” answered Rykoma, “but a few are worrisome about what matters might be decided here today.”

“Like giving away Chula land to the flatlanders?” probed Marak.

“You are perceptive,” nodded Axor. “The Chula have held fast to their land for many generations. It is against our basic code to cede one small pace of it willingly.”

“I understand,” nodded the Torak as he broke his father’s embrace. “Tell me what I must do to ease their concerns without losing the unity of the Khadorans.”

“The simple answer,” shrugged Rykoma, “is to tell the flatlanders where their land really ends. In their hearts, they know this already. They are greedy and taking this opportunity to expand their lands without a struggle. It is not right.”

“I agree wholeheartedly,” admitted the Torak, “but that does not make the problem go away. I need the armies of the Khadorans.”

“Have you given this problem no thought before bringing the chieftains together?” asked Rykoma.

“I have given it great deal of thought,” replied Marak. “I believe that I have a solution in hand, but that is not the point. I come here today seeking the advice of the Chula. What advice do you have to offer?”

“The Chula must obey the Torak,” declared Ukaro. “There is no other option. Tell the chieftains what must be done, and it will be done, even the giving of sacred land.”

Marak frowned as he waited for another viewpoint, but it became apparent that the religious leaders were not the ones to decide the issue.

“Let us meet with the chieftains,” stated the Torak. “This issue must be resolved.”

Ukaro nodded and led the small group out of the temple. In the clearing before the temple was a large crowd of Chula. Scores of Chula chieftains sat on the ground in a large semicircle. Behind each of the chieftains was the head shaman for that tribe. Ukaro, Axor, and Rykoma took their places as Fisher led the Torak to a spot in the center of the circle. Marak turned slowly, gazing upon the faces of the Chula leaders. He saw bright eyes and smiles from most of the men, but he also saw frowns of suspicion on a few faces. His eyes dallied on those few who showed some measure of discomfort.

“This meeting of the Chula tribes is long overdue,” Marak began. “I am Marak, Emperor of Khadora and the Torak. I thank each of you for coming today, and I apologize for the short notice of this gathering. The Time of Cleansing is soon upon all of us, Khadorans and Chula alike. I know that the Chula have been preparing, as have the Khadorans. It is important that we continue to do so.”

While no expressions had changed so far, Marak was pleased that he had everyone’s full attention. Other than his voice, not a sound was heard in the clearing.

“As you are aware,” Marak continued, “I am trying to formalize the borders of the Khadoran clans. This includes the borders with the Chula in cases where they are neighbors. I am also aware that most, if not all, of the Khadoran claims are false. Still, I must make a decision on the boundaries, and I must do it immediately. To deny every single Khadoran claim would result in losing the support of many of the Khadorans. To ask the Chula to give up the land of all of the claims is to insult the rightful owners of the land. I wish to do neither. What I would like to hear from you today are your thoughts on this problem. Who would like to begin?”

A huge burly man stood swiftly among a smattering of suppressed chuckles. Marak noted that he had been one of those frowning.

“I am Grundar,” bellowed the giant, “chief of the Sookie tribe. I am pleased to hear the Torak declare that he will not honor all of the Khadoran claims. Many of my brother tribes are involved in these disputes, if you can call them that, but the claims made by the flatlanders in regards to the Sookie tribe are outlandish. It is an outright theft of vast areas of Chula territory. It cannot be allowed to stand.”

“What is your solution to the problem?” asked the Torak.

“You do not want to hear my solution,” Grundar said to a chorus of laughs from the other chieftains.

Marak could not resist smiling to himself as he envisioned Grundar’s solution to the problem.

“What is your alternative solution?” asked the Torak.

“I do not know,” admitted Grundar. “I have spoken to my brothers about this problem before today. Many of them are quite willing to give up small portions of Chula land to ease the Torak’s problems. We understand that we will never again be pressed to make concessions and that dulls the pain somewhat, but the claims against the Sookie tribe are enormous. My people would no longer be able to live upon our lands. Whole valleys would be taken from us as well as the rivers that flow out of the mountains. We would have no access to the feeding grounds of much of the game in the forest. It would be better to just disband the Sookie tribe and make my people move to other tribes.”

“I will not ask that of any Chula tribe,” Marak replied seriously. “I am aware of three Khadoran clans that border your territory, Grundar. They are the Seth, Rican, and Disina clans. Are there others making claims to any of your land?”

“There are two others,” nodded Grundar, “but their claims are not as onerous, although they are also false.”

“Would you be willing to compromise with the two clans who claims are not onerous?” asked the Torak.

“By compromise,” frowned Grundar, “are you asking if I would honor their claims and forfeit the land?”

“I am,” nodded the Torak. “And I am speaking only of the those two clans, not the other three.”

“I would,” nodded Grundar, “but only because the Torak wishes it to be so. My people can live without the land represented by those smaller claims.”

“And are you willing to fight the other three clans to preserve your land?” inquired Marak.

“With your permission,” Grundar beamed broadly as the other Chula shouted encouragement, “my warriors would sweep over those flatlanders in a single day.”

“That speaks well of the Sookie warriors,” replied the Torak, “but it did not answer my question. Would you personally fight the other three clans to preserve the land of your people?”

“I do not understand your question,” frowned Grundar. “I would certainly lead my people into battle. No Chula chieftain would shy from a battle while sending his warriors to attack. If you mean would I fight them alone,” he added as his frown deepened, “that would be the act of a fool, but I would agree to it if that is what the Torak demands. I have an obligation to my people, Torak. If you were to give me permission to defend my land, but denied that same permission to my warriors, I would be bound to attack the flatlanders by myself.”

“You feel that strongly about this dispute that you would throw your life away?” asked Marak.

“I have three responsibilities that I cannot ignore,” replied Grundar. “They are to Kaltara, the Torak, and the Sookie tribe, in that order. Were you to present the situation that I just described, I would be honor bound to carry out the actions that I just spoke of. It is not a case of throwing my life away. It is a case of living up to one’s responsibilities. My people cannot survive with the loss of the lands that the flatlanders are demanding. My only alternative is to forcefully reclaim my lands. The only two things that can stop me from doing that are God and the Torak.”

Marak frowned and nodded slowly. He was impressed with Grundar’s devotion, but he would not allow a bloodbath to mar the progress that he had made so far.

“Thank you for your honest words, Grundar,” the Torak said loudly. “I would like to hear some other views regarding this problem. Who will speak next?”

Tmundo of the Kywara tribe rose to speak.

“The Kywara have no claims against their land by flatlanders,” Tmundo began, “but that is only because our lands border the clans of the Torak. Almost every other tribe present here today has at least one claim of land set against it by the flatlanders. Most of the claims are small, but it is basic Khadoran greed to grab what is free. These Khadoran know that you will not allow the Chula to defend their land. In a sense, your actions have prompted these false claims. Now you come to us to provide a solution. We feel that we know what solution you want to hear. You want us to voluntarily give up our lands to please the greedy Khadorans. You know in your heart that these claims are wrong. The assembled chieftains of the Chula who are gathered here today know that these claims are false, and the greedy Khadorans who made these claims know that they are false. Why do you torture us with this meeting where we are pushed to say things that are not truly in our hearts? You are the Torak. Tell us what we must do, and we will obey.”

Tmundo sat down and silence fell over the clearing. Marak scanned the faces of the chieftains and saw both defiance and acceptance in their faces. He smiled.

“I have not asked to lead people,” stated the Torak, “but Kaltara has seen fit to place me in charge of two very diverse peoples. I will never spite one to please the other. Kaltara’s commandment to me was to unite the two peoples, and that is what I intend to do. Are there any other thoughts that should be expressed before I explain what my solution is?”

Many an eyebrow rose in surprise at the Torak’s words. The chieftains had come into the meeting expecting that they knew the outcome, but they learned that the Torak was wiser than they had given him credit for.

Chapter 17

Strange Proposal

The evening before the Assembly of Lords convened, Emperor Marak sat in the chambers of the Lords’ Council along with the members of that elite group.

“Spotters are now in place along the entire coast from the Fortung Mountains to the Kalatung Mountains,” reported Lord Patel. “The requirement of spacing them no more than one league apart has been met.”

“Excellent,” nodded the Emperor. “What are their means of communications?”

“There are not enough air mages available at this time to accommodate all of the spotters,” answered the Nordon lord, “but provisions have been made for swift communications. In cases where no mages are available, runners have been substituted. The runners will ride swiftly to the nearest air mage.”

“That will have to do for now,” sighed Emperor Marak. “We are spreading our people thin.”

“We have little choice,” interjected Lord Quilo. “We are trying to train thousands of our own mages in addition to contingents from Sakova and Fakara. We simply can’t afford to spare that many for monitoring the coastline.”

“If you had not started training mages when you were lord of Fardale,” added Lord Kiamesh, “none of this would even be possible now. Be thankful that we are as prepared as we are.”

“What about the military training, Lord Jamarat?” asked the Torak.

“We are doing well,” answered the Neju lord. “The last several rotations of trainees have been fantastic in attitude. I think those that we trained earlier returned to their homes and bragged to their fellow soldiers about the training. All of the trainees these days are eager to learn. It is going much faster now.”

“Good,” Marak smiled at Lord Jamarat.

Marak was especially pleased with how the Neju lord had taken on the responsibility for the training. Most lords of Khadora had looked upon Jamarat as a simpleton. They no longer dismissed him as they used to. As a trainer, Lord Jamarat was among the best. His simple methods had enabled him to explain everything in ways that every man could understand.

“How are we to interact with the Fakarans and the Sakovans?” asked Lord Chenowith. “That is not something that we have discussed at length.”

“An excellent question,” replied the Emperor. “And we should not forget the elves in our planning. I received a message from Mistake, err, Princess Alahara. The elves have resolved their differences and wish to talk about their contribution to the war effort. They proposed coming to Angragar to discuss it, but I have requested permission to travel to Elvangar.”

“Will they allow it?” asked Lord Patel. “I thought their greatest fear was that humans would go to Elvangar.”

“That is one of their fears,” nodded Marak. “It is also one of the reasons that I want to go. We could host an elven delegation in Angragar and map out the best way for the elves to help us, but that would only involve a handful of elves. I want all of the elves to see a human and realize that we hold nothing but friendship towards them. I think it is important to make sure that the elven people stand firmly in support of this war. Once the elves commit to come to our aid, we cannot afford for them to back out. That would be disastrous.”

“Have they responded?” asked Lord Patel.

“Not as of yet,” Marak shook his head. “I am sure there will be much discussion before they answer my request, and there should be. I am content to let them work out their domestic problems among themselves.”

“What about the Fakarans and the Sakovans?” pressed Lord Chenowith. “Their involvement is already certain. How will we coordinate with them?”

“That question has not been answered yet,” frowned the Emperor. “In fact, I want this council involved in that debate. I mentioned before that I was bringing some special visitors to Khadoratung tonight. The Star of Sakova and the Astor are among them. It is time for you to meet them. There is a subject that I have not broached with you yet. It is the vital question of what happens if I die before this war is over.”

“What does that question have to do with the visitors?” asked Lord Chenowith.

“A great deal actually,” answered Emperor Marak. “While it will fall to this Lords’ Council to select a new emperor, it will be either the Star of Sakova or the Astor that you will need to follow for the duration of the war.”

“I do not understand,” frowned Lord Jamarat. “Neither of them are Khadoran.”

“That is correct,” agreed Emperor Marak, “but they have both been chosen by Kaltara to wage this war. It will be hard for this council to do what is right in the event of my demise, because it will require you to subject the Khadoran nation to foreigners. What you do after the war is a matter for you to decide, but until the war is ended, you must follow the path of Kaltara. That means bending to the will of the Star and the Astor.”

“What if they don’t agree?” asked Lord Jamarat. “This is confusing.”

“They will agree,” declared the Torak. “They are following Kaltara’s will. They cannot disagree.”

“You do realize what you are asking?” questioned Lord Chenowith.

“I do,” nodded the Emperor. “I said that it would not be easy. Your own countrymen will call you traitors for your actions, but that is how it must be if you desire to save the Khadoran people.”

“I do not see a problem as long as we can trust the Star and the Astor,” interjected Lord Patel.

“How is that?” asked Lord Quilo. “You don’t see a problem with giving up our sovereignty?”

“Not really,” shrugged Lord Patel. “If a pact is made among the members of this body, the rest of Khadora need not know that the Star and the Astor are leading us. One of us will rise to Emperor and do what is necessary.”

“I can live with that,” nodded Lord Chenowith, “providing we have confidence in those chosen by Kaltara. I look forward to meeting them.”

“If one of us is to rise to replace Emperor Marak,” declared Lord Faliman of the Aritor clan, “shouldn’t we decide that now? Informally, of course. It would forestall any bickering in a time of war.”

“I think asking the Emperor for his preference would be in order,” nodded Lord Kiamesh. “I am willing to agree to his choice.”

The other lords quickly agreed and called for the Emperor to specify his replacement.

“My first thought is one of hesitancy,” admitted Marak. “Each and every one of you is qualified to be Emperor, and each and every one of you has supported me fully. My second thought is that it might be a good idea. Nothing can get in the way of friendship more than the thirst for power, and friendship is what I see in the members of this council. You lords have progressed greatly since I have known you. I am proud to call each of you my friend. My choice is a difficult one, but one that I think you will agree with. In honor of his father, one of the greatest emperors ever to lead Khadora, I would select Lord Chenowith.”

The others lords cheered in agreement and Lord Chenowith rose and offered a humorous bow.

“In all seriousness,” Lord Chenowith said “I am touched not only by your faith in me, Emperor Marak, but even more by the acceptance of my fellow lords gathered here today. Now that we have your wisdom to guide us upon your death, let’s not discuss the expiration of your office again. You have too much work to do to be allowed to die.”

The other lords laughed heartily, and Marak joined in, shaking his head and smiling.

“I truly meant my words,” Marak said seriously after the laughter died down. “Any one of you is capable of leading Khadora, and the sad fact is, it might be that none of us survive the coming war. Always look out for and take care of one another, for it is this friendship that will save Khadora. Working together we have accomplished in a short time what others said was impossible. Let’s keep doing it.”

“Speaking of what we have accomplished,” frowned Lord Patel, “what are we going to do about the remaining boundary disputes?”

“That is a serious problem,” answered Emperor Marak. “There is a quiet revolt taking place among the lords. It is a revolt against the new reforms, but I think it centers on the boundaries that are still unresolved.”

“A revolt?” asked Lord Quilo. “Do you mean armed resistance?”

“No,” clarified Marak. “At the Assembly of Lords tomorrow some lords intend to rouse support for a motion to abolish the reforms.”

“They seek to overrule the Emperor and the Lords’ Council?” gasped Lord Kiamesh. “That is unheard of.”

“Actually,” replied the Torak, “it is not unheard of, merely rare. There is an ancient law on the books that allows the Assembly of Lords to recall a member of the Lords’ Council. With sufficient votes, the Assembly of Lords could recall every member of the Lords’ Council and install new members. There is even a mechanism for recalling the Emperor, although it must be shown that the current Emperor is working against the welfare of the country.”

“And if the Assembly of Lords decides what is good for the welfare of the country,” Lord Chenowith continued the logic, “they could remove you from power.”

“Exactly,” nodded Marak. “Now, I do not take this as a serious threat, because I do not believe that the rebels hold sway over sufficient votes to cause any of this to happen, but the dissension removes the cohesion that we have worked so hard at building.”

“Who are these rebel lords?” asked Lord Quilo.

“Here is what I believe to be a factual accounting of what is to happen tomorrow,” explained Emperor Marak. “The four clans that hosted the Jiadin will present the motion to recall one of you. When the motion is made, other clans will immediately back it, hoping for an upwelling of support from lords that have been cultivated by the real rebels.”

“The real rebels?” prompted Lord Faliman. “Who are they?”

“Three southern frontier clans,” answered Emperor Marak. “The Seth, Rican, and Disina clans are behind the motion. It is no coincidence that each of these clans has an unresolved border dispute concerning the Chula.”

“What can we do about it?” asked Lord Patel. “I understand that they will not get the votes necessary, but it introduces the thought that not all reforms must be implemented. Once that is made clear, we will have a much harder time driving Khadora to where it needs to be.”

“You are correct,” nodded the Emperor. “I think I can deal effectively with the real rebels, but the hard part is stopping the motion from even being brought up in the first place.”

“So you are looking for something to get the four hosts of the Jiadin to falter before making the motion?” asked Lord Kiamesh.

“Yes,” nodded Marak.

“I can think of a way,” groused Lord Quilo. “How about I get each of those traitorous dogs in a room alone and tell them to keep their mouths shut?”

Several of the lords laughed, but Lord Chenowith rose to ask for silence.

“There is merit to your suggestion, Lord Quilo,” Lord Chenowith said seriously. “I do not mean physical abuse, but three of those clans are holding large amounts of land taken from other estates. The Vessi, Glamaraldi, and Lejune clans each seized several estates using their Jiadin mercenaries. This council could revoke those gains under the law.”

“But there was no protest at the time,” frowned Lord Patel. “On what basis could we deny them their holdings?”

“On the basis that their clans were a minority interest in the attacking force,” grinned Emperor Marak. “You are a genius, Lord Chenowith. Of course that would require the Jiadin to express a claim to the spoils, but I think I could arrange for them to do that.”

“But the Jiadin are not even Khadoran,” Lord Faliman shook his head. “How can they have a claim?”

“The Lords’ Council reserves the right to create new clans,” explained Lord Patel. “All we would need are three Jiadin men to step forward, request a new clan, and make a claim for the spoils.”

“I could arrange for that to happen,” declared Emperor Marak. “I am not suggesting that we do so, but it makes an excellent bargaining point for negotiations with the three clans.”

“And the fourth traitorous clan?” asked Lord Faliman. “That was the Pikata, wasn’t it? Lord Damirath, if I remember correctly.”

“It was the Pikata,” nodded Emperor Marak, “but it was not really Lord Damirath. It was a magician named Zygor who had stolen Lord Damirath’s body.”

“Then the Pikata clan was not under orders of its rightful lord,” Lord Kiamesh pointed out. “In reality, the ownership of the Pikata clan passed to Zygor when he assumed command.”

“But the Pikata did not gain any estates in the fighting,” shrugged the Emperor. “We can not bargain with them in the same way as the others.”

“Who rules the Pikata now?” asked Lord Jamarat.

“Lord Damirath’s son, Rymaka,” answered Lord Quilo. “The boy is unfit to lead a clan. While Lord Damirath was fair and just, Rymaka is cruel and unbalanced. If ever there was a clan ruler that this council should revoke, Rymaka is the one. He tortures his servants as he used to torture animals when he was younger. He is a poor excuse for a human being.”

“Does he do this while he is in Khadoratung?” asked Emperor Marak.

“He does it everywhere,” Lord Quilo nodded with distaste. “If the boy was a wasooki, he would have been put down years ago.”

“Who is next in line to rule the Pikata?” asked the Emperor.

“No one,” answered Lord Quilo. “Rymaka is the end of the line.”

“Is there anyone in the Pikata clan who could lead those people justly?” asked Marak.

“There are many good people in the Pikata clan,” nodded Lord Quilo. “That is what makes Rymaka even more unbearable. If you were looking for someone to lead the Pikata, the bursar would be an excellent choice. His name is Wicado.”

“I will not stand for torturing servants in this palace,” declared Emperor Marak. “There are clear prohibitions against that as well as other abuses. If Rymaka violates that rule, I will have him arrested. It will be up to this council to take action concerning his fitness as a lord.”

“You will not catch him,” shrugged Lord Quilo. “He will do so in the privacy of his clan quarters.”

“I will catch him,” vowed Emperor Marak.

“Then we will act upon it,” promised Lord Chenowith. “I propose that we have early morning meetings with the other three eastern lords. They will forego making that motion tomorrow, or they will forego a great deal of land. We will make that clear to them.”

“What about the three southern rebels?” asked Lord Jamarat. “How will you stop them?”

“I have a treat in store for them,” grinned Emperor Marak. “In fact, I think they may start a new trend in Khadora.”

“A new trend?” echoed Lord Kiamesh with a puzzled brow. “What kind of trend?”

“The kind of trend that makes Khadoran lords speak honestly about their borders,” answered the Emperor. “I will explain it later tonight. Now it is time for a meal break. I am famished. After we eat, I want you to meet those special visitors that I spoke about earlier. Let’s reconvene in about an hour. We shall meet at the Temple of Kaltara.”

* * *

Lady Mystic strolled the beach, her eyes alternating between the sea and sand in front of her feet. She stopped and turned to face the surf. Her gaze followed the swells to the horizon as she wondered what Aakuta’s land was like. She wished she had spent more time with him discussing Omunga and what it was like to have lived there. The only information she had ever heard were the reports from Clarvoy, which meant that she had heard little.

Lady Mystic sighed and continued walking. She still thought of Aakuta all of the time, but at least she now had times when she did more than just cry all day. She stopped again and stared into the surf. She was so tempted to just walk into the ocean and allow it to swallow her up, but she knew that she did not have the courage to do so. She pressed her lips tightly together to halt the start of the tears as she turned and continued walking along the beach.

She started once again to berate herself for her mistakes when she rounded the bend and saw a basket sitting on the sand. She frowned as she recognized the spot where she spent most of her waking hours. Cautiously, she walked closer to the basket and peered at it. Her head turned as she looked up and down the beach for the basket’s owner, but no one was visible.

Curiosity got the better of Vand’s daughter as she bent over and slowly opened the basket. She stared at the bounty of food and realized that she was famished. She had not eaten all day. Once again she scanned the beach for the basket’s owner. There was no one in sight.

Lady Mystic reached into the basket and snared a large orange. As she picked it up, a small note moved. She bent closer to read it.

“And an extra cloth to dry your tears,” Lady Mystic read from the note.

She frowned as she turned the note over for a hint of whom it was from. The back was blank. The mention of tears seemed to indicate that the basket had been left for her, but she could not imagine who would leave it. She thought immediately of Xavo, but she quickly dismissed the thought. While he was pleasant the other day, that was because he wanted something. This gesture was not Xavo’s style.

Lady Mystic lowered herself to the sand and began to eat the food in the basket. She enjoyed herself thoroughly as it all tasted exceptionally good. She realized that the taste sensation was due to her starvation, but she relished every bite just the same.

“Funny how things always seem better when you have been without them for a time,” she mused to herself.

She wondered if that was why she missed Aakuta so much. Would she truly love him if he were here now? A smile came involuntarily to her lips as she nodded her head in answer to the question. Just as quickly, the tears started rolling down her cheeks. Aakuta would not magically appear like the basket did, she realized. She rose to her feet, lifting the basket with her. Refusing to abandon the basket on the beach, Lady Mystic decided to venture to her home. She had not been there since the day her laboratory was destroyed.

She walked along the narrow path through the jungle, oblivious to the birds and animals that scurried away from her. She emerged from the jungle and headed into the alleyway. As she neared the door to her home, an anxious feeling began to creep over her. She wiped the tears from her eyes and saw something colorful by her door. She could not tell what it was.

When Lady Mystic got closer to her door, she halted and stared at the ground in wonder. At the foot of her door was a large bouquet of flowers in a very expensive vase. She looked up and down the alleyway in confusion. There was no one in sight. She reasoned that the vase could not have been there for long, or someone would have stolen it.

She bent down and picked up the vase. She smelled the flowers and smiled. There was no note indicating the sender, or even if the flowers were meant for her, but she knew that they were. There were no other doors in the vicinity. She shook her head as she tried to figure out who was responsible for the gifts, but she could not. She thought briefly about her father and a possible attempt to make up with her, but she cursed at the idea almost as soon as it was formed. Vand would never apologize to anyone, and she didn’t want his apology even if he offered it.

Lady Mystic put the basket down and waved her hand before the door, but it had no effect. She frowned and reached out for the door handle. The door was unlocked, and it opened to her touch. She frowned as she realized that Vand’s goons had even destroyed her spell on the door. She kicked the door open and retrieved the basket.

As she entered the laboratory, she stopped and stared at the mess. Broken glass covered the floor and powders were sprinkled about. She stared at the stains on the floor where the liquids had already evaporated. She cursed again as she placed the vase and the basket on the empty table,

The first thing Lady Mystic did was to grab a broom. She started sweeping the debris into a pile. When she had it all gathered into a large pile, she went to the kitchen and retrieved the sheet of metal that she used to pick up sweepings. As she bent down to sweep the debris onto the metal sheet, she felt a presence behind her. She dropped both the broom and the metal sheet and whirled around to see who was there.

“You look like you could use some help,” smiled Xavo. “May I enter?”

“You are already in,” frowned Lady Mystic. “What do you want this time?”

“Nothing, actually,” smiled Xavo. “I just happened to be passing by and saw your door open. I thought I would check up on you and see if you are alright.”

“Why do I have trouble believing you, Xavo?” asked Lady Mystic. “Could it be because you have never offered help to anyone in your entire life? Or is it perhaps because I am too stupid to understand what you are really after? What exactly do you want, Xavo?”

“My, we are brutally candid this day,” replied the Disciple of Vand. “Is my reputation really that bad? Does everyone think of me the way that you do?”

“I cannot speak for others,” shrugged Lady Mystic as she bent to continue her cleaning task, “but my impression is that you don’t have a friend in the world. Now, why would that be? I mean you being such a nice and helpful person as you are?”

“Perhaps no one has ever really known me?” grinned Xavo. “Be honest with yourself, Lady Mystic. Have you ever put forth the effort to get to know me before you decided that I was a worm?”

“No,” laughed Lady Mystic. “I do not need to eat food to tell it is spoiled when I can smell the decay. I would like to tell you to go away because I am too busy to play games with you, but we both know that that is not believable. Just tell me what it is that you want, and we can stop playing this silly game. Either I will give it to you, or I won’t. It is that simple.”

“Ah,” sighed Xavo, “if only life were really that simple. I want your heart, Lady Mystic.”

“Not today,” Lady Mystic shook her head as she rose and dumped the debris into a bucket. “Maybe tomorrow you can have it, but today I feel like continuing on with life, and I need all of my organs. Tomorrow? Who knows? I may decide to let you have it. Why mine?” she asked after a moment’s hesitation. “You could have one from any slave. Why must it be mine?”

“That is not what I meant,” chuckled Xavo. “I did not mean it literally. I want your love, not your heart.”

Lady Mystic dropped the sheet of metal and stared at Xavo.

“What?” she asked with a look on incredulity. “The flowers? The basket? Were they from you?”

“They were,” nodded Xavo. “I thought that you would appreciate them.”

“I did,” Lady Mystic said haltingly. “I mean I do. I just don’t understand. Why?”

“Because I love you,” shrugged Xavo.

Chapter 18

Assembly of Lords

“There are female screams coming from the Pikata chambers,” declared Ophia.

“Are you positive it is from the Pikata chambers?” asked Emperor Marak as he gazed up at the stars. “These chimneys rise from a lot of fireplaces.”

“I heard the woman say Lord Rymaka’s name,” assured the air mage. “I am positive.”

“You have your chance, Marshal Chack,” stated Emperor Marak. “Do what must be done.”

Marshal Chack nodded and ran towards the door, while the Emperor paced the roof.

“Do I have to continue listening?” asked Ophia with a hurtful look. “Whatever he is doing to that woman must horrible. Her screams will haunt me for days.”

“No,” the Emperor replied as he stopped pacing. “Drop the air tunnel. We both have a busy day tomorrow. Let’s leave this problem with Marshal Chack and go to bed. It is out of our hands now.”

* * *

The Imperial soldier knocked loudly on the door of the Vessi chambers. When there was no answer, he knocked even louder. Eventually he heard loud voices from within the chamber and the door opened a crack to allow a soldier to peer out.

“What is it?” the soldier asked groggily.

“The presence of Lord Sebba is required,” stated the Imperial soldier.

“Is it morning yet?” the Vessi soldier asked.

“It is,” nodded the soldier, “although the sun has not yet risen. The matter is urgent. Notify your lord. We will wait for him.”

The door closed and reopened a few minutes later. Lord Sebba stood in the open doorway looking as groggy as his soldier had sounded.

“What is the meaning of this disturbance?” Lord Sebba asked with annoyance.

“Your presence is required,” stated the soldier. “We are to escort you.”

“To where?” frowned the lord.

“To a meeting of the Lords’ Council,” answered the Imperial soldier. “They do not like to be kept waiting.”

“One minute,” scowled the lord as he retreated into the chamber.

Lord Sebba returned in a few minutes. He had obviously struggled into his uniform for the meeting. The soldiers escorted the Vessi lord to the Lords’ Council chamber where the council was already in session. Lord Sebba was summoned to stand at the table by Lord Kiamesh who was chairing the meeting.

“Does the Lords’ Council have so much work that they must meet through the night?” scowled Lord Sebba as he stood looking at the six seated lords.

“We are early risers when the situation demands,” retorted Lord Kiamesh. “Today’s schedule will be shortened by the Assembly of Lords. We must meet beforehand to accomplish everything that needs to be done today.”

“And for what purpose am I here?” asked Lord Sebba.

“To resolve your boundary dispute,” declared Lord Kiamesh.

“Boundary dispute?” echoed the Vessi lord. “I have filed no protest over my stated boundaries.”

“Your boundaries, nevertheless, are in dispute,” interjected Lord Quilo. “In fact, all of the territory gained by the Vessi clan during the last year is in dispute.”

“By whom?” demanded the Vessi lord. “None of those clans even exist any more. There is no one to dispute my boundaries.”

“It is our understanding that your gains were accomplished in coordination with certain Jiadin men,” declared Lord Patel. “In fact, the vast majority of your forces were Jiadin.”

“What of it?” frowned Lord Sebba. “I can use whoever I want to use to fight my wars. There is no law in Khadora that forbids it. Lord Samert hired Jiadin warriors. What is the problem?”

“Hired?” asked Lord Faliman. “Do you have proof of payment?”

Lord Sebba frowned deeply at the six lords. His eyes scanned the faces of each of them and found no humor present. He wondered what they were after. He had no receipt for any payments to the Jiadin, and he was sure that they did not expect him to, so what were they really after?

“I would have to search for them,” Lord Sebba stalled. “Perhaps when I return to my estate I will find what you need to settle this matter.”

“I am afraid that time does not allow such a luxury,” sighed Lord Kiamesh.

“Perhaps he could leave right now?” suggested Lord Jamarat, appearing to be helpful.

“I could leave right after the Assembly of Lords meeting,” offered Lord Sebba.

“I am afraid that this must be resolved before the Assembly of Lords,” stated Lord Kiamesh.

“Before the meeting?” balked Lord Sebba. “That is impossible. What are you really after? Are you trying to steal my land? Who would get it? One of you?”

“How dare you besmirch our honor?” snapped Lord Quilo. “The land that you call yours was stolen from the rightful owners. While it is beyond the possibility of returning it to those owners, we can rightfully attribute it to a new clan represented by a member of the majority of the conquering force.”

“The Jiadin?” Lord Sebba’s eyebrows rose in disbelief. “You would take land from a Khadoran lord and give it to those savages?”

“Those savages,” retorted Lord Chenowith, “would be more loyal to Khadora than you are, Lord Sebba. They at least are not conspiring to destroy the government of Khadora.”

Lord Sebba’s jaw dropped and his forehead started perspiring. He once again looked at the faces of the lords and realized that they were about to destroy him. Within an instant, everything became clear to the Vessi lord. Somehow the Lords’ Council had found out about the motion to be presented to the Assembly of Lords, and they aimed to halt it before it happened. He quickly thought about his option. He believed that the Lords’ Council had the legal authority to do what they threatened to do, and he had no doubt that they would follow through on the threat. Worse than losing all of the land his father had gained, was the fact that all of his neighbors would be Jiadin savages. The Jiadin had threatened to return and extract revenge on the Vessi after their defeat at Balomar. His life would be forfeit within a fortnight. He had to think quickly.

“Your silence is disturbing to me,” Lord Chenowith stated. “It makes me think that you are trying come up with something to say that you hope we will believe. Unfortunately, I get the feeling that you will try to deceive us. That would be a mistake.”

“I will not deceive you,” promised Lord Sebba as his mind whirled seeking away out of his dilemma.

“Are there receipts for payment to the Jiadin?” asked Lord Faliman.

“No,” answered Lord Sebba. “My father did not pay the Jiadin. They were supposed to share in the spoils, but not until they conquered all of Khadora.”

“That is the understanding we got from your cohorts,” declared Lord Kiamesh. “Please continue.”

It was at that moment that Lord Sebba noticed the stack of papers on the table. It was obvious that the Lords’ Council had been in session for some time this morning. Add to that their mention of cohorts, and Lord Sebba knew his options had run out.

“Look,” Lord Sebba pleaded, “my father made some foolish choices in his life. I am willing to do what I must to rectify those wrongs, but you must not let my neighboring lands get into the hands of the Jiadin. That would be sentencing me to death for the wrongs of my father. I will give up my claim to the lands if you will promise me that it will not go to the Jiadin. What more can I offer?”

“What we are after,” Lord Chenowith said calmly, “is a patriotic Khadoran. This country has a hard fight ahead of it, and we need everyone fighting together. That can include you if you elect to reform.”

“Tell me what I must do,” nodded Lord Sebba.

“A patriot would never be involved in plots to overthrow the government,” stated Lord Quilo.

“I will disavow any cooperation with the plotters,” Lord Sebba quickly promised. “I will even detail everything that I know about them. You must believe me when I say that this was not my idea. I have no border disputes to haggle over. I have no Chula neighbors. My only reason for getting involved was a foolish desire for revenge for the defeat of my father at Balomar. I can see now that I have been looking at things from the wrong perspective.”

“Can you really put that need for revenge behind you?” asked Lord Patel. “Can we really believe that you will become a patriotic Khadoran? Tell me why I should believe such a thing.”

“I can only offer my word,” replied Lord Sebba. “If there was any other way that I could assure you of my intentions, I would gladly do so. As I said earlier, I will agree to forfeit the new lands as long as they are not given to the Jiadin. What else can I offer to show my sincerity? Tell me, and I will do anything.”

“Anything?” frowned Lord Chenowith. “I truly wonder if you mean even that?”

“Try me,” begged Lord Sebba. “I truly do understand how foolish I have been.”

“I think he means it,” offered Lord Jamarat. “We should let him keep the new lands.”

Lord Sebba’s eyes opened wide, and a hint of a smile appeared on his face, but that was soon reversed when Lord Quilo spoke.

“I doubt his sincerity,” declared Lord Quilo. “I think he would say anything right now, but change his mind on his way out of the door.”

“That would not do,” Lord Patel shook his head. “No, he must swear in some manner that guarantees his adherence to the laws of Khadora.”

“I will swear in any way that you desire,” offered Lord Sebba. “State the vow that you want me to utter, and I will pledge it here and now. Do not destroy me for my father’s faults.”

“There is one vow that would solve this problem,” Lord Kiamesh mused softly.

“Let me utter it,” pleaded Lord Sebba.

“Very well,” Lord Chenowith stated definitively. “It is the only way to resolve this matter. Send for the Emperor.”

Lord Jamarat rose and went to the door to send a guard to get the Emperor while Lord Sebba looked around in confusion.

“Why the Emperor?” the Vessi lord asked hesitantly.

“For you to issue your Vows of Service to him,” Lord Chenowith replied curtly.

“Vows of Service?” echoed Lord Sebba. “But I am a clan lord. It is not possible.”

“It is not only possible, but quite common these days,” smiled Lord Patel.

“I told you that he was just saying what we wanted to hear,” grumbled Lord Quilo.

“No, no,” Lord Sebba shook his head vigorously as he feared the offer would be rescinded. “I was just confused. I did not know that such a practice was even possible. I have no objections. I will say the vows.”

The room lapsed into silence as everyone waited for Emperor Marak to appear. They did not have to wait long.

“Thank you for coming so quickly, Emperor Marak,” greeted Lord Chenowith. “We require your assistance on a matter before this council. Lord Sebba of the Vessi clan wishes to offer his Vows of Service to you.”

“Greetings, Lord Sebba,” Emperor Marak said with a smile. “It pleases me to see such a patriotic leader such as yourself vow to come to Khadora’s aid. Do you understand that your Vows of Service to me will have the same effect as that of a clansman to his lord?”

“I understand that now,” Lord Sebba nodded nervously.

“And do you offer these Vows of Service freely and of your own will?” asked the Emperor.

“I do,” the Vessi lord nodded.

“Very well,” smiled the Emperor. “Recite the vows.”

Lord Sebba made the ritual recitation of vows. When he was done, Emperor Marak embraced the Vessi lord and smiled.

“I will make arrangements to visit your estates as soon as possible to receive the Vows of Service from each of your people,” stated the Emperor. “Perhaps we can make a festival of it and get to know each other better? Does that sound agreeable?”

Lord Sebba frowned as he had not anticipated his people giving Vows of Service to the Emperor, but he nodded agreeably.

“Excellent,” smiled Emperor Marak. “If you would excuse us now, Lord Sebba, I have some critical things to discuss with the Lords’ Council as long as I am here. We will speak again after the Assembly of Lords meeting.”

Lord Sebba nodded as he backed out of the room. The Emperor waited for the door to close before pulling up a chair and sitting down.

“I am only sorry that I missed the show,” grinned Emperor Marak. “That was three for three this morning. You lords must make a tremendous impression when you work together.”

“It was Lord Chenowith’s idea to get them all to swear Vows of Service to you,” chuckled Lord Patel. “It was easier than we thought. They were more afraid of having the Jiadin as neighbors than they were of us. I suppose the Jiadin felt betrayed when everything fell apart at Balomar.”

“Sometimes that is the price of playing with demons,” shrugged the Torak. “They invited the Jiadin in for the spoils of war and then they were chased out without compensation. It is just as well that they do not know that the Jiadin have been tamed.”

“It is close to the time for part two of this day’s activities,” declared Lord Quilo. “We just have time for a meal before the Assembly of Lords begins.”

“Did you locate Bursar Wicado of the Pikata?” asked Lord Faliman.

“I did,” nodded the Torak. “I told him that he was the acting lord of the Pikata clan. We had a nice talk while I waited for you to finish with Lord Sebba. I like the man. I think if it is possible, I would like to see him take over full control of the Pikata clan.”

“It will be possible,” frowned Lord Jamarat. “The woman that Rymaka was torturing died. The guard informed me when I sent him to get you.”

Emperor Marak’s face twisted with rage. He wanted to shout orders to have Rymaka hung immediately, but he kept his mouth shut. The Lords’ Council did not need any orders to see that justice was delivered to the Pikata lord. Without a word, he turned and walked out of the chamber.

* * *

The three rebel clans from the southern frontier were single estate clans. As such, those three lords sat together towards the rear of the chamber when the Assembly of Lords meeting began. Lord Padro sweated a bit as he watched the lords filing in for the meeting. He was excited about striking a blow to Emperor Marak and his reforms.

“Are you sure about these eastern lords?” Lord Woroman asked softly. “Lord Ratwa just walked by us and did not even glance your way.”

“I am sure,” replied Lord Padro. “Would you expect them to acknowledge us and give away our surprise? I just hope that you and Lord Sydar have lined up enough support for this vote. We will not get a second chance.”

“I spoke with many clans,” replied Lord Sydar. “We will have the votes that we need. There are many lords that have borders with the Chula. Not a one of them wants to give up the land.”

“I agree,” Lord Woroman nodded vigorously. “As long as they don’t have to be the one to bring the motion up for consideration, they will all vote for it.”

“Then this will be a most interesting session of the Assembly of Lords,” grinned Lord Padro. “I hope the Emperor attends. I want to watch his face as he realizes that he has just lost his grip on Khadora.”

The members of the Lords’ Council filed into the room, and the high level of chatter immediately died. While the members of the Lords’ Council took their seats, Lord Patel continued onward to stand on the stage.

“Patel will be leading the meeting,” Lord Woroman remarked softly. “It looks like the Emperor will not be coming.”

Unbeknown to Lord Woroman, Emperor Marak had been sitting in the seat reserved for the Torak clan at the far rear of the chamber. Emperor Marak dropped his air tunnel and rose from his seat. He exited the rear of the chamber where a full squad of Imperial soldiers stood waiting for him.

On the stage, Lord Patel slowly gazed across the faces of the assembled lords. As he delayed to give Marak time to get around to the door at the rear of the stage, he smiled and nodded to several old friends in the audience. When the murmurs in the room rose to an audible level, Lord Patel intentionally coughed loudly to get everyone’s attention.

“Greetings to the members of the Assembly of Lords,” Lord Patel said loudly. “I am pleased that you were all able to make this session. It is an important one. While the Emperor often gives an opening statement at these meetings, the members of the Lords’ Council have agreed to change our format somewhat. Our intention was to allow lords to present motions and vote on them before allowing the Emperor to speak, but I notice that no requests for motions have been submitted.”

“What is he talking about?” snapped Lord Padro as his eyes glared at the eastern lords. “Lord Ratwa told me that he filed a request to speak last night.”

“Lord Sebba told me the same when I spoke to him last night,” agreed Lord Woroman. “Something is not right here.”

“Where is Rymaka?” asked Lord Sydar. “Someone else is sitting in his chair.”

Lord Padro swiveled to see the area where the Pikata clan sat. He frowned at what he saw.

“That is the Bursar Wicado,” Lord Padro said with confusion. “What is a bursar doing in a lord’s chair?”

“So,” Lord Patel continued, “It is with great pleasure that I present Emperor Marak, Emperor of Khadora.”

“You have to do something,” urged Lord Sydar. “All of our work is coming to naught. Make the motion yourself.”

“Are you mad?” snapped Lord Padro as he rose from his seat. “I am not going to present the motion, but I will let Patel know that he missed one that was requested.”

The Rican lord shouted Patel’s name loudly as the door at the rear of the stage opened. Twenty Imperial soldiers swept onto the stage and fanned out to present a backdrop of white. Emperor Marak strode into the room, resplendent in a formal gown of white and gold. The members of the Lords’ Council immediately rose and began applauding as the Emperor walked forward. Soon, many members of the Assembly of Lords also rose and began clapping. The noise drowned out Lord Padro’s call.

Emperor Marak stopped walking and gazed out over the assembled lords. He smiled broadly and nodded to the lords. When the applause finally died down and everyone had sat down, the Emperor signaled for Lord Patel to approach. He spoke too softly for anyone to hear, although everyone wondered what was being said. Unexpectedly, Emperor Marak stepped back a few paces and Lord Patel reclaimed the front of the stage.

“I understand that during the Emperor’s entrance that I missed a lord standing with a call to speak,” announced Lord Patel. “Will that lord stand and state his question?”

Lord Padro looked around nervously, but he finally rose.

“Lord Patel,” the Rican lord said loudly, “it was my understanding that several motions were to be presented today, yet you have stated that none were pending. Could you recheck?”

Lord Patel smiled tightly as his eyes focused on the rebel lord. “Lord Padro,” he replied, “there were several requests to speak this morning, but they have been withdrawn. Would the Lord of the Rican clan like to address the Assembly of Lords? I am sure that the Emperor would not mind waiting.”

Lord Padro’s eyes narrowed in confusion and perspiration dampened his body. His eyes shot glares at the eastern lords, but they were pointedly ignoring him.

“Perhaps at another time,” Lord Padro replied as he sat back down.

“Why didn’t you make the motion?” asked Lord Sydar. “We can’t vote on a motion that has not been offered.”

“Why don’t you stand and offer it?” snapped the Rican lord. “I will not call the Emperor’s attention to myself. That is what those traitorous eastern lords were supposed to do.”

“Obviously,” Lord Woroman said softly, “someone got to them. I wonder how much of the plot they revealed?”

“As if you have anything to worry about,” scowled Lord Padro. “I was the one who spoke to the eastern lords. If they spilled their guts, it would have been my name that they revealed. I am beginning to feel ill.”

“But all of the lords that we convinced to vote for the motion will blame us,” frowned Lord Sydar. “One of us must present the motion.”

“Go for it,” retorted Lord Padro. “Stick your head on the chopping block. I will be busy trying to find a way to hold onto my land as defined by the boundaries that I submitted. Let the rest of you fend for yourselves.”

Lord Sydar fidgeted as he weighed the risks of making a stand. Lord Patel still stood at the edge of the stage, his eyes roving over the crowd to see if anyone else wished to speak.

“If there are no further calls to speak,” Lord Patel stated loudly, “I shall turn this meeting over to the Emperor.”

Lord Patel waited a few moments for someone to rise. No one did as Lord Sydar sunk lower into his seat. The Nordon lord turned and bowed low to Emperor Marak. Patel then left the stage and took his seat in the Assembly of Lords.

Emperor Marak had looked as if he was merely fidgeting as his hands moved, but he had woven an air tunnel to listen to the conversation occurring in the rear of the chamber. He smiled broadly as Lord Patel left the stage. He dropped his air tunnel and stepped forward to speak.

Chapter 19

Of Neighbors and Spies

The Assembly of Lords fell quiet as the Emperor prepared to speak. The Emperor began with a smile, but concern soon etched into his face.

“There is much to cover today,” he began, “as this will probably be the last Assembly of Lords meeting before our country is embroiled in a long and deadly war. By now, most of your troops have been to Khadoratung for training. Those that have not must arrive here soon. If you have troops that have not yet been trained, send them. The limit of two cortes per estate has been eliminated. Lord Jamarat has told me of the improvements made by your soldiers. He is extremely pleased, and so am I. You should be proud of your men. They will stand tall for Khadora.”

The Torak noticed more than one smile on the faces of the lords. If anything pleased a Khadoran lord more than gold, it was praise for the strength of his armies.

“I have also heard from many of you this week about your increases in productivity and prosperity,” smiled the Emperor. “You are beginning to learn that free men are much more valuable to an estate than slaves are. For those of you who have not yet seen the improvements, you will soon. I would not ask anything of a Khadoran lord that I would not do myself. I know what your results will be. I also know what the total effect on the country will be. Khadora will be a more united country than it has ever been before in history.”

Again the Emperor gauged the effects of his speech. Not as many lords were smiling as were at his mention of strong armies, but he was pleased to notice that over half of the lords were nodding in agreement. His reforms were slowly being accepted.

“On the matters of religion and justice,” the Emperor continued, “each of our five major cities now hosts a temple to Kaltara and a regional court. I urge the lords of Khadora to start making use of both. I have selected retired Lords’ Council mediators as our first judges. They are men of renowned impartiality, and they will rule on cases according to our laws, and not according to a clan’s status or familiarity. All cases involving inter-clan disputes, should first ask for a settlement from the nearest court. That settlement can be appealed to the Lords’ Council if you feel that the hearing was not fair and impartial. The services of the Lords’ Council mediators will still be available, but there should be less call for them as the court system grows.”

The lords were listening intently and with respect. Emperor Marak smiled inwardly at the change in temperament that had occurred since he became Emperor.

“As for the temples,” Emperor Marak continued, “they still remain unused by many. I know that embracing Kaltara is hard for many of you, but I urge you to try it with an open mind. Our nation grew up spurning religion as a belief of the dimwitted and timid, but nothing can be farther from the truth. Kaltara can carry us to victory over the evil that will soon engulf us, but why should He bother? If Khadorans cannot be bothered to open their hearts to Him, should He spare the lives of you and your loved ones? He might in any event,” Emperor Marak sighed, “but why take that chance? Go to the nearest temple and speak to the priest. Let him educate you on the ways of Kaltara. You have nothing to lose but a few moments of your time. If you are afraid of appearing weak and timid to your neighbors, let me dissuade you from those thoughts. Every member of the Lords’ Council, as well as myself, pray daily to Kaltara. You will not find a weak or timid lord among us.”

Murmurs of surprise rippled through the assembled lords. Many an eyebrow rose at the Emperor’s revelation, and Marak saw the heads of the members of the Lords’ Council nodding vigorously as lords around them asked for verification. The Emperor waited patiently for the noise to die down.

“There is one area of the reforms that has not gone well,” the Emperor declared with a frown. “That is the area of border disputes. While every border between the clans of Khadora has been settled on, the claims on land held by the Chula are still in dispute. I think the reason for this is clear to all of you. When a border dispute occurs between two clans, they can sit down and discuss it between themselves, or with a third party such as a Lords’ Council mediator. This same process has not been used with your Chula neighbors. While many of your claims on Chula lands are relatively minor, some are egregious in extent. That issue must be addressed today.”

Again murmurs rippled through the assembled lords. Many lords turned in their seats to gaze upon the eastern frontier lords, but those lords lowered their eyes and stared at the floor before them.

“There was a lord standing for recognition when I walked in,” the Emperor continued. “I believe it was Lord Padro of the Rican clan. Lord Padro, please come and join me on the stage.”

Lord Padro twitched nervously as the Emperor called out his name. He tried to sink further into his chair, but the call to the stage could not be refused. Every head in the room turned to watch the Rican lord rise and walk to the stage. Emperor Marak smiled tautly as Lord Padro approached him.

“Lord Padro,” smiled the Emperor, “you asked about motions that were supposed to be presented today. Is that correct?”

“I had heard about motions that were to be presented today,” nodded the Rican lord. “I was curious why they were not presented.”

“I can well imagine that you were curious,” Emperor Marak smiled tightly, “seeing the amount of effort you put into promoting those motions.”

“Me?” balked Lord Padro. “I am certainly interested in the motions, but I had no plans to offer one.”

“Of course not,” smiled the Emperor. “That dirty task was to fall to others to protect yourself.”

“It is not a dirty task to make a motion in the Assembly of Lords,” retorted Lord Padro. “Those motions were to reclaim our country from the reforms that you have forced upon us. There was nothing illegal about the motions. The motions were founded on ancient law, but those laws are still applicable today.”

“I have no problem with ancient laws,” retorted the Emperor, “but your moves were intended to tear down this country at its time of greatest need. While you and your fellow lords were scheming and plotting, the entire city of Duran was annihilated just south of the Kalatung Mountains. Our enemy killed every man, woman, and child found in the city of Duran. There was no talk of surrender. There were no negotiations. There was only a brutal and vicious slaughter.”

Gasps broke out all over the chamber, as the lords understood the meaning of the Emperor’s words. For several long minutes the chamber whirled with talk of the attack and what it might mean to Khadora. The Emperor waited patiently for the noise to subside before continuing.

“The enemy that we face will give no quarter in this war,” Emperor Marak continued. “If there was ever a time in the history of Khadora for the clans to unite, it is now. If there was ever a time to put aside our differences with our neighbors, both foreign and domestic, it is this moment in time. I have spoken with the Sakovans, the Fakarans, the Qubari, and the Chula. Each and every one of them understands the danger that we are all in. Only in Khadora do I see the petty bickering that has gone on for centuries.”

The chamber grew deathly quiet as the lords realized how angry the Emperor had become over the boundary disputes.

“Before we can join with our neighbors to form a defense against Vand and his evil,” declared the Emperor, “we have to resolve our differences here in Khadora. As these claims to Chula land came across my desk, I wondered how we would ever resolve them. It was you, Lord Padro, who supplied the answer.”

“Me?” balked the Rican lord. “What do you mean?”

“Your desire to use our ancient laws to secure land that you know does not belong to you, awakened me to the solution,” replied the Emperor. “I visited and spoke with the Chula chieftain of the tribe that borders your estate. The lands that you are attempting to claim have never been seeded. They have never been harvested, or cleared, or inhabited by any member of your clan. In short, you have no legal claim to the land other than your word.”

“That should be enough,” retorted Lord Padro. “I am a Khadoran lord, not a savage.”

“There is an ancient Khadoran law that you might not be familiar with,” Emperor Marak stated as he signaled one of his Imperial soldiers. “The law is specifically intended to resolve disputes between neighbors, although it has not been used in hundreds of years.”

Excited whispers tore through the lords as they watched an Imperial soldier wheel out a large cart. Positioned on the cart were the weapons of war. Daggers, short swords, long swords, and two-handed swords were set on the cart in pairs.

“The law, Lord Padro,” continued the Emperor as he walked over to the cart and picked up two maps, “calls for a fight to the death to resolve the differences. These maps represent your claims of land versus the claims stated by Grundar, chieftain of the Sookie tribe,” he said as he handed the maps to the Rican lord. “You will notice that there is a huge discrepancy in the maps. That is what you will be fighting for.”

“Preposterous,” snapped Lord Padro as he started backing away from the Emperor. “I will not fight you for my rightful lands. You have nothing to do with this dispute. My claim is not against the Torak clan. You have no right to interfere.”

“Oh,” Emperor Marak smiled as he shook his head and sent another signal to the Imperial soldiers, “you misunderstand me. I am not challenging you to a fight, Lord Padro. That would be exceedingly unfair to you as I am not a party to the dispute. It is Chief Grundar who has demanded satisfaction under our laws.”

An Imperial soldier opened the door at the rear of the stage. A huge bear of a man walked through, his eyes immediately scanning the contents of the room. The man wore nothing but a loincloth and a necklace of teeth. Despite the Chula’s large size, his skin did not quiver and sag when he walked, but rather flexed solidly as he made his way towards the Emperor and the table of weapons.

“Lord Padro,” smiled the Emperor, “I would like you to meet Grundar, Chieftain of the Sookie tribe. He is your neighbor, and it is his lands that you covet. Choose your weapons, and may the rightful claim prevail.”

Grundar smiled and picked up a heavy two-handed sword as if it were a feather. He twirled the weapon around as only an expert could. Lord Padro’s eyes bulged, and his face paled as he stared at the giant and the sword he carried. He slowly backed away until he was in danger of falling off the stage. Emperor Marak’s hand streaked out and grabbed the Rican lord, helping him away from the edge.

“Careful, Lord Padro,” the Emperor said with a smile. “We don’t want you falling off the stage before your bout begins.”

“I will not fight that thing,” Lord Padro said, his arms shaking visibly. “I refuse. You cannot make me fight him.”

“No, I can’t,” shrugged the Emperor, “but he has asserted his rights under our laws. If you do not fight him, you lose all rights to the disputed lands by default. The choice, however, is entirely yours.”

Lord Padro tried to control his trembling body, but he could not. Amidst the jeers and taunts of the other lords, Lord Padro fled from the stage. The Rican lord did not return to his seat, but continued his flight out of the chamber. Grundar sighed and returned the sword to the table. Emperor Marak waited for the noise to quiet before continuing.

“It is not my intention to humiliate others in this manner,” declared the Emperor, “but the claims that have been made against the Chula are wrong. There are lords, and I am not saying that this applies to all of you, who have taken the opportunity of the formalizing of boundaries as an excuse to expand their holdings at the expense of others who they do not know. While that may indeed be in keeping with the traditions in Khadora, it does nothing to further cooperation with an important ally, an ally that we desperately need in the coming battles.”

The Emperor once again signaled the Imperial soldiers, and they opened the door at the rear of the stage. Chula chieftains marched onto the stage and formed long lines across it. When the door was finally closed, over a hundred Chula chieftains stood upon the stage behind Emperor Marak.

“I doubt that any of the lords in this room have ever met a Chula chieftain before,” the Torak said loudly. “That is a shame, because they have much in common with you. Each of them controls a large tribe and has to tend to the thousands of emergencies that always pop up with a large population. They have to ensure that their people are cared for, that they are fed and clothed, and that they have a safe homeland to prosper in. And they must protect their people from invasions and infringements by their neighbors, just as you lords do.”

The lords spoke softly among themselves. Some tried to guess which Chula was the chieftain of which tribe, while others questioned where the Emperor was going with his speech. Emperor Marak stopped talking until the murmurs subsided.

“It is my firm belief that these border disputes must be ended today,” declared the Emperor. “To that end, I have several suggestions for the lords assembled here today. Each of the Chula chieftains has vowed to seek redress under Khadoran laws to protect their lands, but each has also willingly accepted the prospect of negotiations. So there are several choices available to each of you with a remaining border dispute. You can fight for your land under this ancient law, or you can sit down with a representative of the Lords’ Council and your Chula neighbor and work out a peaceful settlement. I would prefer to see everyone take the second option. There will be enough blood shed in the coming days without spilling any here today.”

“Are there any other options?” shouted a voice from the audience.

Emperor Marak tried to attach a face to the voice, but the lord had not risen so he addressed his remarks to everyone.

“Everyone on this stage is open to any solution that will end this crisis,” declared the Emperor, “but this issue needs to be put behind us. I want resolution of each claim before we leave here. I am willing to stay as long as it takes to get each and every one of the disputes resolved fairly. I would like to make another point that may have escaped some of you lords who have no disputes. This is a rare opportunity for each of you to get to know the Chula in a way that has never been possible before. I urge you to stay for a while today and speak with some of these chieftains. You may find that our ancient hatred of the Chula is unfounded. You may also find that you have new neighbors that are willing to help you with your problems. This is an opportunity, but you must avail yourself of it to make anything out of it. Lord Patel?”

Lord Patel made his way back onto the stage as Emperor Marak moved to the rear.

“That concludes the agenda of the Assembly of Lords today unless anyone has something to offer,” stated Lord Patel. “Are there any questions or motions?”

It was clear that everyone had questions, but no one rose to state them publicly. Lord Patel called the meeting to a close. The members of the Lords’ Council immediately left their seats and went onto the stage. They mixed freely with the Chula introducing themselves. Except for the stark clothing of the Chula, the scene was reminiscent of a gathering of lords. The members of the Assembly of Lords stood staring at the spectacle in disbelief and whispering among themselves. Within moments, however, some of the lords became curious. At first they drifted closer to the stage in an attempt to catch snippets of conversation, but eventually some of the lords marched up the steps and stood next to a member of the Lords’ Council to hear what was happening. The members of the Lords’ Council did not miss a beat. When they noticed a new face alongside them, they introduced that lord to the next chieftain as if he were an old friend. Within an hour, lords and chieftains chatted freely with each other. Several hours into the gathering, Emperor Marak bumped into Lord Chenowith.

“How are things going?” the Emperor asked Lord Chenowith. “Are the disputes being resolved?”

“They are,” nodded Lord Chenowith, “and in a much better way than any of us envisioned.”

“What do you mean? frowned the Emperor.

“Twenty seven disputes have been resolved in the last hour alone,” answered Lord Chenowith, “and each of them was resolved with the same solution.”

“And what is that solution?” prompted the Emperor.

“The disputed land will be shared equally between the Chula and the Khadorans,” explained Lord Chenowith, “and I do not mean splitting it down the middle. I mean that both Chula and Khadorans will have full access to the land as equal partners.”

“That is fantastic,” brightened the Emperor. “That means that both peoples will get to know one another. Who thought of this?”

“It evolved out of discussions between one of the lords and his Chula neighbor,” replied Lord Chenowith. “I am not sure which ones, but it is such a great solution.”

“It ensures that the Khadorans will no longer be ignorant about the Chula ways,” nodded the Emperor. “This has turned out much better than I had anticipated. What about Lord Padro? I am afraid my treatment of him has created an enemy for life.”

“He was already your enemy,” shrugged Lord Chenowith. “Little can be done to change that, but his co-plotters have agreed to drop their claims against the Sookie. Their attitude was one of having lost a gamble, so I do not think that Lord Padro will be able to sway them in the future.”

* * *

The floor of the throne room in the temple on the Island of Darkness was splattered with blood. Xavo watched where he stepped as he made his way towards the front of the room, lest he slip and look like a fool. The soldiers were dragging a body out of the chamber while the inner circle of the followers of Vand gathered for a daily briefing. Emperor Vand’s dark visage lightened as he looked up and saw Clarvoy enter the room.

“Welcome home, Clarvoy,” smiled Vand as he signaled for the doors to the room to be closed. “What news do you have for me?”

The spymaster’s eyes scanned the room, as they always did, before answering the Emperor.

“Some of the news is confusing,” admitted Clarvoy, “but there are gems as well. On the confusing end is Marak’s reaction to our attack at Duran. His reaction was fairly swift, but I cannot determine its significance. He made a great show of sending thousands of soldiers south towards Duran, but they never arrived. Our spies lost track of them somewhere around the Kalatung Mountains.”

“They lost track of thousands of soldiers?” frowned the Emperor. “How is that possible?”

“I don’t know,” conceded the spymaster. “I have put extra spies to work in that area to find the lost armies. I will report any progress to you.”

“What else?” frowned the Emperor.

“I have been successful in infiltrating the inner circle of the Star of Sakova,” declared Clarvoy. “Much can be learned from this spy. The city of Zaramilden is being abandoned. The entire population is being evacuated to western coast cities.”

“Interesting,” mused the Emperor. “Is this significant enough to alter our attack plans?”

“I am not sure yet,” replied Clarvoy. “I wish to speak to the generals about this. Using Zaramilden as a base would allow us a complete city between the Khadorans and the Sakovans with easy access denied to both. It has possibilities, but it would require changes to the plans we have already agreed upon.”

“I have faith in you Clarvoy,” replied Vand. “Talk with the generals and report back to me. We will discuss this again at length.”

“I have also learned much about the Sakovan defenses,” continued Clarvoy. “They are hiding the bulk of their armies in the forests beyond Alamar. I have not yet determined the purpose of this, but it is only a matter of time until I do.”

“So there is no plan for them to repopulate Duran?” questioned the Emperor.

“None at all,” replied Clarvoy. “I think the evacuation of Zaramilden verifies that. They are planning on defending Alamar and the west coast.”

“Alamar will fall the first day,” retorted the Emperor. “Find out what those reserve armies are for. I was hoping to crush the bulk of their forces in Alamar. Now it sounds like they will not be there.”

“I will find that out and much more,” promised Clarvoy. “This new spy is the closest we have gotten to the Star of Sakova. It will be a rich vein that can be mined for more information than we dreamed possible.”

“Can this spy kill the Star of Sakova?” asked Vand.

“That is possible,” frowned Clarvoy, “but I would urge against it. Right now we have a source of information that will guarantee the defeat of the Sakovans. If that asset is used to kill the Star of Sakova, it is highly likely that our source of information will be shut down. I do not like being blind, not even for the life of the Star of Sakova.”

“Your point is well taken,” sighed the Emperor. “I do not know what I would do without your services, Clarvoy. You are the one Motangan that never fails me.”

“I always try my best,” bowed the spymaster.

“What of the Fakarans?” asked the Emperor.

“Chaos,” shrugged Clarvoy. “I expected the free tribes and the Jiadin to still be fighting, but that is not happening. It appears that the free tribes have disappeared from the new cities that they were building. The Jiadin now infest Meliban and Taggot.”

“The free tribes are too numerous to disappear,” frowned the Emperor. “Someone knows where they are.”

“Quite true,” replied Clarvoy. “It is said that they have fled to Angragar, but no one knows where Angragar is. I have spies searching all of Fakara.”

“Angragar,” Vand mused troublingly. “That would make sense. It will be the place of the Astor’s last stand. He is fortifying it against our armies and leaving the Jiadin out as treats for our armies. Why should he try to battle the Jiadin when my armies will do it for him?”

“What if we called the Jiadin in to be our allies?” asked Clarvoy. “They accepted the position once before.”

“Oh,” smiled Vand, “we can call them allies, but the Jiadin will die along with the rest. They are all descended from the ingrates who abandoned me long ago. I swore that I would extinguish every one of their spawn from the face of the world, and I shall do so.”

“Still,” suggested Clarvoy, “we can use the Jiadin before we kill them. Let me try to turn them against the Astor one more time.”

“You have my blessings on this matter, Clarvoy,” nodded the Emperor. “Go to Fakara and the sow the seeds of chaos among our enemies. Use one against the other, and let death rain on their families even as they wait for the final judgment that my armies will deliver unto them.”

Chapter 20

Xavo

Xavo left the throne room when the meeting was over. He walked casually through the temple and onto the streets of the city. His walk carried him to the waterfront, and he turned to stroll along the beach. The beach near the city was usually used for people wanting to get away from the city, so it was not surprising to see other people on it. Xavo walked past them all to the point of the peninsula jutting off into the sea. The point was an unofficial demarcation line of sorts. Strollers never wandered past the point, but Xavo kept on walking. He walked all the way along the far side of the peninsula until he came to the spot where he had found Lady Mystic. It was a fairly short walk from the temple if one used the path through the jungle, but Xavo did not want to be seen by Lady Mystic on this day.

His eyes scanned the jungle trail and then the beach in both directions. When he was satisfied that he was alone, he wove an air tunnel and directed it towards Raven’s Point. He smiled as he felt an air mage grab the opposite end of the air tunnel. Breaking his own rules, Xavo modified the pressure of the air tunnel so that it worked in both directions.

“This is a nice beach on the island of Motanga,” Xavo said softly into the air tunnel. “The pressure is equalized, but do not speak unless asked to, and keep your voice soft when you do. Who am I speaking to?”

“Polema,” came a soft reply. “Your voice is wrong.”

“Is Rhoda nearby?” asked Xavo.

“I am here,” came a second female voice. “Who are you?”

“My voice has been altered,” declared Xavo. “You must rely on the keyword that I mentioned the last time. Listen carefully. I have made this air tunnel equalized because I must be sure that you understand my instructions. Send Polema away and then listen well.”

Xavo nodded to himself when Rhoda softly said that she was alone.

“This message is for the ears of Fisher and Marak only,” Xavo continued. “No one else must hear of it. Is that clear?”

“Yes,” replied Rhoda, “but I doubt your identity.”

“Do not make me mention your birthmark,” Xavo smiled. “I found it necessary to adopt another persona. Just listen. Clarvoy has a spy in the inner circle of the Star of Sakova. He knows that the Sakovans are positioning armies deep in the forest, and he is trying to discover the reason for such positioning. Lyra must thwart this spy without letting on that she knows about him or her. My life depends upon it. They also know that Zaramilden is being evacuated. That knowledge may make them alter their attack plans. I have no understanding of why that is.”

“Hold,” Rhoda said softly.

Xavo stopped talking as he imagined Rhoda writing down every single word. Her thoroughness was the reason that he wanted to speak directly to her.

“Continue,” whispered Rhoda.

“Clarvoy also has been snooping around Fakara,” Xavo continued. “He does not know the location of Angragar, but he knows that the free tribes have fled to there. He is planning a trip to either Meliban or Taggot to recruit Jiadin to work against the Astor. Rejji must be informed. Have you got all that?”

“Yes,” Rhoda replied after a moment.

“Officially, Aakuta is dead,” Xavo declared. “Warn the Torak that this information is known to only a few people. If I am compromised, I will not be able to continue. He will understand. I hope to talk to you again soon.”

Xavo immediately dropped the air tunnel as he heard a noise on the jungle trail behind him. He plopped down on the beach and gazed out to sea, pretending to spend a quiet moment with his thoughts. A few moments later, Lady Mystic appeared on the beach.

“Fancy finding you here,” greeted Lady Mystic. “What are you doing?”

“Just thinking about us,” smiled Xavo. “Sit.”

“Why this particular spot?” asked Lady Mystic as she lowered herself to the sand.

“It is where I found you on the beach,” smiled Xavo. “I was hoping that I might bump into you. You have not been answering my knocks on your door.”

“You do not lie well,” retorted Vand’s daughter. “I saw you leaving the temple earlier. You went out of your way to get to this very spot. You could have just walked through the jungle.”

“I guess that I did not plan on coming here when I started the walk,” shrugged Xavo. “Still, this is where I ended up, and I did hope to bump into you before I left. Why do you mistrust me so?”

“Because you are a phony,” answered Lady Mystic. “You still want something from me, but I have not figured it out yet. You are too much like me, Xavo. You are not capable of this love you proclaim for me.”

“How can you say that?” balked Xavo. “Were you not in love with Aakuta? That shows that you are capable of love, so why can’t I be?”

“I was in love with Aakuta,” Lady Mystic replied as she frowned deeply, “but I did not know what it was. I betrayed my lover. That only proves that I am incapable of dealing with it.”

“You are too hard on yourself,” smiled Xavo. “You truly did not understand your father and what motivates him. You were blind to how Vand would react. I am sure that Aakuta would have forgiven you.”

Lady Mystic stared at Xavo and did not speak. Her eyes narrowed as she watched him. After a few moments, Xavo turned and saw Lady Mystic staring at him.

“What’s wrong?” he asked. “Did I say something to offend you?”

Lady Mystic blinked and shook her head. “Did they teach you the air tunnel yet?” she asked.

“Oh yes,” nodded Xavo. “I guess it could be a useful tool for directing people over a wide area, but I would not get too excited about it. I think it is overrated.”

“Oh?” replied Lady Mystic. “Then they only told you about one of its uses?”

“What do you mean?” frowned Xavo. “What other uses are there for it?”

“The original spell only sends messages,” explained Lady Mystic. “That is what I discovered by watching Aakuta, but the spell can be altered to allow messages to flow in either direction. I would have thought that being a Disciple of Vand would have allowed you to be privy to such knowledge.”

“Who discovered the variations?” Xavo asked with concern.

“I did,” smiled Lady Mystic. “I had to think of something to take my mind off of Aakuta.”

“Have you told anyone else yet?” Xavo asked anxiously.

“No,” replied Lady Mystic. “Should I?”

“I wouldn’t in your position,” Xavo inadvertently sighed with relief. “I mean, after what your father did to you, I would not help them ever again. Of course, I am speaking from your perspective, not mine.”

“But you are a Disciple of Vand,” Lady Mystic said with raised eyebrows. “You should be urging me to disclose what I know.”

“It is not that important of a discovery,” shrugged Xavo. “I guess I don’t want to see you abused any more than you already have been.”

“That is so considerate of you, Xavo,” smiled Lady Mystic. “I would really be impressed with your love and dedication to me,” she paused for effect and added, “If I believed a word of what you are saying.”

“What do you mean?” frowned Xavo. “Why do you have such a hard time believing that I love you?”

“Because you are not being honest with me,” replied Vand’s daughter. “You don’t trust me enough to be honest with me. I can’t say that I blame you, but that does stop me from believing you.”

“What can I say to you that you will believe?” asked Xavo. “Ask me anything you want?”

“And you will answer truthfully?” questioned Lady Mystic.

“Of course,” Xavo nodded confidently.

“Do you know how to use variations of the air tunnel spell?” she asked.

Xavo hesitated too long with his answer, and Lady Mystic got up to leave. Xavo reached and gently grabbed her arm.

“Please, don’t leave,” he pleaded. “I truly do love you, but I am willing to accept the fact that you will not love me back. I understand. I still want to be near you when I can.”

“When you can?” asked Lady Mystic. “What do you mean by that?”

“I don’t want to be seen with you,” answered Xavo, “but I want to be with you.”

“Ah,” Lady Mystic nodded as she sat back down. “At least that is truthful on your part. We are making progress. I do not blame you for not wanting to be seen with me. That would draw Vand’s attention to you in ways that could be deadly.”

“I am glad that you understand,” Xavo smiled tautly.

“I understand a great deal more than you think I do,” retorted Lady Mystic. ”I understand that no one on this whole island would understand the concept of forgiveness in the manner that Aakuta understood it.”

“As much as I taunted him,” nodded Xavo, “he was very intelligent.”

“He was,” agreed Lady Mystic. “He also loved me dearly even though I twice betrayed him. He would be a fool to trust me a third time. That is something else that I have come to understand.”

“I am sure that he would forgive you again,” countered Xavo.

“He would want to,” replied Lady Mystic, “but he would be afraid to. Aakuta cared about some things even more than his own life. Not only did I betray him, but I also harmed those things he cares about dearly. As much as he wanted to be with me, he would never again endanger those things. I have also come to understand that.”

“You do understand a great deal about the man,” smiled Xavo.

“Yes,” smiled Lady Mystic, “but there is one thing I do not understand about him.”

“Oh?” asked Xavo. “And what is that?”

“I do not understand,” stated Lady Mystic, “how he survived that day in the jungle.”

Xavo’s eyes clouded over with concern as he stared at Lady Mystic.

“What do you mean?” he asked. “He didn’t survive. He died. You don’t have to take my word for it. There were other witnesses.”

“Yes, I know,” nodded Lady Mystic. “I spoke to Santiock that day. He said that he saw Aakuta die to a fireball. He said that he pulled your body out of the fire while you were trying to sever Aakuta’s head.”

“That is correct,” nodded Xavo. “What is there to understand?”

“How he managed to take your body?” smiled Lady Mystic. “Your fireball should have killed him instantly. Why didn’t it?”

Xavo frowned and said nothing. His fingers drew figures in the sand as his mind raced to find an answer that Lady Mystic would swallow.

“Thinking of your daughter?” asked Lady Mystic.

Xavo gazed at Lady Mystic and saw her staring at the sand. He looked down and saw that he had subconsciously drawn a star in the sand. He quickly brushed the sand away, destroying what his fingers had drawn.

“You might as well tell me,” sighed Lady Mystic. “It is obvious that I already know. What more harm can come of speaking the truth?”

Xavo sat silently for a moment and then slowly nodded.

“Master Malafar had been nearly killed twice by fireballs,” Xavo explained, “once in the back and once in the chest. Had you ever seen him without his clothes on, you would have seen the masses of scar tissue that covered his body. Indeed, Xavo’s fireball was powerful enough to kill, and it did indeed fatally wound Aakuta, but the scar tissue softened the blow just enough to allow Aakuta a few moments of life before he succumbed. Because Xavo was convinced that he had killed me, he was careless in verifying his kill. The fact that the fire was spreading rapidly also added to his haste. When he bent down to slice my throat, I struck. My hands grabbed him by the shoulders as I cast the spell that would allow me to invade his body. He never realized what happened to him.”

“Excellent,” grinned Lady Mystic, “but the first few moments after using that spell the caster becomes dizzy and disoriented.”

“So I found out the hard way,” nodded Xavo. “Fortunately, Santiock was nearby. He saw Aakuta felled by the fireball, and he saw Xavo go down with his knife. When Xavo did not immediately exit the fire, he raced over and pulled me clear of the flames. He truly did save my life that day.”

“So Santiock was not lying,” mused Lady Mystic. “I thought he made it up to get a promotion.”

“He told the truth,” replied Xavo. “I think Vand would have detected the lie. He was more skeptical of Santiock’s story than mine, but once he believed Santiock, he could not possibly question the validity of my story.”

“I would love to see Vand’s face when he learned what a fool he has been,” grinned Lady Mystic.

“Lady Mystic,” Xavo said pleadingly.

“Forget it,” Lady Mystic waved dismissively. “Believe it or not, I have truly learned my lesson. Vand will learn nothing from me ever again.”

“I hope you understand my actions,” Xavo sighed. “I truly do love you, but there are things that are more important than myself. Were it just about me, I would have exposed myself to you, but I will not endanger others for my own gratification. I just couldn’t tell you the truth. I am sorry.”

“You also couldn’t hide the truth,” smiled Lady Mystic. “It is your love for me that gave you away. It is so out of character for Xavo that it puzzled me day and night. It also helped me to understand the air tunnel better.”

“How?” frowned Xavo.

“With a new body comes a new voice,” explained Lady Mystic. “What purpose is there on this island for a spy who cannot communicate his findings? You could still cast an air tunnel to the mainland, but no one would believe that it was Aakuta. The only way that you could continue to spy on Vand, was if the air tunnel could work in both directions. That way you could answer questions that only Aakuta would have the answer to. You could, in essence, validate your identity.”

“You are clever,” smiled Xavo. “Have you told anyone about the air tunnel?”

“You know that I told Vand when I first discovered you using it,” admitted Lady Mystic, “but I have told no one about its variations. And I will not tell anyone. I promise you that.”

“I am relieved,” sighed Xavo. “That knowledge would destroy all hopes of defeating Vand. You took a great chance trying to expose me just now. Suppose you were wrong, and Xavo ran to tell Vand about your discovery?”

“I took no chances,” smiled Lady Mystic. “When I saw you leave the temple, I figured out what you were up to. I wove an air tunnel to this spot on the beach and listened in. I did not approach until it sounded like your conversation was over.”

“Yet you acted as if you still believed in Xavo,” he frowned. “How can that be?”

“I was not sure that I actually wanted to confront the truth,” admitted Lady Mystic. “I did almost leave when I realized that your secret might be better kept if you thought it was still unknown. I could not leave, though. I had to know how you survived.”

“I am no good at this spy business,” frowned Xavo. “I would prefer to just go into the temple and start blasting all of Vand’s top people, but that would accomplish little.”

“You are much better at it than you realize,” replied Lady Mystic. “Just look at the duration of your stay in Motanga. No one could expect a spy to last that long here. And you have even infiltrated Vand’s inner circle. What more could anyone hope for in terms of spying?”

“I suppose,” shrugged Xavo. “What do we do now? It is far too dangerous for me to be seen in your presence too often, yet I want to be by your side constantly.”

“We will figure something out,” grinned Lady Mystic. “The important thing is that we have been given another chance. Let us cherish whatever time together we can arrange.”

“You could take over another body,” suggested Xavo. “It would give you a fresh start in life. You would no longer have to be Vand’s daughter.”

“I thought about that,” Lady Mystic shook her head, “but I would then be under someone’s control. While I am ostracized as Vand’s daughter, everyone will leave me alone. It will give me greater freedom to gain information for you.”

“Gain information for me?” echoed Xavo. “Why?”

“Because I have hurt your cause,” explained Lady Mystic. “Now I will try to make up for that. As a disciple, you will learn many things that the ordinary person will not, but there are still some things that you will not be privy to. I know a great number of people on this island, and I know a great deal about them. I will get information for you that no one else can supply.”

“Like what?” questioned Xavo.

“Like how far along the shipbuilding schedule is,” grinned Lady Mystic. “Or perhaps where the ship is sailing to that next carries Clarvoy. How long they plan to be away from the island. There are many things that I can find out.”

“Alright,” conceded Xavo, “but I do not want you endangering yourself. If Vand finds you spying on him, he will be able to figure out too much. He will discover about the air tunnels and me. We cannot allow that to happen.”

“If Vand does get suspicious,” promised Lady Mystic. “That is when I will take another body. I will never tell him anything. I promise you this. Even if he throws me to Dobuk, Vand has gotten his last bit of help from me. I will give him no more.”

* * *

The lectain who entered the Emperor’s office wore the colors of the Ragatha clan. Emperor Marak smiled and shook his head as he waved the officer to his desk and dismissed the guards.

“Not good enough,” smiled Emperor Marak. “You still walk the same.”

“I will have to work on that,” smiled Fisher. “I have important information for your ears only. Is it safe to speak?”

“It is,” nodded the Torak. “Where is the information from?”

Fisher handed the Emperor a paper and let him read it.

“The message was delivered to Rhoda via an air tunnel,” Fisher stated. “It is the exact method of communication that Aakuta uses, but the voice was different. The keyword was given, and the air tunnel was equalized so that the sender could hear responses. He stated that he had done so because of the seriousness of the message.”

“What else was said besides what you have handed me?” asked Emperor Marak.

“These are his words verbatim,” assured Fisher. “No one knows anything about this except you, me, and Rhoda. He was very explicit about this to Rhoda. He would not even allow Polema to hear the conversation.”

“Does he distrust Polema?” asked Emperor Marak.

“I don’t believe so,” answered Fisher. “I think he is just being extremely cautious. He knows that Rhoda would never reveal the message if she were captured. I think they bonded during her captivity on the island.”

“That makes sense,” nodded the Emperor. “He wished to speak to the mage who had already resisted torture and survived it. Alright,” he mused, “we can assume that Aakuta had to take another body to survive on the Island of Darkness. That is why his voice is different, and we know that Vand’s mages have that capability. Zygor used it to take over Lord Damirath’s body.”

“Rhoda said that she knows of no one else who would be aware of her birthmark,” added Fisher. “At least not anyone that she knows of. There was a period of time when she was naked and unconscious on the Island of Darkness, but she also said that Aakuta used to tease her about it. The voice also used the keyword that Aakuta had previously specified. I feel confident that this new source is indeed Aakuta.”

“Then let’s assume that is true,” accepted the Emperor. “His message is very grim. If there is a spy in Lyra’s inner circle, all of our plans are in jeopardy. She must be informed.”

“In such a way that she does not reveal the origin of her knowledge,” Fisher pointed out. “I don’t want to lose Aakuta as a source. His information is becoming more valuable every day. If we inadvertently expose him, we will have no idea what Vand knows or is up to.”

“This creates a serious problem,” frowned the Torak. “We know that Vand’s mages can assume another’s identity. If that is how they managed to infiltrate Lyra’s inner circle, the spy will be someone that Lyra knows and trusts. It could be anyone. How do we narrow it down? We cannot even ask StarWind or HawkShadow to investigate. It could be one of them. It could be anyone.”

“Except the Star of Sakova,” nodded Fisher. “The message would have been much different if they had taken over her body.”

“I doubt that Kaltara would allow that,” Marak shook his head. “I am sure that she must have some protection against such magic, even if we are not aware of it.”

“So she is the only person that we can trust south of the Kalatung Mountains,” sighed Fisher. “This is a serious problem.”

“It is,” agreed Marak, “but you have just given me the solution.”

“I did?” chuckled Fisher. “And what solution is that?”

“Ukaro,” answered Marak. “My father is well respected and accepted in the Sakova. He is also not possessed by Vand’s mage. I will send him to speak to Lyra privately. It will be his task to uncover the spy.”

“That might work,” nodded Fisher, “but do not have him expose the spy. We can use Vand’s tool against him by providing disinformation.”

“That is assuming Ukaro finds the spy,” nodded Marak. “That is a rather tall task for anyone to accomplish.”

“Were I a wagering man,” smiled Fisher, “I would put my gold on Ukaro. You do not get much past a Chula shaman, and Ukaro is one of the best.”

“What do you make of this mention of Zaramilden?” asked Marak. “Why would that potentially change their attack plans?”

“I don’t know,” admitted the spy. “I was puzzled by that on my way here. It is possible that they were going to attack the city to gauge your response a second time.”

“I don’t think so,” frowned Emperor Marak. “I think attacking Zaramilden had been part of their plan. I just can’t imagine why evacuating the city would alter anything. I can see it as one less objective, but the message implies more.”

“It does,” agreed Fisher. “It would be nice to bounce this off of others, but we must be careful about revealing what we know.”

“I agree,” nodded Marak. “I will not endanger Aakuta, whoever he may be right now. Our failure to get the information he just sent would have resulted in a massive disaster in the Sakova. I want more information out of him, not less. Forget about Zaramilden. That will be my problem to decipher. I am sure that you have other things to keep you busy.”

“I have a lot on my plate,” admitted Fisher. “I may be out of touch for a while. If you need me, contact Rykoma. I will try to check in with him regularly.”

The Emperor’s eyes narrowed as he gazed at Fisher, but he knew better than to asked where the spy was going. If he had wanted Marak to know, he would have said so.

“Travel safely, my friend,” smiled Emperor Marak. “May Kaltara keep watch over you."

Chapter 21

Myka

The citizens of Angragar shouted and pointed skyward as the mighty dragon soared over the city. While women screamed and children ran to hide, the dragon cackled and dove towards the ground. As the dragon raced downward towards the city, the men fled, dragging the women with them until the streets of the ancient city were empty.

Myka grinned and came out of her dive, leveling out just over the tops of the buildings. She winged through the air until the city had passed beneath her, then she circled lazily and landed in a large clearing outside the city. Rejji came running out of the trees and halted right before the dragon’s snout.

“What did you do?” scowled the Astor. “I could hear the screams from out here. Did you fly over the city?”

“Sort of,” Myka said distractedly. “I was rather high in the sky and saw something moving about below. I figured that I should dive down and check it out. It just happened to be a city.”

“Clova chips,” frowned Rejji. “There is nothing wrong with your eyesight. You could tell the sex of a wasooki from higher than you were flying. You just wanted to terrorize the citizens.”

“Perhaps,” Myka feigned indifference, “but then I didn’t disturb anyone’s sleep. I do not like the air tunnel that you use to waken me. It can enter my cave without permission. I cannot even smell it arrive. Have you no respect for naps?”

“I am sorry for disturbing you,” sighed Rejji, “but this is important.”

“Isn’t everything important to you?” retorted the dragon. “What great catastrophe has struck this time?”

“Emperor Marak will be arriving any minute,” explained Rejji. “You remember that he requested to meet you?”

“You woke me up to meet some human?” roared Myka, smoke rushing out of her nostrils. “I said that I might be willing to meet him some day, but I did not promise to wake up for it.”

“It is more than just a meeting,” Rejji said hesitantly. “He needs your help getting someplace in a hurry. It would take days for him to go by ship and return. He cannot afford that much time.”

“Do I look like a horse?” snarled the dragon. “My back was not designed for the comforts of humans. Forget it. I am going back to my nap.”

“You can’t,” pleaded Rejji. “Marak is counting on your help. He will be here any minute.”

“Perhaps I should stay and eat him when he arrives,” mused Myka. “That would teach you a lesson. I am not your pet, nor am I a trained animal to do your bidding. I am a dragon, and I am to be feared and respected.”

“You are already feared and respected,” came a new voice as Emperor Marak exited the forest trail and walked towards Myka and Rejji. “I saw your dive as I was leaving the city. It was most impressive. All of the citizens scattered and fled for their lives.”

“Except for you?” snapped Myka as her eyes bored into the Emperor. “Why is it that you do not fear and respect me?”

Marak walked right up to the dragon’s snout and bowed low before Myka.

“How could I not respect the Queen of the Dragons?” asked Emperor Marak. “It is said that you are the oldest and wisest species in the world. The old tales state that you were around at the beginning of time.”

“Finally,” huffed Myka, “someone who appreciates me. But what about the fear, warrior? Why are you not trembling in your boots?”

“I hide my fear better than most men,” declared Marak. “When half the world wants to kill you on sight, it is best that you do not tremble at all.”

One of Myka’s eyes closed while the other peered intensely at the warrior. She could not make up her mind if she liked him or not. He was certainly different than the others.

“So you wanted to meet me,” Myka said condescendingly. “Well, you have met me. Now, I will return to my nap.”

“Please,” Emperor Marak said softly. “I have wanted to meet you for some time now, but many people depend upon me. I just haven’t been able to find the time. I need your help today. That is why I have come to see you.”

“Honest to a fault,” shrugged Myka, “but that earns you no points in my book. My services are not available to strangers. Go find a swift horse.”

“A horse?” echoed Marak. “To fly across the ocean?”

“Then take a boat,” snapped Myka. “I do not give rides.”

“There is no time for a ship,” Marak replied stubbornly. “I must get to the elves and back quickly. The Time of Cleansing has begun.”

“Elves?” echoed Myka with sudden interest. “Rejji knows an elf, although she claims that she is not one. What was the name of the baby maker?”

“We used to call her Mistake,” Rejji answered.

“She is now known as Princess Alahara,” added Marak. “Her father is King Avalar, and it is who I must speak to.”

“Mistake is a princess?” chuckled Myka. “Now that is rich. We must have pity on the poor elves, if any still exist.”

“The elves still exist,” insisted Marak. “When we get to Elvangar, you will see for yourself.”

“You presume a great deal, friend of Rejji’s,” retorted the dragon. “We are not going to Elvangar or anywhere else. I am returning to my nap.”

Myka was preparing to take off when Rejji responded, “He is more than my friend. He is the Torak and should be treated with respect, the same as you demand.”

Myka’s head swiveled around, and she gazed at Marak again. Slowly she turned around to face the humans.

“The Torak?” she asked. “By what right do you take this name?”

“It is the name given to me by Kaltara,” declared Marak. “You have heard of it?”

“Kaltara is the elven god,” the dragon said suspiciously. “You are not an elf.”

“Kaltara is everyone’s god,” corrected Marak. “Perhaps the elves did not lose faith in Kaltara as the humans did, but we are relearning that faith. Don’t you believe in Kaltara?”

“What a foolish question,” replied Myka. “You already acknowledged that the dragons have been around forever. How could we not believe in Kaltara?”

“We?” questioned the Torak. “Are there more dragons still alive?”

“I would hope so,” mused Myka, “but I have not seen another in many years. Someday I will go looking for them, but not today.”

“Perhaps we will find some on the way to Elvangar,” smiled Marak. “That would be exciting.”

“That would be exciting,” nodded Myka before catching herself. “You are tricky, Torak, but you have not fooled me. There are no dragons in Elvangar. You are trying to trick me into helping you.”

“Perhaps,” shrugged the Torak. “I have never been to Elvangar, so I honestly do not know if dragons live there or not. Do you know?”

“I don’t,” admitted Myka. “And if there are no dragons, the trip will be boring and a waste of time.”

“And if there are,” countered Marak, “and you don’t make the trip, you will never meet them. Dragons live for many years, Myka. I am asking for only one day. Where is your sense of adventure?”

“Adventure?” echoed the dragon. “Flying with a human on my back is supposed to be adventure?”

“Can you imagine swooping down on an elven city?” grinned Rejji. “And with a human on your back to boot? That would stir some excitement in Elvangar. There has not been a human there in thousands of years.”

“There haven’t been any humans in Elvangar?” Myka asked suspiciously. “Will we be attacked when I carry the Torak there?”

“No,” answered Marak. “I have spoken to King Avalar about the journey. He is quite excited to meet one of the ancient winged warriors.”

“Winged warriors,” grinned Myka. “Now there is a term that I have not heard in a long time. The elves always knew how to respect dragons. This King Avalar sounds wise indeed.”

“Then you will take me?” smiled Marak.

“Climb on before I change my mind, Torak,” snorted Myka. “I hope you have a good sense of balance. The winds are quite strong today.”

“She will dive unexpectedly,” Rejji whispered to Marak as Myka turned her back. “It is to scare you, but she will not let you fall.”

Marak nodded and scampered up Myka’s back. Before Marak could get situated, Myka launched off the ground. Marak grabbed a scale and hung on as the dragon soared into the air. He did not move until the dragon leveled out high in the sky.

“Do you know where Elvangar is?” shouted Marak as he removed a knife from his belt and began carving a slit in one of the large scales.

“Of course I know the way,” replied Myka. “I am a dragon after all.”

When Myka did not react to the knife, Marak dug deeper until the blade was firmly entrenched in the scale. He held onto the knife with both hands.

Myka had soared high in the air before leveling out, and Marak now looked down. The ocean spread out in a seemingly endless blanket of blue. He turned and looked back and saw the landmass of Fakara. The ancient city of Angragar was sparkling white and appeared very small as it faded behind them.

Unexpectedly, Myka dove towards the water. Marak tightened his grip on the knife and hung on as the wind began to rush past him. His body felt as if it was floating freely as the sea rushed up to meet him. Tears flowed out of his eyes and were instantly swept away. He shut them tightly as began to feel lightheaded. He could hear the dragon cackling, but he kept his mouth tightly closed so that he didn’t accidentally bite his tongue. Just as suddenly as it began, Myka leveled out again. Marak’s body slammed against the scales of the dragon, and his arms felt like they were being torn from his body as he kept a tight grip on the knife. When he opened his eyes, he saw the waves not more than ten paces below him. The dragon was laughing hard.

“I hear no screams back there,” Myka said as her head turned to look at Marak. “Ah, so you are still with me. I was not sure.”

“Your flying skills are phenomenal,” complimented the Torak. “Have you ever misjudged and ended up in the sea?”

“Of course not,” replied the dragon. “Why did you not scream? Were you not afraid?”

“Fear is in each of us all the time,” answered the Torak, “but that does not mean that we must always acknowledge it.”

“You are a strange human,” grumbled Myka as she soared into the sky again. “How am I to have any fun if you do not show your fear?”

“Fun?” echoed the Torak. “I cannot imagine you not having fun just flying around. What an exhilarating feeling to be so high in the sky. I bet you take it for granted, don’t you?”

“Flying?” frowned the dragon. “Of course I do. I am a dragon. What good would it be to be a dragon and not fly?”

“What does it feel like?” asked the Torak.

The dragon was silent for a moment and Marak looked around again. Fakara was barely visible in the distance, and another land mass appeared far to the right.

“I don’t know how to explain it,” Myka finally answered. “How would you describe the sensation of walking? Flying in itself is nothing, but maneuvering is everything. When you soar and dive, it is a feeling of being alive. An energy races through your body, and when your path calls for precision, that becomes exciting.”

“Is that the Island of Darkness to our right?” shouted Emperor Marak.

“It is an island,” answered Myka, “a very large island. I have heard it called Motanga, but I do not know the name Island of Darkness. Look far ahead of us. You will see little bumps on the horizon. Those are the Barrier Islands. They separate Elvangar from the human lands.”

Marak shook his head. He had felt lightheaded during the dive, and the feeling had suddenly returned. He also noticed that he was breathing heavily, almost as if there was not enough air to breath. As he started thinking about how he was feeling, he realized that his body was chilled. He removed his hands from the knife and rubbed them to warm them.

“So you have finally decided to trust my flying skills?” quipped the dragon.

Marak suddenly realized that the dragon must have felt him burying his knife in the scale. He felt embarrassed.

“I apologize,” replied the Torak. “I did not mean to cause you pain. I thought you could not feel it.”

“It is not painful,” shrugged Myka, “but I can feel it. How did you know that I would dive?”

“Rejji warned me,” admitted Marak. “It really was scary. I just try not to show my fear. Showing fear gives an advantage to your opponent.”

“And you consider me an opponent?” asked Myka.

“No,” answered Marak. “I consider you a magnificent flying creature. I know that you do not like people riding on your back, but I love it up here. To me, flying is new and exciting. It also allows me to see the world in a way that I could never imagine. I really feel bad that the thrill of flying is gone for you. If I had your capabilities, I would fly every day.”

The dragon was silent for a long time. The Barrier Islands passed beneath them, and another landmass appeared before them. Unlike the desolation of Fakara, the new landmass was a vibrant green.

“Going down,” announced Myka. “Grab your knife.”

Marak quickly grabbed the knife as Myka headed downward. The rate of descent was not as harsh as before, but Marak eye’s still watered freely. When the dragon leveled off again, the Torak could see the Gates of Elvangar before them. Huge massive cliffs ran across the face of the island, and a tiny narrow gap ran straight down to the water. Tiny figures appeared atop the tall cliffs, and sparkling white buildings were visible beyond.

“Thank you for the warning,” Marak said to the dragon.

“You have shown your resourcefulness,” quipped Myka, “I do not need another hole in my scales.”

“I am sorry for the hole,” apologized Marak. “Can I make it up to you somehow?”

“You will,” grinned the dragon. “Just make sure that you always use the same hole. I don’t want every one of my scales perforated.”

“I will never use the knife again,” promised the Torak. “I now know that you would feel me falling and save me. I will have no need of the knife on the way back.”

“You will use the knife again, Torak,” replied Myka. “Just make sure that it is the same scale.”

Marak frowned as he tried to decipher the dragon’s words. He wondered if she planned a wild ride for the trip back, but he did not pursue it.

“Elvangar,” announced Myka as she soared over the Gates of Elvangar. “Where do I land?”

“I was told to land near the Royal Tree,” replied Marak as he saw men on top of the Gates of Elvangar holding their swords high and pointing at the dragon. “They said that we would recognize it.”

“And so we do,” replied Myka as she banked slightly and changed course. “That huge tree in the center of the city must be the Royal Tree.”

“Are you going to swoop down and scare the elves?” asked Marak.

“The elves do not fear dragons,” replied Myka. “In fact, they revere us. You could learn a great deal from the elves, Torak. Spend your time with them wisely, and listen carefully. They are wiser than even they know.”

Marak let the dragon’s words roll around in his head, but the sights of the elven city soon distracted him. Morada was neatly laid out with green parks scattered throughout the city. He saw wooden buildings in some of the tall trees, and others on the ground made out of stone. The elven people all stopped what they were doing and pointed at the dragon. Those with swords raised their blades high, while those without weapons raised an empty hand. Marak turned and saw the elves running after the dragon.

“What a difference between this city and Angragar,” commented Marak. “The elves are chasing you.”

“They will converge at the Royal Tree when I land,” declared the dragon with a grin. “The elves love me. I hope they have something to eat.”

Marak laughed and shook his head as Myka dropped lower. The Torak gripped his knife as the land sped up to meet them, but Myka’s landing was smooth and gentle. She landed on the grass underneath the Royal Tree.

King Avalar and the two princesses were there to greet the dragon. A beautiful elven woman wearing a simple golden crown was with them. Marak assumed that she was the queen. As Marak pulled his knife free and slid down the back of the dragon, he saw the Royal Family bowing slightly to the dragon.

“Welcome Winged Warrior,” greeted King Avalar. “It has been a long time since one of you has visited us. How are you called?”

“I am Myka,” answered the dragon. “I come bearing the Torak.”

“We thank you for bringing the Torak to Elvangar, Myka,” nodded King Avalar. “We shall have a feast in honor of this historic visit.”

“I am honored by your gesture, King of the Elves,” replied the dragon.

Marak noticed that the area where the dragon had landed was ringed by thousands of elves. They stared at the dragon with emotionless eyes, but many a smile dotted their faces. There was no fear among them. Marak walked around the dragon and bowed to King Avalar.

“Welcome to Elvangar, Torak,” smiled King Avalar. “Allow me to introduce my wife, Queen Alycia.”

Marak and Alycia bowed to each other. Her broad smile was genuine and Marak yearned to hear what happened after Avalar’s return from the Island of Darkness.

“I have assembled a party of people to join us for the discussion about the elven participation in the coming war,” declared King Avalar. “Come join us in the throne room while the workers set up for the feast.”

Avalar was about to say something to Myka about the feast when Princess Alahara moved forward and stood nose to snout with the dragon.

“Don’t even think about eating any of my people,” Princess Alahara whispered to the dragon, her face a mask of seriousness.

Myka’s tongue lashed out of her mouth and just barely touched Princess Alahara’s chest.

“I am pleased that the baby maker has found a new home,” Myka said with a grin. “This means that my mountain will not be crawling with thousands of tiny elves.”

While the words had not been heard by anyone other than Alahara and Myka, King Avalar hurried forward and gently grabbed Alahara’s arm.

“What are you saying?” he asked. “The dragon is an honored guest in this land. Do not abuse her.”

“I have taken no offense,” Myka said softly. “You are fortunate to have Mistake for a daughter. She has the courage to lead the elven people some day. Teach her the ways of the Winged Warriors. She will learn.”

“Mistake?” frowned King Avalar. “You have known Princess Alahara before?”

“Indeed, we have met before,” replied Myka. “She will tell you about it. She was on her way to see the Sage of the Mountain for help in finding her family. It is well that she succeeded.”

“With your help,” Princess Alahara grudgingly added.

“With my help,” nodded Myka. “Be well elven princess. We shall talk later after the feast.”

Princess Alahara frowned, but she nodded and allowed her father to lead her away from the dragon.

“She won’t eat any elves?” Princess Alahara asked her father.

“She would never do such a thing,” answered Avalar. “You have much to learn about your people. Come with us to the throne room. Your input will be most welcomed.”

The Royal Family and the Torak walked to the lift and rose up into the Royal Tree. Marak gazed about with interest at everything he saw.

“I wish there was time to show you everything,” stated King Avalar, “but time is something that we are running out of. You are the first human to set foot in Elvangar in two thousand years. Coming in on the back of a winged warrior will mean much to the elven people. It will reinforce the fact that the elves are destined to be involved in this war.”

“Why?” asked Marak.

“Until now,” explained Avalar, “the elven people have only heard speeches about the human war. There has been a fear of humans coming here for thousands of year, and now you arrive. You did not arrive as a conqueror, or as a thief. You arrived as a warrior capable of riding a dragon.”

“But anyone can ride a dragon,” shrugged Marak. “It is like riding a horse unless Myka decides to dive to hear you scream for your life.”

“She did that to you, too?” gasped Princess Alahara. “I thought we were going to die that day.”

“That only shows that she has a sense of humor,” King Avalar continued seriously. “Not everyone can ride a dragon, Emperor Marak. While it may be easy to sit upon the back of one, dragons do not invite people to ride upon them, and no one is capable of forcing the dragon to allow it.”

“I guess I was convincing,” shrugged Marak. “She certainly allowed me to ride her.”

“Because you are the Torak,” declared King Avalar.

“But she let me, and Rejji, and Bakhai ride on her,” interjected Princess Alahara.

“And Rejji is the Astor,” nodded King Avalar. “No doubt she would also allow the Star of Sakova to ride upon her back as well.”

“Are you saying that she knows about the prophecies?” asked the Torak. “That she only allowed my ride because I am the Torak?”

“That is exactly what I am saying,” nodded the King of the Elves. “Winged Warriors are creatures of Kaltara. That is why the elves revere them.”

“But what about me and Bakhai?” asked Princess Alahara. “We rode her, too.”

“You will have to tell me what happened some day,” shrugged King Avalar, “but I am willing to wager that she had to do so to save the Astor’s life. Perhaps Rejji would have refused the flight if you two were left behind.”

“He would never have abandoned us,” Princess Alahara said emphatically.

“Then you have answered your own question, Daughter,” smiled the king.

“So Myka will allow me to ride her again?” asked Marak. “I don’t mean just the trip back to Angragar, but another time as well?”

“I will not put words into the mouth of a winged warrior,” smiled King Avalar. “I will say that you need to have a serious talk with Myka. The dragons are not called winged warriors without reason.”

Marak mulled over the words that Myka had spoken earlier. He particularly focused on her statement regarding the hole made by the knife and her warning not to make more holes in the future.

“So she was toying with me,” smiled Marak. “The whole time I was trying to get her to bring me here, she was threatening to leave me there. That was all an act?”

King Avalar merely grinned.

“Some dragons have been known to have a wild sense of humor,” interjected Queen Alycia. “They vary just as people do. At least she won’t be boring.”

Emperor Marak shook his head and laughed.

Chapter 22

Aakuta’s Message

Rhoda saw the Imperial messenger enter the Raven’s Point estate and knew something was afoot. It was not necessarily that a message was being delivered from the Emperor that spurred her to action, but rather it was the hand motion that the fake messenger used to signal her. The Torak mage immediately made an excuse to the students that she was tutoring. She entered the front of the mansion and walked swiftly through the building and out the back. She acted as if she was in a hurry to reach the docks, but at the last minute she turned to the right along the beach. As soon as she was out of sight, Rhoda ran to the cove where she received the secret messages from Aakuta. She hid in the bushes and waited.

Half an hour later, the Imperial messenger came strolling along the beach, his eyes constantly scanning the forest for signs of life. Even though Rhoda had time to conceal herself, the spy immediately detected her. He smiled and waved for her to come out.

“How did you see me?” asked Rhoda. “I was well covered.”

“I didn’t see you,” smiled Fisher. “I just knew that you would be there.”

“I have not had any more messages since the last one,” reported Rhoda. “Why are you back so soon? I did not send for you.”

“I need your help,” replied Fisher. “Can you identify the location on the Island of Darkness where Aakuta sends his messages from?”

“Somewhat,” frowned Rhoda, “but not exactly. It is a place I have not actually been to, although it is not far from the temple. I can tell that much.”

“That is not much help,” sighed Fisher. “I need to narrow it down.”

Rhoda frowned and stared out to sea for several moments before speaking.

“We talked about it when he was healing me,” she said softly. “He told me that he spoke to Polema from the beach. He took a trail through the jungle to get there, and he did not care much for the trail. He said it was a noisy approach and alerted anyone who might be in the area.”

“That is some help,” frowned Fisher, “but I would guess that could mean a thousand places.”

“Not necessarily,” corrected Rhoda. “I do not know much about the island, but I saw a bit of it while escaping. The city extends right to the water and the temple is the outermost part of the city in the opposite direction. Behind the temple is a forest, not a jungle. Also, Aakuta would naturally use the side of the city closest to Raven’s Point. He would not want the air tunnel to be accidentally disrupted by people walking between him and me.”

“Alright,” nodded Fisher, “that is more to go on. Captain Mynor has fairly decent charts of the island. I will study them and see if I can make sense out of your clues.”

“Why do you want to know this information?” asked Rhoda. “Is Aakuta in trouble?”

“Aakuta has been in trouble since he set foot on that island,” nodded Fisher. “I believe that he has taken another person’s body. That is why his voice was not recognizable.”

“Why would he do such a thing?” Rhoda asked with disgust.

“I can only speculate,” shrugged the spy. “I suspect that he was discovered spying on Vand.”

“What does that have to do with where he stands when he contacts me?” asked Rhoda.

“Because I have to talk to him,” replied Fisher. “If he contacts you again, tell him that I am looking for him.”

“Should I have him contact you directly?” asked Rhoda. “Where will you be?”

“On the Island of Darkness,” answered Fisher.

“On Motanga?” gulped Rhoda. “You can’t mean that? Why not talk to him the next time he contacts me? You can wait here safely.”

“He might not use an equalized air tunnel ever again,” replied Fisher. “I cannot take that chance. The information that he is sending is excellent, but we need more. I must talk to him in person.”

“But you don’t even know what he looks like,” argued Rhoda. “You just said that he is someone else now. How will you recognize him?”

“I won’t,” admitted Fisher, “but he will recognize me.”

“You are going to die over there, Fisher,” warned Rhoda as her eyes dampened. “You have no idea what it is like there. Everyone is suspect, and everyone jumps when an order is given. You cannot pretend to be a messenger or a merchant over there.”

“There is no other choice,” shrugged Fisher. “Aakuta knows me and trusts me. I must go.”

“He also knows and trusts me,” Rhoda swallowed hard as she realized what she was offering to do. The thought of returning to the Island of Darkness sent a shiver down her spine.

Fisher’s eyebrows rose as he stared at the petite mage. He smiled broadly and wrapped his arms around Rhoda and hugged her.

“You have more courage than a thousand warriors,” Fisher said softly. “When I get back from the Island of Darkness, I want to talk to you about being a spy. I think that you would make an excellent one.”

“So you are still going to go?” questioned Rhoda.

“I must,” nodded Fisher as he broke the embrace. “I have already arranged to have the Sprite readied to sail at a moment’s notice. You are needed here to receive Aakuta’s messages should I not find him. I have arranged with your lord to free you of all duties from now on. Your only task is to handle messages from the Island of Darkness. I hope their frequency increases greatly.”

Without further speech, Fisher turned and walked away. He followed the beach back to the estate and walked out onto the docks. Captain Mynor immediately came to greet him.

“Everything is ready as you requested,” smiled the captain.

“Did the package I requested get put onboard?” asked Fisher.

“It arrived a while ago,” nodded the captain. “We need to leave promptly if you wish to arrive under the cover of darkness.”

“That is the only way we will be able to approach the island unseen,” nodded Fisher as he climbed aboard the Sprite. “Let’s go.”

* * *

Ukaro used the secret doors to arrive in the temple at StarCity. He peered through the spy hole and saw that the library was empty. He silently moved the bookshelves and slid out from the small alcove. After he secured the bookshelves, the Chula shaman transformed himself into a black kitten.

The kitten padded softly towards the exit from the library. He halted as he sensed the guards just outside the door. Not wanting to walk past the guards, the kitten reversed course. He jumped up on a chair with a small table beside it. On the table were a book and a reading candle. The kitten slowly pushed the book towards the edge of the table until he felt the rear end of it start to lift up. Next the cat took the reading candle and placed it on top of the book, closest to the tableside. Bracing himself against the chair, the kitten lightly batted the candle, causing it to roll slowly towards the edge of the book hanging off the table. As soon as the candle started rolling, the kitten leaped off the chair and darted to the opposite side of the doorway.

As the candle rolled across the book, it shifted the balance, causing the book and the candle to fall to the floor. The noise was not loud, but it shattered the silence of the empty room. Both guards instantly entered the room, their eyes scanning the darkness and their swords swinging free from their sheaths. The kitten silently exited the room, hugging the walls so that the movement would not be noticed.

Moving swiftly through the dimly lit corridors, the kitten made his way to the office of the Star of Sakova. The door was closed, and no light appeared through the crack underneath the door. Ukaro berated himself for waiting too long into the night to make his appearance. He wanted to come late enough to avoid the bulk of the Sakovans, but not so late that he missed Lyra before she went to bed. He had no idea where she slept.

The kitten found the nearest stairwell and climbed to the second level. He walked around corridor after corridor, and all he found were closed doors. He suddenly decided to go up on the roof and transform into a human. There he would contact the Kywara using an air tunnel and ask them to weave another air tunnel to the Sakovans requesting to speak to Lyra. He would transform back into a cat and follow the mage that went to wake Lyra. It was not the best way to find the Star of Sakova, but it would work.

The kitten climbed the steps to the roof and decided to walk around to make sure that his transformation would not be observed. When he passed by the doors to the prayer chamber on the roof, he heard a voice. He silently padded towards the voice and recognized Lyra’s voice as she prayed. He backed out of the prayer chamber so as not to intrude on Lyra’s privacy and waited in the darkness.

An hour went by before the Star of Sakova emerged from the prayer chamber. The kitten silently followed her down the stairs and to her room. Just as she was closing the door to her room, the kitten darted through it. Lyra noticed the motion and immediately grabbed her rapier.

“Don’t even think that I will mistake you for a cat,” warned Lyra. “Reveal yourself immediately.”

Ukaro immediately transformed back into a human and bowed to the Star of Sakova.

“How did you know?” he asked.

“I know all the cats around here,” smiled Lyra. “Why are you sneaking into my room?”

“I carry information from the Torak that is for your ears only,” explained Ukaro. “I do not even want anyone else to know that I am here.”

“The Torak does not trust my people?” Lyra asked with a hint of a scowl.

“He does not,” answered the Chula shaman. “In fact, the message is that your inner circle has been compromised.”

“Inconceivable,” Lyra shook her head as she sheathed the rapier. “What would cause Marak to think that?”

“Your father said so,” Ukaro replied softly.

Lyra’s eyes opened wide, but her gaze was not focused on the shaman. She stared right through him. Slowly, she nodded and sat down on the bed.

“Tell me everything,” she demanded.

“There is little to tell,” responded Ukaro as he handed the note to Lyra. “This message has only been seen by Rhoda, Fisher, and Marak. Now you and I must be added to that list. We five are the only ones to possess this knowledge other than those on the Island of Darkness.”

Silence filled the room as Lyra read the message. Her facial muscles tightened as she read the note.

“This information is accurate,” sighed Lyra. “There is no doubt that I have a spy nearby. What do I do now? Our cause is lost if I cannot depend upon my own people.”

“I have had the benefit of time to think about this problem,” replied Ukaro. “I think there are three things that we must do. We must develop two new strategies for defending the Sakova, one for real, and one to divulge to others.”

“You mean lie to my own people?” asked Lyra.

“Yes,” nodded Ukaro. “Lie to them and save their lives at the same time. You have no choice.”

“What is the third thing?” asked Lyra.

“We must find the spy,” answered Ukaro.

“How?” Lyra sighed with exasperation. “It could be anyone, and I have seen how hard it is to identify someone using another’s body. If Larst had not acted so out of character, he would never have been discovered at all.”

“I did not say that it would be easy,” Ukaro replied comfortingly, “but we must do it. I will stay with you until the spy has been uncovered.”

“And what if you are the spy?” challenged the Star of Sakova. “What a clever ruse that would be to turn me away from all of the people that I trust.”

“You are wise to think in such terms,” nodded Ukaro. “I have already specified the people who know of this problem. You are free to contact all of them if you wish.”

“I am sorry, Ukaro,” shrugged Lyra, “but that is something that I must do.”

“I am not offended by such thoughts,” smiled the shaman. “In fact, you would be foolish to accept my words alone.”

“Please do not leave my room while I am gone,” ordered the Star of Sakova as she rose from the bed and left the room.

Ukaro sat in the chair and thought about the dilemma while he waited for Lyra to return. He did not have to wait long.

“Marak is unavailable,” Lyra reported as she reentered the room, “and so is Fisher.”

“And Rhoda?” asked Ukaro.

“Rhoda refused to speak to me about it,” answered Lyra. “Her instructions did not permit it.”

“Then we must wait,” shrugged Ukaro. “I know Marak was bound for Elvangar, but I know nothing about Fisher’s movements.”

“You are not going to try to contact Rhoda and get her to talk to me?” asked Lyra.

“No,” Ukaro shook his head. “Her instructions make sense. In fact, they are written in the note you read. Lyra, when we cannot trust even our closest friends, how can we berate Rhoda for following her orders? She acted properly. Besides, Rhoda does not know me, nor does she know that I have read the message. We will just have to wait.”

“We cannot afford to wait,” Lyra shook her head. “Every moment that we delay, the invasion gets closer. I am going to have to trust my instincts on this, Ukaro. May Kaltara guide me from making a mistake. What do we do next?”

“Your armies are in danger if Vand knows where they are,” answered the shaman. “The first thing you have to do is move them.”

“Without anyone knowing where they are going,” nodded Lyra. “And just how do we do that when I can trust no one?”

“I have a thought about hiding your armies,” replied Ukaro, “but not one of formulating a new strategy.”

“I will take whatever you have,” responded Lyra. “How do I hide my armies without anyone knowing where they are?”

“Give each general an air mage attached to him,” explained Ukaro. “Give each mage a number, and do let anyone know which mage is which number. Throw in a few dozen more mages with numbers who are not attached to any armies. You will start each mage out by giving them a direction to travel and an amount of time to reach some destination that is unknown to them. You have mages here in StarCity weave an air tunnel to each destination at the appropriate time and give new directions. No one will be able to decipher which army is where.”

“I will end up with armies scattered all over the Sakova,” frowned Lyra. “While it will deceive the spy, it will also disorganize us.”

“Perhaps,” shrugged Ukaro. “If you are clever in the use of directions, you could end with each army exactly where you want it to be. Plus, you will reveal a bogus war plan for the spy to concentrate on.”

“I see where you are going with this,” Lyra nodded in appreciation, “but I sure would like to have a few more people helping me with this.”

“You will have Kaltara helping you,” smiled Ukaro. “If you are worried about the mages recognizing the voices of the other mages, I could persuade some Chula to come down here to help.”

Lyra sat on the bed and did not answer. After a long time of silence, she rose and walked to the window. She stared out at the brilliant night sky before turning to face the shaman.

“When was this message received?” she asked.

“I am not sure,” admitted Ukaro. “I spoke to Marak about it yesterday, so it was some time before then. Why?”

“Because I am thinking of one Sakovan who could be of great help with this plan,” answered Lyra. “Until tonight, StarWind has been by my side for the past week. It is not possible that she has been possessed by a mage without me being aware of it. Her help could be immeasurable.”

“That is your decision to make,” Ukaro replied cautiously. “Please remember that your father’s life is at stake. The message does not come right out and say it, but I have to believe that very few people on the Island of Darkness even possess this information. If it is revealed that we know of the spy, your father’s life will be forfeit.”

“And if we do not find this spy,” retorted Lyra, “thousands of Sakovan lives will be forfeit. My father is a resourceful person, Ukaro. While I will not intentionally endanger his life, I cannot work totally in the dark. I feel confident that StarWind is not Vand’s spy. I will stake my life on it.”

“And the lives of your people,” reminded the shaman.

“And the lives of my people,” nodded Lyra. “It is time to bring her into this conversation.”

* * *

The throne room in the Royal Tree was crowded with officers and military advisors. They crowded around a large table that had been brought in for Marak to spread his charts over.

“They will be most vulnerable when they are crossing the sea,” King Avalar declared. “Anything we can do to disrupt that crossing will be well worthwhile.”

“We have some surprises in store for them when they cross,” replied the Torak, “but once they have made the voyage that chance is gone forever.”

“Not necessarily,” Avalar shook his head. “They cannot just cross the ocean and be done with it. Vand is not a fool. He knows that we will likely deplete the land of food and supplies. His ships will continually sail the seas to resupply his armies. It is important for us to reserve some ships to harass him.”

Marak stared at the map of Omunga for a long time without speaking while the elves bantered among themselves, trying to figure out where Vand would choose to strike first. The Torak suddenly started nodding and smiling and the room fell silent as Avalar leaned over to look at the map.

“What do you see that the rest of us do not?” asked the King of the Elves.

“An answer to a riddle,” smiled Emperor Marak.

“What is the riddle?” asked Tamar.

“Two questions,” answered the Torak. “Why was Duran already attacked? And why would the evacuation of Zaramilden alter the invasion plans?”

“You mentioned that Duran was attacked to see what your reactions would be,” replied Avalar. “Do you think there is more to it?”

“I do,” nodded the Torak. “You brought the thought to mind a few minutes ago when you mentioned his need to resupply his forces. Duran is a seaport that has absolutely no access from any point of land. As a landing point for an invading army, it is worthless, but it is strategically located in the center of the landmass and will be fairly close to the fighting no matter where Vand strikes.”

“He is going to preposition supplies there,” gasped Tamar. “Once the fighting begins, he will have no need to have his ships crossing the ocean.”

“Exactly,” nodded Marak. “Zaramilden, however, is too close to Duran by sea be left unconquered. Any of our ships based in Zaramilden would be a threat to his resupply effort, but if we evacuate it, they no longer have to bother attacking it.”

“Does that mean that he will also attack Raven’s Point?” asked Avalar. “It is Khadora’s only major seaport on the eastern coast.”

“It is also twice as far from Duran as Zaramilden is,” replied Emperor Marak. “If we have an appreciable navy at Raven’s Point, he will be compelled to attack it, otherwise he does not have to hurry.”

“He will want to destroy your navy before the war commences,” declared Tamar. “He is too vulnerable at sea. He will not risk losing a thousand men at a time when one of his ships goes down. His assured victory rests on getting a million men ashore.”

“Half that number might be enough to destroy all of us,” frowned Emperor Marak. “We still don’t have a good handle on the magic that they use, or the number of mages that will be included in that million men.”

“Well,” smiled King Avalar, “you will have the elves to help balance the fight. You will not find a finer archer in the world.”

“I look forward to seeing your men in action,” smiled the Torak, “but I would prefer to keep the knowledge of your involvement secret for a while. Using the elves when Vand least expects it will have the greatest impact.”

“I agree,” interjected Tamar. “After King Avalar’s escape from the Island of Darkness, Vand will be looking for proof of any elven involvement in this war. The best plan is to deny him that knowledge until it is too late for him to compensate for it.”

“Coordinating will be the hardest part,” declared the Torak. “I am sure that Alahara and Alastasia can teach your mages how to use an air tunnel, but I am no longer sure how secure that is. I believe that Vand now has knowledge of air tunnels.”

“If we are cautious in their use,” interjected Princess Alastasia, “I think it would be hard for Vand to know it. At any given time there must be hundreds of air tunnels in existence. Even if he knew how to listen in, he couldn’t intercept all of those messages. He would concentrate on messages that involved you or Lyra. Those are the ones most likely to give him the information that he needs.”

“I will try to get information from Aakuta about their knowledge of air tunnels,” offered the Torak. “Teach the spell to the elven mages. Even if messages can be intercepted, we need the capability to communicate.”

“Alastasia and I can become Mistake and MistyTrail again,” suggested Princess Alahara. “We know how to act human and not be taken for elves. We are known in Angragar at least, and we can go there for meetings to avoid using the air tunnels.”

“There is some benefit to that suggestion,” Emperor Marak replied thoughtfully. “Rejji can get you quickly from Angragar to Khadoratung or StarCity. In fact, Lyra could probably use your help right now. She is short on people that she can trust.”

“Is that necessary?” Queen Alycia asked anxiously. “They are needed here.”

“Do not try to protect them,” King Avalar said to the queen softly, but firmly. “They are true Kierans and can take care of themselves. When the time comes for the elves to fight, I fully expect my daughters to be leading armies of elves. The danger in their lives is something that you must get used to.”

Alahara’s and Alastasia’s eyes widened with surprise, but Queen Alycia bit her lower lip to forestall the tears that were beginning to well up in her eyes. She stared at the princesses for a moment and finally nodded before turning and retreating to her chambers.

Chapter 23

Unfriendly Skies

Myka glided high in the sky over the Island of Darkness while Marak and MistyTrail gazed down at the enemy’s stronghold. The elf and the human were wrapped warmly in cloaks provided by King Avalar to protect them against the chill of high altitudes.

“This gives a new appreciation of what Vand has accomplished,” remarked the Torak. “The harbors are overflowing with ships.”

“And I did not properly imagine the size of the other cities on the island,” added MistyTrail. “They are actually much larger than Vand’s city. I wonder why.”

“I would suspect that the mines and quarries are located towards the sound end of the island,” mused the Torak. “That is where Vand would require the most labor to prepare for the coming war. I wish Captain Mynor had given those cities names. It would help in our planning.”

“They have names,” offered MistyTrail. “Avalar told them to me. He has an incredible amount of knowledge about the island for someone who never left the cells in the temple.”

“Twenty years is a long time to listen to the banter of the jailers without learning something,” shrugged Marak. “What are the names of the cities?”

“The three southern cities are Eldamar, Sudamar, and Teramar, going from east to west,” answered MistyTrail. “The northern city is named Vandamar.”

“I will see that our charts are updated to reflect the names,” responded the Torak. “Without this flight over the island, I would have been tempted to concentrate on learning what is happening in Vandamar, but the real preparation for war would not be taking place there.”

“See where the jungle ends along the beach?” MistyTrail pointed excitedly as Myka flew over the western coast of the island. “That is where we escaped from the island with Eltor and Caldal. You can see the reefs offshore where our boat sunk.”

“We are going to dive shortly,” warned Myka. “The sun is setting, and I want to fly close to the water to avoid being seen in the glow of the sunset. It will be an abrupt dive to limit the amount of time that we are visible. Anyone seeing us will think twice about reporting a dragon diving into the sea. Hang on.”

Marak grabbed his knife and stuck it deep into the hole in the dragon’s scale. MistyTrail wrapped her arms tightly around the Torak, and they waited for the dive.

Myka continued gliding high in the sky until they were well away from the Island of Darkness. Without a word of warning, she pulled her wings in close to her body and plummeted like a rock. The force of the wind threatened to blow Marak off the back of the dragon as he gripped the knife with both hands. The air stung as it whipped his face and arms, and his stomach felt as if it had been left behind high above him. His eyes were closed tightly, and the rushing wind created such a loud noise that he barely heard MistyTrail screaming behind him.

While the dive only took seconds, it felt as if it lasted for hours. Without warning, Myka’s wings flared out, and Marak’s body slammed into the dragon’s back. He almost lost his grip on the knife. The Torak opened his eyes to see the crests of the waves only a few paces below him. He became acutely aware of the ring of pain around his waist and immediately thought of MistyTrail.

“Are you alright?” he asked the elven princess.

“I am now,” panted MistyTrail. “I hope I didn’t break your ribs. I thought I was going to be blown away.”

“You are not alone in that feeling,” Marak replied.

“You did well for your first dive,” quipped Myka. “I feel confident that they did not hear your screams back in Elvangar.”

“We will have to go high again when we reach the coast of the Sakova,” Marak said. “I want to fly over Duran and the Wall of Mermidion.”

“We can fly as high as you want after a while down here close to the water,” answered Myka. “Soon we will be out of sight of the watchers on the Island of Darkness.”

“I don’t want to go too high,” replied Marak. “I want a good look at the empty city. Can we do that without being seen?”

“If the city is empty,” snorted Myka, “how can we be seen?”

“It is supposed to be empty,” explained Emperor Marak. “I am not sure that it is. That is why I want to look at it.”

The dragon did not reply as they skimmed over the ocean waves. Sometime later, after Myka had gradually gained a much higher altitude, MistyTrail tapped Marak on the shoulder and pointed off to the left. Marak looked and could see a landmass on the horizon.

“That is the Sakova,” declared Marak. “If I remember the maps correctly, Alamar is about the closest point of land to the Island of Darkness. We will stay off the coast quite a ways until we get to Duran.”

“Then Duran is not really on the way to StarCity,” frowned MistyTrail. “I know the way there from Alamar and it does not hug the coast.”

“It is out of the way,” agreed Marak. “We could probably reach StarCity just as quickly as Duran, but I have a hunch that I want to check out. Besides, we want to reach StarCity after dark. I am not prepared to let Vand know that a winged warrior is helping us.”

“You think people have moved into Duran?” asked MistyTrail.

“Not people so much,” Marak shook his head. “I think Vand may be using Duran to stockpile supplies. I want to know for sure.”

After a while, they saw the peaks of the Wytung Mountains rising through the clouds gathering over the landmass. The mountain range ran from the center of the Sakova to the coast halfway between Alamar and Duran. It was just on the northern side of that mountain range that the Wall of Mermidion began. The impressive vertical cliffs dropped a thousand feet to the sea, effectively cutting off the coast from the rest of the landmass. In some areas, the beach spread out from the base of the cliffs quite a ways; in other places there was no beach at all; the cliffs actually protruded into the sea.

Marak felt moisture whisk by him and looked up. Heavy clouds raced by directly overhead. A second later, Myka flew into the cloudbank. It felt like being in the midst of deep fog, except they were soaring through it at a frightening speed.

“How can you see where you are going?” the Torak asked Myka.

“The clouds only block my vision,” answered the dragon. “I can also sense things around me. How else could a dragon fly in the dark of night? We will be over Duran shortly. I will try to find a break in the clouds for you to see.”

Without warning, Myka suddenly banked to the left. MistyTrail’s arms immediately wrapped around Marak’s waist, and the Torak’s hands subconsciously reached for the knife. The clouds grew wispier and appeared less solid as the dragon flew in a wide circle. Unexpectedly, they flew out of the clouds and Duran sat below them in full view. The Torak inhaled sharply when he saw the three huge ships sitting in the harbor. Small boats were ferrying goods ashore, and teams of seamen scurried throughout the city, carrying bundles and rolling barrels. It was just a glimpse before the clouds returned to block their view.

“Do you want to see more?” asked Myka.

“I have seen enough,” Marak replied sharply. “Head for StarCity.”

“How could Myka know where StarCity is?” asked MistyTrail. “Its location is a secret.”

“The stronghold of the Sakovans has been around for a thousand years,” chuckled the dragon as she straightened her wings and headed south. “Nothing lasts long as a secret from dragons. Do you think we sleep all of the time in our caves?”

“Actually, I did,” nodded MistyTrail. “I never heard anyone talk about ever seeing a dragon before.”

“And did anyone see us today that was not supposed to?” quipped the winged warrior. “Dragons are only seen when they want to be.”

“Unless people wander into their cave when they are sleeping,” taunted MistyTrail.

“Then they are eaten,” retorted Myka. “Either way no stories are spread.”

The sky grew dark as the sun dropped below the horizon, and eventually the clouds passed away. Brilliant stars illuminated the dark sky as Myka soared high over the uninhabited Sakovan forests. As the mountain peaks rose up to reach the dragon, StarCity suddenly appeared below. Myka’s wings spread wide as she glided silently over the Sakovan stronghold, her head swiveling as she sought a safe landing place.

“Either the roof of the palace or one of the fields at the edge of the city,” suggested MistyTrail. “Those places are normally vacant at night. I think a field would be safer.”

“You learn quickly,” smiled Myka as she glided towards a field at the base of the mountains. “I will not be able to wait here for you, Torak. How shall we meet up?”

“You may return home, Myka,” instructed the Torak. “I can get to Khadoratung quickly through the secret doors. Thank you for bringing us here.”

“I will await your call,” replied the winged warrior as she set down gently in the field. “Be vigilant.”

MistyTrail swiftly slid off the dragon. Marak pulled his knife free from the hole in Myka’s scale and slid down to stand beside the elven princess. Without further words, Myka leaped into the air, hugging the sides of the mountains as she rose into the darkness.

“That is one special creature,” smiled MistyTrail. “You would never know it from listening to Mistake’s tales about her.”

“She is special,” nodded Marak as he began walking towards the palace. “She is one of Kaltara’s winged warriors. Will we be stopped if found in the city?”

“We are both known to the Sakovans,” MistyTrail shook her head. “They will greet us warmly, but word of our arrival will spread quickly.”

“That does not bother me on this trip,” shrugged Marak. “It will tell our enemy nothing.”

“Actually,” grinned MistyTrail, “it could tell them a great deal.”

“How do you mean?” questioned the Torak.

“Everyone will want to know why I have returned,” answered the elven princess. “I can tell them that the elves have decided not to get involved in this war and that I felt I had to return to help the Sakovans fight the evil. I do not have to mention that the elven decision has since been overturned.”

“That is brilliant,” grinned Emperor Marak. “You can be almost as devious as your sister.”

“She has taught me much,” chuckled MistyTrail.

In fact, they met few people on the way to the palace. The evening meal was being served in houses and the palace, and the streets of the city were fairly empty. They made their way to Lyra’s office and walked into the middle of a conversation.

“Marak! MistyTrail!” beamed Lyra. “What a surprise. I am glad to see both of you.”

“Why are you not with the elves?” StarWind asked MistyTrail with concern. “Is there something wrong?”

MistyTrail frowned as she looked at the people in the room. She knew that Ukaro was aware of the problem with spies, but she was not sure about StarWind and Temiker. She decided to play it safe and repeated her line about leaving the elves.

“You are always welcome here, MistyTrail,” smiled Lyra. “Close the door please.”

MistyTrail closed the door and Lyra continued, “Temiker has just arrived from Alamar. I will let him start from the beginning so you can evaluate what he is saying.”

“Do you remember the fisherman in the small village south of Alamar?” Temiker asked MistyTrail.

“Gerock?” asked MistyTrail. “The one you had the boat made up for?”

“Yes,” nodded Temiker. “You and Mistake took his old boat to sail to Fakara, but ended up on the Island of Darkness. He came to see me in Alamar recently. His neighbor had a very strange encounter the other night. He heard a noise outside his home and went to investigate. He remembered nothing, but he awoke in the morning outside on the beach. His boat was missing.”

“Someone stole it?” asked MistyTrail.

“I think so,” nodded Temiker. “Gerock came to me in hopes that I might supply his friend with a boat, but I became very curious about the affair. I went to the village and spoke to Gerock’s friend. I became suspicious that he had been the victim of a mage, so I investigated him magically. I was able to retrieve his memories sufficiently to understand that two men did indeed steal his boat. At least one of them had to be a mage.”

“What is the significance of this?” asked Marak.

“I got an accurate description of his boat and the two thieves,” explained Temiker. “It appears that the two men sailed the boat to Alamar. The next day, one of the men left the harbor in the morning with the boat and has never been seen again.”

“Which leaves one thief in Alamar,” noted StarWind.

“If it were only a thief,” frowned Temiker, “I would not be so concerned. No self-respecting mage would steal a boat to travel up the coast to Alamar. No,” he added adamantly, “the boat was stolen to sneak into the city unquestioned. The fact that only one man left the city means that a spy exists in Alamar. My fear,” Temiker paused and sighed, “is that the mage is the one who remained in Alamar. Remember how the Katana’s body was taken over by an evil mage? We could have a very serious problem here. We have no idea who we can trust.”

StarWind, Ukaro, and Lyra exchanged glances. Ukaro nodded his head affirmatively and StarWind agreed.

“Can I assume from MistyTrail’s presence here that she has been briefed on our problem?” Lyra asked the Torak.

“She is here to help you with it,” nodded Marak.

“Then I see no reason to exclude Temiker,” Lyra decided. “He would not bring us such information if he had indeed been taken over by one of Vand’s mages.”

“So you already know about this?” asked Temiker. “Has the spy been uncovered?”

“No,” Lyra shook her head. “I mean, yes, we know about the spy, but we have no idea who it might be. StarWind was with me in Okata when the report was given to Vand. She is the only Sakovan that I can trust right now. Everyone else is suspect.”

“That is why I thought you could use MistyTrail’s help,” interjected Marak. “What steps have you taken so far?”

“Ukaro has developed a plan to hide our armies,” Lyra replied. “We have called a meeting for later tonight to present a false strategy to everyone. That will cause the spy to send the wrong information to Vand.”

“And gives us a chance to identify the spy,” added StarWind.

“What is the false strategy that you plan to unveil?” asked the Torak.

“We are going to say that we think Zaramilden will be struck next,” answered Lyra. “I will be ordering the bulk of armies to abandon Alamar and mass at Zaramilden. This will cause Vand to show his hand when the attack comes. He will be attacking an empty city.”

“We need to change your new strategy,” frowned Emperor Marak.

“Why?” inquired Ukaro.

“Vand will certainly attack Zaramilden if he thinks it is occupied,” answered the Torak, “but I want him to know that it is deserted. He is positioning supplies in Duran as we speak. That is the reason that the city was attacked so early.”

“Stockpiling supplies?” echoed Lyra. “Why?”

“Because it will be much closer to the fighting than Motanga is,” Marak replied. “He will not have to have convoys of ships crossing the seas while he is busy fighting us. It is a clever move on his part. Duran is so isolated that we would never discover its use. That is why he needs Zaramilden deserted. It is too close to Duran for him to risk having his convoys detected.”

“Are you sure about this?” asked StarWind.

“Positive,” nodded Marak. “There are three ships anchored there right now. They are already unloading supplies. The invasion will start soon.”

“So you plan to station troops in Zaramilden to foil his plan?” asked Temiker. “Is that why you want him to think it is deserted?”

“I am not sure yet what our reaction should be,” admitted Marak, “but we should not lead him to believe that we have massed out troops in Zaramilden. You must unveil a different false strategy.”

“Where else would we move our troops to?” StarWind asked.

“Khadora,” suggested MistyTrail. “Why not tell them that we think that Vand’s attack is geared to toppling the Torak? Marak’s visit today could be an appeal for Sakovan troops.”

“That could work,” Marak nodded. “At least it would make sense to someone like Vand who is always concerned mostly with his own security. It is natural that he would want to strike me the hardest.”

“Isn’t that what he is likely to do?” asked Lyra.

“I don’t know,” shrugged Marak. “We truly have no idea what his strategy is. At this point, that is not the question. First we have to deceive him so that Alamar can be properly defended. It is too close to Motanga for him to ignore it. That is especially true if he is planning on using Duran as a supply depot.”

“We need a plan to watch for the spy after the meeting,” mentioned Ukaro. “The strategy that Lyra unveils will be too important not to immediately transmit it to Vand.”

“You think the spy knows how to use an air tunnel?” asked Lyra.

“I would assume so,” nodded Ukaro. “We already think that they may have learned the spell on the Island of Darkness, but even if they didn’t, a mage in our midst would learn it easily.”

“Plus they would not risk the spy by making him return to Motanga to deliver his news,” added Temiker. “If not an air tunnel, the spy will have some mechanism for transmitting the information without leaving.”

“Finding the spy will not be easy,” frowned StarWind. “After the meeting our people will disperse quickly. There is no way that we can watch everyone.”

“Give them a reason to stay behind,” suggested MistyTrail. “Maybe have a party following the meeting. Most people would stay to enjoy their friends, but the spy would be anxious to get his message off. I think very few people would leave right away.”

“That might work,” StarWind nodded appreciatively. “We all know that we may not make it through this war. This could be the final party before the war begins. No one should be in a hurry to leave.”

“And they will dribble out when they do leave,” nodded Marak. “I think it could work.”

“With the Star’s permission,” offered Ukaro, “I will quickly return home and gather some Chula shaman to help with this effort. All anyone will notice is a larger number of cats around the palace than usual.”

“Have them remain hidden if possible,” nodded Lyra. “My people are aware of the Chula capabilities. They are not stupid.”

“But this spy is not one of your people,” grinned Marak. “He or she only appears to be Sakovan. I would suggest that at the meeting you mention that everyone will have his or her orders tomorrow. When the spy is discovered, he is to be allowed to transmit the false information. Then Lyra can come up with an assignment that will keep the spy busy and away from the action. We do not want Vand to know that we have discovered the spy.”

“I do not like the thought of letting the spy live,” frowned StarWind, “but your point is valid. We can use him to send more false information in the future.”

“Gather your shaman,” Lyra instructed Ukaro. “They can offer prayers to Kaltara while they wait for the meeting to end.”

Ukaro nodded and left the room to head for the temple and the secret door that would eventually lead back to Changragar. Lyra made notes on the points of the new strategy she wanted to explain to her people. The others in the room watched Lyra writing the notes and offered suggestions.

“Don’t forget to tell them about the elves not joining the war,” mentioned MistyTrail.

“Do we really want to share that with Vand?” frowned StarWind.

“We do,” chuckled Marak. “It is a lie. The elves are completely with us. They will strike when Vand expects it the least.”

“Excellent,” grinned Lyra. “My sadness will be profound when I explain that to the audience tonight. I pray that Kaltara will forgive the lies that I am about to speak.”

“You are lying only to your enemy,” countered Emperor Marak. “The rest of your people will know the truth soon.”

* * *

The Sprite glided over the glassy sea, its black sails invisible to anyone along the coast of the Island of Darkness. Captain Mynor gazed skyward and smiled at the cloud cover blocking the stars.

“Just a little while longer and you will be stepping into the jaws of the beast,” he said softly to Fisher.

The spy finished pulling on his red Motangan uniform and turned to the captain for inspection.

“Looks good enough to fool a blind man,” quipped the captain. “There is not enough light to actually see it right now. How it looks in the daytime is what really matters.”

“I just hope it dries by then,” frowned Fisher. “The air feels like rain.”

“You could go ashore naked,” suggested the captain. “I have a wax sack that will keep your uniform dry if you don’t submerge it.”

Fisher stood staring at the bow for a moment and then nodded his head. “An excellent idea,” he replied as he started to strip off the uniform. “Even if it does rain, a uniform soaked with saltwater would be a giveaway.”

The captain nudged the navigator and told him to fetch the waxed sack. The seaman returned quickly and handed the sack to Fisher.

“Are you sure that you can make your way back here tomorrow night?” asked Captain Mynor. “I could come back a second night if you miss the rendezvous.”

“No,” Fisher shook his head. “Tomorrow night for sure. If I do not show, return to Khadora. I will not endanger your ship and your crew by making you come here three nights in a row. How do you know where we are? I cannot even see the shore.”

“We charted this island,” grinned the captain. “I know exactly where I am. In just a minute, we will be coming close to a long sandy point that stretches away from the city. That is where we will drop you off. I am not even going to slow down as we pass the point. You will get ready over the rail and jump when I tell you to.”

“Alright,” nodded Fisher as he carefully tied the wax sack closed.

“Tomorrow night,” continued the captain, “we will sail by the exact same way, only we will be trailing a line in the water. You grab that line as it goes by, and we will pull you in. Can you handle that?”

“I can handle it,” agreed Fisher as he saw palm trees off the port beam. “It is smart not to break the wind in your sails this close to the island. That would be foolish.”

“Aye, lad, it would be,” smiled the captain. “Get over the rail. The point is coming up.”

Chapter 24

To Catch a Spy

The dining hall was packed with Sakovans as everyone sat and listened to Lyra reveal the new strategy that she was going to implement. The crowd verbally showed their disappointment about the elves not joining in the struggle against Vand. MistyTrail felt sorry that her friends were being deceived, but she knew that thousands of lives depended on the spy delivering a false message. The glares that she received from many of the Sakovans hurt her feelings, though.

The Sakovans were surprised to learn that the bulk of the armies were being sent to aid the Khadorans, but most of them accepted that it was logical for Vand to attack Khadora. What caused the crowd to become extremely vocal was Lyra’s statement that Alamar would be abandoned when it was clear that they could no longer halt Vand’s advance.

“You can’t do this,” StormSong yelled loudly from the back of the room. “The people of Alamar have become our brothers and sisters. You can’t just abandon them. It is not right.”

“We are not abandoning them,” insisted Lyra over a roar of jeers. “There will be a noble defense, but let’s be practical about this. Without the bulk of our armies, Alamar cannot be saved.”

“What about our mages?” shouted HawkShadow. “Surely they can halt the advance.”

“The mages will also be going to Khadora,” answered Lyra as she sighed and shook her head. “At least most of them will. They are needed up there.”

Temiker frowned as he watched his niece perform a task that he knew she hated. She had grown to love the Sakovan people, including those who used to be Omungan. Her only pleasure in life seemed to come from making them happy, and now she was intentionally misleading them to the point where they were ready to rebel against her.

“That is unacceptable,” HawkShadow shook his head vigorously. “The citizens of Alamar are Sakovans now. We have all pledged our lives to protecting our brothers and sisters. I formally request leave to help defend Alamar. I will not leave those people to be crushed under Vand’s boot.”

“I am with HawkShadow,” declared SkyDancer. “I offer my life in defense of Alamar.”

“And mine,” added FalconEye. “Let the armies go to Khadora, but I am staying here.”

“I suspect you will find that all of us will stay in Alamar,” shouted StormSong. “Lyra, what has gotten into you? The words you are saying cannot be yours. Rethink your policy.”

Lyra felt the meeting slipping from her grasp. If she allowed the dissent to continue, she would lose the chance to send the disinformation to Vand.

“Quiet,” Lyra shouted sternly as she banged on the table. “I will have quiet.”

The crowd quieted down, but many of the Sakovans stared at Lyra as if they did not know her. They had never heard her shout before, and pounding her fist on the table was just not her style.

“I admire the spirit of everyone in this room,” Lyra said calmly, “but many of you are forgetting something very important. You are forgetting the Scroll of Kaltara.”

Hushed murmurs rippled through the room, as many people knew what was coming next. Lyra never thought she would see the day when she threw this into the faces of the Sakovans, but she knew that she had to.

“Kaltara has anointed me as the Star of Sakova,” Lyra declared. “You know that means that Kaltara has placed his trust in me. There were times before when the Sakovans have turned away from their Star. Are you ready to once again slap Kaltara across the face? Are you now willing to turn your backs on the one sent from God?”

The murmurs continued quietly, but no one rose to speak. Lyra’s eyes scanned the large crowd. Some people glared back at her, but most of them averted their eyes when she looked at them. Lyra felt so ashamed and dirty for doing this to her people, but she could not stop now. When it was over there would be time to cry about how she lost the faith of her people.

“The strategy session is now over,” declared Lyra, “but before you leave this room, I have another announcement. I know that many of you are not happy with my plans. You probably will not feel inclined to an evening of cheer, but there will be a party in this room in just a few minutes. I think it is important that you all have one last good time with your friends and relatives, and tonight is that last chance. One caution, however.”

She saw that she had the group’s attention, but she worried that many would want to leave the party before it started. She didn’t want that to happen.

“I will start issuing final orders to each of you individually in the morning,” Lyra continued, “so do not drink too much. Each of you should be ready to ride out of here at sunup. An assignment list will be posted later this evening with the times that each of you are to report to my office. I will not stay for the party as I think it is best if you enjoy it among yourselves. I know my presence at this time would dampen your spirits. May Kaltara watch over each of you in the coming days.”

The Star of Sakova turned and strode from the room. She barely made the corridor before the tears started streaming down her face. Temiker rushed after her and tried to console her.

“Leave me, Temiker,” urged Lyra. “Your services are desperately needed elsewhere. Please find him for me. I want my people to know the truth.”

Temiker halted as the Star of Sakova hurried to her office. He frowned as half a dozen people left the dining room before the party had even begun. He slowly started following the group out of the palace. When the people started to split up, Temiker made impromptu decisions on which one to follow. Cats appeared out of the shadows and followed some. Temiker ended up following a Sakovan to the Garden of Hope, one of the gardens that occupied the five points of the star that was StarCity. The mage from Alamar followed the Sakovan into the garden. He slid into the shadows and cast an illusion to conceal himself while the Sakovan sat on one of the benches in the garden.

For half an hour the Sakovan sat silently on the stone bench, his head bowed in prayer. No one came or went during that time, and Temiker realized that he had drawn the wrong person. Finally the Sakovan rose and left the garden. Temiker was about to drop the illusion and return to the party to follow another Sakovan, when another Sakovan entered.

The new Sakovan did not bow in prayer, but rather looked around the garden to see if anyone else was around. With no one else in sight, the Sakovan wove an air tunnel. Temiker listened in rapt fascination as the spy began giving a report about the Sakovan plans. The report was thorough and detailed, and uninterrupted by any reply from the other end. The spy’s head swiveled the entire time, as if expecting to be interrupted at any moment, but no one entered the garden. It was as far from the palace as one could get without leaving StarCity.

Temiker let the spy leave the Garden of Hope, keeping his illusion in place for a full half hour before heading to Lyra’s office. When he got there, he found Lyra still crying, her head resting on her crossed arms, which were placed on the desk. He walked over to her and gently placed his hands on her shoulders.

“I have found what you sent me to look for,” he said softly.

Lyra’s head flew up. Her eyes were swollen with tears, but they sparkled with hope. “Who is it?” she demanded to know.

* * *

HawkShadow and SkyDancer approached the assignment board with anxiety. They walked with their arms wrapped around each other and waited patiently for some other Sakovans to move away from the board so that they could see it. As the crowd thinned, the couple moved forward to peer at the listings.

“Good thing we got up early,” commented SkyDancer. “We are in the first group to get our assignments this morning. We better hurry or we will be late.”

“StormSong and FalconEye are with us,” commented HawkShadow. “I hope we are going to Alamar.”

“I still can’t believe that this is happening,” SkyDancer shook her head. “Who would have thought that we would be aiding Khadora instead of the other way around?”

“It makes sense in a way,” shrugged HawkShadow.

SkyDancer looked strangely at HawkShadow and shook her head. “You were so strong last night about opposing this plan,” she stated. “What has changed?”

“She is the Star,” shrugged HawkShadow. “I really think the plan is wrong, but who am I to think that I have all of the answers? If it was open for discussion, I would argue with Lyra all day and night about it, but she halted that discussion. Now I must follow orders. It is that simple.”

As they entered Lyra’s office they found StormSong and FalconEye already there. MistyTrail and Temiker were also there.

“Close the door please, MistyTrail,” ordered Lyra as she looked up at the four Sakovans before her. “You four are the first group to move out. You are being sent to Alamar.”

HawkShadow could not resist a smile at the words.

“Each of you will have a distinct job to perform,” continued Lyra. “SkyDancer, you are to help Temiker gather the mages together. One dozen will be staying in Alamar to help with healing. The rest will be going to Khadoratung. You and Temiker will accompany the mages that are traveling.”

SkyDancer frowned at the mention of travel to Khadora, but she didn’t know yet what HawkShadow would be doing. She hoped that he would be traveling with her.

“FalconEye,” Lyra continued, “you will be taking a boat from Alamar to Zaramilden. You are to supervise the destruction of the dock area. I want every boat in that harbor sunk and the docks destroyed.”

“For what purpose?” asked FalconEye. “The people will need those things after the war.”

“To deny their use to the enemy,” answered Lyra. “All food supplies are to be removed or destroyed. General Papper will have some men there. You may utilize them to accomplish your goal. The idea is to leave nothing behind that the enemy can use.”

FalconEye nodded, and Lyra turned her attention to HawkShadow.

“HawkShadow,” Lyra ordered, “You are to shut down the port of Alamar after FalconEye leaves. He will be on the last ship to sail out of Alamar. Once he has left the harbor, I want holes drilled in the bottom of every ship left in Alamar. Cork the holes for now so that it appears that ships are sailable, but make sure that they are not.”

“Why?” interrupted HawkShadow.

“Because you are going to make it appear as if Alamar is manned by a large force,” smiled Lyra, “when in fact it will not be. You will have the full resources of General Manitow’s army to help you. I want wooden silhouettes of people on the roofs of buildings. I want hundreds of campfires outside the walls as if there were so many soldiers that the city cannot house them all. I want thousands of uniforms drying on lines at any time. Rotate the clothes so it looks real. In short, I want you to create an illusion. When you have it all in place, you will march with General Manitow’s army to Khadora.”

“To Khadoratung?” asked SkyDancer.

The Star of Sakova ignored SkyDancer’s question and looked at StormSong.

“StormSong,” smiled Lyra, “you also have a trip in your future. When we do evacuate Alamar, our remaining forces are going to move south along the coast road. I want you to start outside of Alamar and set up bonfires every thousand paces. General Manitow will provide some men for the labor. I want a series of bonfires all the way to Okata ready to be lit on a moment’s notice.”

“That will takes months,” frowned StormSong. “I am a warrior, not some group leader of laborers.”

“This task requires a warrior,” countered Lyra. “I think the invaders will try to disrupt the process. In any event, that is your task. MistyTrail and Temiker will be accompanying you to Alamar. You should leave StarCity within fifteen minutes. That is all.”

The group of four left the office and closed the door behind them. When he was sure that they were gone, Temiker spoke softly.

“Four good people in that group,” he sighed. “I cannot imagine what they are thinking right now, but it is a credit to them that they are following your orders. The spirit of Kaltara is strong in them.”

“In three of them at least,” frowned Lyra. “I hope they forgive me.”

“They will,” chirped MistyTrail. “Should I have the next group come in?”

“No,” Lyra shook her head. “That was the only group that matters. I will wait for half an hour after you leave before assembling the Sakovans in the dining room again. I will explain to them the deception that I foisted on them last night and explain the reasoning behind it.”

“Is that wise to announce so soon?” asked Temiker.

“We have run out of time,” answered Lyra. “We need to start on the real defense of the Sakova, and I need those people behind me. Make sure that our spy does not get out of line, Temiker. I am counting on you.”

Temiker nodded and opened the door. He left with MistyTrail and closed the door to leave Lyra to herself.

* * *

Fisher found several trails that ran through the jungle to the beach. He could not be sure which trail was the one used by Aakuta, so he began walking past all of them. He walked along the beach from one point fairly close to the city to another point far from the city. When he reached the end, he turned around and walked back. The spy had covered the route over forty times already without seeing anyone, so it surprised him somewhat when a woman appeared on the beach. She was an attractive woman, but she was not what Fisher had hoped to find. He paid no to attention her as he walked by, seemingly deep in thought.

Fisher continued his path to the far point and turned around to retrace his steps. He frowned as he once again approached the woman. He had hoped that she was just out for a morning stroll like he was pretending to be, but she had seated herself on the sand and did not appear anxious to leave. While pretending to be looking out to sea, Fisher caught the woman’s image with his peripheral vision. She was staring at him and frowning. The spy knew that he could not walk the beach the entire day without arousing suspicion, so he planned to make this his last trip. He began to wonder if the whole trip had been a waste. The chance of running into Aakuta now seemed rather weak.

“What are you doing?” demanded the woman.

Fisher glanced at the woman and then looked away, preferring to ignore her on his last pass. The woman had other ideas. She rose from the sand and blocked Fisher’s path.

“I asked you a question,” scowled the woman. “What are you doing on this beach?”

“Why shouldn’t I be here?” Fisher snapped back. “I am not on duty. I feel like walking and being alone with my thoughts. Am I disturbing you?”

The woman was slightly taken aback by Fisher’s reply, but she didn’t move out of his way. She seemed as if she were itching for a fight, and that was something that Fisher could not afford.

“Look,” Fisher said to the woman, “this is my last pass on the beach. I will be gone soon, and you can have the whole beach to yourself. I am just going up to the point and back. Now, if you don’t mind, I want to get back to my walk and my thoughts.”

Fisher stepped around the woman and continued walking. He wanted to turn and look back at her, but he didn’t dare show that much interest in her. He would see her again when he turned around. If there were soldiers with her, he would run in the opposite direction.

Fisher reached the point and turned around. The woman had gone back to sitting in the shade, and he sighed with relief. His eyes drifted up to the towering mountain peaks before him. He knew that somewhere up there was Calitora, a Chula shaman. If strolling the beach looking for Aakuta was no longer an option, he wondered if he could climb the mountain and speak to Calitora. It would be a way to spend the rest of the day without drawing any more attention to himself.

When his eyes returned to the beach, Fisher saw that a black-robed man had joined the woman. He felt a shiver tingle up his spine, as he knew the garb meant that the man was one of Vand’s mages. The spy steeled his nerves and tried to continue walking nonchalantly, but he could feel that he was being watched. When Fisher drew close to the couple, the mage started to approach him. Fisher let a knife slide into his hand, holding his arm slightly behind himself so that it could not be seen.

“Fisher?” exclaimed the man. “What in the world are you doing here?”

Fisher tensed as he turned to face the mage. He saw the woman rise and hurry towards him. The mage’s face was handsome, and Fisher imagined that the man could not walk past a pond without admiring his own reflection.

“You must have me confused with someone else,” Fisher replied, not knowing if he had found Aakuta or someone else who might recognize him.

Fisher began to doubt the wisdom of his mission as he stared into the mage’s eyes for any sign that Aakuta lived within. The mage frowned and then saw Fisher’s eyes focus on the woman. He nodded his head in understanding.

“She is alright,” the mage said. “Come and sit down in the shade. Tell me why you have risked your life to come to Motanga.”

“What is your name?” asked Fisher as the woman arrived and frowned in confusion.

“Xavo,” the man answered.

“I know no one named Xavo,” shrugged Fisher as he tried to walk by the couple.

“Then call me Aakuta,” the mage said softly, “but not too loudly. I am not anxious to die again.”

Fisher froze and spun towards the man, his eyebrows rising in understanding.

“Again?” echoed Fisher. “That explains a lot. Who is the woman?”

“Her name is Lady Mystic,” answered Xavo. “She is Vand’s daughter.”

“And she knows who you are?” whispered Fisher.

“She does,” nodded Xavo. “Come and sit. I will not say that you are safe with us, but Lady Mystic will not cause harm to come to you.”

“Unless you intend to use that knife in your hand,” Lady Mystic said threateningly. “I would advise strongly against that.”

Fisher nodded and slid the knife into its arm sheath. He followed the couple to the shade of a palm tree and sat down on the beach.

“I am hesitant to say what I have come to say in the presence of Vand’s daughter,” admitted Fisher.

“Do not be,” replied Xavo. “She is working with me to do as much damage to Vand as possible. Why have you come?”

“To talk to you,” admitted Fisher. “The last information that you sent has stirred a hornet’s nest. It shows that we need more information than what you have been sending. Just the date of the invasion will not be enough if we cannot discover Vand’s plans.”

“I am not sure that I can get any more information without being discovered,” frowned Xavo. “Vand does not share much, and he trusts no one. That is why Aakuta had to die. Vand uncovered him.”

“Clarvoy is the only one that Vand trusts,” volunteered Lady Mystic. “The spymaster knows everything, but he shares just about as much as Vand himself.”

“That was the reason for the warning I sent,” nodded Xavo. “Only a handful of people were present when Clarvoy spoke to Vand about placing a spy in Lyra’s inner circle. If they found out that someone from this island supplied that information, I would be dead within a day.”

“You have that high an access to Vand?” questioned Fisher.

“I am one of his disciples,” grinned Xavo. “In fact, I got credit for killing Aakuta. That was one of my finer accomplishments.”

“What is it that you need to know?” asked Lady Mystic.

“Everything and anything,” sighed Fisher. “Who the spies are on the mainland? What the overall strategy will be? What is Vand’s goal in all of this? Who is going to the mainland to spy, and how do we identify them?”

“Clarvoy would never mention names,” Lady Mystic shook her head. “He never has, and he never will. Vand would never ask for such information. He is paranoid.”

“Clarvoy goes to the mainland himself quite a bit,” offered Xavo. “In fact, he spends much of his time there. I can tell you one thing that is important. So far the Motangans only know how to use the air tunnel to send messages. They know nothing about equalizing the pressure.”

“That is worth noting,” nodded Fisher. “Incidentally, Rhoda is assigned to you full time now. Her only task is to field your messages, so you can contact her day or night. What about strategic targets on the island that we might want to sabotage? Are there any installations that would cripple Vand’s attack?”

“Vand worries about that,” answered Lady Mystic. “That is why no one ever leaves the island. He does not want any knowledge of Motanga to be in the enemy’s hands. He talked about moving supplies to the mainland before the invasion, just in case the island was attacked after the armies leave.”

“Has that started yet?” asked Fisher.

“That is something that I can find out,” replied Lady Mystic. “While I am no longer allowed into the palace, I know many people on this island. I can find out thousands of small details, like the shipbuilding schedules, storages levels on food and weapons, and which army units are getting ready to move.”

“All of those small details would help immensely,” Fisher nodded encouragingly. “Perhaps you should introduce Lady Mystic to Rhoda,” he suggested. “Both of you can file reports on different levels.”

“I will do that later today,” agreed Xavo. “I have a session this afternoon with Vand and had planned a report to follow it.”

“What will it be about?” asked Fisher.

“One of Clarvoy’s spies sent an important message last night,” replied Xavo. “Vand thought it was important enough to have Clarvoy’s ship turned around. He should be arriving back in the city soon. This afternoon’s session is to hear the report.”

“So Clarvoy is in town,” mused Fisher. “What are the odds of me getting to see what he looks like?”

“That depends on your courage and skill,” frowned Xavo. “I am not sure how much good it would do you. Clarvoy is a master of disguises. How he looks today may not help a bit when you next see him.”

“I will take that chance,” Fisher said eagerly. “Where was he heading?”

“No one ever knows that beforehand,” shrugged Xavo. “He is very secretive.”

“They may not know beforehand,” agreed Lady Mystic, “but today will be an exception. Clarvoy usually does not tell the captain of the ship where he is going until they are at sea, but this captain will already know. I will find out that information for you.”

“Excellent,” smiled Fisher. “Tell me how I get to see this spymaster.”

Chapter 25

Information is King

HawkShadow, SkyDancer, and StormSong stood on the docks of Alamar watching FalconEye’s ship sail out to sea on its way to Zaramilden. MistyTrail stood back a ways watching the three Sakovans.

“I cannot believe that we are destroying these cities,” frowned HawkShadow. “It just feels wrong.”

“You should start drilling your holes,” replied SkyDancer. “I hope you end up in Khadoratung with me. I don’t want to be separated from you for long.”

“At least you two have a chance of being together,” snapped StormSong. “I am going to be on the road for months building stacks of firewood. After all of my years of training, I cannot believe that I am being left out of the fighting. What is wrong with Lyra?”

“Maybe she wants to protect you?” SkyDancer suggested halfheartedly. “Her plan calls for the destruction of Alamar. Anyone defending this city is going to die.”

“Maybe we did something to offend her?” shrugged HawkShadow. “Perhaps these assignments are her form of punishment?”

“Punishment?” balked StormSong. “The three of us are among her most strident supporters. She has to know that each of us would willingly give up our lives for her. If she sent anyone else to do these chores, she would have a mutiny on her hands.”

“Which is exactly why she chose you,” interrupted MistyTrail.

The three Sakovans spun to confront the elven princess.

“What are you talking about?” demanded StormSong. “Are you saying that she chose us because she knew that others would balk at these stupid tasks?”

“Yes,” smiled MistyTrail. “Your devotion is well known to Lyra, and to me. I helped her in the selection process, although I doubted that she needed any help.”

“You will explain yourself, elf,” scowled HawkShadow.

“I am not an elf,” MistyTrail replied automatically. “There are no…”

MistyTrail halted the automatic refrain that she had used with HawkShadow over the years whenever he taunted her about being small like an elf. Her mouth hang open as the irony of her refrain struck her. As angry as HawkShadow was, he could not help himself. He broke out laughing.

“You have learned differently,” smiled SkyDancer. “Haven’t you?”

“I have,” nodded MistyTrail as she blushed vividly. “Come with me to Temiker’s school. I have something very important to reveal to you.”

MistyTrail did not wait for an acknowledgement. She turned and ran to the school with the three Sakovans on her heels. They reached the schoolhouse winded, and Temiker pointed them towards his private office. Confused, but curious, the three Sakovans each took a seat while MistyTrail closed the door. Temiker walked around the desk and sat in his chair while MistyTrail hopped up on the desk and smiled at her three friends.

“You are to completely abandon the tasks that were assigned to you,” declared MistyTrail. “Lyra gave you those tasks to misinform a spy.”

“A spy?” echoed HawkShadow. “What spy?”

“And what about FalconEye?” asked SkyDancer. “He is already on his way to destroy Zaramilden.”

“FalconEye is long dead,” Temiker interjected. “His body was possessed by a Motangan mage.”

“How can you be sure?” asked StormSong. “He acted normal to me.”

“I overheard him the night of the party in StarCity giving away all of the information presented by Lyra at the meeting,” explained Temiker.

“Who was he giving the information to?” asked SkyDancer.

“That I do not know,” shrugged Temiker, “but I can well imagine who was at the other end of the air tunnel.”

“Air tunnel?” questioned HawkShadow. “FalconEye is not even a mage. He could not create an air tunnel.”

“Exactly,” nodded Temiker, “yet he did.”

“Why have we let him go then?” asked StormSong. “He should be killed.”

“He was let go for a reason,” answered MistyTrail. “If he were to die, the Motangans would suspect that the information he sent might be false. I suspect that even as he sails to Zaramilden, he is updating his report with the knowledge about the tasks assigned to the three of you.”

“So,” nodded HawkShadow, “if you are concerned about the Motangans not believing FalconEye’s report, then everything Lyra said the other night was a lie. Is that right?”

“That is correct,” smiled Temiker. “It was all a lie to be reported by FalconEye. Alamar is to be defended strongly. Even before you got here, General Manitow’s men began building catapults to fire at the ships. The armies that have been roving the Sakova in random patterns are now gathering towards this city.”

“And all of that about defending Khadora?” asked SkyDancer. “Am I not going to Khadoratung?”

“You are needed right here,” grinned MistyTrail. “No armies are being sent to Khadora. While the Motangans will be expecting a lightly garrisoned city, they will face the bulk of the Sakovan armies. The silhouettes that they see on the rooftops will not be the wooden ones made by HawkShadow. They will be Sakovan archers.”

“This is more like it,” grinned HawkShadow. “Do the others know about this ruse?”

“They were informed shortly after we left StarCity,” nodded Temiker. “You cannot imagine how hard it was on Lyra to see all of your faces that night. She knew what each of you was thinking. She knew that some of the Sakovans would even hate her for her statements, but she also knew that many lives depended on her deceit.”

“Well, she was certainly good at it,” StormSong said softly. “I am ashamed for ever doubting her.”

“And she is sorry for having to put her people through such a thing,” responded MistyTrail. “That is the reason for my return from Elvangar. We knew that a mage had taken over a body close to Lyra, but we didn’t know who it was. It could have been any of you.”

“Which explains her distance over the past few days,” offered SkyDancer. “I can’t imagine what she went through.”

“What will happen to FalconEye?” asked HawkShadow.

“He will be under General Papper’s command once he reaches Zaramilden,” answered Temiker. “We may use him to report more disinformation for a while, but he will be killed as soon as Alamar is attacked. Vand will discover at that time that the information was false.”

“What do we do now?” asked StormSong.

“There is much to be done,” answered MistyTrail. “General Manitow has the plans for defense of the city. Traps must be laid both on the beaches outside the city and along the streets within the city.”

“So we still expect Alamar to fall?” asked SkyDancer.

“I do not think there was ever a chance that it would not fall to the enemy,” nodded Temiker, “but we are determined to make it painful for Vand’s armies. I have tasks for each of you.”

* * *

The Chula shaman sat in a shadow on the peak of a mountain on the Island of Darkness. He gazed down at the island as his eyes roved over the four major cities one last time before the sun set. Satisfied that there were no threatening movements of troops occurring, Calitora cast a spell that transformed him into a black jaguar. As he did every day at sundown, the jaguar moved out of the shadow and descended from the mountain peak. The large cat angled more to the south than he had on previous occasions. It was time to investigate the southernmost reaches of the island.

The sun set, and darkness claimed the sky long before the jaguar reached the base of the mountain. Calitora eased into the forest, his nose and ears constantly alert as he loped along the forest trails. There were few people in the central forests of Motanga, but krul camps were abundant. The huge ape-like creatures usually avoided large cats, but the shaman was not willing to risk his life to chance. The jaguar took the extra time necessary to avoid the known krul campsites. Within a few hours, Calitora had entered uncharted territory. He slowed his pace as his mind brought up images from his mountain-peak viewpoint. From the vantage point he maintained during the day, the shaman had mentally chosen places that he wanted to investigate at night. Now he had arrived at the first of those places.

The trail widened considerable as the jaguar approached his first destination. Moments later the sounds of men drifted on the air. The jaguar moved off the trail and crept towards the large wooden stockade. As the barricade came into view, the jaguar turned to parallel it, his eyes scanning the ramparts and counting the number of sentries. Stealthily, the cat circumnavigated the compound until he reached the front gates. There he stood unmoving, peering into the stockade at the numerous soldiers within. Calitora tried to estimate the strength of the army within the wooden walls.

An hour later, the jaguar was on his way once again. The second stop was an open pit mine. A large section of the ground had been torn away through the efforts of a large number of slaves. Calitora halted at the edge of the forest and gazed into the massive pit. Near the bottom of the excavation were hundreds of chained people, some elven, some human. Only a handful of red-clad soldiers walked among the sleeping slaves. Calitora’s eyes followed the slope leading out of the pit and saw wooden structures at the top. The buildings appeared to be barracks for the overseers, and Calitora tried to estimate the number of troops before moving on.

The third stop of the night was along the eastern coast of the island. The jaguar moved quietly through a patch of jungle until the sound of the surf intruded on the sounds of the jungle. Following the coast southward, Calitora came to an open stretch of sand. Sitting in the middle of the open stretch was a three-story building. It was a lookout post similar to the ones he had seen on the western coast of the island. Calitora had to know if the post was manned, so he crept out of the jungle and crossed the open area to the side of the building. His nose sniffed the air as he listened intently to the voices coming from within the structure. He could detect three distinct voices, not the four he had expected to hear, but he would assume four sentries in his recordings as all of the other lookouts had held four.

Calitora moved away from the building and reentered the jungle as he continued southward. An hour later he halted outside the city of Eldamar. Clawing his way up a large tree, the jaguar perched on a branch and settled down to view the city. The almost-full moon illuminated Eldamar well, and Calitora was able to get a feel for the Motangan city, but that was not sufficient for the Chula shaman. He scampered out of the tree and transformed once again. Within seconds the jaguar was gone, and a kitten stood in its place.

The kitten darted towards the city and dashed between two widely separated sentries. For the next three hours, the kitten traveled the streets and alleys of Eldamar, ending up near the wharf. Calitora gazed out at the harbor and counted the ships. He knew from his vantage point on the mountain that more ships were anchored offshore, but he could use the number of those in the harbor to estimate the remaining fleet.

The kitten next moved towards the center of the city. When he reached the building that housed the premer, the kitten leaped onto the wall and dropped into the courtyard. He quickly darted into the bushes as two soldiers rounded the corner of the building. The men walked by, talking to one another. The kitten waited a few minutes before continuing onward. The kitten moved alongside the building until he reached the rear corner. Seeing no one in the rear of the property, the kitten jumped up on the rear porch and moved beneath the window.

Voices came out of the window, and Calitora dallied as he listened for anything that might be interesting, but the talk centered on women and stories of other soldiers. With the night steadily wasting away, the kitten moved onward towards the outskirts of the city. Once he reached the forest outside the city, Calitora transformed back into a jaguar for the trip back to the mountains.

Taking a different route back, Calitora was surprised to stumble upon a large army of soldiers marching through the night. The jaguar crouched under a bush as the Motangan soldiers marched by. He remained motionless for over an hour as the men streamed by. He listened to their conversations and learned that they were heading for Teramar, a city on the southwestern coast of the Island of Darkness. He also learned that they were part of the invasion force, and that their march was in preparation for leaving the island. What he did not learn was when they were leaving the island, and where they were going to invade.

When the long column of soldiers had finally passed by, Calitora raced along the trail. The delay caused by the column might cause him to still be on the slopes of the mountain when the sun rose, and that was one thing that he could not afford. The jaguar ran swiftly in a race against time, a race that almost cost the Chula shaman his life.

An hour after seeing the column of troops heading to Teramar, the jaguar stumbled into six soldiers in the forest. The forest that Calitora was traveling through was uninhabited, and he had not expected to find anyone there in the middle of the night, but the soldiers were there, and they saw the jaguar. They already had bows in hand and arrows nocked, and Calitora figured that they were a hunting party, the worst possible group to run into. Arrows flew towards the jaguar as the soldiers stopped, blocking the trail. There was no time for Calitora to alter his course. With a sudden burst of speed, the jaguar launched his body at the closest soldier. Claws raked at human flesh as the jaguar pounced on the man’s shoulders and bounded over him.

The wounded soldier screamed in pain as the others tried to turn around and get a shot off at the large black cat. Several arrows landed close to the jaguar, but luckily none scored a hit. The men chased after Calitora, but the jaguar ran with every ounce of strength that he could muster. A few minutes later their voices faded into the distance. Calitora altered his course in case the men tried to track him. A half hour later he stopped and transformed into a shaman. Remaining in human form for another half hour, Calitora changed his direction again to foil any attempts at tracking. When he reached the rocky slope of the mountains, he transformed back into a jaguar and raced towards the peaks.

By the time Calitora had regained the summit and transformed back into a human, the first lightening of dawn had already arrived. He opened his pack and proceeded to make notes of his findings from the previous night. When the sun peeked over the horizon, Calitora was already fast asleep in the shadows of the peaks.

* * *

“Why are we changing course?” asked Fisher.

“Meliban is just over the horizon,” answered Captain Mynor. “Unless you want us to be seen by the residents of that fine city, we need to head west a bit.”

“Residents?” chuckled Fisher. “The Jiadin infest Meliban now. The rest of the Fakarans have fled towards Angragar. Can we afford the time required to go west before landing?”

“Aye,” nodded the captain. “Those huge behemoths that Vand uses are not very fast across the water. We are hours ahead of Clarvoy. Besides, they will wait until dark to put Clarvoy ashore. They would not want reports of their large ships off the coast to made. You will be ashore and into the city before Clarvoy touches sand beneath his boots.”

“I can ask for no more than that,” Fisher nodded appreciatively as he pulled a red scarf out of his pack and tied it around his neck.

“So you plan to be one of the Jiadin?” questioned the captain as he gazed at the black-clad spy. “Think you can make it believable?”

“I sure hope so,” shrugged Fisher. “I don’t think the Jiadin would look kindly on me if they didn’t believe my disguise.”

Captain Mynor turned the wheel slightly, causing the ship to angle in towards the shore that was not yet visible. Fisher closed his pack and found a dry spot on the deck to stretch out for a nap.

Several hours later, Fisher was awakened by one of the crew. He rose and stretched as he looked at the beach. Not a person was in sight.

“This is as close as we can get you,” offered the captain as he pointed to a spit of land stretching into the sea. “You will have about an hour’s walk once you round that point.”

Fisher nodded and headed towards the bow, which was resting on the beach. He jumped down to the sand and began walking towards Meliban. When he reached the spit of land, he turned around to look. The Sprite was already back at sea, its black sails hardly visible in the waning sunlight.

Fisher spent the next hour walking along the beach and reviewing everything about Meliban and the Jiadin that he knew. He was not overly concerned about being accepted as a Jiadin warrior. The Jiadin were horsemen, and he would draw a lot of attention if he tried to walk through the gates of the city without a horse, but coming along the beach should work well. It would not appear as if he was just arriving in the city, but rather that he was returning from a stroll along the beach.

Dozens of Jiadin were lounging on the beach and sitting on the docks when the city came into view. Several wrestling matches were drawing large crowds, and no one seemed to pay any particular attention to Fisher leaving the beach and heading for the center of the city. Seeing all the red scarves around the city was quite different from the last time Fisher had been to Meliban. On the prior trip the city was still being built and everyone ran around doing something. The Jiadin, however, appeared bored, as if they were out of their element, and Fisher realized that they were. The Jiadin would much rather be riding across the plains attacking something or someone. They were warriors, not city dwellers.

While Fisher walked the streets of Meliban, he tried to figure out the reason for Clarvoy’s visit to the city. That was one thing that Xavo had not been able to ascertain. His mind paused on the reason for Clarvoy’s visit to Alamar, and a chill ran up his back. Fisher wondered what a spy in Meliban would be able to learn for Vand. He immediately decided to talk to the only person in Meliban that he knew anything about, the innkeeper of the Kheri Inn.

Fisher made his way to the Kheri Inn and entered the common room. The room was fairly full and noisy. The spy immediately entered the kitchen and was confronted with a large woman wielding a knife.

“Out!” scowled the woman. “Only workers are allowed back here. Out with you.”

Fisher halted and stared at the woman. She held the knife as if she knew how to use it and was not afraid of spearing a Jiadin or two. He smiled and nodded at her.

“I am looking for Tutman,” Fisher said softly.

The woman’s brow creased in confusion for a moment and then begrudgingly nodded over her shoulder. She turned to the worktable and began hacking the necks off chickens. Fisher moved quickly past the woman before she changed her mind. Off the kitchen was a small office, and the door was open. Fisher saw a man sitting uncomfortably behind a desk, his left leg extended alongside the desk with two boards tied to it. Fisher walked into the office and closed the door. Tutman looked up at the sound of the door closing, concern clearly etched on his face.

“Are you hurt?” asked Fisher.

“What do you think?” snapped Tutman. “Whoever you are, and whatever you want, get out of here. I have had enough for one day.”

“All I want,” Fisher said softly as he continued across the room, “is to talk. I work for Emperor Marak.”

The man’s demeanor changed instantly, although he still looked at Fisher with suspicion.

“What does a Khadoran emperor want with me?” asked Tutman.

“Vand has an interest in Meliban,” declared Fisher. “I am trying to find out what it is.”

“I have no idea,” groused the innkeeper. “Nobody tells me anything.”

“May I look at your leg?” asked Fisher. “It does not appear to be tied well.”

The innkeeper nodded and Fisher knelt next to the desk. He untied the boards and felt the man’s leg. Tutman groaned loudly, but he endured the pain.

“It is broken,” commented Fisher.

“I knew that,” snapped Tutman. “Are you through playing with it?”

“No,” Fisher said as he took the leg in both hands and twisted it.

Tutman howled in pain and the door flew open. The large woman stood in the doorway with her knife and several other women stood behind her.

“It was crooked,” Fisher explained. “If it had been left as it was, you would never have walked again. I set it proper. Now I will tie the boards back. Does it feel better?”

“It does,” Tutman gasped as he nodded. “You are pretty brutal for a healer, son.”

Tutman waved the women back to work, and they closed the door. Fisher tied the boards around the innkeeper’s legs to keep the bone from shifting again.

“Actually,” Fisher said softly, “I am not a healer. I am a spy.”

“A spy?” echoed the innkeeper. “What do you want with me?”

“I think a spy from the Island of Darkness is coming here tonight,” explained Fisher. “I have no idea why. I am hoping that you might be able to think of something. I certainly can’t ask the Jiadin.”

“I can’t imagine a spy accomplishing anything in Meliban,” frowned Tutman. “The Jiadin know less than I do about what is going on, and I don’t know anything. It would be a waste of a trip for anyone to come here.”

“How do you keep in touch with the Astor?” asked Fisher.

“We don’t,” shrugged Tutman. “Once in a while Wyant or one of the tribal leaders comes to town. They give a talk and disappear again. I hope something happens soon. The Jiadin are starting to climb the walls here. They can’t stand being cooped up in the city. They get rowdier with every passing day.”

“Is that what happened to your leg?” asked Fisher.

“Some of the men thought they would have some fun with me,” nodded Tutman. “A big one picked me up and was swinging me over his head. They were wagering which table I might land on when he let go. I didn’t actually land on any table,” frowned Tutman, “but I did bust my leg. The girls broke up the party and carried me into the kitchen.”

“I will contact Rejji and tell him he has a problem brewing here,” offered Fisher, “but I still can’t figure out what Vand wants here. And time is running out.”

“All that I can think of,” mused Tutman, “is the location of Angragar. The Jiadin ask that question every time someone shows up here. It really bothers them that the secret is being withheld from them.”

“Do you know when someone is coming next?” asked Fisher.

“It should be tonight or tomorrow,” answered Tutman. “Someone usually comes on the full moon. It’s none too soon for my tastes. The visits usually tame the Jiadin for a while. That is why today is so bad. It has been a long time since the last visit.”

“Where does the speech take place?” asked Fisher.

“Just up the street,” answered Tutman. “Directly across the street is the administration building. Wyant, or whoever, holds some meetings in there with some of the senior Jiadin. Then they all go to the large park up the street. They give a speech addressing all of the concerns and then they come here for a night’s sleep. The next day they are gone again.”

“Does Wyant stay in the same room each time?” asked Fisher.

“Yes,” nodded Tutman. “He gets the large corner room every time.”

“Can you give me a room next to his?” asked Fisher.

“I can,” frowned Tutman. “Do you think they will try to harm him?”

“I don’t know what to expect,” admitted Fisher. “It is just too much of a coincidence that Clarvoy is coming to Meliban at the same time Wyant is. He either wants to eliminate Wyant or force him to tell the secret of Angragar. Killing Wyant would hardly seem worth the trip. Who does Wyant meet with across the street?”

“There are about a dozen of them,” replied Tutman, “but the ringleader is a big guy by the name of Harmagan. Be cautious around that one. The man is a killer.”

“Is there a back way into the administration building?” asked Fisher. “I want to hear what Wyant says to the Jiadin.”

“There is a back door,” replied Tutman, “but it will be locked. Harmagan and a few others live in the administration building. You can’t get in without them knowing about it.”

“I am not even sure if Wyant is what they are after,” shrugged Fisher. “I think I will walk around the city and see if I notice anything strange.”

“Take your room key,” offered the innkeeper as he pulled a key out of his desk drawer and handed it to Fisher. “There will be no charge the first night. I appreciate the healing you did.”

“Thank you,” smiled Fisher. “Keep off that leg, and it will heal just fine now.”

Chapter 26

Scarab

Fisher left the Kheri Inn and walked to the park where the speech would be given. A knife fight had drawn a large crowd, and dozens of Jiadin were cheering for their favorite fighter. The noise was deafening. Fisher turned and left the park and headed down a narrow alleyway that passed behind the administration building. The back door to the building may have been unlocked, but it hardly mattered. Two mean looking Jiadin stood outside the back door with swords drawn. They glared at Fisher as if daring him to approach. The spy walked quickly by the doorway and did not look back.

At the mouth of the alleyway, another crowd of Jiadin were gathered. Two groups of warriors appeared to be squaring off against each other. Swords were drawn and insults were being thrown with abandon. As Fisher tried to exit the alley and move past the crowd, one of the Jiadin pivoted, his sword pointing towards Fisher’s chest. Fisher immediately backpedaled into the alley to avoid being sucked into the brewing fight.

As Fisher turned around and headed back along the alley towards the park, he saw the two guards in the distance. He stopped walking and leaned against the wall in the darkness. He was finding nothing out and walking around Meliban was dangerous, and not because he was a spy. It was just a dangerous city to walk around at night. He sighed with frustration and moved into a small alcove between the buildings, dropping to ground to sit with his back against the building. He closed his eyes and tried to shut out the distant shouting so that he could concentrate and think of some reason for Clarvoy to travel to Meliban.

A noise forced Fisher to open his eyes, but it was not the loud noise of boisterous shouting. It was the soft click of a single person’s footsteps. Fisher gazed into the dimly lit alley, the only light coming from the full moon high overhead. He heard the footsteps coming closer. Fisher was not sure what intrigued him about the sound of footsteps in the alley, but he held his breath as they came closer. A figure walked past the small alcove, and Fisher nearly gasped. The man was out of sight within a second, but Fisher was sure that he had recognized the Jiadin warrior. What bothered Fisher about recognizing the man is that he was positive that Brakas was already dead.

Fisher rose slowly from the ground in the alcove and crept to the corner of the alleyway. He peered around the corner at the Jiadin warrior walking along the alley towards the park. Brakas stopped near the two guards stationed behind the administration building. The three men exchanged words, but it was too far for Fisher to hear what was said. Fisher was about to ease out of the alcove and follow Brakas when the two guards ushered the Jiadin warrior into the administration building. Fisher frowned as he heard the door slam and a bolt thrown to lock it.

While he might not find out why Clarvoy was coming to Meliban, Fisher knew that following Brakas could lead to important information. He immediately dismissed his thoughts of Clarvoy and looked upward to find a way onto the roof of the administration building. His eyes followed the roofline until they came back to the alcove. Seeing that the buildings were connected, Fisher entered the alcove again and peered upward. He had not brought any rope with him, but the alcove was narrow. His eyes peered into the darkness for a handhold to begin his climb. Wedging one foot on each wall, Fisher reached up and grabbed an indentation in the wood. His fingertips ached as he moved his feet higher and looked for the next imperfection in the wooden walls.

It took Fisher much longer than he cared to spend to climb to the roof, but he had no other choice. His fingertips were raw and bleeding from wood slivers that had pricked his skin. Fisher wiped the blood on his clothes and ignored the pain. He walked cautiously along the roof of the administration building, placing each step with care. His eyes scanned the roof for any type of hatch that might allow access into the building, but he could not find one.

Fisher sighed noiselessly as he realized that he was missing a valuable conversation. He moved to the edge of the roof and stared down. There were several windows on the second level of the administration building. As far as Fisher could see, they were the only way that he could gain entrance to the building. He chose a window at random and leaned over the edge of the roof above it. He could barely see into the dark room, but he sensed nothing moving in it. Fisher straightened up and removed his pack. He pulled a knife and cut the straps from the pack and tied them together.

There was a small wooden beam that ran along the edge of the roof. Fisher laid one end of the strap over the beam and jabbed his knife through it. With all of his might, he pushed the knife as deep as he could into the beam. He tied a not in the strap where the blade had slit it so that it would not continue ripping. When he was done, Fisher lowered his body over the side of the roof, just above the chosen window. Hanging from the wooden beam, Fisher reached out and carefully griped the strap, hoping that it could hold his weight.

When Fisher let go of the roof with his second hand, he heard the fabric of the strap start to rip. For a few terrorizing seconds, Fisher hung immobile. The strap held and Fisher exhaled slowly. Very slowly, Fisher lowered himself on the hanging strap. When he was at the right altitude to enter the window, he stretched out one foot to snare the window ledge. Pulling with his foot, Fisher managed to get his second foot in the window before the strap snapped. His hands immediately let go of the strap and flew out to grasp the window frame. He caught the frame with one hand and pulled hard. His body tumbled through the window.

Fisher half expected to slam into the floor, notifying the whole building of his entrance. As luck would have it, the Jiadin who occupied the room had moved his bed under the window. Fisher landed on the bed with minimal noise. He immediately sprang from the bed and placed his back to the wall beside the door, a knife automatically sliding into his hand.

When no one came in response to the noise, Fisher put his ear to the door. He could hear faint voices, but nothing else. He decided to risk opening the door. The spy eased the door open and peered out. The corridor was dark, as the evening torches had not been lit yet. He slipped out of the room, silently closing the door behind him.

Fisher tiptoed along the corridor until he reached the stairs leading down. The voices became louder, and light from the first floor spread upward to paint the stairs a ghostly yellow. Fisher dropped to the floor and crawled forward so he could peer down the steps. He stared in fascination as Brakas stood talking to half a dozen Jiadin. One particularly large man was standing toe to toe with Brakas. They appeared to be arguing.

“Why don’t you try listening for a change, Harmagan,” shouted Brakas. “Do you want to spend the rest of your life in this hole of a city?”

“Don’t push me, Brakas,” the large man retorted. “Meliban might not be much, but right now it is my city, not yours. If you don’t like the way things are going around here, just keep on moving. You already have enough Jiadin dead on your watch. That fiasco in Khadora cost us many fine warriors.”

“How many times do I have to go through this,” scowled Brakas. “What happened in Khadora was not my fault. The person who portrayed me was a fake. I don’t know how he did it, but I wasn’t even there.”

“Look,” interrupted another Jiadin warrior, “this arguing doesn’t do anything for any of us. Khadora is ancient history. Why don’t you tell us why you have come here, Brakas? Then we can be about the business of doing nothing for a while.”

“Alright,” Brakas sighed. “I actually came to help you guys. There is no reason that Jiadin warriors should be forced to live in some wooden city when the riches of Angragar are available.”

“And you know where Angragar is?” taunted Harmagan.

“If I knew,” Brakas shook his head, “would I be standing here now?”

“Then what is the point of flapping your gums?” spat Harmagan. “We don’t know where it is either.”

“But Wyant does,” smiled Brakas. “And he is coming here tonight or tomorrow.”

“Wyant wouldn’t give us the correct phase of the moon,” Harmagan shook his head. “We have asked him a thousand times already. He just won’t say.”

“Perhaps you haven’t asked him properly,” smirked Brakas. “You said this was your city. How can you let Wyant come and go as he pleases without answering a simple question?”

“Are you insane?” asked Harmagan. “You are proposing that we try to force Wyant to reveal where Angragar is? Are you trying to get us all killed?”

“Wyant is going to kill all of you?” balked Brakas. “You men are no longer Jiadin warriors. You are all clova. You sit around this city all day being fattened up for the kill. You are all a herd of clova.”

Harmagan’s face turned red with rage, his features contorting as his hand went for his sword. Brakas swiftly stepped close to the large Jiadin and grabbed him by the shoulder. Harmagan’s face turned from rage to fear as his body began to spasm. His fingers fell away from the hilt of his sword as his arms began to twitch uncontrollably. Suddenly, Harmagan fell to the floor and curled into a ball, his lips quivering as he sobbed.

“Don’t ever think about pulling a sword on me again,” snarled Brakas. “I will not stand for it.”

The other Jiadin warriors backed away from Brakas, but their hands were conspicuously held away from their swords.

Brakas sighed and shook his head as he looked at the other Jiadin warriors.

“It looks like I will have to do this on my own,” Brakas declared. “Don’t mention to Wyant that I am in town when he arrives. I will find out the location of Angragar before he leaves Meliban. The rest of you should start preparing the men for a long ride. Go on! Get out and start getting your men sober.”

The Jiadin warriors fled the administration building through the front door. Brakas stood for a moment staring at Harmagan who was still curled up on the floor. Brakas shook his head and spat on the Jiadin leader before exiting the building. Fisher stared at Brakas as the man left the building. There were several things about Brakas that bothered Fisher. The story he told about being impersonated didn’t make sense. Aakuta had declared that he had killed Brakas, and Fisher believed the dark mage.

What bothered Fisher even more was the weird angle of Brakas’s left hand when he stood normally. Most people’s palms face their legs when their arms hang at their sides. Brakas’s left palm faced forward. By a strange coincidence, the only other person that Fisher knew with such an abnormality was the spy that he had seen just recently on the Island of Darkness. It was the only thing extraordinary that Fisher had noticed about Clarvoy.

Now that Fisher knew what Clarvoy was up to, he had to find a way out of the administration building, and a way to foil the spy’s plan. Fisher was not prepared to jump from the second story window into the alley. That meant that his only exit was down the stairs, and that would force him to walk right in front of Harmagan. Fisher thought about his situation for a moment and then rose from the floor. He walked normally down the stairs and in front of Harmagan.

The Jiadin leader’s eyes opened in alarm when Fisher walked by, but he said nothing, the shock to his body still gripping him. Fisher searched the lower floor and found the kitchen. He rummaged through the supplies and found a loaf of crusty bread and a barrel of ale. He broke off a large chuck of bread and filled a mug with ale. He carried the food into the main room and knelt beside Harmagan.

“Bite the bread,” instructed Fisher as he pried the Jiadin’s mouth open and shoved a corner of the bread into his mouth. “Try not to think about the pain. It will go away.”

Harmagan’s eyes looked confused, but he bit down on the bread. Fisher grabbed the Jiadin’s legs and pulled them to straighten the man’s body.

“Chew it slowly,” advised Fisher. “Just concentrate on chewing the bread. Think of nothing else.”

The Jiadin leader closed his eyes, but Fisher could see the man starting to chew. After a few moments, Fisher noticed the man’s muscles cease quivering. Harmagan opened his eyes and stared at Fisher.

“I have a mug of ale here,” declared Fisher. “It will help you if you can stand to drink it yet. Do you want it?”

Harmagan nodded and bit off a chunk of bread. Fisher helped the Jiadin into a sitting position and handed him the mug of ale. The Jiadin continued to stare at the spy.

“Who are you?” the Jiadin finally asked. “I have never seen you before.”

“No one who seeks to harm you,” Fisher answered mysteriously. “I am just trying to save your life.”

“I would have died?” questioned the Jiadin leader.

“You might have,” nodded Fisher. “Your body started to shut down from the shock. In a few moments you would have lost consciousness. Whether you ever woke up from it or not…”

“I will kill Brakas for this,” snarled the Jiadin.

“I would not advise it,” Fisher shook his head. “At least not alone.”

“Do not insult me,” snapped Harmagan. “He just caught me off guard before. If you say otherwise to anyone, I will kill you, too.”

“You are in no condition to kill anyone right now,” sighed Fisher. “And do not worry about me talking to anyone. Besides, my words were not meant to taunt you. The man that you call Brakas, is not who he claims to be. Brakas is dead.”

Harmagan’s eyes clouded with confusion. He sipped the ale and then nodded.

“I had heard that he died,” Harmagan said, “but Brakas claims that that was an imposter.”

“This Brakas is the imposter,” stated Fisher. “Brakas never knew any magic. How do you explain his attack on you? If that was not magic, what was it?”

“Your words make sense,” nodded Harmagan, “but I don’t know you. You could be a spy for all I know.”

“What or who I am is of little importance to you at the moment,” replied Fisher. “Be thankful that I was here to save your life.”

“Well, be useful,” scowled Harmagan. “Go out and rally my men. I want Brakas dead and his head brought before me.”

“They won’t be able to find him,” replied Fisher, as he finally understood how Clarvoy managed to move at ease on the mainland. He did not use disguises per se. He used illusions to portray others. “The man is a mage, Harmagan. He will change his looks now. He could be anyone. He could be among the very men you order to find Brakas. Do you really want him to attack you again?”

Harmagan shuddered at the thought. He swallowed the last piece of bread and drained the cup of ale. “Help me to my feet,” he ordered.

Fisher complied and helped the Jiadin leader stand up. Harmagan took a couple of cautious steps and nodded triumphantly.

“At least I can still walk,” he sighed. “What am I supposed to do then if I can’t find this wizard?”

“The only thing that you can do is to safeguard Wyant when he arrives,” replied Fisher. “If someone tries to attack Wyant, you will know who it is. Then you can have your men kill him.”

“You are clever,” grinned Harmagan, “but you are not Jiadin, are you?”

“Today, I am Jiadin,” smiled Fisher. “Tomorrow, who knows? What does it matter? You know that I mean you no harm.”

“I guess it doesn’t matter much,” conceded Harmagan. “The Jiadin are no longer what we used to be. That much Brakas had right. We have become clova to be fattened up for slaughter.”

“No, my friend,” smiled Fisher. “The Jiadin will ride again, and soon. The Time of Cleansing is coming, and a million enemies are coming with it.”

“You believe in that nonsense?” frowned Harmagan. “No one can put a million men together.”

“I believe it,” nodded Fisher. “I have seen parts of the armies coming to attack us. The Jiadin’s mettle will be tested. Your men should be making ready. This war will not be for clova.”

“I hope you are right,” grinned Harmagan. “Even if you aren’t right, I like your words. What should I call you?”

“Call me Scarab,” chuckled Fisher, “and I think you truly know that my words are true. You just abhor the waiting like any good warrior does.”

“Well, Scarab,” Harmagan asked, “do you know where Angragar is?”

“I do,” nodded Fisher, “but you know that I will not tell you. Why are you so anxious to know?”

“Why?” frowned Harmagan. “Why do I want to know where the lost city of riches is? You can’t be serious?”

“Oh,” smiled Fisher, “but I am. The riches of Angragar are not the type of riches that would interest you or your men. The riches that are spoken of are spiritual in nature. You cannot spend them. Besides, the Free Tribes inhabit Angragar. Would you truly lead your men against them?”

“No gold?” frowned the Jiadin leader. “You are lying to me.”

“For what purpose?” posed Fisher. “If there was any gold there, would not the Free Tribes have already taken it? The one you call Brakas is interested in Angragar for an entirely different reason. He is part of the evil that is coming to invade this land. He seeks Angragar so that Vand’s armies can plot its destruction. The rumors of gold and treasure that he spreads gains the cooperation of a hundred thousand Jiadin who dream of the spoils. Think about it, Harmagan. Is there any doubt in your mind that Brakas was trying to use you and your men?”

“The Jiadin have been used by everyone,” sighed Harmagan. “We tire of it.”

“Not entirely true,” retorted Fisher. “You have been manipulated by Vand’s people over and over again. It is always the same people pulling your puppet strings. Grulak was the first. Zygor and Brakas were the last. You may think the Khadoran lords used you, but Zygor and Brakas were behind that whole plot.”

“What about Rejji?” asked Harmagan. “Isn’t he using us now?”

“Is he?” asked Fisher. “Look around you. Is Rejji making you stay here? He is trying to rally you to fight the evil, but isn’t that in your own best interests? The Jiadin will be exterminated just as quickly as the Free Tribes when Vand’s armies invade. All he is trying to do is to get you all working together. I don’t categorize that as using you.”

“You make a lot of sense, Scarab,” replied Harmagan. “I just wish that I could believe your words. The Jiadin would join with any tribe that stood for defending Fakara from outsiders. I just can’t believe in this evil army that everyone says is coming.”

“What will it take to get you to believe it?” asked Fisher. “Do you want me to take you to the Island of Darkness and drop you off? That would certainly prove it to you. Unfortunately, you would be dead after just a few moments of belief. That wouldn’t do any of us any good.”

“I just want an enemy for my people to attack,” Harmagan sighed with frustration. “Can you give me that?”

“It won’t be long now,” promised Fisher. “Already the city of Duran has been destroyed.”

“Duran?” asked Harmagan. “Where is that?”

“It is a city in the Sakova,” answered Fisher. “Thousands of people were slaughtered. Every man, woman, and child was killed.”

“Women, too?” frowned Harmagan. “Surely they took them hostage?”

“The Motangans want no hostages,” Fisher shook his head. “They plan to annihilate every living person.”

“The Sakova is far away,” Harmagan shrugged after a few moments of silence. “A war there means nothing to the Jiadin.”

“Really?” retorted Fisher. “Meliban is no farther from the Island of Darkness than Duran. You could be next to be invaded.”

“Who knows about the destruction of Duran?” asked the Jiadin leader.

“I thought everyone knew,” shrugged Fisher. “It happened some time ago. It is thought to have been a trial run to see how our armies react. The real invasion is close at hand.”

“I will ask Wyant when he arrives,” stated Harmagan. “If he confirms what you have said about Duran, I will finally believe the stories of the coming war.”

“Fair enough,” smiled Fisher. “When is he due to arrive?”

Just then, several Jiadin burst through the front door. They slid to a halt and looked around the room.

“Where is Brakas?” asked one of the men.

“He is gone,” answered Harmagan. “Why do you want him?”

“Wyant is in town,” answered the warrior. “We want to be there when Brakas makes him tell us where Angragar is.”

“Brakas left town,” Harmagan stated. “Have every group commander report here immediately. I want them all here before Wyant arrives in this building. Is that clear?”

The men nodded and ran out of the building. Fisher moved to leave as well, but Harmagan called to him.

“Where are you going, Scarab?” he asked.

“To get lost in the darkness,” Fisher replied. “I am not one who cares for the light. I have to find out where Brakas has gone.”

“Stay, fellow Jiadin,” smiled Harmagan. “I don’t want you out of my sight before Wyant arrives. I want his answer to the question about Duran to honest.”

“I will promise not to speak to Wyant,” countered Fisher. “I really must go.”

“You don’t want to be seen by Wyant,” Harmagan grinned. “And here I thought you were working for him and the Free Tribes. Would he recognize you by sight?”

“No,” Fisher replied. “My duties require that few people know me. Your men would probably recognize that I am not a Jiadin and that would call attention to me. That is attention that I cannot afford.”

“Put your mind at rest,” grinned Harmagan. “Few who call themselves Jiadin today are really from the original Jiadin tribe. Most of the current Jiadin joined under Grulak. In fact, most of my original kinsmen are long dead. I will introduce you as Scarab, my long lost brother.”

Fisher thought about the value of having a validated Jiadin identity. He knew that it could be valuable one day.

“Why would you do this for me?” asked Fisher. “You must know by now that I am a spy. Why open up the entire Jiadin tribe to my snooping?”

“Because I like you,” grinned Harmagan. “You not only saved my life, but you have been open and truthful to me. Besides, I do not fear anything that you might find out snooping on the Jiadin. Stay and listen to Wyant. Afterwards you can give me your thoughts on what he says.”

“You want me here to validate what Wyant says,” laughed Fisher.

“You are quick, little brother,” grinned Harmagan. “If Wyant confirms your words about Duran, then I can believe everything you say. Seeing as I can believe you, I will ask you what you think about what Wyant tries to feed us. In the end, we will all have the truth.”

“I will stay,” smiled Fisher. “I do not have to know Wyant well to know that he will tell you the truth. Rejji would not have it any other way.”

Chapter 27

The Jiadin Tribe

Jiadin warriors started pouring into the administration building. Some of them glanced questioningly at Fisher, but no one actually challenged his right to be there. When all of the leaders had assembled, Harmagan ordered the door closed.

“I want to talk to all of you before Wyant gets here,” Harmagan began. “Most of you probably heard that Brakas is back in town and urging us to make Wyant mention the location of Angragar. As far as the Jiadin are concerned for now, let Brakas ask Wyant what he wants to. What we are interested in is much different. We want to know when we can get out of this city and kill something.”

The Jiadin cheered and raised their fists in the air. Harmagan grinned and waited for the commotion to die down.

“Not sure if any of you remember him,” Harmagan said as he put his arm around Fisher, “but this is my little brother, Scarab. You old timers will remember him for sure, but not you young pups.”

Amazingly, some of the older Jiadin professed to remember Scarab. Fisher figured that they were either drunk and couldn’t see, or they wanted to act as if they were founding fathers of the Jiadin clan and remembered everyone. In the end it didn’t matter much. Scarab was enthusiastically welcomed by the Jiadin leaders.

“Scarab here has brought me some disturbing news,” Harmagan frowned as he regained everyone’s attention. “It appears that there is a plot to kill Wyant. Now, we all know that no good will come to the Jiadin if that happens.”

“Does this have to do with Brakas?” asked one of the men.

“No,” Harmagan shook his head. “As I said, Brakas has already left the city. No, this is some type of scheme to kill Wyant and blame the death on the Jiadin. We can’t let that happen.”

“What scum would do such a thing?” one of the men shouted angrily.

“Let’s not worry about the who for now,” replied Harmagan. “I want each of you to be responsible for Wyant’s safety while he in our city. What happens to him after he leaves here is not our concern, but that man will not die in Meliban. Everyone clear on this?”

The Jiadin leaders all acknowledged their understanding about Wyant’s protection. Harmagan was pleased and opened the floor for discussion on what they wanted to talk to Wyant about. Scarab listened to the Jiadin complaints, which centered mostly on the inactivity of being cooped up in the city, but his mind was on Clarvoy. He wondered what the evil mage had up his sleeve, and who he would look like next.

The door to the administration building opened and Wyant entered with a group of six Jiadin warriors surrounding him. Harmagan and the other leaders greeted Wyant while Fisher tried to fade into the background. Fisher had been in Angragar at least once while Wyant was there. Although they had never been introduced to each other, Fisher was slightly concerned that Wyant would recognize him and inadvertently expose him. The spy’s fears were overblown. Harmagan grabbed Fisher by the shoulder and pulled him forward to meet Wyant. The Marshal of Fakara nodded as Harmagan introduced Scarab, his younger brother.

“Have there been troubles in Meliban?” Wyant opened the discussion.

“Little outside the normal problems,” shrugged Harmagan. “The men are tired of being held in this city. When can we leave?”

“Soon,” answered Wyant. “Very soon. I was asking about troubles because you seem to have afforded me an escort on this visit to the city. Why?”

“The men have been rowdy lately,” smiled Harmagan. “I wouldn’t want to see you hurt. Does the protection bother you?”

“No,” frowned Wyant. “I just sense that there is more to the story than you are telling me.”

“Well,” shrugged Harmagan, “that is all there is to it. Tell us what is new in this supposed war we keep hearing about. I have to tell you that many of the men are beginning to doubt that there will be a war.”

“Oh, the war is coming,” stressed Wyant, “and much sooner than we had thought. Already the enemy has destroyed a city down south. The full invasion cannot be far off.”

Harmagan shot a glance at Scarab as he addressed Wyant. “What city was destroyed?” he asked.

“A Sakovan city,” Wyant replied. “You probably never heard of it. It was called Duran.”

“Duran?” echoed the Jiadin leader. “I think that I have heard of it recently. Were the city defenders beaten badly?”

“Beaten?” Wyant frowned heavily. “They were utterly destroyed. It was not a fight; it was a slaughter. I am not talking about a city like Meliban that is filled with Jiadin warriors. Duran was a farming and fishing city. The Motangans literally killed every living thing in the city. You do not understand what we are facing, Harmagan. These Motangans have no use for prisoners. They already hold thousands and thousands of slaves on the Island of Darkness. They have no need for more slaves, nor will prisoners have any value in negotiations, because there will be no negotiations. This coming war is a fight to the death. Either our civilization wins, or theirs does. There will be no in between.”

The assembled Jiadin leaders glanced at one another in silence. Finally, Harmagan broke the quiet.

“You must explain this to all of the men in the park tonight,” Harmagan demanded. “I also think the Jiadin should be returned to the plains and the mountains. We are not a defending army. Our strength lies in the swift attack on slow moving armies. Our talents are wasted in Meliban.”

Wyant stared at his old foes and suddenly saw them in a new light. His main focus as Marshal of Fakara had been to avoid fighting the Jiadin. Segregating them in Meliban and Taggot had solved that problem, but now he saw that he was wasting a valuable resource, if they could be trusted.

“I am willing to talk about a change in duties for the Jiadin,” offered Wyant, “but I cannot allow the lawlessness that existed in the past to reoccur. How can I be assured that the Jiadin will fight the same war that the Free Tribes are fighting?”

Harmagan fell silent for a moment as he tried to figure out how to answer the question. The other Jiadin leaders looked on in confusion. They were not quite sure what Harmagan was trying to accomplish.

“There is no easy answer to your question,” Harmagan finally replied. “The Jiadin have been very deceitful lately, but they have also been deceived by others. Truth has become elusive for all of us. What I can tell you is that the Jiadin were once valiant warriors, before the time of Grulak. Unlike many of the present day Jiadin, I was born with a red scarf. That honor still runs through my veins. If what you are saying about the Motangans is true, and I now believe it to be true, I will offer up my life in the defense of our homeland. No foreign army has the right to march through the Land of the Tribes. All I am asking of King Rejji and the Free Tribes is the chance to fight like a warrior, to die like a warrior, with honor.”

Wyant stared at the Jiadin leader for a few moments before nodding. “The Jiadin are one of the tribes,” Wyant conceded. “No one has the right to deny them the option of fighting for Fakara, but our only chance of survival rests in the coordination of efforts. To win this war, we must fight together. Otherwise, we will all die. Are the Jiadin capable of putting their rebellion behind them and rejoining the Free Tribes?”

Harmagan turned abruptly and walked to the fireplace. He picked up a piece of charcoal and carried it back to the table. While the other leaders watched, Harmagan tore off his red scarf and firmly rubbed the charcoal across it to create a black diagonal stripe.

“This is my answer to you, Marshal of Fakara,” Harmagan said loudly. “Let any Jiadin who will unite with the Free Tribes to battle the infidels mark his scarf in this manner. This will be the mark of the Jiadin of the Free Tribes.”

The other Jiadin leaders appeared frozen, each afraid to be the first to commit to a drastic change to the only life they had ever known. Harmagan’s statement was clear to all of them. To accept the black stripe was to put behind them the hatred and animosity of the other tribes that had driven the Jiadin for so long. It was a commitment that could not be reversed, for they would be placing themselves directly under the rule of the other tribes. Any rebellion would not only be crushed by the Free Tribes, but by the other converted Jiadin.

While the room stood silent and frozen, Scarab walked to the table. Everyone’s eyes focused on him as he tore off his scarf and grabbed the charcoal.

“Harmagan is right about this,” Scarab said loudly. “We have been outcasts long enough. It has gained us nothing. Over the years tribal alliances have come and gone, but this time is different. We are fighting an enemy that wants us all dead. I would rather ride alongside my former enemies than die like a rodent in a trapped box. The Jiadin rebellion is dead!” he added as he rubbed the charcoal across his red scarf.

The other Jiadin leaders watched the display, their eyes large as they listened to what could only be called a call to war. When Scarab was done, the other leaders cheered and shouted insults to the Motangans. One by one the leaders removed their scarves and created black stripes across them. When they were all done, Wyant smiled and nodded.

“Welcome home,” grinned the Marshal of Fakara.

“You have us on your side, Wyant,” declared Harmagan, “but there are many more Jiadin who wear the red scarf unadorned. Your speech tonight must convince them to accept the stripe. We are giving you our loyalty. Show us that it is not mistaken.”

“I will do more than that,” promised Wyant. “Help me win over your men tonight, and I will give orders to evacuate Meliban. The Jiadin will be returned to the wilds. Food and supplies will still be delivered to specified places at specified times.”

“What of Meliban?” asked Scarab.

“It is only wood and stone,” shrugged Wyant. “We built it once; we will build again when the Motangans’ blood has drained from their bodies.”

“One more gesture is in order,” stated Scarab. “Many of the Jiadin believe that Angragar is a city of gold and spoils. They believe that the Free Tribes are hoarding it for themselves. As a show of good faith, I think you should take some of the leaders to see it for themselves. That will prove once and for all that King Rejji is dealing honestly with the Jiadin.”

Wyant stared at Scarab for several moments before nodded.

“Done,” agreed Wyant. “I will take six men with me to Angragar. It will be up to the Jiadin to select the men. Talk it over. I am going to the park to await the rest of your people.”

The Marshal of Fakara left the administration building. The leaders of the Jiadin grinned and congratulated each other after he had left. After all of the years of division, they felt good about returning to the tribes. Many of them slapped Harmagan on the back. One of them even dragged Scarab into the circle and spoke loudly.

“I say that Scarab should be one of those who goes to Angragar,” he proclaimed. “I never thought that I would live to see anyone enter the fabled city.”

Scarab grinned but shook his head. “I will not go,” he announced. “I hold no illusions about Angragar. I never believed those old tales about gold and riches. No, let six of you go. I must leave the city in the morning anyway. I will continue my search for friends lost in the wars in Khadora.”

* * *

Fisher lurked around the edges of the large gathering overflowing the park. He tuned out Wyant’s speech and the speeches given by the Jiadin leaders. His eyes continually scanned the crowd, hoping to catch sight of a Jiadin with Clarvoy’s deformity, but he could not find the Motangan spy. He had been hoping, when he made the suggestion about visiting Angragar, that Clarvoy would find a way to be included in the six. That now appeared to be Fisher’s last chance to snare Clarvoy.

The meeting disbanded with loud shouting and cheering. Boisterous insults regarding Motangans flowed down every street as the Jiadin rejoiced the decision to abandon Meliban. Fisher watched Wyant leave the park and retire to the Kheri Inn. The Marshal of Fakara appeared weary as he passed through the common room and ascended the stairs. He did not even bother with the evening meal.

Fisher halted in the common room and gazed at the customers. Most of the Jiadin in the room were eating, which made looking for the deformity difficult at best. Some of the men that were eating shouted his new Jiadin name and waved for him to join them. He smiled in return and waved to the men, but he shook his head and started up the stairs. When he reached the door to his room, Fisher stood in silence for a moment as he studied the corridor. The corridor was dark with no torch at the end of it, so the entrance to Wyant’s room was in complete darkness.

Fisher spun and headed back downstairs. He entered the kitchen and deftly avoided the large woman who spun with her knife ready to gut any unexpected visitors.

“You again?” the large woman snapped.

“Have you any nuts?” asked Fisher.

The woman grunted and pointed to the corner of the room with her knife. Fisher walked to the corner and gazed at the barrels of nuts. He grabbed two large handfuls of peanuts and shoved them into a pouch. Without a word, the spy left the kitchen and returned upstairs. He entered his room and reclined on the bed, eating the peanuts and wondering where Clarvoy was at the moment. He also wondered what he would do when he found the Motangan spy.

Fisher was not a mage, and Clarvoy appeared to be a rather accomplished one. The Motangan spy could not only appear as someone else, he had other capabilities that Fisher could only dream of having. It was not a contest of equals, yet Fisher could not back away from the challenge. Clarvoy’s successes had to stop if there was to be any chance of defeating Vand.

By the time Fisher had finished eating the peanuts, the noise throughout the city had diminished. Only an occasional shout could be heard through the window. Fisher gathered up the peanut shells and quietly opened the door to the corridor. Seeing no one present in the corridor, Fisher crept out of his room and sprinkled the peanut shells on the floor in front of Wyant’s room. He silently retreated to his room and stretched out on the floor near the door. After a while, the spy drifted off to sleep.

* * *

Fisher set his jaw firmly and refused to speak. He would not give Vand the satisfaction of hearing him whimper and cry. The spy cringed and ground his teeth together as another bone cracked somewhere in his body. He thought it was strange that he could not feel the pain of the torture that they were inflicting on him. A dozen bones must have already been broken, but Fisher felt nothing. He glared at Clarvoy as if to say that a Chula could not be broken. Clarvoy only smiled in return, his smug face suddenly changing in appearance to look like Brakas. The soft click of a door lock floated through Fisher’s mind, and he immediately sat up. He looked around the dark room and realized that he had been dreaming. He was not being tortured in Vand’s temple, and Clarvoy was not standing there smiling at him.

It took only a second for Fisher’s mind to register where he was and what the cracking noises had been. The moonlight flowed through the window of his small room, illuminating the floor he had been sleeping on. He quickly rose to his feet, a knife sliding into his hand. He slowly opened the door to the corridor and peered out. A small sliver of moonlight pierced the darkness of the corridor, but a much wider swath of light overpowered it. The door to Wyant’s room was open.

Fisher knew that the peanut shells would now help his adversary as much as they had helped him. He ignored the need for silence and rushed into Wyant’s room. A Jiadin warrior stood bathed in the ghostly moonlight from the window. The light reflected off the blade the warrior was bringing down on the sleeping form in the bed before him. Fisher did not hesitate.

“Assassin!” Fisher shouted as he threw his knife at the Jiadin warrior.

Suddenly, a brilliant light flared in the room. Fisher closed his eyes and rolled into the room, pulling a knife from his boot as he rolled. He heard a snarl from one direction and a body hit the floor in the other direction. Fisher came out of his roll and opened his eyes, quickly seeking the target to skewer with his blade. The assassin was gone.

Jiadin crowded into the room from the corridor while Fisher ran to the window and looked out. There was a low roof below the window, but there was no one in sight. He turned to see Wyant getting up off the floor. He appeared unhurt. Fisher started to search the floor for the dagger that he had thrown.

“What was all that about?” asked Wyant. “What is going on?”

“Someone jumped out the window,” replied one of the Jiadin. “He had a knife buried in his arm.”

Wyant turned and stared at Fisher. “Your knife, Scarab?” he asked.

“I wasn’t sure if I had hit him,” Fisher nodded. “A bright light filled the room. I could not see.”

“You got him alright,” stated the Jiadin standing in the doorway. “All we need to do is look for a Jiadin with knife deep into his arm.”

“He was not a Jiadin,” countered Fisher. “That bright light was magic. He is only disguised to look like us.”

“So look for someone who is disguised as a Jiadin with a hole in his arm,” Wyant ordered. “Move. Find that assassin.”

The Jiadin crowded in the doorway turned and ran. Within minutes the entire city was awakened in its hunt for the mage. Fisher sheathed his knife and tried to return to his room, but Wyant grabbed him by the arm.

“Heck of a shot,” complimented Wyant. “How is it that you just happened to be in here to halt the assassin?”

“I am in the next room,” shrugged Fisher.

“The next room?” echoed the marshal. “I would have suspected that you would be staying with your close brother, Scarab. Do you not get along with Harmagan?”

“We get along just fine,” replied Fisher. “If you are wondering if I was in on the assassination, think again. I have no reason to see you dead.”

After a few moments of silence, Wyant nodded. “I can accept that,” he said, “but I find it hard to believe that you just happened to be here. It does not take long to enter a man’s room and stab him. You had to be waiting for him.”

“I was,” Fisher admitted. “I took the room next to yours and sprinkled peanut shells outside your door. When I heard the shells crack, I came running.”

“So you knew there would be an attempt on my life tonight?” frowned the marshal.

“Not for sure,” Fisher shook his head. “We knew the mage was in the city. He is seeking the location of Angragar. He first appeared as Brakas with a plan to force you to tell of its location, but Brakas is already dead. We had no idea who he might look like the next time, so I waited for him to show up here, just in case. Why do you think Harmagan insisted on protection for you today?”

“You could have warned me,” sighed Wyant.

“The reconciliation between the Jiadin and the Free Tribes is too important,” answered Fisher. “If you had been scared out of the city, it would never have occurred. Besides, we didn’t really think he would just kill you. It is information that he is after.”

“And you took it upon yourself to protect me against a mage with your knife?” questioned the Marshal of Fakara.

“You are still alive, aren’t you?” grinned Fisher.

“I am at that,” chuckled Wyant as he slapped Fisher on the back. “I am indebted to you, Scarab, not only for saving my life. Do not think that I did not notice your pivotal role tonight in swaying the other Jiadin towards the Free Tribes. I will not forget that. I hope they have chosen you as one of the ones to go to Angragar.”

“I cannot go to Angragar,” replied Fisher. “I am leaving in the morning to continue my search for lost friends from the Khadora wars.”

“So you were involved in that fiasco?” frowned Wyant. “Many died in Khadora. I doubt that you will ever find them, but I can’t blame you for looking. I hope we meet again some day.”

“I am sure that we will,” smiled Fisher. “Good luck, Marshal. I am going to try to get some sleep.”

* * *

Marshal Wyant watched the Jiadin warriors ride out of Meliban. Thousands of riders bearing red scarves with a black slash through it surged through the gates of the city and turned to the west. The men were in a jubilant mood at being released from the confines of the city. At the tail end of the procession were a dozen riders who halted next to Wyant. Harmagan gave orders to the group, and six of the men turned eastward, heading for the city of Taggot. The other six sat waiting for Wyant to lead the way to Angragar.

“It has been a long time since I saw so many happy faces, Marshal,” grinned Harmagan. “Lead the way.”

“I am still uneasy about this,” admitted Wyant. “Not one of your men refused the black stripe on his scarf. Am I really to believe that all of the Jiadin have accepted the move to return to the tribes?”

“All of the Jiadin in Meliban have,” replied Harmagan. “There are still those in Taggot. That is why I sent six men there. I cannot force the rest of the Jiadin to make the same choice as we have, but those six will be persuasive. Truthfully,” he smiled, “I cannot imagine any Jiadin not accepting the chance to rejoin the tribes. Living in a city has been like a prison to us. I am sure that those in Taggot will feel the same. It is high time that Grulak and his plans be discarded as past mistakes. The wars of the horsemen are over. Now we join with our brothers to bring death to the invaders. Lead on.”

“I will have to take you at your word,” nodded Wyant, “but I must warn you. The location of Angragar must remain a secret. If the Motangans find out where the lost city is, many of us will die trying to defend it. I prefer to meet our enemy on the plains as any horseman would.”

Chapter 28

Birth of a Shaman

Bakhai sat cross-legged on the roof of the temple in Angragar. His head was bowed, and his eyes were closed. Behind him stood Yltar, the head shaman of the Qubari tribe. Yltar’s eyes were focused on the distant jungle, although he was too far away to see that which he wanted to. Instead he gazed blankly, listening to the voice coming through the air tunnel. He nodded in satisfaction as his lips turned upward in a smile.

“Well done, Bakhai,” congratulated Yltar. “The tyrik is following your instructions perfectly. The range of your abilities is wonderful.”

For several moments, Bakhai did not respond. Suddenly, Yltar’s face clouded with concern. Bakhai opened his eyes and smiled as he rose to face the head shaman. Yltar saw the smile on Bakhai’s face and started laughing heartily.

“You did that to Almos, didn’t you?” he asked accusingly. “How did you know that the mound of fire ants were nearby?”

“The tyrik told me,” grinned Bakhai. “Shall I call off the ants?”

“No,” laughed Yltar. “Let Almos practice his own animal-talking to get them to stop attacking him.”

Both men laughed for several minutes until Yltar finally regained his composure. His eyes turned serious as he gazed upon his student.

“Communicating with such a primitive species over that distance is quite an accomplishment,” Yltar mused. “Your power is far greater than I would have ever imagined. It is greater than even your father’s, and he was a powerful shaman. We must work together to develop your skills more fully.”

“That is why I am here,” shrugged Bakhai. “I want to learn.”

“You are here to learn the ways of the Qubari shaman,” corrected Yltar. “I am talking about more intensive training. Your skills are so impressive that I want the Astor to place you in my care. There are ancient spells that no recent shaman has been able to duplicate. I think you may have the power necessary to try them.”

“What kind of spells?” asked Bakhai.

“Qubari magic is unique in many ways,” explained the head shaman. “It is human in nature, but it is blended with elven magic. I know of no other people who combine magics as the Qubari do.”

“What are the differences between human magic and elven magic?” Bakhai frowned in confusion.

“Human magics are centered on the elementals,” explained the shaman. “They primarily seek to control the elements of this world and harness their powers. The Khadorans, for example categorize their mages as having power in one of the four elemental areas, sun, air, water, and soil. The air tunnel spell is a good example of human magic. The mage sets up a corridor of air and then manipulates the pressures within it to obtain the desired effect.”

“And the elves?” prompted Bakhai.

“Elves have a totally different concept of magic,” replied Yltar. “Their spells revolve around senses and feelings. It is a more intangible branch of magic. They seek to influence nature and allow life forms to provide the changes that they desire. The expedited growth of plants and animals is an example, as are their spells of compulsion. Instead of directing outside energy to affect an object, they use the object’s own life force to accomplish their goal.”

“But mages can do both,” frowned Bakhai. “Princess Alahara is quite capable of throwing a fireball or casting an air tunnel, yet she knows elven magic as well.”

“Correct,” nodded Yltar, “but few elves see magic through the eyes of a human. It is not that the mages are incapable of such deeds; it is that they do not think in such terms. The Qubari, however, were human shaman that were taught elven spells to enable them to protect Angragar. For generations we have used elven magic to nurture the jungle and communicate with the animals.”

“So animal-talking is an elven art?” asked Bakhai.

“By its very nature,” nodded Yltar, “although I do not know if the elves still practice it. I look forward to the days when elven mages return to this land so that I may learn what magics they still focus on.”

“Mistake will know,” shrugged Bakhai. “Rejji said that she was learning magic in Elvangar.”

“You must learn to call her Princess Alahara,” cautioned Yltar. “We do not want to offend our elven friends.”

“Sorry,” sighed Bakhai, “but I knew her before she became a princess.”

“I understand,” smiled Yltar. “You will learn. Let’s go talk to Rejji about you becoming a full fledged shaman.”

They left the roof of the temple and walked across the plaza to the administration building. They looked in the Astor’s office, but Rejji was not there. Walking the corridors of the complex, they finally found the Astor in one of the large meeting rooms. The leaders of the free tribes were all present and voices were raised to alarming levels. Yltar and Bakhai slipped into the room to listen.

“I can’t imagine what Wyant has in mind,” scowled Yojji, leader of the Kheri tribe. “The Jiadin were sent to Meliban and Taggot precisely to keep them away from Angragar. Why in the world would he bring some of them here?”

“We should ride out and confront him with that very question,” stressed Adger, leader of the Mutang tribe.

“And before he gets much closer,” added Blaka, leader of the Extala tribe. “Already the Jiadin will have been able to narrow down the location of the lost city.”

“I will not have the free tribes confronting Wyant and the Jiadin in an aggressive manner,” warned Rejji. “While I am as surprised as you are about this development, I have a great deal of faith in Wyant. The Marshal of Fakara well knows the reason that the Jiadin have been kept separate. It was his idea in the first place.”

“So you are just going to allow them to continue on their way here?” asked Yojji.

Rejji looked around the room as if measuring the degree of hostility present. His eyes landed on Yltar and Bakhai, and a smile crossed his lips.

“No,” answered Rejji. “A delegation from Angragar will go out and meet Wyant and the Jiadin, but it will not be members of the free tribes. I will go myself to find out what the situation is. Yltar and Bakhai will accompany me.”

“The Jiadin may turn on you,” cautioned Blaka. “You should have protection.”

“I will be protected,” Rejji assured the tribesmen. “Not only by Bakhai and Yltar, but Kaltara will be with me as well. What better protection could I have?”

The tribesmen grumbled, knowing that they could not argue with the Astor.

“I will send word back to Angragar well before we return,” Rejji continued, ignoring the mood of the tribesmen. “If I allow the Jiadin to enter Angragar, they are to be treated as long lost brothers. Their desire to rejoin the brotherhood of the tribes is the only reason that would force me to allow them to come here. Has not our goal been to eventually bring the Jiadin back into the fold?”

“But that could be a ploy,” balked Adger. “We should watch them closely. I doubt that the Jiadin can ever be trusted enough to rejoin the free tirbes.”

“I will determine their true intent,” assured Rejji. “If they arrive in Angragar, you will treat them as brothers. It is that agreed to?”

“I have faith in Rejji,” Yojji sighed in submission. “For better or worse, I bow before the Astor. The Jiadin will be treated as brothers.”

“And the past will be forgotten?” frowned Blaka. “Do we just forget the slaughter of our brothers by the Jiadin scum?”

“The tribes have quite a history of warfare,” replied Rejji. “The latest wars were the free tribes against the Jiadin, but each and every one of you can remember wars with other tribes. Those differences are well behind us now. It is time to put the Jiadin wars behind us as well.”

“If they are truly repentant,” nodded Adger.

“Agreed,” nodded Rejji. “They must be ready to accept our new way of life in Fakara, but that is the requirement that I have for them being allowed to enter Angragar. I will determine the truth of it.”

The tribal leaders all nodded in agreement, and Rejji adjourned the meeting. The leaders filed out of the room, leaving Yltar and Bakhai alone with the Astor.

“How will you determine their true intent?” asked Bakhai.

“I was hoping that Yltar might have an answer to that question,” sighed Rejji. “He is the head shaman.”

“I cannot tell for certain if the Jiadin will lie,” replied Yltar, “but there is an ancient spell that can accomplish such a thing.”

“Then get the shaman who is capable of the spell,” directed Rejji. “We will take him with us.”

“There is no such shaman,” Yltar reported as he glanced at Bakhai, “but there may be a candidate to learn the spell. How much time do we have before we must leave?”

“We must leave in the morning at the latest,” answered Rejji. “Wyant and the Jiadin were seen heading for the pass in the mountains. Tomorrow they will pass through it. I would prefer to leave today, if possible, but if you can supply someone with the magical ability to determine if the Jiadin speak the truth, I will wait.”

“I cannot guarantee success,” shrugged Yltar. “No Qubari shaman has mastered the spell in generations.”

“And what makes you think that one of your shaman can now learn it?” frowned the Astor. “This is no time to take chances with new magic.”

“I disagree,” replied Yltar. “It is the perfect time for it. Much rides on the words of the Jiadin coming here. Your decision to let them enter Angragar will either result in a terrible act of treachery, or it will herald a new beginning for Fakara. If the Jiadin are sincere in their vows to you, we may actually have a chance against the forces of Vand.”

Rejji paced the room in silence for some moments before stopping and turning to face Yltar.

“Have your shaman try to learn the spell,” Rejji decided, “but we leave in the morning whether he is successful or not. I will order four horses to be ready for us.”

“We will only need three horses,” smiled Yltar, “and your permission for Bakhai to enter training to become a Qubari shaman.”

“Bakhai?” questioned the Astor. “You think he will be able to learn this spell?”

“He is the most promising student that I have ever encountered,” nodded Yltar. “His power and range are extraordinary.”

Rejji looked at his brother with a questioning gaze. Bakhai smiled and shrugged.

“Then let him begin his studies immediately,” replied Rejji.

Yltar bowed and hurriedly ushered Bakhai out of the room. Within minutes they were seated in the library of the temple, and Yltar unrolled an ancient scroll and handed it to Bakhai.

“Read it over first,” instructed Yltar, “and then I will explain what it is talking about. This is not the type of spell that I would prefer to start your training with, but we have little choice in the matter.”

A few moments later, Bakhai shook his head and handed the scroll back to Yltar. “It makes no sense at all to me,” Bakhai confessed. “I do not even understand what the writer is trying to say.”

“That is understandable,” smiled Yltar. “The scroll assumes a great deal of prior knowledge. That is why I said that it was not appropriate for a beginning student, but I can explain it to you. It will just take a fair amount of time. Push all thoughts from your mind. Nothing exists outside this room, and that must remain so for the duration of today’s lesson. Can you do that?”

“I can,” nodded Bakhai. “Many times I do that when I must make a decision about something. Do you think you can really explain this spell to me?”

“Over time,” sighed Yltar, “I am sure that you would learn to understand what is being said in the scroll, but even that understanding would not mean that you are capable of casting the spell. Truthfully, I have little hope that you can learn it by morning, but we will try regardless. My words to Rejji were truthful; his decision regarding the Jiadin is of the utmost importance. Let us begin.”

Yltar and Bakhai worked through the day and into the night. Both of them became thoroughly frustrated in Bakhai’s inability to discern a lie when Yltar spoke. Fatigued by exhaustion and hunger, Yltar called a halt to the lesson.

“I am sorry, Yltar,” sighed Bakhai. “I was trying. Truly, I was.”

“I know, Bakhai,” Yltar nodded with a taut smile. “Do not blame yourself. There is no Qubari shaman alive who can successfully cast this spell. I was wrong to expect you to be able to.”

“But it is so important,” frowned Bakhai. “I feel as though I have let the Astor down.”

“Do not feel that way,” Yltar replied distractedly as Mobi appeared in the doorway with a plate of food. “Perhaps some food will allow us to continue. Or should we quit and get a few hours sleep before the dawn arrives?”

“We shall continue,” Bakhai declared stubbornly.

“Not without a bite to eat,” smiled Mobi as he slid the tray onto the table in front of Bakhai.

The tray was piled with dry sticks of meat and assorted fruits. Yltar reached over and snared a banana as Bakhai bit into a piece of meat.

“Bringing food was very thoughtful of you, Mobi,” smiled Yltar. “Thank you.”

“I just happened to be roaming the halls and thought you would like a bite to eat,” Mobi shrugged modestly.

Bakhai dropped his meat and stared at the warrior. His face creased heavily, and his eyes narrowed in confusion. Yltar noticed the reaction and slowly removed the banana from his mouth.

“What is the matter, Bakhai?” the shaman asked with concern. “Does the meat not agree with you?”

“Why did you really bring the food?” Bakhai asked Mobi.

Mobi blinked and shook his head. “What do you mean?”

“Why did you really bring us food?” repeated Bakhai. “Do not lie.”

Mobi clearly did not understand what was going on. His eyes bounced from Yltar to Bakhai, and he shook his head.

“Rejji asked me to check in on you until you were done,” explained Mobi. “You have been in here a long time, and I figured that you would be hungry. Did I do something wrong?”

“So you didn’t just happen to be roaming the halls?” Yltar asked with a grin. “That is what you said, wasn’t it?”

“I guess I did,” shrugged Mobi, “but I meant nothing by it. It was just that the act of bringing you food was not something that required a great deal of thanks. It is nothing. Anyone would do the same for you.”

“But it was still a lie,” smiled Yltar. “A harmless one, perhaps, but a lie nonetheless. What did you feel, Bakhai?”

“It is hard to explain,” Bakhai said excitedly, “but I knew that it was a lie. I knew it.”

“That is excellent!” Yltar grinned happily. “I knew that you could do it if anyone could.”

“But why didn’t it work on you, Yltar?” asked Bakhai. “You have been lying to me all night, and I could not detect it.”

Yltar stood with a look of confusion on his face for several moments before suddenly smiling.

“Of course,” he said with sudden realization. “How could I have been so foolish? One of the first spells a shaman learns is to guard his mind from compulsion spells. Why didn’t I think of that earlier? It is such a basic spell that I never even consciously think of it anymore. It must have been blocking your attempts to determine my truthfulness.”

“Drop your protection and lie to me,” ordered Bakhai.

Mobi watched with interest as the other two men excitedly spoke of their lesson.

“Your father was ugly and stupid,” smiled Yltar.

“Liar!” Bakhai grinned victoriously. “It works. It really works.”

“And we still have time to catch some sleep,” Yltar nodded with joy. “Your father would be very proud to see you today, Bakhai. You will become the greatest Qubari shaman in centuries. It will take a lot of work on your part, but your talents are amazing. The beginner’s spells will be like playing around after you have already mastered a spell such as this one. Finish your food and let’s get some rest. Tomorrow will be a long day for both of us.”

Bakhai nodded and grinned broadly. He knew without a doubt that the words of praise just given by the head shaman were sincere. He would have detected it if they had been lies.

* * *

Wyant led the Jiadin through the forest east of the mountain pass. They rounded a bend, and Wyant immediately halted. Harmagan rode up alongside the Marshal of Fakara and stared at the three men blocking the trail.

“He is King Rejji!” exclaimed Harmagan. “I saw him fly over Vandegar on the back of a dragon.”

“I had expected to be met,” Wyant addressed Rejji, “but I expected tribesmen to be the welcoming committee, and I expected it yesterday.”

“It is more fitting that I meet any Jiadin entering these lands,” replied Rejji. “Why have they come?”

“They have come to rejoin their brothers of the tribes,” smiled Wyant. “Harmagan is the leader from Meliban. I promised to bring six of them to Angragar. The rest I have let leave the city. They now roam the western plains of Fakara.”

Rejji looked at Bakhai and Yltar alongside him, and saw no need to disbelieve the Marshal of Fakara.

“Well met, Harmagan,” greeted Rejji. “Have you truly put your Jiadin thoughts behind you?”

“I have,” nodded Harmagan as he bowed slightly to the King of Fakara. “I know that Wyant’s word is not good enough to allow us entry into Angragar, but I beseech you to allow us to see the city. My men and I are truly ready to rejoin the brotherhood. We have been foolish and greedy over the past few years. I could make a thousand excuses for our past behavior, but I do not wish to start our reunion with lies. If you are willing to forgive our past, we are willing to fight and die for Fakara. We only ask that we be allowed to die with honor befitting a tribesman.”

“And why does seeing Angragar mean so much to you?” asked the Astor.

“Angragar is the symbol of greed that has plagued the tribes for generations,” explained Harmagan. “Wyant tells me that the treasures of Angragar are not gold and riches, but truth and enlightenment. If this is true, it will forever prove to my men that the tales told by Grulak and the others were lies. We will be able to see the folly of our past paths.”

“The riches of Angragar are indeed truth and enlightenment,” smiled Rejji as he glanced at Bakhai. “Harmagan, I offer to lead you to the lost city of Angragar. Introduce me to the rest of your men so that I might also extend an invitation to each of them personally.”

Harmagan introduced the other five Jiadin. The men had been chosen wisely, for each one of them truthfully explained his desire to put the Jiadin way behind him. One by one, Rejji extended his welcome into the brotherhood of tribesmen. Within the hour, ten riders turned eastward towards the lost city of Angragar. Rejji led the way, and Bakhai soon moved up alongside him.

“Your talents have proved quite worthwhile today,” smiled Rejji.

“I am pleased that I was able to aid you in such a way,” replied Bakhai. “Do you think the other tribes will accept the Jiadin as well as you have?”

“They will,” nodded Rejji. “Your gift might make it easy to detect a lie, but there are other ways of determining what is truly in a man’s heart. The men of the free tribes will know the truth soon enough. Oh, they may be suspicious at first, but I think the Jiadin are prepared for such a reception. They are strong enough to weather that storm.”

“What is the impact of the Jiadin coming over to our side?” asked Bakhai. “I know it is important, but how important?”

“It is the difference between life and death,” smiled Rejji. “If Vand had succeeded in aligning the Jiadin against us, we would have surely perished. We may yet perish under Vand’s onslaught, but we now have a chance to survive. One thing we have yet to do, is to determine how best to utilize the Jiadin. Defending the coastal cities is not the correct path.”

“May I make a suggestion?” asked Bakhai.

“Words from a wise shaman are always welcome,” grinned the Astor.

“I am not quite a shaman yet,” smiled Bakhai, “but I will be soon. My suggestion is to place Qubari shaman with the Jiadin riders. If you have the ability to contact the Jiadin via an air tunnel, you will effectively have two great armies of horsemen capable of acting independently.”

“You have more talents than you have let on,” laughed Rejji. “That is an excellent idea. I know the last place that I would wish to be is in the middle of two charging armies of Fakaran horsemen. Talk to Yltar about your plan. I am ready to accept it, but Yltar must choose the men.”

* * *

Yltar had sent word ahead to Angragar about the Jiadin being led into the city by the Astor. The entrance to the city was lined with tribesmen, and each tribe had a banner guard present to form a human corridor. The Jiadin riders looked on in awe as the tribesmen welcomed their lost brothers to Angragar. Shouts of welcome to the entering Jiadin were loud and genuine. For the first time in history, the tribes of Fakara were truly united.

Harmagan grinned from ear to ear as the other tribes welcomed him and his men. He nodded and waved to each and every tribal leader as the small group made its way into the city center. Rejji halted the group in front of the administration building and everyone dismounted. The leaders of the free tribes immediately gathered around the Jiadin and personally welcomed them into the fold. The plaza filled with thousands of people as the citizens set up tables and carried out food and drink. Within moments the usually quiet plaza was turned into a festival.

The Jiadin and the other tribesmen filled the plaza at the administration end. Soon wrestling matches and sparring contests began. Rejji stood on the steps of the administration building and smiled at the reception. Although the Time of Cleansing was due to start at any moment, the Astor knew that he had already accomplished something that had never been done before. He had united the tribesmen of Fakara. Whether or not that would be sufficient to halt the advance of the Motangans was yet to be determined.

At the other end of the plaza was another party. Qubari shamans filled the area of the plaza before the temple of Kaltara. They all gathered around Bakhai as Yltar announced that the brother of the Astor was in training. Word Of Bakhai’s mastering of the truth-telling spell had spread while they were out of the city. The shamans vied with one another for the privilege of tutoring one who was bound to become a Qubari legend. After much discussion, Yltar offered a compromise that would allow each shaman the opportunity to teach Bakhai those spells that the shaman was most proficient in. Bakhai’s head spun with all of the attention, but Yltar dragged him to one side of the festival.

“With so many tutors,” grinned Yltar, “you will learn Qubari magic faster than any other shaman in history. I would advise you to free your days of obligations. You will be learning magic night and day until you cannot stay awake any longer. You must clear your mind and make your father proud of you.”

“I will make him proud,” Bakhai promised as dampness invaded his eyes. “As Kaltara is my witness, I will bring honor to his name.”

“Your father has always had honor in my eyes,” smiled Yltar, “and I am sure in Kaltara’s, too, but his sons were left rudderless through the cruel hand of fate. Now he will have good reason to smile down upon you and your brother. You both are his gifts to the people that he loved.”

Content

Richard S. Tuttle
Winged Warrior

Prologue

Our story so far…

Chapter 1 Raid on Duran

Chapter 2 Pain Killers

Chapter 3 Society of Mages

Chapter 4 For God and Country

Chapter 5 The Voice of Kaltara

Chapter 6 Spy Holes

Chapter 7 Death of a Mage

Chapter 8 Aunt Kanis

Chapter 9 Spies

Chapter 10 Naming the Players

Chapter 11 Setting the Stage

Chapter 12 Protesting the War

Chapter 13 The Resolution

Chapter 14 Ears Can Deceive

Chapter 15 War Plans

Chapter 16 Changing Boundaries

Chapter 17 Strange Proposal

Chapter 18 Assembly of Lords

Chapter 19 Of Neighbors and Spies

Chapter 20 Xavo

Chapter 21 Myka

Chapter 22 Aakuta’s Message

Chapter 23 Unfriendly Skies

Chapter 24 To Catch a Spy

Chapter 25 Information is King

Chapter 26 Scarab

Chapter 27 The Jiadin Tribe

Chapter 28 Birth of a Shaman